Ceragon FibeAir IP-10G IP-10E User Guide 20120601 Rev A.01

FibeAir® IP-10G and IP-10E
User Guide
DOC-00034612 (Rev A.01)

Hardware Release: R2 and R3
Software Release: i6.9
BM-0252-0
July 2012
Copyright © 2012 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.

FibeAir® IP-10G and IP-10E User Guide
Notice
This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, modified, or distributed without prior written authorization of
Ceragon Networks Ltd. This document is provided as is, without warranty of any kind.
Registered Trademarks
Ceragon Networks® is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd. FibeAir® is a registered
trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd. CeraView® is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks
Ltd. Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders.
Trademarks
CeraMap™, ConfigAir™, PolyView™, EncryptAir™, and CeraMon™ are trademarks of Ceragon
Networks Ltd. Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Ceragon
Networks Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential
damage in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document or equipment
supplied with it.
Open Source Statement

The Product may use open source software, among them O/S software released under the GPL or
GPL alike license ("GPL License"). Inasmuch that such software is being used, it is released under
the GPL License, accordingly. Some software might have changed. The complete list of the
software being used in this product including their respective license and the aforementioned
public available changes is accessible on http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
Information to User
Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment.
Revision History
Rev Date Author Description Approved by Date
A June 16, Baruch Gitlin Initial release for version I6.9. Eytan Perso June 16,
2012 2012
A.01 July 29, Baruch Gitlin Revised Replacing a License. Eran Shecter July 29, 2012
2012
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 2 of 577

Table of Contents
1. Introduction .................................................................................................... 16
1.1 About the CeraWeb EMS (Web EMS) ......................................................................... 17
1.1.1 Browser behavior with Web EMS ................................................................................ 17
1.2 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure ........................................................... 18
2. Getting Started................................................................................................ 23
2.1 Establishing a Connection with the IDU ....................................................................... 24
2.2 Launching the Web EMS ............................................................................................. 25
2.3 Configuring IP Addresses ............................................................................................ 26
3. Configuring Secured Access Protocols........................................................ 27

3.1 Security Overview ........................................................................................................ 28
3.1.1 Defenses in Management Communication Channels .................................................. 28
3.1.2 Defenses in User and System Authentication Procedures .......................................... 29
3.1.2.1 User Identification ........................................................................................ 29
3.1.2.2 Remote Authentication ................................................................................ 29
3.1.2.3 Authorization ................................................................................................ 29
3.1.2.4 RADIUS Support .......................................................................................... 30
3.1.2.5 Attack Types Addressed .............................................................................. 30
3.1.3 Secure Communication Channels ............................................................................... 30
3.1.3.1 SSH (Secured Shell).................................................................................... 30
3.1.3.2 HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) ............................................. 30
3.1.3.3 SFTP (Secure FTP) ..................................................................................... 31
3.1.3.4 Creation of Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File .................................... 31
3.1.3.5 SNMP .......................................................................................................... 32
3.1.3.6 Server authentication (SSL / SLLv3) ........................................................... 32
3.1.3.7 Encryption .................................................................................................... 32
3.1.3.8 SSH.............................................................................................................. 32
3.1.4 Security Log ................................................................................................................. 33
3.2 Configuring SNMP ....................................................................................................... 35
3.2.1 Configuring SNMPv3 Parameters ................................................................................ 35
3.3 Configuring Secure Communication Channels ............................................................ 37
3.3.1 Configuring Inactivity Timeout ...................................................................................... 37
3.3.2 Secure File Transfer and Server Authentication .......................................................... 38
3.3.3 Configuring HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) .......................................... 39
3.3.4 Downloading a Certificate ............................................................................................ 40
3.3.5 Configuring the Security File Name, Type and Format ................................................ 40
3.3.6 Enabling the CA Certificate .......................................................................................... 41
3.3.7 Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP) ...................................................................... 41
3.3.8 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File .................................................. 42
3.3.9 Generating a Security Certificate from a CSR File ...................................................... 44
4. Working with Configuration Files .................................................................. 45

4.1 Archiving the Configuration .......................................................................................... 46
4.1.1 Creating a Configuration Archive File .......................................................................... 46
4.1.2 Viewing Configuration Archive Creation Status ........................................................... 46
4.1.3 Uploading a Configuration Archive File ........................................................................ 47

4.1.4 Viewing Configuration Archive Upload Status ............................................................. 47

4.1.5 Creating a Unit Information Archive File ...................................................................... 47
4.1.6 Viewing Unit Information Archive Creation Status ....................................................... 47
4.1.7 Uploading a Unit Information Archive File.................................................................... 48
4.1.8 Viewing Unit Information Archive Upload Status ......................................................... 48
4.1.9 Downloading a Configuration Archive File ................................................................... 48
4.1.10 Viewing configuration file download status .................................................................. 48
4.1.11 Uploading a Configuration Archive File ........................................................................ 49
4.1.12 Viewing configuration file installation status................................................................. 49
4.2 Restoring the Default Configuration ............................................................................. 50
4.3 Resetting the Unit ......................................................................................................... 50
5. Configuring Users and Password Security .................................................. 51

5.1 Configuring RADIUS .................................................................................................... 52
5.2 Adding Users ................................................................................................................ 54
5.3 Deleting Users .............................................................................................................. 55
5.4 Changing Your Password ............................................................................................ 56
5.5 Configuring a Timeout for Inactive Users..................................................................... 57
6. Configuring Software ..................................................................................... 58

6.1 Configuring IDU Software ............................................................................................ 59
6.1.1 Viewing IDU Version Information ................................................................................. 60
6.1.2 Downloading IDU Software Files ................................................................................. 61
6.1.3 Upgrading the IDU Software Version ........................................................................... 62
6.1.4 Rolling Back a Software Upgrade ................................................................................ 64
6.2 Configuring RFU Software and Firmware .................................................................... 65
6.2.1 Viewing RFU Version Information ................................................................................ 66
6.2.2 Updating the RFU Software Version ............................................................................ 68
7. Configuring and Viewing Basic System Information ................................... 69

7.1 Configuring and Viewing Unit System Information ...................................................... 70
7.2 Configuring System Date and Time ............................................................................. 71
7.3 Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP) Parameters ............................................ 72
7.4 Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers ................................................................... 73
7.5 Viewing System Application Files ................................................................................ 74
8. Configuring Feature and Capacity Licenses ................................................ 75

8.1 Viewing Current License Details .................................................................................. 76
8.2 Loading a New License Key ........................................................................................ 77
8.3 Replacing a License ..................................................................................................... 79
8.4 Working with a Demo License ..................................................................................... 81
8.5 Viewing Licensed Usage and Features ....................................................................... 82
9. Configuring Unit Management ....................................................................... 84

9.1 Management Overview ................................................................................................ 85
9.2 Configuring the Management Ports ............................................................................. 86

9.3 Configuring Out-of-Band Management ........................................................................ 88
9.4 Configuring In-Band Management ............................................................................... 89
9.4.1 Configuring In-Band Management in a 1+1 Link ......................................................... 90
9.4.2 In-Band Management in Nodal Configurations ............................................................ 92
9.4.3 GbE In-Band Management in a Node .......................................................................... 94
9.4.4 In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode ................................................... 95
10. Configuring Traffic Interfaces ........................................................................ 96

10.1 Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode.................................................................... 97
10.1.1 Switch Configurations Overview .................................................................................. 98
10.1.2 Configuring Smart Pipe Switch Mode ........................................................................ 100
10.1.3 Configuring Managed and Metro Switch Mode .......................................................... 101
10.2 Configuring Ethernet Ports ......................................................................................... 104
10.2.1 Configuring a Single Pipe Port ................................................................................... 104
10.2.2 Configuring a Managed Switch or Metro Switch Port ................................................ 106
10.3 Assigning VLANs to a Port ......................................................................................... 108
10.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation .................................................................. 109
10.5 Configuring LAGs ....................................................................................................... 112
10.5.1 LAG Overview ............................................................................................................ 113
10.5.2 Creating a LAG .......................................................................................................... 115
10.5.3 Configuring a LAG ...................................................................................................... 116
10.5.4 Removing Ports from a LAG ...................................................................................... 118
10.5.5 Configuring LAG Load Balancing ............................................................................... 119
10.6 Configuring Peer Port Settings .................................................................................. 120
10.7 Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces .................................................................................. 121
10.8 Configuring STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces .......................................................................... 123
10.9 Configuring Pseudowire ............................................................................................. 126
10.9.1 Pseudowire Overview ................................................................................................ 127
10.9.2 Configuring an Ethernet Port for Pseudowire ............................................................ 129
10.9.3 Configuring the Pseudowire TDM Ports ..................................................................... 131
10.9.4 Configuring TDM Trails for Pseudowire ..................................................................... 134
10.9.5 Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization .................................................................. 135
10.9.6 Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card........................................................................... 137
10.9.7 Configuring Pseudowire Profiles ................................................................................ 139
10.9.8 Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation (Tunnels) ..................................................... 142
10.9.9 Configuring DS0 Bundles ........................................................................................... 144
10.9.10 Configuring Pseudowire Services .............................................................. 146
11. Configuring Auxiliary Channels .................................................................. 148

11.1 Configuring the Wayside Channel ............................................................................. 149
11.2 Configuring the User Channel .................................................................................... 150
11.3 Viewing the EOW Channel Status ............................................................................. 151
12. Configuring the Radio Parameters .............................................................. 152

12.1 Enabling and Disabling the Radio .............................................................................. 153

12.2 Configuring the Radio Frequencies ........................................................................... 154

12.3 Specifying the Radio Link ID ...................................................................................... 155
12.4 Configuring the Remote Radio IP Address ................................................................ 156
12.5 Configuring the Radio Thresholds ............................................................................. 157
12.5.1 Radio Threshold Levels ............................................................................................. 158
12.5.2 RSL and TSL Thresholds ........................................................................................... 159
12.5.3 MSE Threshold .......................................................................................................... 159
12.5.4 XPI Threshold ............................................................................................................ 160
12.5.5 Ethernet Throughput Threshold ................................................................................. 160
12.5.6 Ethernet Capacity Threshold ..................................................................................... 161
12.5.7 Ethernet Utilization Threshold .................................................................................... 161
12.6 Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms ............................................................................ 162
12.7 Selecting a Radio Script and Configuring ACM ......................................................... 163
12.7.1 ACM Radio Scripts ..................................................................................................... 164
12.7.2 ACM with 1+1 HSB Protection ................................................................................... 166
12.7.3 ACM Adaptive Power ................................................................................................. 167
12.7.4 Enabling Alarms on MRMC Profile Degradation ........................................................ 169
12.7.5 Activating an Asymmetrical Script .............................................................................. 170
12.8 Configuring Compression........................................................................................... 171
12.8.1 Configuring Enhanced Header Compression ............................................................ 172
12.8.1.1 Enhanced Header Compression Flow Type Bitmask and Supported
Configurations ............................................................................................ 173
12.8.1.2 Enhanced Header Compression Compatibility .......................................... 175
12.9 Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities ............................................................................ 176
12.10 Configuring the Power Options and Green Mode ...................................................... 178
12.10.1 Configuring ATPC Override ....................................................................... 179
12.10.2 Configuring Green Mode ........................................................................... 181
13. Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS ......................................................... 182

13.1 QoS Overview ............................................................................................................ 183
13.1.1 Standard QoS Overview ............................................................................................ 183
13.1.1.1 Standard QoS Classifier ............................................................................ 183
13.1.1.2 Standard QoS Policers .............................................................................. 184
13.1.1.3 Queue Management, Scheduling, and Shaping ........................................ 185
13.1.2 Enhanced QoS Overview ........................................................................................... 186
13.1.2.1 Queue Management .................................................................................. 188
13.1.2.2 Scheduling and Shaping ............................................................................ 189
13.1.2.3 Configurable P-Bit and CFI/DEI Re-Marking ............................................. 190
13.2 Configuring Standard QoS ......................................................................................... 191
13.2.1 Opening the QoS & Rate Limiting Page .................................................................... 192
13.2.2 Configuring the Classification Settings ...................................................................... 193
13.2.3 Configuring the Egress Scheduler ............................................................................. 194
13.2.4 Configuring Ingress Rate Limiting .............................................................................. 195
13.2.5 Remapping P-Bits ...................................................................................................... 196
13.2.6 Configuring VLAN-ID to Queue .................................................................................. 197
13.2.7 Assigning IP P-Bits to Queue ..................................................................................... 198
13.2.8 Assigning Queues According to P-Bits ...................................................................... 199
13.2.9 Assigning Queue Weights .......................................................................................... 199
13.2.10 Configuring Policers................................................................................... 200
13.2.11 Defining the Static MAC Table .................................................................. 201

13.2.12 Copying QoS Settings from One Port to Another ...................................... 202
13.3 Configuring Enhanced QoS ....................................................................................... 203
13.3.1 Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS .................................................................. 203
13.3.1.1 Classifying In-Band Management Traffic................................................... 203
13.3.1.2 Disabling the QoS Egress Shaper ............................................................. 204
13.3.2 Enabling Enhanced QoS ............................................................................................ 205
13.3.3 Enabling PTP Optimized Transport ........................................................................... 206
13.3.4 Configuring Queue Size ............................................................................................. 208
13.3.5 Configuring Enhanced QoS Classification ................................................................. 209
13.3.5.1 Configuring Services.................................................................................. 209
13.3.5.2 Configuring the egress CoS and Color Modifier (Marker) ......................... 210
13.3.5.3 Enabling Classification Rules .................................................................... 211
13.3.5.4 Setting the Default Classification Settings ................................................. 212
13.3.5.5 Configuring First Hierarchy Classification Rules ....................................... 214
13.3.5.6 Configuring Second Hierarchy Classification Rules .................................. 218
13.3.5.7 Configuring Third Hierarchy Classification Rules ...................................... 220
13.3.6 Configuring Egress Policers ....................................................................................... 226
13.3.6.1 Policer per Cos Option............................................................................... 229
13.3.7 Configuring WRED ..................................................................................................... 230
13.3.8 Configuring the Egress Shaper and Scheduler ......................................................... 232
14. Setting Up Protected Configurations .......................................................... 234

14.1 Protection Overview ................................................................................................... 235
14.2 Configuring 1+1 HSB ................................................................................................. 236
14.2.1 1+1 HSB Overview ..................................................................................................... 237
14.2.2 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Standalone System ................................ 238
14.2.3 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Standalone System ................................. 240
14.2.4 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Nodal System ......................................... 241
14.2.5 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Nodal System ......................................... 243
14.3 Configuring a 2+0 System .......................................................................................... 245
14.3.1 2+0 Overview ............................................................................................................. 246
14.3.2 Configuring 2+0 Protection ........................................................................................ 247
14.4 Configuring 2+2 HSB ................................................................................................. 248
14.4.1 2+2 Overview ............................................................................................................. 249
14.4.2 Deploying a 2+2 Configuration................................................................................... 250
14.4.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection ................................................................................ 251
14.4.4 XPIC and 2+2 Protection ........................................................................................... 252
14.4.5 Replacing Units in a 2+2 Configuration ..................................................................... 253
14.5 Specifying Active and Standby Mode ........................................................................ 254
14.6 Configuring Switchover Criteria ................................................................................. 255
14.7 Viewing Mate Parameters .......................................................................................... 256
14.8 Configuring Multi-Unit LAG ........................................................................................ 257
15. Configuring Diversity ................................................................................... 259

15.1 Diversity Overview ..................................................................................................... 260
15.2 Configuring 1+1 Space Diversity (BBS) ..................................................................... 261
15.3 Configuring 1+1 Frequency Diversity (BBS) .............................................................. 262

15.4 Configuring IF Combining Diversity ........................................................................... 263
16. Configuring Multi-Radio ............................................................................... 265

16.1 Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio ...................................................................................... 266
16.1.1 Multi Radio Traffic Blocking ....................................................................................... 267
16.1.2 Setting Multi-Radio Thresholds .................................................................................. 268
16.2 Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection ...................................................... 269
17. Configuring XPIC .......................................................................................... 270

17.1 Conditions for XPIC .................................................................................................... 271
17.2 Configuring the Antenna and RFU for XPIC .............................................................. 271
17.2.1 IDU-RFU Cable Installation ........................................................................................ 271
17.2.2 Antenna Alignment ..................................................................................................... 271
17.2.3 Polarization Alignment ............................................................................................... 272
17.3 Displaying XPI Values ................................................................................................ 272
18. Configuring TDM Trails ................................................................................ 274

18.1 TDM Trails Overview.................................................................................................. 275
18.2 Viewing the Trails List ................................................................................................ 276
18.3 Adding New Trails ...................................................................................................... 277
18.4 Activating and Reserving Trails ................................................................................. 280
18.5 Deleting Trails ............................................................................................................ 281
18.6 Configuring SNCP and ABR Trail Protection ............................................................. 282
18.7 Configuring AIS Detection and Signaling ................................................................... 283
19. Configuring Synchronization....................................................................... 284

19.1 Synchronization Overview.......................................................................................... 285
19.2 Configuring the Synchronization Source.................................................................... 286
19.2.1 Viewing Current Synchronization Sources................................................................. 288
19.3 Configuring the Outgoing Signal Clock ...................................................................... 290
19.3.1 Configuring Clock Sources ........................................................................................ 290
19.3.2 Viewing Clock Sources .............................................................................................. 291
19.4 Configuring PRC Regenerator Mode and Direction ................................................... 292
19.4.1 Basic Operation .......................................................................................................... 292
19.4.2 User Configuration ..................................................................................................... 293
20. Configuring RSTP ......................................................................................... 295

20.1 Network Resiliency Overview .................................................................................... 296
20.1.1 Standard RSTP .......................................................................................................... 296
20.1.2 Carrier Ethernet Wireless Ring-Optimized RSTP ...................................................... 297
20.2 Setting the xSTP Protocol .......................................................................................... 298
20.3 Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP ............................................................................ 299
20.3.1 Ring RSTP Limitations ............................................................................................... 300
20.3.2 Ring RSTP Supported Topologies ............................................................................. 300
20.3.3 Ring RSTP Performance............................................................................................ 301
20.3.4 Ring RSTP Management ........................................................................................... 302

20.3.4.1 In-Band Management ................................................................................ 302
20.3.4.2 Out-of-Band Management ......................................................................... 303
20.3.5 Ring RSTP Configuration ........................................................................................... 304
20.3.5.1 Node Type A Configuration ....................................................................... 304
20.3.5.2 Node Type B Configuration ....................................................................... 305
20.3.6 Ring RSTP Installation ............................................................................................... 305
20.3.6.1 Installation Scenario1: Node with no STP ................................................. 305
20.3.6.2 Scenario2: Replacing an IDU in an RSTP Ring ........................................ 306
20.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports to Support RSTP ............................................................ 307
20.5 Configuring RSTP Priority .......................................................................................... 308
21. Working with Service OAM .......................................................................... 309

21.1 Working with MAIDs ................................................................................................... 310
21.1.1 Viewing MAID List Status and Details ........................................................................ 311
21.1.2 Adding MAIDs ............................................................................................................ 312
21.1.3 Deleting MAIDs .......................................................................................................... 312
21.2 Managing Local MEPs ............................................................................................... 313
21.2.1 Viewing Local MEPs .................................................................................................. 314
21.2.2 Adding Local MEPs .................................................................................................... 315
21.2.3 Deleting local MEPs ................................................................................................... 315
21.3 Managing Remote MEPs ........................................................................................... 316
21.3.1 Viewing Remote MEPs .............................................................................................. 317
21.3.2 Adding Remote MEPs ................................................................................................ 317
21.3.3 Deleting Remote MEPs .............................................................................................. 318
21.3.4 Pinging Remote MEPs ............................................................................................... 318
21.3.5 Remote MEP Linktrace .............................................................................................. 319
21.3.6 Enabling Automatic Linktrace for a MAID .................................................................. 321
21.4 Working with MEPs .................................................................................................... 322
21.4.1 Configuring CCM ........................................................................................................ 323
21.4.2 Viewing MAID Ethernet Ports .................................................................................... 323
21.4.3 Viewing Port MEPs .................................................................................................... 324
21.4.4 Adding MEPs to a Port ............................................................................................... 324
21.4.5 Deleting MEPs from a Port ........................................................................................ 325
21.5 Working with MIPs ..................................................................................................... 326
21.5.1 Viewing Port MIPs ...................................................................................................... 327
21.5.2 Adding MIPs to a Port ................................................................................................ 327
21.5.3 Deleting MIPs from a Port .......................................................................................... 327
21.6 Performing Manual Ping and Linktrace Operations ................................................... 328
21.6.1 Pinging Remote MEPs and MIPs ............................................................................... 329
21.6.2 Performing a Manual Linktrace .................................................................................. 330
22. Viewing System Activity and Performance ................................................. 331

22.1 Displaying and Clearing PMs ..................................................................................... 332
22.2 Displaying and Resetting RMON Counters................................................................ 333
22.3 Displaying Ethernet Statistics .................................................................................... 337
22.3.1 Displaying Frame Error Rate Statistics ...................................................................... 338
22.3.2 Displaying Throughput Statistics ................................................................................ 339

22.3.3 Displaying Capacity Statistics .................................................................................... 340

22.3.4 Displaying Utilization Statistics .................................................................................. 341
22.4 Displaying TDM PMs .................................................................................................. 342
22.4.1 Displaying E1/DS1 Line PMs ..................................................................................... 343
22.4.2 Displaying TDM Channel PMs ................................................................................... 344
22.4.3 Displaying TDM Trail PMs.......................................................................................... 345
22.4.4 Displaying STM-1/OC-3 Line PMs ............................................................................. 346
22.4.5 Displaying Pseudowire PMs ...................................................................................... 347
22.5 Displaying Radio PMs ................................................................................................ 353
22.5.1 Displaying Signal Level PMs ...................................................................................... 354
22.5.2 Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs .............................................................................. 355
22.5.3 Displaying Radio MRMC PMs .................................................................................... 356
22.5.4 Displaying Radio MSE PMs ....................................................................................... 357
22.5.5 Displaying Radio XPI PMs ......................................................................................... 358
22.6 Viewing Radio Status ................................................................................................. 359
22.6.1 Viewing RFU Status ................................................................................................... 360
22.6.2 Viewing MRMC Status ............................................................................................... 361
22.6.3 Viewing Current Tx Status ......................................................................................... 362
22.6.4 Viewing Current Rx Status ......................................................................................... 363
22.6.5 Viewing Remote Radio Parameters ........................................................................... 364
22.6.6 Viewing XPIC Status .................................................................................................. 364
22.7 Viewing Ethernet Interface Status .............................................................................. 365
22.8 Viewing RSTP Status ................................................................................................. 366
22.9 Viewing Enhanced Traffic Management Statistics ..................................................... 367
23. Fault Management ........................................................................................ 370

23.1 Overview of Fault Management ................................................................................. 371
23.2 LED Indicators ............................................................................................................ 373
23.3 Configuring External Alarms ...................................................................................... 374
23.4 Configuring Traps ....................................................................................................... 376
23.5 Configuring Power Supply Alarms ............................................................................. 377
23.6 Viewing Current Alarms ............................................................................................. 378
23.7 Viewing the Event Log ............................................................................................... 379
23.8 Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface ............................................................................. 380
23.9 Loopback .................................................................................................................... 381
23.9.1 Radio Loopback ......................................................................................................... 382
23.9.2 E1/DS1 Line Loopback .............................................................................................. 383
23.9.3 STM-1/OC-3 Line Loopback ...................................................................................... 384
23.9.4 Pseudowire Line Loopback ........................................................................................ 385
23.10 Troubleshooting Protection ........................................................................................ 386
23.10.1 Switchover Triggers ................................................................................... 387
23.10.2 Copy-to-Mate ............................................................................................. 387
23.10.3 Mismatch Mechanism ................................................................................ 388
23.11 XPIC Recovery Mechanism ....................................................................................... 389
23.11.1 XPIC Events .............................................................................................. 389

23.12 Activating the All-ODU Enclosure .............................................................................. 391
24. Appendix A – CLI Reference ........................................................................ 392

24.1 Using the CLI ............................................................................................................. 393
24.1.1 Access rights .............................................................................................................. 393
24.1.2 Getting started ............................................................................................................ 393
24.1.3 Getting help ................................................................................................................ 394
24.1.4 Basic commands ........................................................................................................ 394
24.1.5 Finding commands ..................................................................................................... 395
24.1.6 Command example .................................................................................................... 395
24.1.7 Viewing the command tree ........................................................................................ 396
24.2 CLI Commands and Parameters ............................................................................... 399
24.2.1 management .............................................................................................................. 399
24.2.1.1 mng-services ............................................................................................. 399
24.2.1.2 cfg-service ................................................................................................. 399
24.2.1.3 event-service ............................................................................................. 399
24.2.1.4 alarm-service ............................................................................................. 400
24.2.1.5 pm-service ................................................................................................. 401
24.2.1.6 time-service ............................................................................................... 401
24.2.1.7 mng-software ............................................................................................. 403
24.2.1.8 users .......................................................................................................... 406
24.2.1.9 log-srv ........................................................................................................ 407
24.2.1.10 networking ................................................................................................. 407
24.2.1.11 ip-address .................................................................................................. 408
24.2.1.12 floating-ip-address ..................................................................................... 409
24.2.1.13 mng-protocols ............................................................................................ 409
24.2.1.14 snmp .......................................................................................................... 410
24.2.1.15 platform ...................................................................................................... 412
24.2.1.16 Inventory .................................................................................................... 413
24.2.1.17 daughter-board .......................................................................................... 416
24.2.1.18 license ........................................................................................................ 417
24.2.1.19 idc-board .................................................................................................... 419
24.2.1.20 fpga ............................................................................................................ 423
24.2.1.21 mate-idu ..................................................................................................... 424
24.2.1.22 all-odu ........................................................................................................ 425
24.2.1.23 shelf-manager ............................................................................................ 425
24.2.1.24 remote-idu .................................................................................................. 427
24.2.1.25 remote-cl .................................................................................................... 428
24.2.1.26 remote-co................................................................................................... 428
24.2.1.27 radio-diversity ............................................................................................ 428
24.2.1.28 multi-radio .................................................................................................. 429
24.2.1.29 radio ........................................................................................................... 430
24.2.1.30 xpic............................................................................................................. 431
24.2.1.31 framer ........................................................................................................ 432
24.2.1.32 mrmc .......................................................................................................... 433
24.2.1.33 tdm-radio-pm ............................................................................................. 436
24.2.1.34 modem ....................................................................................................... 436
24.2.1.35 rfu ............................................................................................................... 437
24.2.1.36 rfu-sw-upload ............................................................................................. 442
24.2.1.37 rfu-fw-upload .............................................................................................. 442
24.2.1.38 rfu-co .......................................................................................................... 443
24.2.1.39 rfu-cl ........................................................................................................... 443
24.2.1.40 rfic .............................................................................................................. 443
24.2.1.41 enhanced-hc .............................................................................................. 443

24.2.1.42 interfaces ................................................................................................... 445
24.2.1.43 user-channel .............................................................................................. 446
24.2.1.44 eow ............................................................................................................ 446
24.2.1.45 wayside ...................................................................................................... 446
24.2.1.46 sync............................................................................................................ 447
24.2.1.47 ethernet ...................................................................................................... 449
24.2.1.48 bridge ......................................................................................................... 449
24.2.1.49 port-group .................................................................................................. 452
24.2.1.50 eth-port ...................................................................................................... 452
24.2.1.51 enhanced-tm .............................................................................................. 464
24.2.1.52 service-oam ............................................................................................... 469
24.2.2 pdh ............................................................................................................................. 471
24.2.2.1 e1t1-port .................................................................................................... 471
24.2.2.2 lag-port ....................................................................................................... 472
24.2.2.3 trails ........................................................................................................... 478
24.2.3 sdh.............................................................................................................................. 480
24.2.3.1 stm1 ........................................................................................................... 480
24.2.4 pw ............................................................................................................................... 483
24.2.4.1 pw-tdm ....................................................................................................... 483
24.2.4.2 pwc............................................................................................................. 483
24.2.4.3 tdm-ports .................................................................................................... 484
24.2.4.4 ds0-bundles ............................................................................................... 485
24.2.4.5 tunnels ....................................................................................................... 487
24.2.4.6 pw-profiles ................................................................................................. 488
24.2.4.7 pws............................................................................................................. 489
24.2.4.8 eth-port-pwc ............................................................................................... 491
24.2.5 diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 499
24.2.5.1 rmon ........................................................................................................... 499
24.2.5.2 loopback .................................................................................................... 499
24.2.6 xml-interface ............................................................................................................... 500
24.3 Basic System Configuration Using CLI ...................................................................... 501
24.3.1 Setting IP Addresses.................................................................................................. 502
24.3.2 Adding users .............................................................................................................. 502
24.3.3 Navigating between stacked units ............................................................................. 502
24.3.3.1 Going from the main unit to a different unit ............................................... 502
24.3.3.2 Returning to main unit................................................................................ 502
24.3.4 Performing Resets ..................................................................................................... 503
24.3.4.1 In Stacked Configuration ........................................................................... 503
24.3.4.2 In any IDU (Standalone or Nodal) ............................................................. 503
24.3.5 Configuration backup ................................................................................................. 504
24.3.5.1 Creating configuration backup files ........................................................... 504
24.3.5.2 Saving configuration files in external site: ................................................. 504
24.3.5.3 Downloading saved configuration files: ..................................................... 505
24.3.6 Software version management .................................................................................. 506
24.3.7 Using CLI scripts ........................................................................................................ 508
24.3.7.1 Setting external FTP client site parameters .............................................. 508
24.3.7.2 Managing and Executing scripts ................................................................ 508
24.3.8 CLI Script Limitations ................................................................................................. 509
24.3.9 Radio Parameter Configurations ................................................................................ 510
24.3.10 NTP ............................................................................................................ 512
24.3.11 SNMP ........................................................................................................ 513
24.3.11.1 SNMP parameters for SNMP Version 3 .................................................... 513

24.3.11.2 Configuring HTTPS Web Protocol ............................................................. 514

24.3.12 CFM ........................................................................................................... 516
24.3.12.1 Domain ...................................................................................................... 516
24.3.12.2 Domain & association ................................................................................ 516
24.3.12.3 Association ................................................................................................ 516
24.3.12.4 CCM ........................................................................................................... 517
24.3.12.5 CCM Interval .............................................................................................. 517
24.3.12.6 Local MEP ................................................................................................. 517
24.3.12.7 Remote MEP ............................................................................................. 518
24.3.12.8 MIP............................................................................................................. 518
24.3.12.9 Loopback (Ping) ......................................................................................... 518
24.3.12.10 Link Trace ............................................................................................. 520
24.3.12.11 Auto link trace ....................................................................................... 521
24.3.12.12 Auto Link Trace Interval........................................................................ 522
24.3.12.13 Remote MEP learning time .................................................................. 523
24.3.13 Pseudowire Configuration ......................................................................... 524
24.3.13.1 PW T-Card Basic Configuration ................................................................ 524
24.3.13.2 Ethernet Traffic Port Configuration ............................................................ 524
24.3.13.3 Configuring a SAToP UDP/IP Unprotected Service .................................. 525
24.3.13.4 Configuring a CESoPSN UDP/IP Protected Service ................................. 526
24.3.14 TDM trail management .............................................................................. 528
24.3.14.1 Defining a TDM Trail .................................................................................. 528
24.3.14.2 Viewing Trails Defined in the System ........................................................ 528
24.3.14.3 Deleting trails ............................................................................................. 529
24.3.14.4 Activating and reserving trails .................................................................... 530
24.3.15 TDM Protected Trails (SNCP) ................................................................... 530
24.3.15.1 Defining a Protected TDM Trail ................................................................. 530
24.3.15.2 Forcing trails to active/standby .................................................................. 531
24.3.16 Showing TDM Trail PMs and Status .......................................................... 532
24.3.16.1 Showing TDM Trail PM Measurements ..................................................... 532
24.3.16.2 Showing TDM Trail Status ......................................................................... 532
24.3.17 Configuring the Ethernet Switch Application ............................................. 533
24.3.18 Configuring the LAG Ports ......................................................................... 534
24.3.18.1 Setting load balancing of the LAG ............................................................. 534
24.3.18.2 Assigning ports to a LAG ........................................................................... 534
24.3.18.3 Defining LAG Options ................................................................................ 534
24.3.18.4 Deleting a LAG .......................................................................................... 536
24.3.19 Management Ports .................................................................................... 537
24.3.19.1 Port configuration....................................................................................... 537
24.3.20 VLAN Configuration ................................................................................... 539
24.3.21 QoS Configuration ..................................................................................... 540
24.3.21.1 Ingress Classifier ....................................................................................... 540
24.3.21.2 Egress scheduler ....................................................................................... 540
24.3.21.3 Egress shaper ............................................................................................ 540
24.3.21.4 Policer ........................................................................................................ 541
24.3.21.5 QoS tables ................................................................................................. 541
24.3.22 Auxiliary Channels ..................................................................................... 543
24.3.22.1 Wayside Channel....................................................................................... 543
24.3.22.2 User channel .............................................................................................. 543
24.3.23 Automatic State Propagation, 1+0 Configuration Only .............................. 544
24.3.23.1 Ethernet Shutdown (Rx) Profile Threshold (ACM Enabled) ...................... 544
24.3.23.2 Metro Switch and Port Type Configuration ................................................ 544
24.3.24 Radio script configuration .......................................................................... 546
24.3.25 Ring RSTP ................................................................................................. 547
25. Appendix B – List of Alarms ........................................................................ 548

About This Guide

This document explains how to configure and operate an IP-10G or IP-10E
IDU. This document applies to hardware versions R2 and R3 and software
version I6.9.
What You Should Know

The instructions in this manual assume that you are using Ceragon’s Web-
Based Element Management System (EMS) to perform software configuration.
A reference guide to using the Command Line Interface is also included.
Target Audience
This manual is intended for use individuals responsible for configuration and
administration of an IP-10G or IP-10E system or network.
Related Documents
 FibeAir IP-10G Product Description
 FibeAir IP-10E Product Description
 FibeAir IP-10G Installation Guide - DOC-00023199
 FibeAir IP-10E Installation Guide - DOC-00029444
 FibeAir IP-10 G/E MIB Reference - DOC-00015446
 FibeAir IP-10 License Management System - DOC-00019183

1. Introduction
This chapter includes:
 About the CeraWeb EMS (Web EMS)
 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure

1.1 About the CeraWeb EMS (Web EMS)

The CeraWeb Element Management System (Web EMS) is an HTTP web-based
element manager that enables the operator to perform configuration
operations and obtain statistical and performance information related to the
system, including:
 Configuration Management – Enables you to view and define
configuration data for the IP-10 system.
 Fault Monitoring – Enables you to view active alarms.
 Performance Monitoring – Enables you to view and clear performance
monitoring values and counters.
 Maintenance Association Identifiers – Enables you to define
Maintenance Association Identifiers (MAID) for CFR protection.
 Diagnostics and Maintenance – Enables you to define and perform
loopback tests, software updates, and IDU-RFU interface monitoring.
 Security Configuration – Enables you to configure IP-10G/E security
features.
 User Management – Enables you to define users and user groups.
A Web-Based EMS connection to the IP-10G/E can be opened using an HTTP
Browser (Explorer or Mozilla Firefox). The Web-Based EMS uses a graphical
interface. All system configurations and statuses are available via the Web-
Based EMS, including all L2-Switch configurations such as port type, VLANs,
QoS.
The Web-Based EMS shows the actual node configuration and provides easy
access to any IDU in the node.
1.1.1 Browser behavior with Web EMS

The Web EMS does not disable any innate browser functionality. However,
some browser functions will not function as expected.
 The browser’s Back button will load the page that was open before you
logged into the Web EMS. Therefore, you should use the navigation pane in
the Web EMS to select pages, rather than the browser’s Back button.
 Selecting Refresh from the browser’s menu or pressing F5 will not update
the information on the page. Rather, it will start a new Web EMS session.
Therefore, you should use the Refresh buttons within the Web EMS GUI to
update data.
Note: For multi-radio configurations, protection, and extension
units, available options will vary according to the available
interfaces and configured features for selected slot.

1.2 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure

The following table shows the Web EMS menu hierarchy, with links to the
sections in this document that provide instructions for the relevant menu
item.
Note: Some menu items are only available if the relevant license
or feature is enabled.
IP-10G/E Web EMS Menu Hierarchy
Root Menu Item Sub-Menus Applicability For Further Information

Current Alarms IP-10G/E Viewing Current Alarms
Faults
Event Log IP-10G/E Viewing the Event Log
PM Commands IP-10G/E Displaying and Clearing PMs
RMON IP-10G/E Displaying and Resetting RMON Counters
TDM Trails IP.10G only Displaying TDM Trail PMs
Pseudowire Port RMON IP.10G only Displaying Pseudowire PMs
E1/DS1 Port # IP.10G only Displaying E1/DS1 Line PMs
STM-1/OC-3 Port # IP.10G only Displaying STM-1/OC-3 Line PMs
Signal Level IP-10G/E  RSL and TSL Thresholds
 Displaying Signal Level PMs
Aggregate IP-10G/E Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs
MRMC IP-10G/E Displaying Radio MRMC PMs
MSE IP-10G/E  MSE Threshold
PM & Counters
Radio  Displaying Radio MSE PMs
XPI IP-10G/E  XPI Threshold
 Displaying Radio XPI PMs
TDM Channel IP.10G only Displaying TDM Channel PMs
Ethernet > Capacity IP-10G/E  Displaying Capacity Statistics
 Ethernet Capacity Threshold
Ethernet > Utilization IP-10G/E  Displaying Utilization Statistics
 Ethernet Utilization Threshold
Ethernet > Frame Error IP-10G/E Displaying Frame Error Rate Statistics
Radio
Rate
Ethernet > Throughput IP-10G/E  Ethernet Throughput Threshold
 Displaying Throughput Statistics


Unit Parameters IP-10G/E  Configuring and Viewing Unit System
Information
 Configuring System Date and Time
 Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers
 Loading a New License Key
 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New
Standalone System
External Alarms IP-10G/E Configuring External Alarms
Management IP-10G/E  Configuring IP Addresses
 Configuring the Management Ports
 Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS
Standalone System
Nodal System
Traps Configuration IP-10G/E Configuring Traps
Licensing IP-10G/E  Viewing Current License Details
Configuration General
 Replacing a License
 Working with a Demo License
 Viewing Licensed Usage and Features
Standalone System
Nodal System
NTP IP-10G/E Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP)
Parameters
IP Table IP-10G/E Configuring Peer Port Settings
SNMP IP-10G/E Configuring SNMP
All ODU IP-10G/E Activating the All-ODU Enclosure
Dual Power Supply IP-10G/E Configuring Power Supply Alarms
Versions > IDU IP-10G/E Viewing IDU Version Information
Versions > RFU IP-10G/E Viewing RFU Version Information


Switch Configuration IP-10G/E  Configuring Smart Pipe Switch Mode
 Configuring Managed and Metro Switch
Mode
 Assigning VLANs to a Port
QoS & Rate Limiting IP-10G/E  Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS
 Configuring Enhanced QoS
Enhanced Traffic IP-10G/E Configuring Enhanced QoS
Ethernet Switch
Manager
STP Protocol IP-10G/E Setting the xSTP Protocol
RSTP/Ring RSTP IP-10G/E  Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP
 Configuring Ethernet Ports to Support
RSTP
 Configuring RSTP Priority
 Viewing RSTP Status
Radio Parameters IP-10G/E  Enabling and Disabling the Radio
 Configuring the Radio Frequencies
 Specifying the Radio Link ID
Configuration  Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms

 Configuring Green Mode
 Configuring IF Combining Diversity
 Configuring Multi-Radio
 Displaying XPI Values
 Viewing RFU Status
 Viewing XPIC Status
Remote Radio IP-10G/E  Configuring the Radio Frequencies
Radio
 Viewing Remote Radio Parameters
Radio Thresholds IP-10G/E Radio Threshold Levels
MRMC IP-10G/E  Selecting a Radio Script and Configuring
ACM
 Viewing MRMC Status
 Viewing Current Tx Status
 Viewing Current Rx Status
Compression IP-10G/E Configuring Compression
Traffic Priority IP-10G/E Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities
ATPC IP-10G/E Configuring ATPC Override


Ethernet Ports IP-10G/E  Configuring a Single Pipe Port
 Configuring a Managed Switch or Metro
Switch Port
 Configuring Automatic State Propagation
 Configuring LAGs
 Configuring an Ethernet Port for
Pseudowire
 Viewing Ethernet Interface Status
E1 Ports/DS1 Ports IP.10G only Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces
STM Ports/OC-3 Ports IP.10G only Configuring STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces
Interfaces Wayside Channel IP-10G/E  Configuring the Wayside Channel
 Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS
User Channel IP-10G/E Configuring the User Channel
EOW IP-10G/E Viewing the EOW Channel Status
Configuration
AIS IP-10G/E Configuring AIS Detection and Signaling
Synchronization > Sync IP-10G/E  Configuring the Synchronization Source
Source  Configuring PRC Regenerator Mode and
Direction
Synchronization > Clock IP-10G/E Configuring the Outgoing Signal Clock
Source
Protection Parameters IP-10G/E  Configuring 2+0 Protection
 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection
 Specifying Active and Standby Mode
Protection  Configuring Switchover Criteria
 Viewing Mate Parameters
Multi-Unit LAG IP-10G/E Configuring Multi-Unit LAG
Radio Diversity IP-10G/E Configuring Diversity
Trails TDM Trails IP-10G only Configuring TDM Trails
Card Configuration IP-10G only  Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization
 Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card
TDM Ports IP-10G only Configuring the Pseudowire TDM Ports
PSN Profiles IP-10G only Configuring Pseudowire Profiles
Configuration Pseudowire
PSN Tunnels IP-10G only Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation
(Tunnels)
DS0 Bundles IP-10G only Configuring DS0 Bundles
Pseudowire Service IP-10G only Configuring Pseudowire Services


MAID List IP-10G/E  Working with MAIDs
 Managing Local MEPs
 Managing Remote MEPs
 Working with MEPs
Service OAM
MEP and MIP List IP-10G/E  Working with MEPs
 Working with MIPs
Manual Ping IP-10G/E Pinging Remote MEPs and MIPs
Advanced
Manual Linktrace IP-10G/E Performing a Manual Linktrace
Radio IP-10G/E Radio Loopback
PDH Line IP-10G only E1/DS1 Line Loopback
Loopback
SDH/SONET Line IP-10G only STM-1/OC-3 Line Loopback
Pseudowire TDM Ports IP-10G only Pseudowire Line Loopback
Configuration Management IP-10G/E  Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP)
Diagnostics &  Archiving the Configuration
Maintenance  Restoring the Default Configuration
Software Management IP-10G/E Configuring IDU Software
RFU Download IP-10G/E Updating the RFU Software Version
IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring IP-10G/E Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface
Resets IP-10G/E Resetting the Unit
File List IP-10G/E Viewing System Application Files
Security Configuration IP-10G/E  Configuring Secure Communication
Channels
 Configuring a Timeout for Inactive Users
Users & Groups IP-10G/E  Adding Users
Security  Deleting Users
CSR File IP-10G/E Generating a Security Certificate from a CSR
File
Change Password IP-10G/E Changing Your Password
RADIUS IP-10G/E Configuring RADIUS

2. Getting Started
 Establishing a Connection with the IDU
 Launching the Web EMS
 Configuring IP Addresses

2.1 Establishing a Connection with the IDU

The default factory configuration of a new IP-10 IDU is:
 IP Address: 192.168.1.1, IP Mask 255.255.255.0.
 Active management ports: ports 6, and 7 (far right RJ45 ports), out-of band
management.
 License: Basic – capacity 10Mbps, no ACM, Smart Pipe (only GbE ports,
ports #1 or #3)
 SW package: Basic – 6.xx.xx.
 Protection: Disabled. 1+0 configuration
To establish a connection with the IDU:
1 Verify that no Ethernet traffic (cables or fibers) is connected.
2 Power up the IDU.
3 Connect your PC or laptop to one of the IDU management ports (ports
6 or 7, far right RJ45 ports).
4 Set your PC or laptop to the following configuration:

IP Address: 192.168.1.240
IP Mask 255.255.255.0
No default gateway.
5 Verify connectivity to the IDU by pinging 192.168.1.1. If there is no
connectivity, verify IDU IP management configuration using the Command
Line Interface (CLI).

2.2 Launching the Web EMS

You can use the Web EMS to perform initial IDU configuration. To launch the
Web EMS:
1 Start your web browser.
2 In the URL address field at the top, type http://yourIP, where yourIP is the
IP address of the IDU. The default IDU IP address is 192.168.1.1.
3 Press Enter. The IP-10 Login page is displayed.
4 Enter the user name and password:

Default user name: admin
Default password: admin.
5 Click Apply. The Main View page opens, displaying all the unit’s populated
slots.
Note: For multi-radio configurations, protection, and extension
units, available options will vary according to the available
interfaces and configured features for selected slot.
Main View - Multi Radio Configuration
Main View - Single Unit Configuration
Configuration and other operations are performed by clicking the menus on

the left side of the page.

2.3 Configuring IP Addresses

You can configure the local IDU’s IP address in the Local IP Configuration
section of the Management page.
You can configure the remote IDU’s IP address in the Remote IP Configuration
section of the Management page.
In protected configurations, the floating IP address feature provides a single IP
address that will always provide direct access to the currently active main
unit. This is used primarily for web-based management and telnet access.
The user can configure a floating IP address in the active unit, and this IP
address will be automatically copied to the standby unit.
To configure local IP settings:
1 Select Configuration > General > Management. The Management page
opens.
2 In the Local IP Configuration section of the Management page, enter the IP
address of the local unit, its subnet mask, and the default gateway.
3 Optionally, enter a floating IP address. The following limitations apply to a

floating IP address:
The floating IP address must be different from the system IP address.
The floating IP address must be in the same subnet as the system IP
address.
To configure remote IP settings:
opens.
2 In the Remote IP Configuration section of the Management page, enter the
IP address of the remote unit and its subnet mask.
3 Click Open Remote to open the remote unit's management page.

3. Configuring Secured Access Protocols

 Security Overview
 Configuring SNMP
 Configuring Secure Communication Channels

3.1 Security Overview

To guarantee proper performance and availability of a network as well as the
data integrity of the traffic, it is imperative to protect it from all potential
threats, both internal (misuse by operators and administrators) and external
(attacks originating outside the network).
System security is based on making attacks difficult (in the sense that the
effort required to carry them out is not worth the possible gain) by putting
technical and operational barriers in every layer along the way, from the
access outside the network, through the authentication process, up to every
data link in the network.
3.1.1 Defenses in Management Communication Channels

Since network equipment can be managed from any location, it is necessary to
protect the communication channels’ contents end to end.
These defenses are based on existing and proven cryptographic techniques
and libraries, thus providing standard secure means to manage the network,
with minimal impact on usability.
They provide defense at any point (including public networks and radio
aggregation networks) of communications.
While these features are implemented in Ceragon equipment, it is the
responsibility of the operator to have the proper capabilities in any external
devices used to manage the network.
In addition, inside Ceragon networking equipment it is possible to control
physical channels used for management. This can greatly help deal with all
sorts of DoS attacks.
Operators can use secure channels instead or in addition to the existing
management channels:
 SNMPv3 for all SNMP-based protocols for both NEs and NMS
 HTTPS for access to the NE’s web server
 SSH-2 for all CLI access SFTP for all software and configuration download
between NMS and NEs
All protocols run with secure settings using strong encryption techniques.
Unencrypted modes are not allowed, and algorithms used must meet modern
and client standards.
Users are allowed to disable all insecure channels.
In the network elements, the bandwidth of physical channels transporting
management communications is limited to the appropriate magnitude, in
particular, channels carrying management frames to the CPU.
Attack types addressed
 Tempering with management flows
 Management traffic analysis
 Unauthorized software installation
 Attacks on protocols (by providing secrecy and integrity to messages)
 Traffic interfaces eavesdropping (by making it harder to change

configuration)
 DoS through flooding
3.1.2 Defenses in User and System Authentication Procedures
3.1.2.1 User Identification

IP-10G/E supports the following user identification features:
 Configurable inactivity time-out for closing management channels
 Password strength is enforced; passwords must comply with the following
rules:
Be at least 8 characters long
Include both numbers and letters (or spaces, symbols, etc.)
Include both uppercase and lowercase letters
When calculating the number of character classes, upper-case letters
used as the first character and digits used as the last character of a
password are not counted
A password cannot be repeated within the past 5 password changes
 Password aging: users can be prompted do change passwords after a
configurable amount of time
 Users may be suspended after a configurable number of unsuccessful login
attempts
 Users can be configured to expire at a certain date
 Mandatory change of password at first time login can be enabled and
disabled upon user configuration. It is enabled by default.
3.1.2.2 Remote Authentication

Certificate-based strong standard encryption techniques are used for remote
authentication. Users may choose to use this feature or not for all secure
communication channels.
Since different operators may have different certificate-based authentication
policies (for example, issuing its own certificates vs. using an external CA or
allowing the NMS system to be a CA), NEs and NMS software provide the tools
required for operators to enforce their policy and create certificates according
to their established processes.
Server authentication capabilities are provided.
3.1.2.3 Authorization
Users are assigned to user groups. Each group has separate and well-defined
authorization to access resources. Security configuration can only be
performed by the group with the highest permission level.
In the NMS, it is possible to customize groups and group permissions.

3.1.2.4 RADIUS Support

IP-10G/E supports RADIUS user authentication. RADIUS can be enabled or
disabled by the user. Vendor-specific permission levels can be configured on
the RADIUS server.
The following RADIUS servers are supported:
 FreeRADIUS
 RADIUS on Windows Server (IAS)
Windows Server 2008
Windows Server 2003
 Cisco ACS
3.1.2.5 Attack Types Addressed

 Impersonation
 Unauthorized software installation
 Traffic interfaces eavesdropping
3.1.3 Secure Communication Channels

IP-10G/E supports a variety of standard encryption protocols and algorithms,
as described in the following sections.
3.1.3.1 SSH (Secured Shell)

 SHHv1 and SSHv2 are supported.
 SSH protocol can be used as a secured alternative to Telnet.
 SSH protocol will always be operational. Admin users can choose whether
to disable Telnet protocol, which is enabled by default. Server
authentication is based on IP-10G/E’s public key.
 Key exchange algorithm is RSA.
 Supported Encryptions: aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc, blowfish-cbc, cast128-cbc,
arcfour128, arcfour256, arcfour, aes192-cbc, aes256-cbc, aes128-ctr,
aes192-ctr, aes256-ctr.
 MAC (Message Authentication Code): SHA-1-96 (MAC length = 96 bits, key
length = 160 bit). Supported MAC: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmac-
ripemd160, hmac-sha1-96, hmac-md5-96'
 The server authenticates the user based on user name and password. The
number of failed authentication attempts is not limited.
 The server timeout for authentication is 10 minutes. This value cannot be
changed.
3.1.3.2 HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)

Administrators can configure secure access via HTTPS protocol.

3.1.3.3 SFTP (Secure FTP)

SFTP can be used for the following operations:
 Configuration upload and download,
 Uploading unit information
 Uploading a public key
 Downloading certificate files
 Downloading software
Users with admin privileges can enforce secure FTP by disabling standard
FTP.
3.1.3.4 Creation of Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File

In order to create a digital certificate for the NE, a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) file should be created by the NE. The CSR contains information that will
be included in the NE's certificate such as the organization name, common
name (domain name), locality, and country. It also contains the public key that
will be included in the certificate. Certificate authority (CA) will use the CSR to
create the desired certificate for the NE.
While creating the CSR file, the user will be asked to input the following
parameters that should be known to the operator who applies the command:
 Common name – The identify name of the element in the network (e.g., the
IP address). The common name can be a network IP or the FQDN of the
element.
 Organization – The legal name of the organization.
 Organizational Unit - The division of the organization handling the
certificate.
 City/Locality - The city where the organization is located.
 State/County/Region - The state/region where the organization is located.
 Country - The two-letter ISO code for the country where the organization is
location.
 Email address - An email address used to contact the organization.

3.1.3.5 SNMP
IP-10G/E supports SNMP v1, V2c or v3. The default community string in NMS
and the SNMP agent in the embedded SW are disabled. Users are allowed to
set community strings for access to IDUs.
SNMPv3 connections are authenticated with a single user ID and password.
Admin users can configure this user ID and password.
IP-10G/E supports the following MIBs:
 RFC-1213 (MIB II)
 RMON MIB
 Ceragon (proprietary) MIB.
Access to all IDUs in a node is provided by making use of the community and
context fields in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c/SNMPv3, respectively.
For additional information:

 FibeAir IP-10G/E I6.9 MIB Reference, DOC- 00015446
3.1.3.6 Server authentication (SSL / SLLv3)

 All protocols making use of SSL (such as HTTPS) use SLLv3 and support
X.509 certificates-based server authentication.
 Users with type of “administrator” or above can perform the following
server (IDU) authentication operations for certificates handling:
Generate server key pairs (private + public)
Export public key (as a file to a user-specified address)
Install third-party certificates
The Admin user is responsible for obtaining a valid certificate.
Load a server RSA key pair that was generated externally for use by
protocols making use of SSL.
 Non-SSL protocols using asymmetric encryption, such as SSH and SFTP,
can make use of public-key based authentication.
Users can load trusted public keys for this purpose.
3.1.3.7 Encryption
 Encryption algorithms for secure management protocols include:
Symmetric key algorithms: 128-bit AES
Asymmetric key algorithms: 1024-bit RSA
3.1.3.8 SSH
 The CLI interface supports SSH-2
Users of type of “administrator” or above can enable or disable SSH.

3.1.4 Security Log

The security log is an internal system file which records all changes performed
to any security feature, as well as all security related events.
Note: The Security log can only be accessed via the CLI.
The security log file has the following attributes:
 The file is of a “cyclic” nature (fixed size, newest events overwrite oldest).
 The log can only be read by users with "admin" or above privilege.
 The log can be viewed using the following command:
/management/mng-services/log-srv/security log/view-security log
 The contents of the log file are cryptographically protected and digitally
signed.
In the event of an attempt to modify the file, an alarm will be raised.
 Users may not overwrite, delete, or modify the log file.
The security log records:
 Changes in security configuration
Carrying out “security configuration copy to mate”
Management channels time-out
Password aging time
Number of unsuccessful login attempts for user suspension
Warning banner change
Adding/deleting of users
Password changed
SNMP enable/disable
SNMP version used (v1/v3) change
SNMPv3 parameters change
Security mode
Authentication algorithm
User
Password
SNMPv1 parameters change
Read community
Write community
Trap community for any manager
HTTP/HTTPS change
FTP/SFTP change
Telnet and web interface enable/disable
FTP enable/disable
Loading certificates
RADIUS server
Radius enable/disable
Remote logging enable/disable (for security and configuration logs)

Syslog server address change (for security and configuration logs)

System clock change
NTP enable/disable
 Security events
 Successful and unsuccessful login attempts
 N consecutive unsuccessful login attempts (blocking)
 Configuration change failure due to insufficient permissions
 SNMPv3/PV authentication failures
 User logout
 User account expired
For each recorded event the following information is available:
 User ID
 Communication channel (WEB, terminal, telnet/SSH, SNMP, NMS, etc.)
 IP address, if applicable
 Date and time

3.2 Configuring SNMP

To configure SNMP:
1 Select Configuration > General>SNMP. The SNMP page opens.
2 Go to the In the SNMP Parameters section.
3 In the SNMP version field, select V1, V2c, or V3 to specify the SNMP
version.
4 In the SNMP read community field, enter the password for the SNMP read
community.
5 In the SNMP write community field, enter the password for the SNMP
write community.
6 Click Apply.
3.2.1 Configuring SNMPv3 Parameters

If you are using SNMPv3, you must configure the security mode,
authentication, user name, and password. To configure SNMPv3 parameters:
1 Select Configuration > General>SNMP. The SNMP page opens.
2 Go to the In the SNMP V3 User Settings section.
3 In the Security mode field, select the SNMPv3security mode: Options are:
No security
Authentication (default)
Authentication privacy

4 In the Authentication algorithm field, select either MDS or SHA.

Note: This field is only configurable if the Security mode is not set
to No security.
5 In the User name field, enter the SNMPv3 user name.
6 In the Password field, enter the SNMPv3 password.
This field is only configurable if the Security mode is not set to No
security.
SNMPv3 passwords must be at least eight characters.
7 Click Change User Settings to apply the SNMP V3 changes.

3.3 Configuring Secure Communication Channels

IP-10G and IP-10E work with several standard encryption protocols and
algorithms for increased system security. The following sections provide
instructions for configuring these protocols and algorithms and other
communication security features:
 Configuring Inactivity Timeout
 Secure File Transfer and Server Authentication
 Configuring HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)
 Downloading a Certificate
 Configuring the Security File Name, Type and Format
 Enabling the CA Certificate
 Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP)
 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File
 Generating a Security Certificate from a CSR File
3.3.1 Configuring Inactivity Timeout

The system automatically times out after a specified number of minutes with
no activity. To configure this timeout period:
1 Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page is displayed.
2 In the Communication inactivity timeout field, enter the timeout period

in minutes. The timeout can be from 1 to 60 minutes..
3 Click Apply.

3.3.2 Secure File Transfer and Server Authentication

IP-10G and IP-10E support Secured Shell protocol (SSH) and Telnet for secure
file transfer. SSHv1 and SSHv2 are supported. SSH is always operational. In
contrast, Telnet, which is enabled by default, can be disabled.
To disable Telnet:
page is displayed.
2 In the Telnet protocol field, select Disable.

3 Click Apply.
Server authentication is based on IP-10G/E’s public key. The key exchange
algorithm is RSA. Supported encryptions are: aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc, blowfish-
cbc, cast128-cbc, arcfour128, arcfour256, arcfour, aes192-cbc, aes256-cbc,
aes128-ctr, aes192-ctr, aes256-ctr.
The server timeout for authentication is 10 minutes. This value cannot be
changed.

3.3.3 Configuring HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)

The web interface protocol can be configured to be HTTP (default) or HTTPS,
but it cannot be set to both at the same time.
To configure HTTPS web protocol:
1 Create a CSR file, upload it and provide it to the Certificate Authority or
certificate generator. Refer to Generating a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) File on page 42.
2 Configure the certificate file name, type, and format for each certificate
that you wish to download. Refer to Configuring the Security File Name,
Type and Format on page 40
3 Download the certificate to the NE. Refer to Downloading a Certificate on
page 40.
4 Download the CA certificate to the NE (optional). Refer to Downloading a
Certificate on page 40.
5 Enable the CA certificate (optional).
6 Set the web-protocol parameter to HTTPS:
i Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page opens.
ii In the Security Parameters section, select HTTPS.
iii Click Apply to save your changes.
While switching to HTTPS mode, the following conditions must exist:
A WEB server certificate file must exist.
The certificate’s public key must be compatible with the IDU’s private
key.
Notes: For security reasons, this parameter is NOT copied by a
copy to mate operation. An unsecured unit should not be
able to override the security parameters of a secured unit
just by performing a copy to mate operation.
To configure HTTPS without certificates:

1 Upload the unit’s public key:
i Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page opens.
ii In the Upload Public Key Status & Command section, click Upload
Public Key. You can monitor the upload status in the Upload public
key status field of the Security Configuration page.
Note: Uploads are performed using FTP/SFTP. The public key file
will be in PEM format.
2 Set the web-protocol parameter to HTTPS by performing Step 6 on
page 39.

3.3.4 Downloading a Certificate

To download an IDU server or CA certificate, you must perform the following
steps for each file type:
Note: You must have admin privileges to perform this procedure.
page opens.
2 In the Security file name field, enter the certificate file name.
3 In the Security file type field, enter the digital certificate type. Options are
"Target certificate" for WEB server digital certificate, or "Target ca
certificate" for WEB CA digital certificate.
4 In the Security file format field, select the certificate file format: PEM (for
PEM formatted file) or DER (for DER formatted file).
5 In the WEB CA Certificate field, select Enable if the downloaded file is a
“WEB CA digital certificate” or Disable if the file is a "WEB server digital
certificate.”
6 Click Download Certificate. You can monitor the status of the download
operation in the Download security status field in the Security
Configuration page.
7 It is recommended to refresh the Security Configuration page once the
certificate download operation is complete.
8 To apply the new certificate, the web server should be restarted. The web
server is automatically restarted when it is configured to HTTPS.
3.3.5 Configuring the Security File Name, Type and Format
To configure the security certificate file name, type, and format:

page opens.
2 In the Download Certificate Parameters section, define the security

certificate:
 In the Security file name field, enter a name for the certificate.
 In the Security type field, select the file type.
Valid file type values are either: Target Certificate for WEB server
digital certificate, or Target CA certificate for WEB CA digital
certificate.
 In the Security type format field, select the file format.
Valid file formats are PEM and DER.
3. Click Apply to save your changes.

3.3.6 Enabling the CA Certificate

Determine whether to include the CA certificate into the web configuration
definitions. This is an optional configuration and is recommended for adapting
the web interface to all the web browsers applications.
To enable the CA certificate:
1. Select Security > Security Configuration. The Security Configuration
page opens.
2. Enable or disable the CA certificate in the Download Certificate Parameters
section:
 Select Enable if the downloaded file is a WEB CA digital certificate.
 Select Disable if the file is "WEB server digital certificate".
3. Restart the web server to apply the new certificate.
3.3.7 Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP)

Before uploading or downloading configuration archives, you must define FTP
settings.
IP-10G and IP-10E support the use of SFTP for the following operations:
 Configuration upload and download
 Uploading IDU unit information
 Uploading a public key
 Downloading certificate files
 Downloading software
To configure local FTP or SFTP:
1. Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management and
click the FTP parameters link at the bottom of the Configuration
management page.
2. Specify the FTP server host.

 In the Server IP address field, enter the IP of the host where the
archive is to be stored.
 In the Server files location path field, enter the path in the host (FTP
directory) where the archive is to be stored.
For the default FTP path use set // for Windows, or set / for Linux.
3. In the File transfer protocol field, select Ftp or Sftp to specify the FTP
mode.
4. Specify FTP login information.
 In the User name field, enter the user name for the FTP session.
 In the User password field, enter the password for the FTP session. If
you use the default user name (anonymous), use the host login for the
password.
5 Click Apply.
To configure remote FTP:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Software Management and click the
FTP parameters link at the bottom of the Software management page.
2. Specify the FTP server host.

 In the Server IP address and path field, enter software update server
URL, where the software updates reside.
3. Specify FTP login information.
 In the User name field, enter the user name for the FTP session.
 In the User password field, enter the password for the FTP session. If
you use the default user name (anonymous), use the host login for the
password.
4 Click Apply.
3.3.8 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File

In order to create a digital certificate for an IP-10G/E unit, or any other
network element (NE), a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file should be
generated by the NE. The CSR contains information that will be included in the
NE's certificate such as the organization name, common name (domain name),
locality, and country. It also contains the public key that will be included in the
certificate. Certificate authority (CA) will use the CSR to create the desired
certificate for the NE.
When creating the CSR file, you will be prompted to input the following
parameters:
 Common name – The identify name of the element in the network (e.g.,
the IP address). The common name can be a network IP or the FQDN of the
element.
 Organization – The legal name of the organization.

 Organizational Unit - The division of the organization handling the

certificate.
 City/Locality - The city where the organization is located.
 State/County/Region - The state/region where the organization is
located.
 Country - The two-letter ISO code for the country where the organization
is location.
 Email address - An email address used to contact the organization.
To generate a CSR file:
1 Select Security > CSR file. The CSR File page opens.
2 In the Country name field, enter the two-letter ISO code for the country
where the organization is location.
3 In the State or Province Name field, enter the state or region where the
organization is located.
4 In the Locality Name field, enter the city where the organization is
located.
5 In the Organization name field, enter the legal name of the organization.
6 In the Organizational unit name field, enter the division of the
organization handling the certificate.
7 In the Common Name field, enter the identify name of the element in the
network (e.g., IP address).
8 In the Email address field, enter an email address used to contact your
organization. The common name could be network IP or the FQDN of the
element.
9 Click Create CSR file.

3.3.9 Generating a Security Certificate from a CSR File
To generate a security certificate from the CSR text only:

2 Click the View CSR file link at the bottom of the page. The CSR file opens.
3 Copy the CSR file to paste into a CSR generator and give it to a certificate
generator or the Certificate Authority.
To generate a certificate from a CSR file via upload:

2 Enter the name of the CSR file in the Security file name field.
3 Click Apply.
4 When the Upload CSR file status field indicates Ready, click Upload File.
5 Give the CSR file to a certificate generator or the Certificate Authority.

4. Working with Configuration Files

 Archiving the Configuration
 Restoring the Default Configuration
 Resetting the Unit

4.1 Archiving the Configuration

In the Configuration Management page, you can manage unit information and
configuration archives.
4.1.1 Creating a Configuration Archive File

To create a unit information archive file:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens.
2 In the Configuration section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Create Archive.
4.1.2 Viewing Configuration Archive Creation Status

To view configuration archive creation status:
2 In the Upload Status & Commands section of the Configuration
Management page, view the configuration archive creation status in the
Config creation status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

4.1.3 Uploading a Configuration Archive File

To upload a unit information archive file:
2 In the Configuration section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Upload Archive.
4.1.4 Viewing Configuration Archive Upload Status

To view archive upload status:
Management page, view the archive upload status in the Config upload
status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed
4.1.5 Creating a Unit Information Archive File

To create a unit information archive file:
2 In the Unit Information section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Create Archive.
4.1.6 Viewing Unit Information Archive Creation Status

To view unit information archive creation status:
Management page, view the unit information archive creation status in the
Unit info creation status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

4.1.7 Uploading a Unit Information Archive File

To upload a unit information archive file:
2 In the Unit Information section under Upload Status & Commands, click
Upload Archive.
4.1.8 Viewing Unit Information Archive Upload Status

To view the unit information archive upload status:
Management page, view the archive upload status in the Unit info upload
status field. Possible status values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed
4.1.9 Downloading a Configuration Archive File

To download a configuration archive file:
2 In the Upload/Download Status & Commands section, click Download
Archive(s).
4.1.10 Viewing configuration file download status

To view configuration file download status:
2 View the download status in the Config download status field, located in
the Upload/Download Status & Commands section. Possible values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

4.1.11 Uploading a Configuration Archive File

To download an archive file:
2 In the Upload/Download Status & Commands section, click Upload
Archive(s).
4.1.12 Viewing configuration file installation status

To view configuration file download status:
2 View the upload status in the Config upload status field, located in the
Upload/Download Status & Commands section. Possible values are:
Ready
In Progress
Succeeded
Failed

4.2 Restoring the Default Configuration

You can reset the IDU to the default factory configuration:
2 In the Set to factory default configuration section, click Activate.
3 Click OK to confirm the reset, or Cancel to return to the Configuration

Management window.
4.3 Resetting the Unit

To perform a system reset:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Resets. The Resets page opens.
2 In the Click to perform reset section, click Reset.

5. Configuring Users and Password Security

 Configuring RADIUS
 Adding Users
 Deleting Users
 Changing Your Password
 Configuring a Timeout for Inactive Users

5.1 Configuring RADIUS

IP-10G/E supports RADIUS user authentication. RADIUS can be enabled or
disabled by the user. Vendor-specific permission levels can be configured on
the RADIUS server.
The following RADIUS servers are supported:
 FreeRADIUS
 RADIUS on Windows Server (IAS)
First priority - Windows Server 2008
Second priority - Windows Server 2003
 Cisco ACS
To configure RADIUS on the IP-10G/E:
1 Select Security > RADIUS. The RADIUS page opens.
2 In the Radius admin field, select Enable to enable RADIUS server.

3 In the Server ip address field, enter the IP address of the RADIUS server.
4 In the Server shared secret field, enter a secret word (up to 128
characters). This word must also be configured in the RADIUS server.
5 In the Server port field, enter a port number for the server (1 to 65536).
The RADIUS server must be configured with the same port number.
6 In the Server request attempts field, enter the number of retries (1 to
10).
7 In the Server timeout field, enter the timeout between retries (in
seconds) when attempting to connect to the RADIUS server (3-30).
8 Click Apply.
The RADIUS should be configured with the same parameters as the RADIUS
client.
In order to support IP-10G/E- specific privilege levels, the vendor-specific
field must be used. Ceragon’s IANA number for this field is 2281.

The RADIUS server should be configured with the privilege levels supported
by IP-10G as follows:
Type of privilege (TLV) in Values Interpretation

Vendor-Specific Field
1 1-4 IP-10 privileges:
 1 – Viewer
 2 – Operator
 3 – Technician
 4 – Admin
2 1 Root privilege

5.2 Adding Users

When you add a new user, you must assign the user to a User Privilege group.
You must also assign a password to the user.
Passwords must comply with the following rules:
 Must include at least 8 characters
 Must include both numbers and letters (or spaces, symbols, etc.)
 Must include both uppercase and lowercase letters
 When calculating the number of character classes, upper-case letters used
as the first character and digits used as the last character of a password
are not counted
 A password cannot be repeated within five password changes
Users can be required to change passwords at the interval set in the
Password Aging field. Passwords can also be set to expire at a fixed date.
To add a new user:
1 Select Security > Users and Groups. The Users and Groups page opens.
2 Click Add User underneath the Users list to define a new user. The Add a
user window opens.
3 In the User Privilege field, select a user group. Each user group includes a
set of user privileges, which are assigned to users in that group. Options
are:
Viewer - The user can only view, not configure, parameters.
Operator - The user can configure all parameters in the system, except
for security-related parameters (such as adding privilege groups).
Admin - The user has all Operator privileges, as well as the ability to
add new users.
Tech (technician) – The user has all Admin privileges, as well as

access to the Linux OS shell.
4 Define the user login parameters:
In the User Name field, enter a user name for the user.
In the Password field, enter a password that will authenticate the user.
5 Specify the user password settings:
In the Expiration date field, click the calendar icon and select the
expiration date for the user’s password. To configure no expiration
date for the password, select Never.
In the Password Aging field, select the number of days for which a
password is valid for this user. Whenever this interval is reached, the
system will require the user to change his or her password. If you
select No aging, the user will never be required to change his or her
password.
6 Click Apply to add the new user.
5.3 Deleting Users

To delete a user:
1 Select Security > Users and Groups. The Users and Groups page opens.
2 In the Users table:
i Select the checkbox next to each user that you want to delete.
ii Click the Delete selected button underneath the Users list.

5.4 Changing Your Password

To change your password:
1 Select Security > Change Password. The Change Password page opens.
2 Enter your old password in the Old password field.

3 Enter your new password in the New password field.
4 Re-enter your new password in the Reenter password field.
5 Click Change Password.

5.5 Configuring a Timeout for Inactive Users

To suspend inactive users:
page opens.
2 Configure the auto logout timeout by specifying the number of minutes
before automatically suspending an inactive user in the Communication
inactivity timeout field, located in the Security Parameters section.
3 Click Apply.

6. Configuring Software
This chapter explains how to manage IDU and RFU software, including how to
view version information, download software files, and upgrade the software.
RFU software is managed via the IDU.

 Configuring IDU Software
 Configuring RFU Software

6.1 Configuring IDU Software

New IDUs contain the basic software version (6.xx.xx.), and require a software
upgrade in order to support all system features. You must download the new
software by FTP.
When downloading software, the IDU functions as an FTP client. You must
install FTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the
software upgrade. You may use Windows FTP Server or any other FTP server
application to perform the upgrade.
Note: It is recommended to use FileZilla_Server-0_9_26 software
that can be downloaded from the web (freeware).
IP-10G/E includes a timed software installation feature that enables you to
configure a software upgrade to take place at a later time. This enables you to
perform software upgrades during periods of off-peak user traffic.
IP-10G/E software versions are released as zipped Linux RPM (Red Hat
Package Manager) files (22 files or more).
Note: IDU software versions do not include RFU software, which
much be configured separately. Refer to Configuring RFU
Software and Firmware on page 65.
This section includes the following topics:

 Viewing IDU Version Information
 Downloading IDU Software Files
 Upgrading the IDU Software Version
 Rolling Back a Software Upgrade

6.1.1 Viewing IDU Version Information

To view IDU version information:
1 Select Configuration > General > Versions > IDU. The IDU Versions
window opens.
The IDU Versions table includes the following columns:

 Package Name – Indicates the name of the software package.
 Target Device – Indicates the specific component that is contains the
version.
 Running Version– Indicates the version that is currently running on the
IDU.
 Installed Version– Displays IDU software files that were successfully
installed.
 Upgrade Package– Displays IDU software files that were successfully
downloaded to the IDU, and are ready to be installed when IDU upgrade is
executed.
 Downgrade Package– Displays IDU software files that were successfully
downloaded to the IDU, and are ready to be installed when IDU downgrade
is executed.

6.1.2 Downloading IDU Software Files

To download IDU software files:
1 Verify that your Windows firewall is disabled.
2 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Software Management. The
Software Management page opens.
3 Verify that the FTP server and remote server are properly configured.
Refer to Configuring FTP or SFTP (Secure FTP) on page 41.
4 In the New Version section, click Download to download a software
upgrade package. This may take a few minutes.
Note: If you want to install an older version of the software, click

Download in the Old Version section rather than the New
Version section of the Software Management page.
5 Download or take the zipped software package (e.g., aidu-6.9.X.X.X.X.zip)
from FTP and save it under C:\updates.
6 Extract the files to C;\updates.
7 Remove the ZIP file and store it in another location (e.g., C:\IP-10).

The Download Status field displays the status of the software download.
Options are:
Ready
In-Progress
Success
Failure
To view the software download log, click the icon next to the Download
Status field.
6.1.3 Upgrading the IDU Software Version

If you are upgrading the software in a 1+1 nodal configuration, make sure to
perform the following steps:
1 Before initiating the upgrade, connect to the active IDU in the local site.
2 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page opens.
3 Set Protection Lockout to: On.
4 Click Apply.
If you are upgrading the software in a 1+1 standalone configuration, upgrade
the standby IDU first, then upgrade the active IDU.
If you are upgrading the software in a 2+2 configuration, upgrade the I
To upgrade an IDU’s software:
2 In the Installation Type section, specify the type of installation:
Regular – The upgrade will be initiated immediately when you click
Upgrade.
Timed – The upgrade will be initiated after a defined time interval.
3 For a timed installation, specify the number of minutes in the Timed Install
section of the Software Management page. When you click Upgrade, the
upgrade will be initiated after the defined number of minutes.
4 In the New Version section, click one of the following:
In a 1+1 nodal configuration, select the standby IDU and click Upgrade
Selected to upgrade the software in the standby IDU. This may take a
few minutes. Once the upgrade is complete, the standby IDU will
automatically reboot. Then, select the active IDU and click Upgrade
Selected. Once the upgrade is complete, verify in the Configuration >
General > Versions > IDU page that the new version is installed and
running.
In a 2+0 system, click Upgrade All to upgrade the software in both
IDUs.

In a 2+2 configuration, click Upgrade All to upgrade the software in

both IDUs in the standby enclosure. Once the upgrade is complete in
both IDUs, the IDUs will automatically reboot. Then, go to the active
enclosure and click Upgrade All to upgrade both IDUs in the active
enclosure.
Note: If you are downgrading to an older software version, click
Downgrade Selected or Download All in the Old Version
section instead of Upgrade Selected or Upgrade All in the
New Version section. Software downgrade requires a
special package for downgrade. For example:
downgrade-aidu-6.9.X.X.X.X.zip.
5 For a 1+1 configuration, select Configuration > Protection > Protection
Parameters, set Protection Lockout to Off, and click Apply.
The Install Status section indicates the current download status. Options are:
Ready
In-Progress
Success
Failure
For a timed installation, the Install Status section indicates the number of
remaining minutes until the installation begins.
Note: Cancelling a timed installation operation will not abort an
installation that is already in progress.
To view the software installation log, click the icon next to the slot you want to
view in the Install Status section.

6.1.4 Rolling Back a Software Upgrade

Rolling back an installation restores the select unit or units to the previous
software version.
Note: Rolling back is not the same as a downgrade. For example,
you could rollback a downgrade operation, which in effect
upgrades the unit to the software version it was running
before the downgrade.
To rollback a software installation:
2 In the Installation Type section, specify the type of software rollback:
Regular – The rollback will be initiated immediately when you click
Upgrade.
Timed – The rollback will be initiated after a defined time interval.
3 For a timed rollback, specify the number of minutes in the Timed Install
section of the Software Management page. When you click Rollback, the
rollback will be initiated after the defined number of minutes.
4 Optionally, in a 1+1 or 2+0 system, select Slot #1 or Slot #2 in the Install
Status section to rollback the software in only one IDU in the pair.
5 Underneath the Timed Install section, click one of the following:
To rollback the software in only one unit, click Rollback Selected to
upgrade the software in the unit selected in the Install Status section.
To rollback both units in a 1+1 or 2+0 pair, click Rollback All.

6.2 Configuring RFU Software and Firmware

RFU software and firmware is configured via the IDU. You can initiate RFU
software downloads and upgrades, and view the status of these operations, in
the RFU Download page.
This section includes:

 Viewing RFU Version Information
 Updating the RFU Software Version

6.2.1 Viewing RFU Version Information

To view RFU software versions currently installed in the IDU as part of the
overall software package.
1 Select Configuration > General > Versions > RFU. The RFU page opens.
The RFU Installed Versions section of the RFU page displays the RFU software
versions currently installed in the IDU as part of the overall software package.
 Type indicates the RFU type.
 SW Version indicates the version of the installed RFU software.
 FW Version indicates the version of the installed RFU firmware.
To view the RFU type and the software version currently running on the RFU:
2 In the RFU Running Versions section:
RFU type indicates the RFU type.
Software version indicates the software version currently running on
the RFU.

To view the RFU software packages that have been successfully downloaded
to the IDU, and are ready to be installed:
2 In the RFU Upgrade & Download Versions section:
Common version rfu upgrade indicates the version of the RFU
software upgrade package.
Common version rfu downgrade indicates the version of the RFU
software downgrade package.

6.2.2 Updating the RFU Software Version

To initiate an RFU download:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> RFU Download. The RFU Download
page opens.
2 Click Software Download.

The following fields display the RFU software download status:
 RFU software download status - Displays the current state of RFU
software download.
 RFU software download progress - Displays the download progress.

7. Configuring and Viewing Basic System

Information
 Configuring and Viewing Unit System Information
 Configuring System Date and Time
 Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP) Parameters
 Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers
 Viewing System Application Files

7.1 Configuring and Viewing Unit System Information

You can view and configure system information on the Unit Parameters page:
1 Select Configuration > General > Unit Parameters. The Unit Parameters
page opens.
2 The following fields in the Unit Parameters section of the Unit Parameters
page can be modified:
System name – A name for the node (optional). By convention, this is

the node’s fully qualified domain name.
Slot label – A name for the link. By convention, this is the name and
slot label of the unit across the radio link.
Contact person - The name of the person to be contacted when a
problem with the system occurs (optional).
System location - The actual physical location of the node or agent
(optional).
Measurement system – The type of measurement you want the
system to use: Metric or Imperial.
3 The following fields in the Unit Parameters section of the Unit Parameters
page are read-only. The values in these fields are either automatically
generated or configured elsewhere.
IP address – Displays the IP address that is configured in the
Management page
System description – Provides a general description of the system.
System up time – The length of time for which the system has been
continuously operating.
Voltage input – The current input voltage.
IDU temperature – The current temperature of the IDU.
RFU temperature – The current temperature of the RFU.

7.2 Configuring System Date and Time

By default, the system date and time are derived from the operating system
clock. You can set new date and time values in the Unit Parameters page.
page opens.
2 You can set the following parameters in the Date & Time Configuration
section:
Click the calendar to set the date.

Click the time area to set the time.
Specify the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) in the Offset from
GMT section.
To configure Daylight Saving Time:
page opens.
2 In the Daylight Saving Time section:
In the Start date field, click the calendar to set the date when daylight
saving time will automatically be activated.
In the End date field, click the calendar to set the date when daylight
saving time will automatically be terminated.
In the Offset field, specify the offset (in hours) from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).

7.3 Configuring Network Timing Protocol (NTP)

Parameters
You can view and set Network Timing Protocol (NTP) parameters in the NTP
Server Parameters window.
1 Select Configuration > General > NTP. The NTP Server Parameters page
opens.
2 In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the NTP
server.
3 In the Server IP field, enter the IP address of the NTP server.
The following fields are read-only:
 Status – Indicates whether the NTP server is Up or Down.
 Sync server – Displays details about the NTP server with which the
system is currently synchronized. The following values may appear:
IP address of the remote NTP server
Local, if locked to the local element’s real-time clock
NA, when Admin is set to Disable and not synchronized with any
clock.
 Poll interval – The interval used by the NTP client to maintain
synchronization with the current NTP server.

7.4 Configuring Unit Serial and Part Numbers

When you perform license upgrades and certain other operations, you will
need to supply the unit’s serial number.
To view IDU serial and part numbers:
page opens.
2 In the IDU Serial/Part Numbers section:
Serial number - The IDU’s serial number.

Part number - The IDU’s part number.
To view RFU serial and part numbers:
page opens.
2 In the RFU Serial/Part Numbers section:
Serial number - The RFU’s serial number.

Part number - The RFU’s part number.

7.5 Viewing System Application Files

The File List page displays all application-related files on the disk.
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> File List. The File List page opens.

8. Configuring Feature and Capacity Licenses

New IDUs are delivered with a basic license:
 License: Basic - capacity 10Mbps, no ACM, Smart Pipe (only GbE ports,
ports #1 or #2)
Feature and capacity upgrades are implemented through manual entry of a
license key based on the IDU's serial number. Contact Ceragon in order to
obtain your license key.

 Viewing Current License Details
 Replacing a License
 Working with a Demo License
 Viewing Licensed Usage and Features

8.1 Viewing Current License Details

The Licensing page displays details about the current IDU’s license status. To
view the IDU’s current license:
1 Select Configuration > General > Licensing. The Licensing page opens.
The License type field in the Current License section displays the current
license type.

8.2 Loading a New License Key

A new license key must be obtained from your Ceragon representative. Once
you receive a new license key, you must load the new license key into the IDU:
page opens.
2 Verify that the three left characters of the license key match the three right
characters of the IDU Serial Number, displayed near the bottom of the Unit
Parameters page.
Note: You may have to scroll down the Unit Parameters page to
display the IDU Serial Number.

4 Enter the license key in the License code field.

5 Click Apply.
6 Perform a cold reset of the IDU. The new license will take be activated only
after a cold reset.
8 Verify that the license parameters were updated.
Note: If the license key itself is not legal (e.g., a typing mistake or
an invalid serial number), a License Violation alarm is raised
specific to the problem with the license. In the event of a
License Violation alarm, radio port capacity is automatically
limited to ~3Mbps, allowing only management channels to
the remote end. In order to clear the alarm, you must
configure the system to comply with the loaded license, then
issue a cold-reset. When the system returns online, it checks
the legality of the configuration against the license limits. If
no violation is detected, no alarm is raised, and the radio is
fully operational.

 Resetting the Unit

8.3 Replacing a License

This feature requires:
 Software version I6.9 or higher
If an operator needs to change its level of feature support or capacity, a new
license key can be issued to support the new level of feature support and
capacity. Once the license is entered into the IP-10G, a validation key is issued
confirming the license change in the event that the operator is entitled to a
refund. Once the new license key is entered, any previously used license keys
become invalid and can no longer be used.
The IP-10G/E licensing mechanism provides license keys per IDU serial
number. You cannot use the same license key on a different IDU. However, in
some cases, it may be necessary to downgrade the IDU’s capabilities and
obtain a refund for the difference between the supported features and
capabilities on the old and the new license.
To replace the IDU license and obtain a refund:
1 In the LMS server, select the IDU and the license set for which you want to
obtain credits. The LMS generates a new license for the specified IDU. The
new generated license key is of a new type (30 characters long, as opposed
to 17 characters long).
2 Load the new license key to the IDU and reset the IDU, as described in
Loading a New License Key on page 77.
3 After loading the new license, the IDU generates a Validation Number.
4 Provide the Validation Number to your Ceragon representative, or load the

Validation Number into the LMS server. Your available credits will be
updated. You can use refunded credits to generate licenses for other IDUs.
Note: For instructions on using the LMS server, refer to FibeAir IP-
10 License Management System, DOC-00019183.

The license replacement feature is subject to the following limitations:

 The new license key is a new type of license key that consists of 30
characters. The old license key is only 17 characters long.
 The new license key can only be loaded on an IDU running software
version I6.9 or later. Earlier software releases will not accept the 30
characters license key, and license replacement will therefore not be
possible. If the IDU is running earlier software release, you must upgrade
the IDU software to I6.9 or higher before performing the license
replacement procedure.
 License replacement does not have any impact on the IDU’s functionality
unless the license is violated.
 An IDU will not accept old type (17 characters) license keys after a new
(30 characters) license key has been loaded.
 The license replacement and refunding procedure may be performed
several times on the same IDU. Each time, a new 30 character license key is
generated by the LMS.
 An IDU will not accept a 30 character license key that was generated
before the license key currently installed on the IDU.

8.4 Working with a Demo License

You can use a Demo license for 60 days for full capacity and a full feature-set.
To enable or disable the demo license:
2 In the Demo admin field, in the Demo License section, select Enable to
enable the Demo license, or Disable to disable the Demo license.
Demo timer is a read-only field that displays the time remaining for use of the
Demo license.

8.5 Viewing Licensed Usage and Features

The License Features section of the Licensing page indicates which features
are licensed for use according to the currently-installed license key.
The following fields appear in the License Features section of the Licensing
page:
 ACM license – Indicates whether Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM) is
installed.
 Switch application license – Displays the type of Ethernet Switching
application licensed for the IDU (Single Pipe or Switch).
 Capacity – Displays the maximum licensed radio capacity.
 Network resiliency license –Indicates whether the resiliency
(RSTP/SNCP) feature is available.
 TDM-only capacity license –Indicates whether the TDM capacity license
is installed. This license limits the amount of TDM trails that can be
mapped to a radio. If this license is installed, any radio script can be loaded
but the number of TDM trails is limited.
Note: This license is not relevant for the IP-10E.
 TDM-only capacity value – Indicates the amount of TDM trail capacity
corresponding to the TDM capacity license.
Note: This field is not relevant for the IP-10E.
 Synchronization Unit License – Indicates whether or not the
Synchronization Unit License (Synchronous Ethernet output) is installed.

 Enhanced Traffic Manager License – Indicates whether the Enhanced

Traffic Manager license is installed. This license enables you to use the
Enhanced Quality of Service (QoS) feature.
 Asymmetrical scripts license – Indicates whether the IDU is licensed to
use asymmetric scripts.
 Enhanced compression license – Indicates whether the IDU is licensed to
use enhanced multi-layer Ethernet header compression.
 Per usage license – Indicates whether the per usage license is installed. A
per usage license allows unlimited usage of all features in the system.
Feature and capacity usage is tracked by the system, and a report can be
generated for billing purposes.
Note: The usage report must be generated using PolyView,
Ceragon’s Network Management System (NMS).

9. Configuring Unit Management

 Management Overview
 Configuring Out-of-Band Management
 Configuring In-Band Management

9.1 Management Overview

An IP-10G/E system can be configured to use between 0 and 3 Ethernet
management ports. The default number of ports is 2. Ethernet ports 5, 6, and 7
are the only ports that can be assigned to be management ports:
Configured Number of Management Ports Management Interfaces

1 Ethernet 7
2 (default) Ethernet 7, Ethernet 6
3 Ethernet 7, Ethernet 6, Ethernet 5
0 None
Management ports are connected to the switch (bridge) and are configured to
Learning mode.
Note: Management ports can be configured to have one of the
following capacities: 64kbps, 128kbps, 256kbps, 512kbps,
1024kbps, 2048kbps (default). Capacity is limited by the
port ingress rate limit.
In a nodal configuration, all management is carried out through the main unit,
which communicates with the extension units via the nodal backplane.
Therefore, management traffic must reach the main unit in order for
management to be available.
A local craft terminal can be used to configure each IDU individually using CLI.
However, with the exception of the main unit, functionality is limited to local
configurations. Access to all other units is provided via the main unit’s CLI. For
remote channels (e.g., CeraWeb, PolyView, and Telnet) this requires IP traffic
to be directed to the main unit.
The IP address of the node is the address of the main unit in the node. In a 1+1
configuration, the node will have two IP addresses (the addresses of each of
the main units) and should be managed via the Active unit.

9.2 Configuring the Management Ports

opens. Management ports are configured in the Management Ports section,
towards the bottom of the Management page.
2 In the bottom of the Management page, click Refresh. The current
parameters are displayed.
3 In the Number of ports field, specify the number of ports that are used for
management data. The IDU has three ports for local management: Port 7,
Port 6 and Port 5. You may enable none or up to 3 ports.
4 When you are using In-band management, in the In-band Management
VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN ID that is used to identify management
traffic.
5 In the Type drop-down menu, select the management mode of operation:
In band or Out of band.
In-band management refers to a method in which the network
management software sends management packets through the same
network it is managing. Out-of-band management uses an overlay
network to communicate with the managed elements.
Out-of-band management uses the Wayside Channel (WSC) for
management access to the IDUs in the network. An external switch
using some form of STP should be used to obtain resilient management
access and resolve management loops.
6 In the Capacity drop-down menu, select the bandwidth that is allocated to
the management port(s).
7 In the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 On - Enables this feature.
 Off - Disables this feature.
8 In the Rate drop-down menu, select the bit rate you want for the
management port(s).
9 In the Duplex drop-down menu, select Half or Full.

10 Specify whether to block management frames towards the line interface by

selecting Enable or Disable from the Block management frames drop
down list.
Note: This option applies only if the Ethernet application type is
configured as Smart Pipe.
11 Click Apply. The parameters for the management port(s) are configured.

 Configuring Out-of-Band Management
 Configuring In-Band Management
 Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode
 Configuring the Wayside Channel

9.3 Configuring Out-of-Band Management

With Out-of-Band management, the remote system is managed using the
wayside channel. On both local and remote units, the wayside channel must be
connected to a management port using an Ethernet cross-cable. The Wayside
channel can be configured to Narrow capacity (~64kbps) or Wide capacity
(~2Mbps). It is recommended to use Wide capacity in order to achieve better
management performance.


9.4 Configuring In-Band Management

With In-Band management, the remote IDU is managed by specific frames that
are sent as part of the traffic. These frames are identified as management
frames by a special VLAN ID configured by the user. This VLAN ID must be
used ONLY for management. It is NOT possible to configure more than a single
VLAN ID for management.
Important: It is highly recommended to classify the management VLAN
ID to the highest queue, in order to ensure the ability to
manage remote units even under congestion scenarios.
The local unit is the gateway for In-Band management. The remote unit is
managed via its traffic ports (the radio port, for example), so that no
management ports are needed.

 Configuring In-Band Management in a 1+1 Link
 In-Band Management in Nodal Configurations
 GbE In-Band Management in a Node
 In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode


9.4.1 Configuring In-Band Management in a 1+1 Link

It is important to follow these instructions carefully in order to avoid
management loss to the remote unit. It is mandatory to configure the same
management VLAN ID in all units that are part of the same management
domain.
In order to configure a protected link to In-Band management, or to change
the management VLAN ID, the following steps must be performed, in order:
1 Configure the following units’ management VLAN ID in their order of
appearance (even if the unit is still configured to Out-of-Band
management):
Remote Standby
Remote Active
Local Standby
Local Active
Note: For instructions on how to configure the VLAN ID, refer to
Configuring the Management Ports on page 86.
2 If Metro Switch is used, the Ethertype of the bridge should first be
configured on the remote side of the link, then on the local side.
3 Configure all the units listed above to In-Band management. Again, this
configuration should be made to the units in the order they are listed
above.

1+1 In-Band Management (Cable Splitter)
1+1 In-Band Management (Patch Panel)
Note: It is possible to use fewer than three patch-panels (as

depicted above), according to the number of FE interfaces
required to be split (traffic, management, WSC), assuming
the IDUs are co-located. When a patch panel is used, straight
and short (<0.5m) Ethernet cables should be connected
between the IDUs and the panel (these cables are provided
by Ceragon). Straight Ethernet cables should be connected
from the IDU to the patch-panel.

9.4.2 In-Band Management in Nodal Configurations

In a nodal configuration, it is necessary to transport management traffic to the
main unit by using external Ethernet cables.
The following figures show a few examples of relevant topologies and how to
connect the cables in each topology.
3:1 (Aggregation 3 to 1)
In-Band management in non-protected node
3:1 (Aggregation 3 to 1) with Protection

In-Band management in node with protected main units

9.4.3 GbE In-Band Management in a Node

In nodal configurations, the Ethernet bandwidth available between extension
units and main units is limited by the Fast Ethernet interfaces to 100Mbps.
In order to achieve resiliency and have a configuration ready for higher
bandwidth traffic, it is possible to set up the node in a ring configuration, using
optical SFP connections between the IDUs as shown in the following figure.

9.4.4 In-Band Management Isolation in Smart Pipe Mode

This feature is required by “carrier of carriers” customers that provide
Ethernet leased lines to third party users. The third party user connects its
equipment to the Ethernet interface of the IP-10, while all the other network
interfaces, particularly the radios, are managed by the “carrier of carriers”
user. In that case, management frames that are sent throughout the network
to manage the “carrier of carrier” equipment must not egress the line
interfaces that are used by the third party customer, since these frames will, in
effect, spam the third party user network.
The following figure describes the management blocking scenario.
Carrier of carriers network

3rd Party User (Provider Network)
3rd Party User
Network IP-10 IP-10
Mng
Network
Mng
Frames Frames
Block provider’s
Block provider’s
management Frames
management Frames
Provider Network
Management Center
In switch modes, it is very easy to achieve the required functionality by a

simple VLAN exclude configuration on the relevant ports. However, in Smart
Pipe mode, VLANs cannot be used to block traffic, since the line and radio
interfaces are transparent by definition to all VLANs. Thus, this management
blocking capacity is a special feature for Smart Pipe applications that blocks
management frames from egressing the line interface.
This feature is relevant only to Smart Pipe applications. It is also relevant only
to standalone units or the main unit in a nodal configuration. There is no
purpose in blocking the In-Band management VLAN in extension units, since
the management VLAN can be blocked in the Ethernet switch port.
Management isolation and blocking behavior is controlled by the block-
management-towards-line CLI parameter. The default is disable. To enable this
feature, enter:
block-management-towards-line enable
You can also set this parameter in the Management page of the Web EMS. For
instructions, refer to Configuring the Management Ports on page 86.

10. Configuring Traffic Interfaces

 Configuring Ethernet Ports
 Assigning VLANs to a Port
 Configuring LAGs
 Configuring Peer Port Settings
 Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces
 Configuring STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces
 Configuring Pseudowire

10.1 Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode

FibeAir IP-10G/E supports Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch
configurations. Smart Pipe is the default configuration, and does not require a
separate license. Configuring the system to Managed or Metro Switch requires
a separate license.

 Switch Configurations Overview
 Configuring Smart Pipe Switch Mode
 Configuring Managed and Metro Switch

10.1.1 Switch Configurations Overview

Single (Smart) Pipe allows only a single GbE interface for traffic (optical GbE-
SFP or Electrical GBE, 10/100/1000 mbps). Traffic originating from any GbE
interface is sent directly to the radio and vice versa. The Smart Pipe method
enables you to use QoS configurations. The Fast Ethernet interfaces (10/100
mbps) interfaces are "functional" interfaces (WSC, Protection, Management).
Managed Switch is a 802.1Q VLAN-aware bridge, allowing L2 switching based
on VLANs. Each traffic port can be configured as an "access" port or a "trunk"
port. A port can also be configured as a “hybrid” port that allows both tagged
and untagged frames.
Managed Switch Mode
Type VLANs Allowed Ingress Frames Allowed Egress Frames

Access A default VLAN should be Only Untagged frames (or Tagged Untagged frames.
attached to access port. with VID=0 – "Priority Tagged").
Trunk A range of VLANs, or "all" Only Tagged frames. Tagged frames.
VLANs should be attached to
trunk port
Hybrid A range of VLANs, or all VLANs Tagged and untagged frames. Tagged and untagged
should be attached to trunk frames.
port.
A default VLAN should be
attached to access port.
The Managed Switch method allows QoS configuration, and all Ethernet ports
are allowed for traffic.

The following table lists VLANs that are reserved for internal use in Managed
Switch mode.
VLANs Reserved for Internal Use in Managed Switch Mode
VLAN Description Remark

0 Frames with VLAN=0 are considered untagged. This -
VLAN is used in order to prioritize untagged traffic
1 Default VLAN. This VLAN is always defined in the -
database, and all trunk ports are members of this
VLAN. VLAN 1 cannot be deleted from the database
and not from Trunk port membership.
4091 Cannot be used for in-band management. Traffic -
frames carrying this VLAN are not allowed in Smart
Pipe mode.
4092 Internal VLANs. Used for protection internal
Smart Pipe: Frames carrying these VLANs are not communication.
4093 allowed. Used for Wayside.
Managed Switch: "Access" traffic ports cannot be
4094 Used for internal management.
associated with any of these default VLANs.
4095 - Not defined.
Metro Switch is an 802.1ad Provider Bridge, allowing Q-in-Q switching

capabilities. Each traffic port can be assigned as a "Customer Network" port or
a "Provider Network" port. The port attributes are listed in the following
table:
Allowed Egress
Type VLANs Allowed Ingress Frames
Frames
Specific S-VLAN should be
Customer Untagged frames or tagged (C- Untagged frames of
associated with the
Network tag) frames tagged (C-tag) frames
customer network port
A range of S-VLANs or all Only S-tagged frames, (in S-tagged frames,
Provider S-VLANs should be accordance with the configured carrying the configured
Network associated with the "provider ether-type", which is provider ether-type,
provider network port 0x88a8 by default) (0x88a8 by default)
Note: S-Tag Ether type can be configured to one of the following

values: 0x88a8 (default), 0x8100, 0x9100, or 0x9200.

10.1.2 Configuring Smart Pipe Switch Mode

This section explains how to configure the Ethernet switch to Smart Pipe
mode. When you are using the Smart Pipe mode, Ethernet switching is
disabled, and only a single Ethernet interface is used for traffic. The IDU
operates as a point-to-point microwave Ethernet radio.
To configure the Ethernet switch to Smart Pipe:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Switch Configuration. The
Switch Configuration page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet switch configuration opens.
3 In the Ethernet Application Type section, select Single pipe.

4 Click Apply. The IDU is configured to Smart Pipe mode.

10.1.3 Configuring Managed and Metro Switch Mode

 L2 Switch license
To configure the Ethernet switch to Managed Switch or Metro Switch:
1 select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Switch Configuration. The
Switch Configuration window opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet switch configuration opens.
3 In the Ethernet Application Type section, select one of the following
options:
 Managed switch - Ethernet switching is enabled and all the ports are
used for traffic.
 Metro switch - Ethernet switching is enabled and all the ports are
used for traffic. You must select this option to use Ethernet Q-in-Q
provider switch.
4 Click Apply. The Managed or Metro switch is enabled.
Note: Depending on the current configuration, the Apply button
may be located in LAG load balancing section.
5 From the bottom of the Switch Configuration window, click Refresh. The
current Switch Configuration parameters are displayed.

6 Configure the LAG load balancing setting.

i In the LAG load balancing section, select one of the following load
balancing options:
Simple XOR - Performs XOR on the last three bits of the Packet
Source MAC address (SA) and the Destination MAC address (DA).
Depending on the XOR result, the system selects the link to be used
in the LAG.
The HASH mechanism distributes flows across multiple egress
ports in a LAG. It uses a proprietary scrambling function, and uses
the last three bits (LSBs) of the DA, SA. This means that two flows
with the same three LSB bits, but different MSB bits, still egress on
the same port.
ii In the LAG load balancing section, click Apply. The LAG load balancing
options are configured.
7 In the bottom of the Switch Configuration window, click Refresh. The
current VLAN ID parameters are displayed beneath the Unit Allowed VIDs
section.
8 The following list explains the columns are in the Units allowed VIDs
section:
 VLAN ID - Specific ID for this VLAN.
 Name - Configured name for the VLAN.
 Status - Indicates whether this VLAN is Active or Passive.
 Member Ports - Lists which IDU ports allow this VLAN.
9 Configure the VLAN IDs for the switch.
i From the Operation drop-down menu, select the VLAN operation you
want to perform for the switch:
Set - Add VLANs to the database.
Remove - Remove VLANs from the database.
Change name - Change the name of a configured VLAN.
Disable - Suspend usage of a configured VLAN.
Enable - Activate a configured VLAN.
ii In the Start VID and End VID fields, enter the VLAN start and end IDs.
iii In the Name field, specify a unique name for the VLAN.
10 Click Apply. The VLANs for the switch are defined.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 as necessary and click Refresh. The parameters of
the defined VLANs are displayed beneath the Unit Allowed VIDs section.


 Configuring Feature and Capacity Licenses

10.2 Configuring Ethernet Ports

Related topics:
IP-10G/E supports two dual GbE interfaces. For each of these interfaces, you
can configure the desired interface: Electrical GbE (10/100/1000) interface or
Optical GbE (SFP) interface. You cannot use SFP with electrical stack. SFP
supports only optical stack.
In Smart Pipe mode, only a single Ethernet interface can be used. The options
are:
 Eth1: Electrical GbE or Optical GbE.
 Eth3: Electrical FE
In Managed Switch and Metro Switch modes, there are no interface
limitations. This means that any GbE and/or FE ports can be used.
It is possible to use an electrical interface at one end of the link, and an optical
interface at the other end. In order to change interfaces, it is essential to
disable the active interface first, and then to enable the other interface.
Port configuration differs somewhat depending on which switching mode
your system is using. The following sections explain how to configure a Smart
Pipe port and a Metro Switch or Managed Switch port, respectively.
10.2.1 Configuring a Single Pipe Port

1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Ethernet Ports. The Ethernet Ports
page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet Ports parameters are displayed.
Ethernet Ports Page

3 Click next to the port you want to configure. The Ethernet port settings
are displayed.
4 From the Port admin drop-down menu, select Enable to activate the port.
5 From the Connector type drop-down menu, select RJ 45 or Optical
connector type.
Note: This field is only relevant for the two GbE ports, Eth1 and
Eth2. All the other Ethernet ports are RJ-45 ports only.
6 From the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 Enable - The system controls the flow of data.
 Disable - Deactivates the Auto negotiation feature.
7 From the Port learning drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 Enable
 Disable
8 From the Flow control drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 On
 Off
9 From the Port service type drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 Service network point
 Access port
Note: The Port service type is configured for the PolyView NMS
Ethernet services.
10 Click Apply. The Smart Pipe Ethernet port settings are configured.

10.2.2 Configuring a Managed Switch or Metro Switch Port

To configure the settings for an Ethernet port in Managed Switch or Metro
Switch mode:
page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current Ethernet Ports parameters are displayed.
3 Expand the Ethernet port. The port settings are displayed.
4 From the Port admin drop-down menu, select Enable to activate the port.
5 From the Connector type drop-down menu, select RJ 45 or Optical
connector type.
Note: This field is only relevant for the two GbE ports, Eth1 and
Eth2. All the other Ethernet ports are RJ-45 ports only.
6 From the Type drop-down menu select the option that is appropriate to
your configuration.
i Managed Switch ports can be can be one of the following types:
Access
Trunk
Hybrid
ii Metro Switch ports can be one of the following types:
Customer Network
Provider Network
7 In the Default VLAN ID field, enter the default VLAN ID for tagged frames
on this port.
options:
 Enable - The system controls the flow of data.
 Disable - Deactivates the Auto negotiation feature.
9 From the Port learning drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 Enable
 Disable

10 From the Flow control drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 On
 Off
From the Port service type drop-down menu, select one of the following
options:
 Service network point
 Access port
Note: The Port service type is configured for the PolyView NMS
Ethernet services.
11 Click Apply. The port settings are configured.

10.3 Assigning VLANs to a Port

To assign VLAN IDs to a port:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Switch Configuration. The
Switch Configuration page opens.
2 In the Unit allowed VIDs section of the Switch Configuration page, select a
VLAN.
3 Select one of the following options in the Operation field:

Set - Adds the VLANs to the database.
Remove - Removes the VLANs from the database.
Change name - Changes the VLAN name.
Disable - Suspends usage of the selected VLAN.
Enable - Activates the selected VLAN.
4 In the Start VID and End VID fields, enter the VLAN start and end IDs.
5 In the Name field, enter a unique name for the VLAN.
6 Click Apply to save your VLAN definitions.
The defined VLANs are summarized at the bottom of the window.
 VLAN ID – Displays the specific ID for this VLAN.
 Name – Displays the configured name for the VLAN.
 Status – Indicates whether the VLAN is Active or Passive.
 Member Ports - Lists which IDU ports allow this VLAN.

10.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation

Automatic state propagation enables propagation of radio failures back to the
line, to improve recovery performance. The feature enables the user to
configure which criteria will force the GbE port (or ports in case of “remote
fault”) to be muted/shut down, to allow the network find alternative paths.
In Smart Pipe mode, upon radio failure, Eth1 is muted when configured as
optical or shutdown when configured as electrical.
In Managed Switch or Metro Switch mode, the switch’s Radio port (Eth8) is
forced to be disabled. Eth8 cannot be muted, but only disabled in both
directions.
In 2+0 Multi-Radio mode, Automatic State Propagation can be triggered upon
a failure in a single IDU or upon a failure in both IDUs.
It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same Automatic
State Propagation configuration.
If the link uses in-band management, when the port is muted or shut down,
management distributed through the link might be lost. If this occurs, the unit
will not be manageable. The unit will only become manageable again when the
port is un-muted or enabled.
To configure automatic state propagation for an Ethernet port:
page opens.
2 In the Automatic State Propagation field underneath the ports table,
select Enable or Disable to enable or disable Automatic State Propagation.
3 In the Fault criteria section of the Ethernet Ports page:

i In the Ethernet shutdown Rx profile threshold field, select a profile.
Ethernet shuts down when radio performance degrades below the
specified profile.
Note: This option is only enabled if ACM adaptive mode is active.
ii In the Local Excessive BER field, select Enable or Disable to
determine whether local excessive BER is propagated as a fault.

iii In the Local LOC field, select Enable or Disable to determine whether a
Loss of Carrier alarms is propagated as a fault.
Note: This is only relevant for optical GbE interfaces in Smart Pipe
mode.
4 In the Remote Fault field, select Enable or Disable to enable these settings
for the remote interface.
5 Click Apply.
When Automatic State Propagation is enabled:
 Local LOF will always be set to Enable, which means that Radio Loss of
Frame (LOF) faults are always propagated.
 Link ID Mismatch will always be set to Enable, which means that Radio
Link ID Mismatch faults are always propagated.
The following table describes interface behavior based on the Automatic State
Propagation configuration
User Configuration Optical (SFP) GbE port Electrical GbE port Radio Port functionality
Functionality - Smart Pipe Mode (10/100/1000) Functionality – Managed/Metro Switch
- Smart Pipe Mode Mode
”Automatic State Propagation” No mute is issued. No shutdown.
disabled.
Local LOF, Link-ID mismatch Mute the LOCAL port when one or Shut down the LOCAL port when one or more of the following
(always enabled) more of the following events occurs: events occurs:
1. Radio-LOF on the LOCAL unit. 1. Radio-LOF on the LOCAL unit.
2. Link ID mismatch on the LOCAL 2. Link ID mismatch on the LOCAL unit.
unit.
Ethernet shutdown threshold Mute the LOCAL port when ACM Rx Shut down the LOCAL port when ACM Rx profile degrades
profile. profile degrades below a pre- below a pre-configured profile on the LOCAL unit.
configured profile on the LOCAL unit This capability is applicable only when ACM is enabled.
Local Excessive BER Mute the LOCAL port when an Shut down the LOCAL port when an Excessive BER alarm is
Excessive BER alarm is raised on the raised on the LOCAL unit
LOCAL unit
Local LOC Mute the LOCAL port when a GbE- No shutdown. N/A
LOC alarm is raised on the LOCAL Note1: Electrical-GbE cannot be
unit. muted. Electrical-GbE LOC will
not trigger Shutdown, because it
will not be possible to enable the
port when the LOC alarm is
cleared

User Configuration Optical (SFP) GbE port Electrical GbE port Radio Port functionality
Functionality - Smart Pipe Mode (10/100/1000) Functionality – Managed/Metro Switch
- Smart Pipe Mode Mode
Remote Fault Mute the LOCAL port when one or Shut down the LOCAL port, Shut down the LOCAL port,
more of the following events is raised when one or more of the when one or more of the
on the REMOTE unit: following events is raised on the following events is raised on
1. Radio-LOF (on remote). REMOTE unit: the REMOTE unit:
2. Link-ID mismatch (on remote). 1. Radio-LOF (on remote). 1. Radio-LOF (on remote).
3. GbE-LOC alarm is raised (on 2. Link-ID mismatch (on remote). 2. Link-ID mismatch (on
remote). 3. ACM Rx profile crossing remote).
4. ACM Rx profile crossing threshold threshold (on remote), only if 3. ACM Rx profile crossing
(on remote), only if enabled on the enabled on the LOCAL. threshold (on remote), only
LOCAL. 4. „Excessive BER‟ (on remote), if enabled on the LOCAL.
5. „Excessive BER‟ (on remote), only only if enabled on the LOCAL. 4. „Excessive BER‟ (on
if enabled on the LOCAL. Note1: Electrical-GbE cannot be remote), only if enabled on
muted. Electrical-GbE LOC will the LOCAL.
not trigger "Shut-down", because
it will not be possible to enable
the port when LOC alarm is
cleared

10.5 Configuring LAGs

 LAG Overview
 Creating a LAG
 Configuring a LAG
 Removing Ports from a LAG
 Configuring LAG Load Balancing
Related topics:
 Configuring Multi-Unit LAG

10.5.1 LAG Overview

Link aggregation enables you to group several ports into a single logical
channel bound to a single MAC address. Traffic sent to the ports in such a
group is distributed through a load balancing function. The group is called a
LAG.
LAGs are virtual ports that do not permanently exist in the system. A LAG is a
logical port with its own MAC address that differs from that of the component
ports. A LAG is created as soon as the first physical port is added to the LAG.
LAGs may include ports with the following constraints:
 Only traffic ports (including the radio port), not functional ports (e.g.,
management and WSC), can belong to a LAG.
 LAG can only be used in IDUs which are configured for Managed Switch or
Metro Switch.
 All ports in a LAG must be in the same IDU (same switch)
 There can be up to three LAGs per IDU.
 A LAG can contain from 1 to 5 physical ports
 GbE ports (1 and 2) and FE ports (3-7) cannot be in the same LAG, even if
the GbE ports are configured as 100Mbps.
 For GbE LAGs, both interfaces must be of the same type (electrical or
optical).
 The Radio port (Eth8) can only be in a LAG with GbE ports. The GbE ports
can be either electrical or optical.
 The ports in a LAG must have the same configuration.
 All ports in a LAG group must have the same data rate (10, 100, or 1000
Mbps).
When a LAG is created by adding a first port to it, the LAG automatically
inherits all the port’s characteristics, except for the following:
 xSTP role (edge, non-edge)
 Path cost
All Ethernet port parameters can be configured in a LAG. These parameters
are inherited by the LAG’s physical component ports, and are unavailable for
physical ports belonging to the LAG, with the following exceptions:
 Admin
 Flow control
 Ingress rate limiting policer name
 Shaper (egress rate limiting)
 Peer port parameters
MAC address
IP address
Slot ID
Port number
Description

The following settings must be identical between a LAG and the ports being
added to it. If they are not identical, the port’s inclusion in the LAG will be
blocked:
 QoS configuration
Port MAC DA QoS classification
Port VID QoS classification
Port initial QOS classification
Port default QoS classification
Port VLAN PBITs priority remap
Egress scheduling scheme
 Data rate
 Type (access/trunk or cn/pn)
 Interface (electrical/optical)
 Duplex
 Auto-negotiation
 VLANs
VLAN list must be identical
“allow all” is considered a different value (must be equal in all ports)
 Learning state
In addition, ports with CFM MEP/MIPs cannot be added to a LAG (which may
have its own MEP/MIPs).

10.5.2 Creating a LAG

To define a LAG:
page opens.
2 Click the Create LAG port button underneath the ports table. The Create
new LAG port window opens.
3 In the representation of the IDU in the Create new LAG port window, select
the ports to include in the LAG. Selected ports are highlighted.
Note: Ports that do not meet the criteria described in LAG
Overview cannot be selected.
4 In the LAG port to create field, select a name for the LAG. Options are
“LAG #1, #2, #3”, since there can be up to three LAGs in the system.
5 Click Apply.

10.5.3 Configuring a LAG

To define the LAG configuration:
page opens.
2 Click + in the left column next to the LAG to display the LAG’s configuration
options.
3 In the Port admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the
LAG.
4 In the Type field, select the port type. Options depend on the Ethernet
switching mode:
Managed Switch – Options are Access, Trunk, or Hybrid.
Metro Switch – Options are Customer Network or Provider Network.
5 In the Auto Negotiation field, select On if you want the system to control
the flow of data.
6 In the Ethernet rate field, select the Ethernet rate for the LAG.
7 In the Port learning field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable
port learning.
8 In the Port service type field, select Service network point or Service
access point.

9 Click the Allowed VIDs link below the port configuration options to assign
VIDs to the LAG. The Ethernet Allowed VIDs window opens.
i Select one of the following options in the Operation field:

Set - Adds the VLANs to the database.
Remove - Removes the VLANs from the database.
Change name - Changes the VLAN name.
Disable - Suspends usage of the selected VLAN.
Enable - Activates the selected VLAN.
ii In the Start VID and End VID fields, enter the VLAN start and end IDs.
iii Click Apply to save your VLAN definitions. The Ethernet-allowed VIDs
table displays the allowed VLANs for each LAG.
10 Click Apply to save the LAG settings.

10.5.4 Removing Ports from a LAG

Ports removed from a LAG will keep the existing port parameters, but will be
initially disabled in order to prevent loops.
In addition, when the last port is removed from a LAG, the LAG will be deleted.
Therefore it is necessary to remove all MEP/MIPs from a LAG before removing
the last port.
To remove ports from a LAG:
page opens.
2 Click + in the left column next to the LAG to display the LAG’s configuration
options.
3 Click the Add or Remove ports from LAG port link below the port
configuration options.

10.5.5 Configuring LAG Load Balancing

To configure the LAG load balancing method:
page opens.
2 In the LAG load balancing section of the Ethernet Ports page, select
Simple XOR for demos or lab test or HASH for real traffic:
Simple XOR performs XOR on the last three bits of the packet source
MAC address (SA) and the destination MAC address (DA), and
according to the result, selects the link to be used in the LAG.
The HASH mechanism distributes flows across multiple egress ports in
a LAG. It uses a proprietary scrambling function, and uses the last three
bits (LSBs) of the DA, SA. This means that two flows with the same
three LSB bits, but different MSB bits, will still go to the same port.
Thus, the HASH will simply distribute more evenly.

10.6 Configuring Peer Port Settings

The IP table page enables you to configure the characteristics of the peer port,
to which the local port of the element is connected.
Each IDU port has its own IP table, which enables the configuration of the
characteristics of the peer port to which it is connected.
To configure peer port settings:
1 Select Configuration > General > IP Table. The IP Table page opens.
2 Click + to the left of the port to open the port’s IP table

3 In the Peer MAC address field, enter the MAC address of the peer port.
4 In the Peer IP address field, enter the IP address of the peer port.
5 In the Peer slot ID field, enter the slot ID of the IDU in which the peer port
is located. The slot can be from 0 to 6, where 0 is used when the other side
is a standalone unit, and 1-6 are used for the other side’s nodal enclosure
slot IDs.
6 In the Peer port number field, enter the peer port number.
7 Optionally, in the Peer description field, add a general description of the
peer port.
8 From the LLDP admin drop down list, select the LLDP protocol for the
port. Options are:
Enable transmit only – LLDP agent will transmit LLDP frames on this
port and it will not update information about the remote systems.
Enable receive only – LLDP agent will receive, but it will not transmit
LLDP frames on this port.
Enable receive and transmit – LLDP agent will transmit and receive
LLDP frames on this port.
Disable (default) –LLDP agent will not transmit or receive LLDP
frames on this port.
9 Click Apply to save your configuration settings.

10.7 Configuring E1/DS1 Interfaces

Note: This section is not relevant for the IP-10E.
IP-10G contains an MDR69 connector in which 16 E1/DS1 ports are available
(ports 1 through 16).
Above the MDR69 connector is an add-on slot which can contain a field-
upgradable T-Card with either 16 additional E1/DS1 ports, an STM-1/OC-3
port, or 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire processing. The T-Cards are field-upgradable.
The T-Card is not a standalone entity within the IP-10G. When inserted in the
system, the new interfaces become integral interfaces of the IP-10G and
E1/DS1 ports 17-32 will be added to the existing 1-16.
To configure E1/DS1 ports:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > E1 ports or Configuration >
Interfaces > DS1 ports. The E1 Ports or DS1 Ports page opens.
2 In the Excessive BER threshold field, select the level above which an
excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link
3 In the Signal degrade threshold field, select the level above which a
Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the link.
4 Click Apply.

The following information opens about the E1/DS1 ports in the E1 Ports and
DS1 Ports pages:
 The Line Coding 1-8 and Line Coding 9-16 fields display the T1 line
coding, which can be B8ZS or AMI.
 In the E1 or DS1 Ports table:
Enabled – Indicates whether the port is enabled.
Interface – Indicates the port number.
Priority – Indicates the port priority.
Current BER – Indicates the current BER level.

10.8 Configuring STM-1/OC-3 Interfaces

port, or 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire processing. The T-Cards are field-upgradable.
The STM-1/OC-3 T-Card provides an interface for up to 63 E1s inside a
standard channelized STM-1 signal, or 84 DS1s for OC-3 channels.
Each E1/DS1 is transported by a VC-12 container (or DS1 in VC-11), which
behaves like a regular line interface. TDM trails can be configured ending in
VC-11/12 in the same manner as they are configured for E1/DS1 interfaces.
The STM-1/OC-3 T-Card includes a LED that indicates the status of the
interface:
 Critical or major severity alarm raised: RED
 Minor or warning severity alarm raised: YELLOW
 No SFP detected or STM-1/OC-3 interface disabled: OFF
 Otherwise the LED is GREEN
To configure the STM-1/OC-3 T-Card interface:
1 For an STM-1 configuration, select Configuration > Interfaces > STM1
Ports. For an OC-3 configuration, select Configuration > Interfaces > OC-
3 Ports. The STM-1 Ports or OC-3 Ports page opens.
2 From the Port Admin field drop down list, select Enable or Disable to
enable or disable the port.

3 From the Mute Tx drop down list, select Mute or Unmute to enable or
disable the mute Tx option on the interface. If muted, the radio will still
receive signals, but will not transmit any signals.
4 From the Outgoing signal clock source drop down list, specify the
outgoing signal clock source. Options are Internal clock, Loop, and STM-1
VC.
The clock source and the clock source status may be different when the
configuration does not match the current clock source in use, due to
the signal failures listed below.
If you choose Internal Clock (the default option), the quality will be
SMC/SEC (ITU-T G.813).
If you choose Loop (CDR mode), the signal clock source will be taken in
accordance with the following table:
# LOF from framer LOS from optics Mode of operation Clock source
1 LOF LOS Free run/holdover Local clock
2 LOF NO LOS Free run/holdover Local clock
3 NO LOF LOS N/A Local clock
4 NO LOF NO LOS Lock mode (loop timing) CDR
If you choose STM-1 VC, the signal will be synchronized to the signal
clock derived from a TDM trail. The clock will be taken from the first
VC-12 configured in the STM-1 port.
The VC source can be changed using the following CLI commands:
cd interfaces/sdh/stm1/get sync-vc (shows the VC that the
system will use as the clock and sync)
Set sync-vc XX (XX = VC number)
Note: The Clock source status field Indicates the current clock
source.
5 In the Synchronization VC field, specify the VC channel used to
synchronize the STM-1/OC-3 interface.
6 From the AIS VC Signaling Admin drop down list, select Enable or
Disable to enable or disable AIS VC signaling. When enabled, if a signal
failure at the trail outgoing from the STM-1/OC-3 interface occurs, the
system will signal AIS at the VC level (AIS-V) in the V5 byte of the
overhead.
7 From the Line Tx protection mode drop down list, select Normal or
Uni-direction MSP to configure the behavior of the transmitting line in a
1+1 HSB configuration:
In Normal mode the standby signal is silenced. The redundant
STM-1/OC-3 will not transmit signals unless the primary IDU performs
a switch due to a failure.
Choose Uni-direction MSP when the system is configured for 1+1 with
STM-1/OC-3 cards. Both cards will transmit, and the decision as to
which one will actually function will be made by other equipment
connected to it.

8 Optionally, you can configure STM-1/OC--3 trace identifiers in the Trace

Identifiers section of the STP-1/OC-3 Ports page:
i In the Transmitted field, specify the string used as the transmitted

STM-1/OC-3 signal J0 trace identifier. This is used to verify ongoing
connection to the receiver.
ii In the Expected field, configure the J0 trace identifier signal that is
expected to be received on the STM-1/OC-3 interface. This is used to
verify an ongoing connection to the remote side of the link.
iii From the String Length drop down list, select a string length for the
STM-1/OC-3 signal J0 trace identifier.
Note: The Received field indicates the J0 trace identifier signal
that was received on the on the STM-1/OC-3 interface.
9 You can configure STM-1/OC--3 thresholds in the Thresholds section of
the STP-1/OC-3 Ports page:
i From the Excessive BER drop down list, select the threshold value
above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over
the radio link. The value can be 1e-3, 1e-4, or 1e-5.
ii From the Signal degrade drop down list, select the threshold value
above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over
the link. The value can be 1e-6, 1e-7, 1e-8, or 1e-9.
10 Click Apply to save your configuration changes.

10.9 Configuring Pseudowire

 Pseudowire Overview
 Configuring an Ethernet Port for Pseudowire
 Configuring the Pseudowire TDM Ports
 Configuring TDM Trails for Pseudowire
 Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization
 Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card
 Configuring Pseudowire Profiles
 Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation (Tunnels)
 Configuring DS0 Bundles
 Configuring Pseudowire Services

10.9.1 Pseudowire Overview

port, or 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire processing.
IP-10G’s 16 E1/DS1 pseudowire (PW) processing T-Card processes E1 data,
sends the data through the system in Ethernet packet format that can be
processed by the IDU’s Ethernet ports. The T-Card also re-converts data
received via pseudowire processing back to TDM format.
Note: Release I6.9 only supports pseudowire for E1 lines.
IP-10G supports the following pseudowire protocols:
 SAToP (Structure-Agnostic TDM-Over-Packet) – E1 lines must be
transferred to pseudowire as full E1s. SAToP is agnostic with respect to
the data being sent, which can be either 1 TS or 30 with CAS, or even
unframed.
 CESoP (Circuit Emulation Services-Over-Packet) – E1 lines can be divided
into individual bundles of DS0 channels.
Pseudowire operates by encapsulating E1 input and sending it via one of the
IP-10G’s Ethernet ports. Traffic sent via pseudowire is de-encapsulated at the
other end of the link. Traffic must be passed to the pseudowire card by means
of TDM trails from the E1 port to the pseudowire port. A cable must be
connected between the pseudowire card and an Ethernet port in the same IDU
as the PW T-Card.
Proper synchronization is vital to ensure that traffic being transported via
pseudowire is processed properly at the other end of the link. IP-10G offers
the following synchronization options for pseudowire:
 Absolute (common) clock – A timing source external to the PW T-Card,
such as a GPS, an E1 line from external equipment, or the IDU’s reference
clock, is configured to provide synchronization on both sides of the link.
 Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) – Timing information is embedded in
the packets containing pseudowire traffic and used for synchronization at
the far end of the link.
Pseudowire encapsulation is defined by one or more pseudowire tunnels. IP-
10G pseudowire encapsulation can be performed using:
 MEF-8 (Ethernet)
 UDP/IP
You can configure up to 16 pseudowire services on the IP-10G. You can use a
mixture of MEF-8 and UDP/IP services. Before configuring pseudowire
services, you must configure one or more pseudowire profiles and tunnels. If
you are using CESoP, you must also configure one or more DS0 bundles.
Important Note: Once a profile, tunnel, or bundle has been assigned to a
service, you cannot modify that profile, tunnel, or bundle
until you first delete the service.

Pseudowire Configuration Flow
Ethernet Port TDM Port TDM Trail

Configuration Configuration Configuration
Pseudowire
PW T-Card Pseudowire Profile Tunnel
Configuration Configuration Configuration
(Encapsulation)
DS0 Bundle For CESoP

Configuration services only
For SAToP
services
Pseudowire
Service
Configuration

10.9.2 Configuring an Ethernet Port for Pseudowire

The PW T-Card includes three RJ-45 interfaces:
 Sync – Used to connect an external synchronization source, such as a GPS
or an E1 line.
 Prot – Reserved for future use.
 Eth – Used to connect the PW T-Card to an Ethernet port on the IP-10G.
You must connect the Eth interface on the PW T-Card to one of the Ethernet
ports on the IP-10G. Any electrical Ethernet port can be used, including either
GbE or Fast Ethernet ports. You can use any type of Ethernet cable.
The following Ethernet ports cannot be used for pseudowire:
 Optical ports
 Ports that belong to a LAG group

After connecting the Ethernet port to the PW T-Card, you must select the port
as the pseudowire interface port in the Ethernet Ports page:
page opens.
2 From the Pw interface port drop down list, select the Ethernet port you
are using as the pseudowire interface.
3 Click Apply. The selected port is highlighted in the main screen.

10.9.3 Configuring the Pseudowire TDM Ports

To configure the pseudowire TDM ports:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > TDM Ports. The TDM Ports page
opens.

2 Click + next to the port you want to configure to display the port
configuration settings.
3 From the Admin drop down list, select Enable.

Note: The Line coding field is read only.
4 From the Line type drop down list:
For SAToP, select E1 unframed.
For CESoP, select from the following:
 E1
 E1 Double-Frame CRC
 E1 Multi-Frame
 E1 Multi-Frame CRC
5 From the Channelization drop down list:
For SAToP, select Disable.
For CESoP, select Enable:
6 From the Timing mode drop down list, select the synchronization mode
for the port. Options are:
Loop – Transmits with the clock received from the TDM signal. Select
this option if an E1 line is connected directly to the PW T-Card.

Absolute – Transmits with the clock selected in the Clock source

reference field. Select this option if the clock is received from the front
panel or from NativeSync.
Clock recovery – Uses Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR). If you select
this option, you must define the E1 port from which to receive the
clock in the Clock source ref port field.
7 From the Clock source reference drop down list, you must select from
the following clock source options if you selected Absolute in the Timing
mode field:
Sys ref clk – Select this option if the clock is received from the
NativeSynch mechanism.
Front panel – Select this option if clock is received from the front
panel.
8 If you selected Clock Recovery in the Timing mode field, enter the E1
port from which to receive the clock.
Note: Several E1s can use the same PW as a clock reference.
9 Click Apply.
Note: The idle code is transmitted when the time slot is not being
used.

10.9.4 Configuring TDM Trails for Pseudowire

In order to pass traffic between E1s and the PW T-Card, you must configure
one or more TDM trails with the pseudowire interface as their start point or
end point. If the pseudowire interface is not assigned to any TDM trail, a Loss
of Frame (LOF) alarm will occur.
For instructions, refer to Configuring TDM Trails on page 274.

10.9.5 Configuring Pseudowire Synchronization

The following synchronization modes are available to determine which clock
is used to generate the outdoing TDM signals at the other end of the link.
Smart TDM Pseudowire supports the following synchronization modes:
 Absolute (Common) Clock – The pseudowire mechanism takes the
timing from either an external clock reference connected to the PW T-Card
on the front panel or from IP-10G’s NativeSync mechanism.
 Loop Timing – The pseudowire TDM port recovers the timing from the
incoming E1.
 Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) – Clock information is added to the TDM
data stream at the point where the data is packetized. The clock
information is extracted at the point where the packets are received and
reconverted to TDM. The extracted clock information is used for the
reconversion to TDM. ACR can provide very accurate synchronization, but
requires low jitter.
To configure the PW T-Card:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > Card Configuration. The Card
Configuration page opens.

2 From the Front panel clock admin drop down list, select Enable if you
are using an external clock source such as a GPS or an E1 line from
external equipment. In this case, the external clock source must be
physically connected to the Sync interface on the PW T-Card.
3 From the Signal to system sync distribution reference drop down list,
select the clock source that will be transmitted towards the general IP-10G
synchronization mechanism. Options are:
None – Select this if you do not want to transmit a clock source to the
general IP-10G synchronization mechanism (e.g., if you are using the
front panel for input only).
Front Panel – Only available if Front panel clock admin is set to
Enable. Select this option to use the front panel as the timing source.
Clock Recovery – System uses Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) for
synchronization.
4 From the Signal to front panel clock interface drop down list, select the
clock source the system transmits to the front panel. Options are:
None – Select None if the timing is coming from the front panel.
Front Panel – Select this option to use an external clock source.
Clock Recovery – System uses Adaptive Clock Recovery (ACR) for
synchronization.
5 From the Front panel clock signal input drop down list, select the type of
signal to be input at the Sync port on the PW T-Card:
Sync – A digital 2 MHz signal.
E1/DS1 – A normal coded TDM signal.
6 From the Front panel clock signal output drop down list, select the type
of signal to be transmitted from the Sync port on the PW T-Card:
Sync – A digital 2 MHz signal.
E1/DS1 - A normal coded TDM signal.
7 If Signal to front panel clock interface field is set to Clock Recovery,
then in the TDM port for front panel clock recovery reference field,
enter the TDM port that serves as the clock recovery reference.
8 If Signal to system sync distribution reference field is set to Clock
Recovery, then in the TDM port for system clock recovery reference
field, enter the TDM port that serves as the clock recovery reference.
9 Click Apply.

10.9.6 Configuring the Pseudowire T-Card

To configure the PW T-Card:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > Card Configuration. The Card
2 Configure the Synchronization parameters. Refer to Configuring

Pseudowire Synchronization on page 135.
3 In the IP Addresses section of the Card Configuration page, enter a unique
IP address and subnet mask for the PW T-Card.
Note: The IP address and subnet mask are only necessary for
UDP/IP encapsulation. Therefore, if all pseudowire in the
system uses MEF-8 encapsulation, it is not necessary to
configure an IP address and subnet mask for the PW T-Card.
4 In the Ethernet Port Configuration section of the Card Configuration page,
configure the Ethernet port being used for pseudowire traffic:
i From the Admin drop down list, select Enable to enable the port.
ii From the Auto negotiation drop-down menu, select one of the
following options.
Note: The Auto negotiation setting must be the same as the auto-
negotiation setting of the port connected to the IP-10G.

 On - The data flow between the IP-10G port and the external port is
negotiated between the two ports.
 Off – The duplex type and Ethernet rate are determined by user
configuration.
iii From the Ethernet rate drop down list, select the Ethernet rate for the
port.
iv From the Flow control drop down list, select On or Off to enable or
disable flow control for the port.
Note: The remaining fields are read-only. The Mac address field
displays the T-Card’s MAC address, which is unique to the
card and used for Ethernet encapsulation.
5 Click Apply.

10.9.7 Configuring Pseudowire Profiles

Each pseudowire service must include a pseudowire profile. The profile
determines the behavior of the pseudowire service, including the buffer, alarm
thresholds, payload suppression, and other parameters. A profile can be used
by multiple pseudowire services.
To configure pseudowire profiles:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > PSN Profiles. The PSN Profiles
page opens.
2 In the Add New Entry section, select a profile ID from the New profile ID
drop down list, and do one of the following:
Click Create new; or
To create a new profile based on an existing profile select an existing
profile from the Copy from profile drop down list and click Copy
existing.
The new profile appears in the Profiles Table.

3 Click + next to the new profile (or any profile you want to edit). The profile
is expanded.
4 In the Payload size field, enter the number of TDM frames per packet
(from 1 to 64). This number multiplied by the number of DS0 channels in a
specific bundle equals the size of the TDM payload, and does not include
the Ethernet header.
5 In the Jitter buffer depth field, enter the desired jitter buffer depth (from
1 to 32, in milliseconds). This is used to enable the network to
accommodate PSN-specific packet delay variation. The jitter buffer can be
increased if the network experiences a higher-than-normal level of jitter.
6 From the Use RTP header drop down list, select Yes if you want the
system to add RTP headers to Ethernet packets carrying pseudowire
traffic. The default value is No.
7 From the RTP timestamp mode drop down list, select from the following
RTP timestamp mode options:
Absolute
Differential
The default value is Absolute.
Note: This parameter is only relevant if you select Yes in the Use
RTP header drop down list.
8 In the RTP timestamp multiplication factor field, enter the number by
which the reference frequency is multiplied. This must be set to the same
value at both ends of the pseudowire service.
9 from the Payload suppression drop down list, select Enable or Disable
to enable or disable payload suppression. The default value is Disable.
10 In the Payload type field, enter a value between 96 and 127. This value is
used to distinguish between signaling and data types. The default value
is 96.
11 From the LOPS detection drop down list, select Enable or Disable to
enable or disable LOPS detection. The default value is Enable.
12 In the Consecutive Packets in Sync for LOP field, enter the number of
missing packets required in order for the system to indicate a loss of
packet state (1-10). The default value is 2.
13 In the Consecutive Missing Packets Out of Sync for LOP field, enter the
packets required in order for the system to go out of a loss of packet state
(1-10). The default value is 2.
14 In the Packet loss time window, field, enter the time (in milliseconds) the
system period (in seconds) the system uses to compute the average packet
loss rate in order to detect excessive packet loss (1-65535). The default
value is 3000.
15 In the Alarm threshold, field, enter the amount of time (in milliseconds)
the system waits after a fault condition exists before indicating an alarm
16 In the Excessive packet loss threshold field enter the alarm threshold (in
percentage) for excessive packet loss (1-100). The default value is 5.
17 In the Clear alarm threshold field, enter the time (in milliseconds) the
system waits before clearing an alarm once the alarm condition has ended
18 In the Missing packets for SES threshold field, enter the percentage of
missing packets detected within a one second window that will cause SES
to be counted.
19 In the CAS alarm pattern field, enter the CAS alarm pattern transmitted
on the E1 interface when packets overflow or underflow the jitter buffer.
20 Click Apply.

10.9.8 Configuring Pseudowire Encapsulation (Tunnels)

Each pseudowire service must include an encapsulation tunnel to determine
how traffic over the service passes through the network. Encapsulation can
use one of the following protocols:
 MEF-8
 UDP/IP
To configure a tunnel:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > PSN Tunnels. The PSN Tunnels
page opens.
2 Click Add Entry to add a tunnel. The Add Entry window opens.

3 From the Tunnel ID drop down list, select a unique Tunnel ID from 1 to
512.
4 From the PSN type drop down list, select the encapsulation protocol for
the tunnel:
UDP/IP – The tunnel uses UDP/IP encapsulation.
Ethernet – The tunnel uses MEF-8 encapsulation.
5 From the VLAN type drop down list, select the VLAN type used by the
tunnel. Options are:
None
C type
S type
6 In the VLAN ID field, enter a VLAN ID for the tunnel.
7 In the VLAN p-bits field, enter a p-bit value. This value will be assigned to
frames transversing the tunnel.
8 For MEF-8 tunnels, enter the MAC address of the card at the other site of
the link in the Remote MAC address field.
Note: If the card at the other side of the link is replaced, you will
have to re-configure the tunnel.
9 For UDP/IP tunnels, enter a destination IP address in the Destination IP
address field.
10 For UDP/IP tunnels, if the destination is on a different segment of the
network, enter a next hop IP address in the Next hop IP address field.
11 For UDP/IP tunnels, enter a ToS/DSCP value in the ToS-DSCP field.
12 Click Apply to add the entry.

10.9.9 Configuring DS0 Bundles

For CESoP-based services, you must allocate DS0 channels, splitting one E1
port into several DS0 bundles. To configure DS0 bundles:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > DS0 Bundles. The DS0 Bundles
page opens.
2 Click Add Bundle. The Add New Bundle window opens.

3 In the Bundle ID field, enter a unique bundle ID from 1 to 496.

4 From the Port ID drop down list, select the E1 port from which you will
add DS0 channels to the bundle.
5 In the Start channel field, enter the number of the first DS0 channel to
include in the bundle.
6 In the End channel field, enter the number of the last DS0 channel to
include in the bundle.
7 From the Admin field, select Enable.
8 Optionally, in the Description field you can enter a description of the
bundle.
9 Click Apply to add the bundle.

10.9.10 Configuring Pseudowire Services

You can configure up to 16 pseudowire services.
Important Note: Once a profile, tunnel, or bundle has been assigned to a
service, you cannot modify that profile, tunnel, or bundle
until you first delete the service.
To configure a pseudowire service:
1 Select Configuration > Pseudowire > Pseudowire Service. The
Pseudowire Service page opens.
2 Click Add Service. The Add Service window opens.
3 From the Service ID drop down list, select a unique Service ID.

4 From the Pw type drop down list, select the pseudotype protocol you want
to use for the service:
E1 SAToP – Service uses SAToP protocol.
CESoP – Service uses CESoP protocol without CAS signaling.
CESoP with CAS – Service uses CESoP protocol with CAS signaling.
5 From the Psn type drop down list, select the encapsulation type:
UDP/IP –UDP/IP
Ethernet – MEF-8
6 From the Port ID drop down list:
For SAToP services, select the TDM port to use with the service.
For CESoP services, this option is grayed out.
7 From the Bundle ID drop down list:
For SAToP services, this option is grayed out.
For CESoP services, select the DS0 bundle to use with the service.
8 From the Profile ID field, select the pseudowire profile to use with the
service.
9 From the Tunnel ID field, select the pseudowire tunnel to use with the
service.
10 In the Service UDP port or ECID field, enter the source UDP Port for the
UDP/IP tunnel or ECID for the Ethernet tunnel.
11 In the Destination UDP port or ECID field, enter the source UDP Port for
the UDP/IP tunnel or ECID for the Ethernet tunnel.
12 From the Clock recovery master drop down list, select Enable if Clock
Recovery is used for this service. Otherwise, select Disable.
13 From the Admin drop down list, select Enable to enable the service.
14 Click Apply.
Note: It is recommended to assign high QoS priority for
pseudowire services, using VLAN p-bits, MAC address, and
DSCP QoS classification.

 Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS

11. Configuring Auxiliary Channels

 Configuring the User Channel
 Viewing the EOW Channel Status

11.1 Configuring the Wayside Channel

This feature cannot be used with:
 PTP Optimized Transport mode
Wayside channel and PTP optimized transport mode are mutually exclusive
features. You should verify that PTP optimized transport mode is not enabled
before enabling the Wayside channel. Refer to Enabling PTP Optimized
Transport on page 206.
To configure the wayside channel:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Wayside Channel. The Wayside
Channel page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current settings for the wayside channel are displayed.
3 From the Wayside admin drop-down menu, select Enable.

4 From the Capacity drop-down menu, select Narrow or Wide for the
wayside channel capacity.
options:
 On - The system controls the data flow between the wayside channel
and the other active ports.
 Off - The data flow between the wayside channel and the other ports is
not controlled by the system.
6 From the Duplex drop-down menu, select Full or Half duplex.
7 From the Rate drop-down menu, select the data rate for the port.
8 Click Apply. The settings for the Wayside Channel are configured.

11.2 Configuring the User Channel

To configure the user channel:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > User Channel. The User Channel
page opens.
2 In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the user
channel.
3 In the Type field, specify the channel type:
Asynchronous RS-232
Asynchronous V.11/X.21
4 Click Apply.

11.3 Viewing the EOW Channel Status

The EOW page displays the EOW (Engineering Order Wire) channel status. To
display the EOW channel status, select Configuration > Interfaces > EOW.
The EOW page opens.
The status of the EOW channel (Enable or Disable) opens in the Admin field.

12. Configuring the Radio Parameters

 Enabling and Disabling the Radio
 Configuring the Radio Frequencies
 Specifying the Radio Link ID
 Configuring the Remote Radio IP Address
 Configuring the Radio Thresholds
 Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms
 Selecting a Radio Script and Configuring ACM
 Configuring Compression
 Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities
 Configuring the Power Options and Green Mode
Related topics:
 Configuring Diversity
 Configuring XPIC

12.1 Enabling and Disabling the Radio

To enable or disable the radio:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio
Parameters page opens.
2 In the Configuration parameters section, select Enable or Disable from
the Radio IF interface drop down list to enable or disable the radio.
Note: The Radio IF operational status field indicates the current

radio status.

12.2 Configuring the Radio Frequencies

You can configure both the local and the remote radio frequencies.
To configure the Tx and Rx frequencies of the local radio:
2 In the Frequency Control section:
i In the Tx frequency field, enter the transmission radio frequency.

ii In the Rx frequency field, enter the received radio frequency.
iii Optionally, select Set also remote unit to apply these frequency
settings to the remote unit.
3 In the Configuration Parameters section:
i In the Mute Tx field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable Tx
muting.
ii In the Max Tx level field, enter a number between 2-20 as the
maximum transmission frequency.
To configure remote radio frequency settings:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio
window opens.
2 In the Remote force max Tx level field, enter a number between 2-20 as
the maximum transmit level for the remote radio.
3 In the Remote ATPC reference Rx Level field, enter a number
between -70-30 as the ATPC receive level.
4 Click Apply.
To unmute the remote unit transmitter output:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio
window opens.
2 Click Force Unmute.

12.3 Specifying the Radio Link ID

To specify the radio link ID:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio Parameters
page opens.
2 In the Configuration parameters section, enter the identification number of
the link in the Link ID field.
Note: When working with an IDU that has the Link ID feature on
one end and an IDU that does not have this feature on the
other end, set the Link ID to 1.

12.4 Configuring the Remote Radio IP Address

To set the remote radio IP address:
1 Select Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio page opens.
2 In the Remote Radio Parameters section:
 In the Remote IP address field, enter the IP address of the remote unit.
 In the Remote floating IP address field, enter the remote floating IP
address.
3 Click Apply.

12.5 Configuring the Radio Thresholds

 Radio Threshold Levels
 RSL and TSL Thresholds
 MSE Threshold
 XPI Threshold
 Ethernet Throughput Threshold
 Ethernet Capacity Threshold
 Ethernet Utilization Threshold

12.5.1 Radio Threshold Levels

To configure the radio threshold levels:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Thresholds. The Radio Thresholds
page opens.
2 Click Refresh. The current remote radio unit settings are displayed.
3 From the Radio excessive BER threshold drop-down list, select the level
above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the
radio link.
4 From the Radio signal degrade threshold drop-down list, select the level
above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the
radio link.
5 The Radio BER field displays the value above which a BER alarm is issued
for errors detected over the radio link.
6 Click Apply. The radio threshold levels are configured.

12.5.2 RSL and TSL Thresholds

To configure signal level thresholds:
1 Select PM & counters > Radio> Signal Level. The Signal Level page
opens.
2 Go to the Thresholds Configuration section.
3 In the RSL Threshold #1 field, specify the number of seconds below which
RSL 1 exceeded seconds will be counted.
4 In the RSL Threshold #2 field, specify the number of seconds below which
RSL 2 exceeded seconds will be counted.
5 In the TSL Threshold field, specify the number of seconds below which
TSL exceeded seconds will be counted.
6 Click Apply to save your changes.
7 Click Refresh to update the threshold values.
12.5.3 MSE Threshold

To configure the MSE threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> MSE. The MSE page opens.
3 In the MSE Threshold field, specify the number of seconds below which
MSE exceeded seconds will be counted.
5 Click Refresh to update the threshold value.

12.5.4 XPI Threshold

To configure the XPI threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> XPI. The XPI page opens.
2 Go to the Threshold Configuration section.
3 In the XPI Threshold field, specify the number of seconds below which
XPI exceeded seconds will be counted.
12.5.5 Ethernet Throughput Threshold

To configure the throughput threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> Ethernet > Throughput. The
Throughput page opens.
2 Go to the Thresholds configuration section.
3 In the Throughput Threshold field, specify the throughput threshold (in

Mbps), above which will be counted as Throughput Exceeds seconds.

12.5.6 Ethernet Capacity Threshold

To configure the Ethernet capacity threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> Ethernet > Capacity. The Capacity page
opens.
3 In the Capacity Threshold field, specify the capacity threshold (in bps),
above which will be counted as Capacity Exceeds seconds.
12.5.7 Ethernet Utilization Threshold

To configure the Ethernet utilization threshold:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio> Ethernet > Utilization. The Utilization
page opens.
3 In the Utilization Threshold field, select a range of utilized throughput,

above which will be counted as Utilization Exceeds seconds.

12.6 Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms

This feature enables the generation of an alarm when the RSL level degrades
below a user-defined threshold.
When enabled, an alarm is generated if the RSL level degrades below the
nominal level minus the degradation margin. The alarm is cleared when the
RSL level returns to a level above this point.
To enable RSL degradation alarms:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio Parameters
page opens.
2 Go to the Configuration Parameters section of the Radio Parameters page.
3 In the RSL degradation alarm admin field, select Enable.

4 In the Nominal RSL level for RSL degradation alarm field, enter the
nominal level for the RSL degradation alarm.
5 In the Margin for RSL degradation alarm field, enter the degradation
margin for the RSL degradation alarm.
6 Click Apply.

12.7 Selecting a Radio Script and Configuring ACM

The MRMC table lists all available radio scripts.
Radio scripts define how the radio utilizes its available capacity. Each script is
a pre-defined collection of configuration settings that specify the radio’s
transmit and receive levels, link modulation, channel spacing, and bit rate.
Scripts apply uniform transmit and receive rates that remain constant
regardless of environmental impact on radio operation.
Note: The list of available scripts reflects licensed features. Only
scripts within your licensed capacity will be displayed.
To apply a radio script:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC Table opens.
2 Specify which types of scripts to display.

Select FCC to display only FCC compatible scripts.
Select ETSI to display only ETSI compatible scripts.
Select Both to display both FCC and ETSI scripts.
3 Click the + icon for a regular script (without the ACM prefix) to open the
script configuration options.
4 Click Apply.

12.7.1 ACM Radio Scripts
Related topics:
In ACM mode, a range of profiles determines Tx and Rx rates.
This allows the radio to modify its transmit and receive levels in response to
environmental conditions.
 The ACM TX profile is determined by the remote RX MSE performance.
 The RX end is the one that initiates an ACM profile upgrade or downgrade.
To apply an ACM script:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC page opens.
2 Go to the MRMC Table, near the bottom of the page.
3 Click the + icon of an ACM script (scripts with an ACM prefix) to open the
script configuration options.
4 Select the ACM mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
Fixed ACM mode applies constant Tx and Rx rates. However, unlike
regular scripts, with a Fixed ACM script you can specify a maximum
profile to inhibit inefficient transmission levels.
In Adaptive ACM mode, Tx and Rx rates are dynamic. An ACM-enabled
radio system automatically chooses which profile to use according to
the channel fading conditions.
For ACM Fixed Mode scripts:
1 Select the MRMC profile.
2 Click Apply.

For ACM Adaptive Mode scripts:

1 Specify the radio’s maximum allowed transmission frequency.
In the Select Maximum ACM Profile section, select the maximum ACM
profile.
2 Specify the radio’s minimum allowed transmission frequency.
In the ACM Minimum Profile field, select the minimum ACM profile.
3 Specify whether the system should automatically align power usage to the
current bandwidth utilization.
Select Enable or Disable from the Adaptive Power field drop down
list.
In the Reference Class field, specify class-2/4/5B/6A for ETSI, or FCC
for FCC.
4 Click Apply.

12.7.2 ACM with 1+1 HSB Protection

When activating an ACM script together with 1+1 HSB protection, if an LOF
alarm is raised, both the active and the standby receivers degrade to the
lowest available profile (highest RX sensitivity). Because RX sensitivity is very
high, the receivers may have “false lock”, which will result in a switchover. If
the LOF alarm remains, protection switchovers may appear alternately every
1 sec. This may cause management instability and may even prevent
management access to the units completely.
In order to avoid this scenario, it is important to follow the instructions for
setting up 1+1 HSB protection. In particular, make sure that the link is
established with “lockout” configuration in order to avoid alternate
switchovers. Once the link is up and running, ”lockout” can be disabled.
The following ACM behavior should be expected in a 1+1 configuration:
 In the TX direction, the Active TX will follow the remote Active RX ACM
requests (according to the remote Active Rx MSE performance).
 The Standby TX might have the same profile as the Active TX, or might stay
at the lowest profile (profile-0). That depends on whether the Standby TX
was able to follow the remote RX Active unit’s ACM requests (only the
active remote RX sends ACM request messages).
 In the RX direction, both the active and the standby units follow the
remote Active TX profile (which is the only active transmitter).

 Configuring 1+1 HSB

12.7.3 ACM Adaptive Power

 RFU-C, running software version 2.01 or above
When configuring an ACM script with Adaptive Mode, you can determine
whether or not the RFU power will be adaptive as well.
During fade conditions requiring a modulation drop, a constant power scheme
cannot increase transmit power to compensate for the signal degradation,
further reducing capacity.
Adaptive power dynamically adjusts the power to the lowest transmit level for
the current modulation.
When disabled, the maximum Tx power in lower constellations is
limited by the highest modulation.
When enabled, the maximum Tx power in lower constellations is
limited by the reference class.
To enable adaptive power:
2 Select an ACM script.

3 Expand an ACM script to configure its options.
Note: ACM scripts are indicated by the ACM prefix.

4 Enable or disable adaptive power.

Select Enable or Disable from the Adaptive Power field drop down
list.
5 Specify the adaptive power reference class.
In the Reference Class field, select class-2/4/5B/6A for ETSI, or FCC
for FCC.

12.7.4 Enabling Alarms on MRMC Profile Degradation

If the current radio script supports Adaptive Code Modulation (ACM), when
enabled, traps can be generated upon Tx ACM profile degradation below the
user-defined threshold.
To enable alarms on MRMC profile degrade:
2 Go to the MRMC Configuration section.
3 From the Alarm generation on MRMC profile degrade drop down list,
select Enable to enable the MRMC profile degrade alarm.
4 In the Threshold for MRMC profile degrade alarm field, specify the
profile above which will generate the profile degrade alarm.
5 In the Alarm generation for MRMC profile degrade field, select Enable
or Disable to enable or disable event and trap generation on ACM profile
degrade.

12.7.5 Activating an Asymmetrical Script

 Asymmetrical Scripts license
Note: When using an asymmetrical script, the capacity license
relates to the TX side of each link.
To activate an asymmetrical script, you must upgrade the uplink script
(narrow TX, wide RX) at one end of the link, and upgrade the downlink script
(wide TX, narrow RX) at the other end of the link. This operation requires
reset.
The number of TDM trails is determined by the capacity of the uplink (narrow
script).
To avoid loss of management while upgrading the scripts, it is recommended
to upgrade the remote side first.
Asymmetrical scripts are supported in both R2 and R3 hardware.

12.8 Configuring Compression

IP-10G/E offers several Ethernet header compression methods, which enable
operators to significantly improve Ethernet throughout over the radio link
without affecting user traffic:
 No Header Compression (Layer 1 Header Suppression) – Removes the
IFG and Preamble fields. This mechanism operates automatically even if no
header compression is selected by the user.
 MAC Header Compression (“Legacy Mode”) – Operates at Layer 2,
compressing the MAC SA and the MAC DA. The user can enable or disable
MAC header compression.
 Multi-Layer Header Compression (“Enhanced Compression”) –Users
can configure the depth of Enhanced Compression, up to Layer 4. You must
balance the depth of compression against the number of flows in order to
ensure maximum efficiency. Up to 256 concurrent flows are supported.
To configure header compression:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Compression. The Compression page
opens.
2 In the Compression mode field, select Legacy or Enhanced.

Select Legacy if you want to use MAC header compression or no
compression. Then, select Enable or Disable in the MAC header
compression field to enable or disable MAC header compression, and
click Apply.
Select Enhanced if you want enhanced (multi-layer) header
compression. Then, perform the steps in the next section.

12.8.1 Configuring Enhanced Header Compression

 Enhanced Compression License
 Hardware version R3
 Software version I6.9 or higher
Enhanced (multi-layer) header compression identifies traffic flows and
replaces header fields with a flow ID. The Enhanced Compression module
includes an algorithm for learning each new flow, and implements
compression on the flow type starting with the next frame of that flow type.
In Enhanced Compression mode, you can determine the depth to which the
compression mechanism operates, from Layer 2 to Layer 4. You must balance
the depth of compression against the number of flows in order to ensure
maximum efficiency. Multi-Layer (Enhanced) compression supports up to 256
flow types.
To configure enhanced (multi-layer) header compression:
1 In the Compression mode field of the Compression page, select Enhanced.
2 Click Apply. The fields in the Compression Configuration section of the
Compression page change as shown in the following figure.

3 In the Enhanced Header Compression Mode field, select the layer depth
to which compression will operate. Options are:
L2 – Ethernet and MPLS
L3 – Ethernet and IP
L4 – All supported layers up to L4
4 Optionally, you can configure excluding rules to restrict the number of
compressed flow. To add an excluding rule:
i In the Rule Name field, enter a name for the rule.
ii In the Rule Type field, select from the following options:
 Flow Type
 VLAN
 MAC DA
 MAC SA
 Ethertype
iii In the Rule Value field, enter the value that you want to exclude,
according to the following table:
Rule Type Rule Value
Flow Type 1 byte hexadecimal identifier of the protocol stack. For details, refer to Enhanced
Header Compression Flow Type Bitmask and Supported Configurations on
page 173.
VLAN 4 bytes, including VLAN Ethertype to distinguish S-VLAN from C-VLAN, VLAN ID,
and VLAN P-Bit.
MAC DA 6 bytes in hexadecimal format.
MAC SA 6 bytes in hexadecimal format.
Ethertype 2 bytes in hexadecimal format.
5 Click Apply.
12.8.1.1 Enhanced Header Compression Flow Type Bitmask and Supported

Configurations
The following table shows the flow type bitmask.
Bit 6-7 (MSB) Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 0-1 (LSB)
L2 PBB-TE MPLS L3 - IPv4 L3 - IPv6 L4
„00‟ untag „0‟ – no „0‟ – no „0‟ – no „0‟ – no „00‟ – no
„10‟ reserved „1‟ - yes „1‟ - yes „1‟ - yes „1‟ – yes „01‟ – UDP
„01‟ single tag „10‟ – TCP
„11‟ double tag „11‟ - GRE

The following lookup table shows all supported flow type configurations:
Flow Attributes Flow-type

untag-no L4 0x00
untag-IPV6-no L4 0x04
untag-IPV6-UDP 0x05
untag-IPV6-TCP 0x06
untag-IPV4-no L4 0x08
untag-IPV4-UDP 0x09
untag-IPV4-TCP 0x0A
untag-MPLS-no L4 0x10
untag-PBB-no L4 0x20
S-tag-no L4 0x40
S-tag-IPV6-no L4 0x44
S-tag-IPV6-UDP 0x45
S-tag-IPV6-TCP 0x46
S-tag-IPV4-no L4 0x48
S-tag-IPV4-UDP 0x49
S-tag-IPV4-TCP 0x4A
S-tag-MPLS-no L4 0x50
C-tag-no L4 0x80
C-tag-IPV6-no L4 0x84
C-tag-IPV6-UDP 0x85
C-tag-IPV6-TCP 0x86
C-tag-IPV4-no L4 0x88
C-tag-IPV4-UDP 0x89
C-tag-IPV4-TCP 0x8A
C-tag-MPLS-no L4 0x90
SC-tag-no L4 0xC0
SC-tag-IPV6-no L4 0xC4
SC-tag-IPV6-UDP 0xC5
SC-tag-IPV6-TCP 0xC6
SC-tag-IPV4-no L4 0xC8
SC-tag-IPV4-UDP 0xC9

Flow Attributes Flow-type

SC-tag-IPV4-TCP 0xCA
SC-tag-MPLS-no L4 0xD0
12.8.1.2 Enhanced Header Compression Compatibility

The IP-10G/E’s configuration monitoring mechanism is used to provide
backwards compatibility with legacy hardware and software versions that do
not support Multi-Layer (enhanced) header compression.
A configuration mismatch may occur in the following scenarios:
 The remote IDU is using a pre-I6.9 software release.
 The remote IDU is using a pre-R3 hardware release.
 The remote IDU is configured to Legacy compression mode.
In each of these scenarios, both sides of the link will use Legacy compression
mode and an alarm will be raised to indicate that there is a configuration
mismatch.

12.9 Configuring Radio Traffic Priorities

Related topics:
 ACM Radio Scripts
Since radio bandwidth may vary in ACM, situations may arise in which it is
necessary to drop some of the outgoing traffic. The system dynamically
allocates bandwidth to traffic according to user-defined priorities.
At the radio level, the system can discern between the following types of
traffic:
 High-priority Ethernet traffic
 Low-priority Ethernet traffic
 High-priority TDM trails
 Low-priority TDM trails
Users can configure the following parameters:
 The amount (in Mbps) of high priority Ethernet Bandwidth
 For each TDM trail, whether it is high or low priority
 The priority order between the different types of traffic. the following
schemes are available (from high to low priority):
High-TDM-over-high-Ethernet, meaning:
1. TDM high priority
2. Ethernet high priority
3. TDM low priority
4. Ethernet low priority
High-Ethernet-over-TDM, meaning:
1. Ethernet high priority
3. TDM low priority
4. Ethernet low priority
TDM-over-Ethernet (default), meaning:
2. TDM low priority
3. Ethernet
For this mechanism to work properly, both sides of the link should be
identically configured:
 Each TDM trail on both sides of a link should be assigned the same
priority.
 Both sides of the link should have the same amount of high priority
Ethernet bandwidth.
 Both sides of the link should use the same priority scheme.

To configure radio traffic priority:

1 Select Configuration > Radio > Traffic Priority. The Traffic Priority page
opens.
2 In the Traffic priority scheme field, select a traffic priority scheme:

High TDM over Ethernet (default)
 TDM high priority
 TDM low priority
 Ethernet
High Ethernet over TDM
 Ethernet high priority
 Ethernet low priority
High TDM over high Ethernet
 Ethernet high priority
 Ethernet low priority
Note: The Current available capacity field displays the amount
of current capacity, in Kbps.
3 In the High-priority Ethernet BW field, specify how much of your current
capacity to allocate for Ethernet bandwidth.
4 Click Apply to save configuration changes.

12.10 Configuring the Power Options and Green Mode

 Configuring ATPC Override
 Configuring Green Mode

12.10.1 Configuring ATPC Override
This feature cannot be used with the following:

 Green Mode
ATPC is a closed-loop mechanism by which each RFU changes the transmitted
signal power according to the indication received across the link, in order to
achieve a desired RSL on the other side of the link.
Without ATPC, if loss of frame occurs the system automatically increases its
transmit power to the configured maximum. This may cause a higher level of
interference with other systems until the failure is corrected.
In order to minimize this interference, some regulators require a timer
mechanism which will be manually overridden when the failure is fixed. The
underlying principle is that the system should start a timer from the moment
maximum power has been reached. If the timer expires, ATPC is overridden
and the system transmits at a pre-determined power level until the user
manually re-establishes ATPC and the system works normally again.
The user can configure the following parameters:
 Override timeout (0 to disable the feature): The amount of time the timer
counts from the moment the system transmits at the maximum configured
power.
 Override transmission power: The power that will be transmitted if
ATPC is overridden because of timeout.
The user can also display the current countdown value.
When the system enters into the override state, ATPC is automatically
disabled and the system transmits at the pre-determined override power. An
alarm is raised in this situation.
The only way to go back to normal operation is to manually cancel the
override. When doing so, users should be sure that the problem has been
corrected; otherwise, ATPC may be overridden again.
To configure ATPC override:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > ATPC. The ATPC page opens.
2 Go to the ATPC Configuration section.

3 In the ATPC admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable

ATPC.
4 In the ATPC override Tx level field, enter a number between -50 and 34
as the ATPC override transmit level.
5 In the ATPC reference RSL field, enter a number between -70 and 30 as
the reference value for the ATPC mechanism.
6 In the ATPC timeout field, specify the number of seconds before
overriding the current Tx level with the ATPC override Tx level.
Note: The ATPC timer counter field displays the number of
seconds remaining until ATPC timeout.
7 Click Apply.
To cancel ATPC override:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > ATPC. The ATPC page opens.
2 Go to the ATPC Configuration section.
3 Click ATPC Override Cancel. The cancel option aborts the current ATPC
override for a radio that is transmitting at the ATPC override Tx level.
Following execution, the system goes back to normal ATPC operating
mode.

12.10.2 Configuring Green Mode

 RFU-HP or RFU-A

 ATPC
FibeAir IP-10G/E offers an optional ultra-high power radio solution that
transmits the highest power in the industry, while employing an innovative
Power Saving Mode that saves up to 30% power consumption. Power Saving
Mode enables the deployment of smaller antennas, and reduces the need for
repeater stations. Moreover, installation labor cost and electricity
consumption are reduced, achieving an overall diminished carbon footprint.
To configure radio Green mode:
2 Go to the Green Mode section.
3 In the Green mode admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or

disable Green Mode.
4 In the Green mode reference RX level field, enter a number between -70
-30 as the Green Mode reference level.
5 Click Apply.

13. Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS

 QoS Overview
 Configuring Standard QoS
 Configuring Enhanced QoS
Related topics:

13.1 QoS Overview

IP-10G/E offers integrated QoS functionality in all switching modes. In
addition to its standard QoS functionality, IP-10G/E offers an enhanced QoS
feature. Enhanced QoS is license-activated.
IP-10G/E’s standard QoS provides for four queues and six classification
criteria. Ingress traffic is limited per port, Class of Service (CoS), and traffic
type. Scheduling is performed according to Strict Priority (SP), Weighted
Round Robin (WRR), or Hybrid WRR/SP scheduling.
IP-10G/E’s enhanced QoS provides eight classification criteria instead of six,
color-awareness, increased frame buffer memory, eight priority queues with
configurable buffer length, improved congestion management using WRED
protocols, enhanced counters, and other enhanced functionality.
13.1.1 Standard QoS Overview

QoS enables users to configure classification and scheduling to ensure that
packets are forwarded and discarded according to their priority. QoS
configurations are available in all switch applications (Smart Pipe, Managed
Switch, and Metro Switch).
Since it is common to set QoS and rate limiting settings identically in several
ports, the QoS configuration can be copied from one port to another. This
saves considerable time and prevents configuration mistakes.
The following diagram illustrates the QoS flow:
Ingress Port #x Egress Port #y
5 Policers
Shaper
Classifier (Ingress Queue
Marker Scheduler (Egress rate
(4 Queues) Rate Controller
limiting)
Limiting)
13.1.1.1 Standard QoS Classifier

Using IP-10G/E’s standard QoS functionality, the system examines the
incoming traffic and assigns the desired priority according to the marking of
the packets (based on the user port/L2/L3 marking in the packet). In case of
congestion in the ingress port, low priority packets are discarded first.
The standard QoS classifier is made up of four classification criteria
hierarchies:
 MAC DA (Destination Address) Overwrite – Classification and marking
is performed for incoming frames carrying a MAC DA that appears in the
Static MAC table, according to the following options:
Disable – No MAC DA classification or VLAN P-Bit overwrite
(marking).
Queue Decision – Only classification to queue. No marking.
VLAN P-Bit Overwrite – Only VLAN P-Bits overwrite (marking).
Classification according to a lower criterion.

Queue Decision and VLAN P-Bit Overwrite – Both classification and

VLAN P-Bits overwrite.
 VLAN ID Overwrite –If the first criteria is not fulfilled (either because it is
disabled, or because the ingress frame does not carry any MAC DA that
appears in the S MAC table), classification and/or marking (VLAN P-Bit
overwrite, assuming the frame egress is tagged) is decided according to
the VLAN ID to Queue table according to the following options:
Disable – No VLAN ID classification or VLAN P-Bit overwrite
(marking).
Queue Decision – Only classification to queue. No marking.
 VLAN P-Bit Overwrite – Only VLAN P-Bit overwrite (marking).
Classification is according to the lower criteria (P-Bits or port priority). In
this case, P-Bits are assigned as follows (if egress frame is tagged):
Frames classified to 1st queue are given p-bits=0
Frames classified to 2nd queue are given p-bits=2
Frames classified to 3rd queue are given p-bits=4
Frames classified to 4th queue are given p-bits=6
 Queue Decision and VLAN P-Bit Overwrite – Both classification and
VLAN P-Bit overwrite. Initial Classification is according to the following
configuration:
VLAN P-Bit – Classification is according to VLAN P-Bit. And the queue
is assigned according to the VLAN P-Bit to Queue table.
IP TOS – Classification is according to IP TOS (IP precedence, or IP
diffserv). The queue is assigned according to the IP P-Bit to Queue
table.
VLAN P-Bit over IP TOS – Classification according to VLAN P-Bit, if the
ingress frame carries a VLAN. For untagged packets with an IP header,
classification is according to IP TOS.
IP TOS over VLAN P-Bit – Classification is according to IP TOS, if the
ingress frame has an IP header. If the ingress frame without an IP
header carries a VLAN, classification is according to VLAN P-Bit.
Port (Default) – If any of the above criteria are not fulfilled, the default
classification is assigned to the ingress frame according to the port
priority.
Default Classification. Default priority for frames incoming at the
port.
13.1.1.2 Standard QoS Policers

IP-10G/E’s standard QoS provides up to five policers to perform ingress rate
limiting. The policers are based on a color blind leaky bucket scheme, and can
be applied per port or CoS.
For each policer, users can define up to five class maps. Each class map
includes the following parameters:

 Committed Information Rate (CIR) – IP-10G/E supports CIR granularity

of 64kbps up to 1 Mbps of CIR, 1 Mbps from 1 Mbps to 1 Gbps of CIR.
Packets within the CIR defined for the service are marked green and
passed through the QoS module.
 Committed Burst Size (CBS) – IP-10G/E supports CBS up to a maximum
of 128 kbytes. The default value is 12 kbytes. Packets within the CBS
defined for the service are marked green and passed through the QoS
module.
 Committed Information Rate (CIR) – IP-10G/E supports the following
granularity for CIR:
64Kbps <= CIR <= 960Kbps, in steps of 64Kbps.
1000Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000Kbps in steps of 1000Kbps.
100,000Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000Kbps in steps of 10,000Kbps.
 Committed Burst Size (CBS) – IP-10G/E supports the following
granularity for CBS:
For 64Kbps <= CIR <= 960Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 273,404 Bytes.
For 1000Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 132,585 Bytes.
For 100,000Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 4,192,668 Bytes.
 Data type – The rate can be limited based on the following data types:
None (no limiting), Unknown unicast, Unknown multicast, Broadcast,
Multicast, Unicast, Management, ARP, TCP-Data, TCP-Control, UDP,
Non- UDP, Non-TCP-UDP, Queue1, Queue2, Queue3, Queue4.
Note: Management frames are BPDUs processed by the system’s
IDC, when processing L2 protocols (e.g., xSTP).
Limit Exceed Action
Discard Frame.
Note: The rate for rate limiting is measured for all Layer 1 bytes,
meaning: Preamble (8bytes) + Frame's DA to CRC + IFG (12
Bytes)
13.1.1.3 Queue Management, Scheduling, and Shaping

IP-10G/E’s standard QoS has four priority queues. The queue controller
distributes frames to the queues according to the classifier. The fourth queue
is the highest priority queue, and the first queue is the lowest priority queue.
The scheduler determines how frames are output from the queues. IP-10G/E’s
standard QoS supports the following scheduling schemes:
 Strict Priority for all queues.
 Strict Priority for the fourth queue, and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) for
the remaining queues.
 Strict Priority for the fourth and third queues, and WRR for second and
first queues.
 WRR for all queues.
In a WRR scheduling scheme, a weight is assigned to each queue, so that
frames egress from the queues according to their assigned weight, in order to

avoid starvation of lower priority queues. In addition, frames egress in a

mixed manner, in order to avoid bursts of frames from the same queue.
Each queue’s weight can be configured. A queue's weight is used by the
scheduler when the specific queue is part of a WRR scheduling scheme.
Queue-Weight can be configured in the range of 1-32. The default queue
weights are 8,4,2,1.
The shaper determines the scheduler rate (egress rate limit). The shaper can
be enabled and disabled by the user. By default, the shaper is disabled.
The shaper rate is set with the following granularity:
For 64Kbps <= Rate <= 960Kbps, in steps of 64Kbps.
For 1000Kbps <= Rate <= 100,000Kbps in steps of 1000Kbps.
For 100,000Kbps < Rate <= 1,000,000Kbps in steps of 10,000Kbps.
13.1.2 Enhanced QoS Overview

Enhanced QoS provides an enhanced and expanded feature set. The tools
provided by enhanced QoS apply to egress traffic on the radio port, which is
where bottlenecks generally occur.
Enhanced QoS capabilities include:
 Enhanced classification criteria
 CIR/CBS and EIR/EBS support
 255 MEF-compliant policers with trTCM support.
 Policers per port, service (VLAN+CoS), and CoS
 Eight priority queues with configurable buffer length
 An enhanced scheduler based on Strict Priority, Weighted Fair Queue
(WFQ), or a hybrid approach that combines Strict Priority and WFQ
 Shaper per priority queue
 WRED support, along with Tail-Drop, for congestion management
 A PTP Optimized Transport dedicated channel for time synchronization
protocols
 Enhanced PM and statistics
These and other IP-10G/E enhanced QoS features enable operators to provide
differentiated services with strict SLA while maximizing network resource
utilization. Enhanced QoS requires a license, and can be enabled and disabled
by the user.

The following figure illustrates the basic building blocks and traffic flow of
enhanced QoS.
The initial step in the enhanced QoS traffic flow is the classifier, which
provides granular service classification based on a number of user-defined
criteria.
The classifier marks the Service ID, CoS, and color of the frames. If a frame’s
VLAN ID matches a Service ID that is mapped to a policer, the frame is sent to
the policer. Untagged frames or frames whose VLAN ID does not match a
defined Service ID are sent directly to a queue, based on the frame’s CoS and
color.
Enhanced QoS provides up to 255 user-defined TrTCM policers. The policers
implement a bandwidth profile, based on CIR/EIR, CBS/EBS, and several other
criteria.
The next step after the TrTCM policers is queue management. Queue
management determines which packets enter which of the eight available
queues. Queue management also includes congestion management, which can
be implemented by Tail-Drop or WRED.
Frames are sent out of the queues according to scheduling and shaping, IP-
10G/E’s enhanced QoS module provides a unique hierarchical scheduling
model that includes four priorities, with WFQ within each priority and shaping
per queue. This model enables operators to define flexible and highly granular
QoS schemes for any mix of services.
Finally, the enhanced QoS module re-marks the P-bits and CFI/DEI bits of the
most outer VLAN according to the CoS and color decision in the classifier. This
step is also known as the modifier.

13.1.2.1 Queue Management

Queue management is the process by which packets are assigned to priority
queues. Queue management also includes congestion management. IP-10G
provides the tail-drop method of congestion management, and enhanced QoS
also offers Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED).
Enhanced QoS supports eight queues with configurable buffer size. The user
can specify the buffer size of each queue independently. The total amount of
memory dedicated to these queue buffers is 4Mb, and the size of each queue
can be set in granularity of 0.5Mb. The default buffer size is 0.5Mb for each
queue.
The following considerations should be taken into account in determining the
proper buffer size:
 Latency considerations – If low latency is required (users would rather
drop frames in the queue than increase latency) small buffer sizes are
preferable.
Note: The actual, effective buffer size of the queue can be less than
0.5Mb based on the configuration of the WRED tail drop
curve.
 Throughput immunity to fast bursts – When traffic is characterized by
fast bursts, it is recommended to increase the buffer sizes of the priority
queues to prevent packet loss. Of course, this comes at the cost of a
possible increase in latency.
User can configure burst size as a tradeoff between latency and immunity to
bursts, according the application requirements.
One of the key features of IP-10G’s enhanced QoS is the use of WRED to
manage congestion scenarios. WRED provides several advantages over the
standard tail-drop congestion management method.
WRED enables differentiation between higher and lower priority traffic based
on CoS. Moreover, WRED can increase capacity utilization by eliminating the
phenomenon of global synchronization. Global synchronization occurs when
TCP flows sharing bottleneck conditions receive loss indications at around the
same time. This can result in periods during which link bandwidth utilization
drops significantly as a consequence of a simultaneous falling to a ”slow start”
of all the TCP flows.

13.1.2.2 Scheduling and Shaping

Scheduling and shaping determine how traffic is sent on to the radio from the
queues. Scheduling determines the priority among the queues, and shaping
determines the traffic profile for each queue.
IP-10G’s enhanced QoS module provides a unique hierarchical scheduling
model that includes four priorities, with Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) within
each priority, and shaping per port and per queue. This model enables
operators to define flexible and highly granular QoS schemes for any mix of
services.
Shaping
The egress shaper is used to shape the traffic profile sent to the radio. In
enhanced QoS mode, there is an egress shaper for each priority queue. The
user can configure the following parameters:
 Global shaper admin – Enables/disables all of the eight shapers.
 Shaper admin – Enables/disables each shaper for each priority queue.
 CIR – Committed Information Rate (as specified by MEF 10.2).
 CBS – Committed Buffer Size (as specified by MEF 10.2).
 Line compensation – Represents the number of bytes to compensate in
the shaper credits counting for the Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) and the
preamble + SFD fields between the two consecutive Ethernet frames. The
default value is 20 bytes, which is the number of bytes used for IFG +
preamble + SFD according to the Ethernet standard.
Note: The user can configure the shaper to count in L2 by setting
line compensation to zero. The user can also “punish” short
frame senders for the overhead they cause in the network
by increasing the line compensation to a value above 20
bytes.
Scheduling
IP-10G’s enhanced QoS mechanism provides Strict Priority and Weighted Fair
Queue (WFQ) for scheduling. Users can configure a combination of both
methods to achieve the optimal results for their unique network
requirements.
Each priority queue has a configurable strict priority from 1 to 4
(4=High;1=Low). WFQ weights are used to partition bandwidth between
queues of the same priority.
For each queue, the user configures the following parameters:
 Priority (1 to 4) – The priority value is strictly applied. This means the
queue with higher priority will egress before a queue with lower priority,
regardless of WFQ weights.
 WFQ weight (1 to 15) – Defines the ratio between the bandwidth given to
queues of the same priority. For example if queue 6 and queue 7 are
assigned WFQ weights of 4 and 8, respectively (using the notations of the
above figure), then under congestion conditions queue 7 will be allowed to
transmit twice as much bandwidth as queue 6.

Note: In order to be able to egress frames, each queue must also

have enough credits in its shaper.
13.1.2.3 Configurable P-Bit and CFI/DEI Re-Marking

When enabled, the re-marker modifies each packet’s 802.1p P-Bit and CFI/DEI
bit fields. 802.1p is modified according to the classifier decision.
The CFI/DEI (color) field is modified according to the classifier and policer
decision. The color is first determined by a classifier and may be later
overwritten by a policer. Green color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0,
and Yellow color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 1.

13.2 Configuring Standard QoS

 Opening the QoS & Rate Limiting Page
 Configuring the Classification Settings
 Configuring the Egress Scheduler
 Configuring Ingress Rate Limiting
 Remapping P-Bits
 Configuring VLAN-ID to Queue
 Assigning IP P-Bits to Queue
 Assigning Queues According to P-Bits
 Assigning Queue Weights
 Configuring Policers
 Defining the Static MAC Table
 Copying QoS Settings from One Port to Another

13.2.1 Opening the QoS & Rate Limiting Page

Most of the standard QoS configuration is performed in the QoS & Rate
Limiting page. To configure open this page and display the port settings:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > QoS & Rate Limiting. The QoS
& Rate Limiting page opens. This page includes the following sections:
Interfaces Table – Summarizes the current rate limiting settings for
the selected port.
Advanced Classifier Links – Includes advanced QoS parameters that
you can apply to ports.
Copy Ports Configuration – Enables you to copy the QoS
configuration from one port to another.

2 Click the + icon next to the port you want to configure to expand the port
settings.
13.2.2 Configuring the Classification Settings

Define the ports classification settings in the Ingress Classifier section of the
QoS & Rate Limiting page. A frame ingressed to the port will be classified
according to the four levels of criteria defined in this section.
1 Define the first criteria: MAC DA based. A frame ingressed to a port,
carrying a MAC Destination Address (DA) that appears in the Static MAC
table, will be classified, its VLAN P-bits will be overwritten (assuming the
frame egress is tagged) according to one of these options:
Disable - No MAC DA classification or VLAN P-bits will be overwritten.
No marking.
Queue decision - There will only be classification to queue. No
marking.
VLAN P-bits overwrite - Only VLAN P-bits will be overwritten
(marked). Classification according to a lower criteria.
Queue Decision & VLAN P-bits overwrite - Both classification and
VLAN P-bits overwrite.

2 Define the second criteria: VLAN ID based. If the first criteria is not
fulfilled (whether it is disabled, or the ingress frame does not carry a MAC
DA that appears in the Static MAC table), classification and/or marking
(VLAN P-bits overwrite, assuming the frame egress is tagged) will be
decided according to classification options defined in the VLAN ID to
queue table. Options are:
Disable - No VLAN ID classification or VLAN P-bits overwrite
(marking).
Queue decision - Only classification to queue. No marking.
VLAN P-bits overwrite - Only VLAN P-bits overwrite (marking).
Classification will be according to lower criteria.
Queue decision & VLAN P-bits overwrite - Both classification and
VLAN P-bits overwrite.
3 Define the third criteria. If both the first and second criteria are not
fulfilled (whether they are both disabled, or the ingress frame does not
carry a MAC DA or VLAN ID that appears in the tables), it will be classified
according to the following configuration:
VLAN P-bits - Classification according to VLAN P-bits. Queue is
assigned according to the VLAN P-bits priority remap table.
IP TOS - Classification according to IP TOS (IP precedence, or IP
diffserv). Queue is assigned according to IP P-bits to queue table.
VLAN P-bits over IP TOS - Classification according to VLAN P-bits, if
the ingress frame carries a VLAN and has an IP header.
IP TOS over VLAN P-bits - classification according to IP TOS, if the
ingress frame carries a VLAN and has an IP header.
Port (Default) - If any of the above criteria is not fulfilled, the default
classification will be assigned to the ingress frame.
4 In the Default classification field, select the criteria to use as the default
queue decision.
13.2.3 Configuring the Egress Scheduler

The Egress scheduler section of the QoS & Rate Limiting page determines how
frames are output from the queues.
 The fourth queue is the highest priority queue.
 The first queue is the lowest priority queue.
The following scheduling schemes are supported:
 Strict for all queues.
 Strict for fourth queue, and Hierarchical Round Robin (HRR) for third,
second, and first queues.
 Strict for fourth and third queues, and HRR for second and first queues.
 HRR for all queues.
In the HRR scheduling scheme, a weight is assigned to each queue, so that
frames egress from the queues according to their assigned weight, to avoid
"starvation" of lower priority queues. In addition, frames will egress in a
"mixed" manner, to avoid "bursts" of frames from the same queue.

Each queue weight can be configured, and the weight will be used by the
scheduler when the specific queue is part of the HRR scheduling scheme.
The queue weight is a value between 1 and 32, and is configured via the queue
weights table. The default queue weights are 8,4,2,1.
To define how frames are output from the queues:
1 Expand the port and go to the Egress Rate Limiting section of the QoS &
Rate Limiting page.
2 In the Egress shaper field, select On or Off to enable or disable the egress
shaper. The default is OFF.
3 In the Shaper rate field, enter the Kb per second for the egress rate limit.
The value should be in steps of 64K for values less than 1 Mbps; 1M steps
for values between 1 Mbps and 100 Mbps; and 10M steps for values
between 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps:
For 64 Kbps <= Rate <= 960 Kbps, in steps of 64 Kbps.
For 1000 Kbps <= Rate <= 100,000 Kbps, in steps of 1000 Kbps.
For 100,000 Kbps < Rate <= 1,000,000 Kbps, in steps of 10,000 Kbps.
13.2.4 Configuring Ingress Rate Limiting

The Ingress rate limiting section of the QoS & rate limiting window determines
the port ingress rate limit.
To specify the port ingress rate limit:
1 Expand the port and go to the Ingress Rate Limiting section of the QoS &
Rate Limiting page.
2 In the Attach policer field, specify which policer to attach to the port. You
can configure up to five policers for each port.
Each policer has the following parameters:
 CIR - Committed Information Rate. Rate limiting resolution is:
For 64 Kbps <= CIR <= 960 Kbps, in steps of 64 Kbps
For 1000 Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000 Kbps, in steps of 1000 Kbps
For 100,000 Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000 Kbps, in steps of 10,000 Kbps
 CBS - Committed Burst Size. CBS is CIR-dependent, and should be
configured in bytes:
For 64 Kbps <= CIR <= 960 Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 273,404 bytes.

For 1000 Kbps <= CIR <= 100,000 Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 132,585 bytes.
For 100,000 Kbps < CIR <= 1,000,000 Kbps, 0 < CBS <= 4,192,668
bytes.
 Data type. Rate can be limited based on the following data types:
None (no limiting)
Unknown unicast |Unknown multicast
Broadcast | Multicast | Unicast
Management | ARP | TCP-Control
UDP | Non- UDP | Non-TCP-UDP
Queue1 | Queue2 | Queue3 | Queue4.
13.2.5 Remapping P-Bits

You can re-mark p-bits per port. To re-mark p-bits:
1 In the Ingress Classifier section of the QoS & Rate Limiting page, click
VLAN Pbits Priority Remap Table. The P-Bit Remapping table opens.
2 In the Pbit field, select the p-bit you want to remap.

3 In the Remapped Pbit field, select the value you want to apply to p-bits
with the value selected in the Pbit field.
4 Click Apply.
5 Repeat for each p-bit value you want to remap.

13.2.6 Configuring VLAN-ID to Queue

The VLAN ID to queue page allows you to assign a frame to a queue according
to the frame’s VLAN-ID.
The number of table entries depends on the number of VLANs that have a
queue allocation definition. By default, VLANs do not have a pre-determined
queue allocation.
To assign VLANs to queues according to VLAN ID:
1 Click VLAN ID to queue link in the Advanced section at the bottom of the
QoS & Rate Limiting page The QoS-VLAN ID to Queue window opens.
2 In the Operation field, select Add or Delete to specify the operation type.
3 In the Start VID and End VID fields, enter the VLAN start and end IDs.
4 In the Queue field, specify to which queue to assign the frame.
5 Click Apply.

13.2.7 Assigning IP P-Bits to Queue

The IP P-Bits to Queue page enables you to assign a queue to a frame
according to the frame’s IP priority bits (IP-Precedence or Diffserv), assuming
the frame is an IP packet.
To assign a queue to a frame according to the frame’s IP priority bits:
1 Click IP P-bits to queue in the Advanced section at the bottom of the QoS
& Rate Limiting page The QoS-IP Pbits to Queue window opens.
2 In the IP priority options section, specify the IP type:

IP Precedence configuration: 8 entries.
DiffServ configuration: 64 entries.
3 Click Apply.
4 In the QoS IP P-bits to Queue section, assign a queue to each IP priority bit.
5 Click Apply.

13.2.8 Assigning Queues According to P-Bits

The VLAN P-Bits to Queue page enables you to assign a queue to a frame
according to the frame’s p-bits (CoS), assuming the frame is tagged.
To assign a queue to a frame according to the frame’s p-bits:
1 Click VLAN P-bits to queue in the Advanced section at the bottom of the
QoS & Rate Limiting page The QoS-VLAN Pbits to Queue window opens.
2 In the QoS VLAN Pbits to Queue section, assign a queue to each p-bit.
3 Click Apply.
13.2.9 Assigning Queue Weights

The Queue Weights page allows you to assign weights to each queue.
Queue weight is used by scheduler when the specific queue is part of HRR
scheduling scheme.
To configure the QoS queue weights:
1 Click Queue weights in the Advanced section at the bottom of the QoS &
Rate Limiting page The QoS-Queue Weights window opens.

2 In the Scheduler Queue Weight section, select one of the four QoS queues
in the drop-down list on the left and specify the weight for the selected
queue in the drop-down list to the right.
Queue weights can be configured in the range of 1-32.
The higher the weight, the higher the priority for that queue.
3 Click Apply to save your configuration settings.
In the QoS-Queue Weights table, click Refresh to display the current queue
weights.
13.2.10 Configuring Policers

The QoS-Policer List page enables you to add policy rules to a policer. You can
configure up to five policy rules per policer.
When a policer definition is completed, it can be associated with any port, by
attaching its name to the port. This will enforce all policy rules of the policer
on the port. You can use the detach command to remove the policer (and all its
policy rules) from the port.
To configure a policer:
1 Click Policer List in the Advanced section at the bottom of the QoS & Rate
Limiting page The QoS-Policer List window opens. The Policer List
includes the following columns:
Policer Name – Identifies the policer.
Attached Ports – Indicates to which ports the policer is attached.
2 In the Operation field above the QoS-Policer List section, select Add or
Delete to specify the operation type.
3 In the Policer Name field, enter a name for the policer. Note that the name
cannot include spaces. However, you can use underscores instead.
4 Click Apply. The new policer appears in the QoS-Policer List section.
5 Select a policer from the list and click its + icon to expand the policer
details.
7 In the Class name field, enter a class name for the policer.
8 In the Traffic type field, select the type of traffic to which the policer can
be applied.
9 In the CIR field, enter the CIR steps, in kbps.
10 In the CBS field, enter the CBS, in bytes.
11 Click Apply.
13.2.11 Defining the Static MAC Table

The Static MAC table is used to load static MAC addresses to the forwarding
table of the switch.
To define the static MAC table:
1 Click Static MAC in the Advanced section at the bottom of the QoS & Rate
Limiting page The QoS-Static MAC window opens.
3 In the VLAN ID field, enter the ID of the frame.
Each frame is attached with a VLAN ID.
Frames are learned and filed in the static MAC table under their VLAN
ID.

4 In the Static MAC field, enter in the 48-bit static MAC address, in octet
format (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx).
Note: The static MACs are never flushed.
5 In the Forward To field, select the destination port to which the frame
should be forwarded.
6 In the Priority field, select a priority level.
7 Click Apply.
In the QoS Static MAC table:
 VLAN ID – Indicates the ID of the frame.
 Static MAC – Indicates the 48-bit MAC address.
 Forward – Indicates which port the frame will be forwarded to.
 Priority – Indicates the priority level according to the QoS configurations.
13.2.12 Copying QoS Settings from One Port to Another

Since it is common to set QoS and rate limiting settings identically in several
ports, the Copy Ports Configuration option can be used to copy the
configurations from one port to another. This saves considerable time and
prevents configuration errors.
To copy a port’s QoS configuration to another port:
1 In the Copy Ports Configuration section of the QoS & Rate Limiting page,
select the source port from the Source port drop down list.
2 Select the port to which you want to copy the source port’s settings from
the Destination port drop down list.
3 Specify the copy operation to be performed:
Copy Priorities Configuration – Copies all traffic priorities using the
ingress classifier.
Copy Rate Limiting Configuration – Copies the policer configuration
only.

13.3 Configuring Enhanced QoS

 Enhanced QoS License
Enhanced QoS settings apply to the egress traffic on the Radio port (where the
bottleneck is located). All other ports function as usual. Standard QoS settings
continue to apply even when enhanced QoS is activated.
13.3.1 Preparing the System for Enhanced QoS

This section describes how to prepare the system to enable the Enhanced
traffic manager to minimize the impact on traffic.
In preparation for using the Enhanced traffic manager, you must disable the
QoS egress shaper. You should also classify the in-band management traffic to
ensure that the management signal is not affected.
13.3.1.1 Classifying In-Band Management Traffic

To configure the classification of the in-band management signal:
opens. Management ports are configured in the Management Ports section,
towards the bottom of the Management page.
2 In the bottom of the Management page, click Refresh. The current
parameters are displayed.
3 Select In-band or Out of band from the Type drop down list to configure
the management mode.
4 In the In-band Management VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN. ID that will
be used to manage the unit, when the In-band management type is used.
5 Click Apply.

13.3.1.2 Disabling the QoS Egress Shaper

To disable the QoS egress shaper:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet switch > QoS & Rate Limiting. The QoS
& Rate Limiting page opens.
2 Expand the radio port to open the port configuration options.
3 Go to the Egress Rate Limiting section.
4 In the Egress shaper field, select Off.

5 Click Apply.

13.3.2 Enabling Enhanced QoS

Note that enabling Enhanced QoS will affect traffic on the radio port.
To enable Enhanced Traffic Manager:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
Configuration & Parameters. The Configuration & Parameters page
opens.
2 Go to the Configuration section.
3 In the Enhanced Traffic Manager admin field, select Enable to enable

Enhanced QoS.
4 From the PM calculation mode drop down list, select the PM calculation
mode.
5 Click Apply.

13.3.3 Enabling PTP Optimized Transport

 Wayside Channel
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) optimized transport feature is a special
channel with low Packet Delay Variation (PDV), which is essential for timing
synchronization protocols such as IEEE 1588. PTP optimized transport
channel is a Constant Bit Rate Channel that is dedicated to the Precision Time
protocol with a constant latency that is invariant to ACM profile changes and
to any congestion conditions that may occur on the payload traffic path.
Upon enabling this feature, a special low PDV channel is created. This channel
has 2Mb bandwidth and carries all the frames mapped to the 8th queue. Once
enabling the feature, the user must make sure to classify all PTP frames to the
8th queue according to the criterion described above (e.g.,. by UDP destination
ports 319 and 320 for IEEE 1588 protocol). In this mode, all frames from the
8th queue will bypass the shaper and scheduler and will be sent directly to the
dedicated low PDV channel.
To enable PTP Optimized transport:
1 Ensure that the Wayside channel is disabled:
i Select Configuration > Interfaces > Wayside Channel. The Wayside
Channel page opens.
ii In the Wayside admin field, select Disable.

iii Click Apply to disable the Wayside channel.
opens.

3 Go to the Configuration section.
4 In the Precision Time Protocol optimized transport admin field, select

Enable.
5 Click Apply.
6 Classify all PTP frames to the eighth priority queue.IN PTP optimized
transport mode, frames from the eighth queue will bypass the shaper and
scheduler and will be sent directly to the dedicated low PDV channel.

13.3.4 Configuring Queue Size

Enhanced QoS supports eight queues with configurable buffer sizes. The user
can specify the buffer size of each queue independently. The total amount of
memory dedicated to these queue buffers is 4Mb, and the size of each queue
can be set in granularity of 0.5Mb. The default buffer size is 0.5Mb for each
queue.
The following considerations should be taken into account in determining the
proper buffer size:
 Latency considerations – If low latency is required (users would rather
drop frames in the queue than increase latency) small buffer sizes are
preferable.
Note: The actual, effective buffer size of the queue can be less than
0.5Mb based on the configuration of the WRED tail drop
curve.
 Throughput immunity to fast bursts – When traffic is characterized by
fast bursts, it is recommended to increase the buffer sizes of the priority
queues to prevent packet loss. Of course, this comes at the cost of a
possible increase in latency.
You can configure burst size as a tradeoff between latency and immunity to
bursts, according the application requirements.
Note: Changing queue size can impact traffic output.
To configure queue size:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > Enhanced Traffic Manager >
opens.
2 In the Queue Size section of the Configuration & Parameters page, select
the buffer size in the Queue Size field for each queue.
3 Click Apply.

13.3.5 Configuring Enhanced QoS Classification

The classifier is a basic element of each Enhanced Traffic Manager mechanism.
Each frame is given a Class of Service (CoS) and color (based on MEF 10.2
recommendations). Green frames refer to traffic that complies with the
configured CIR. Yellow frames exceed the CIR, but are still less than the
configured CBS.
Users can define several criteria that classify Ethernet frames. All the
classification criteria are divided into three hierarchies from the most specific
to the general.
13.3.5.1 Configuring Services

You can configure services per VLAN. To configure services:
Classification. The Classification page opens.
2 Go to the Services Configuration section, towards the bottom of the
Classification page.
3 Click Services Configuration Table. The Services Configuration Table

opens.

4 In the Row number field, enter the number of the row you want to
configure and press <Enter>. The window jumps to the row you entered.
5 In the Service ID column, an ID for the service (1-255).
6 Click Apply.
13.3.5.2 Configuring the egress CoS and Color Modifier (Marker)

You can configure the IP-10G/E to re-mark the P-bits and CFI/DEI bits of the
most outer VLAN according to the CoS and color decision in the classifier. This
step is also known as the modifier.
To configure the modifier:
2 Go to the Marker section, towards the bottom of the Classification page.
3 Select Enable.
4 Click Marker Configuration Table. The Marker Configuration Table
opens. The markers are sorted by CoS and color.

5 Click + next to the marker you want to modify. The marker is expanded.
6 Modify the P-bit value and/or the DEI/CFI value fields.

7 Click Apply.
13.3.5.3 Enabling Classification Rules

To enable classification rules for Ethernet frames:
2 In the First Hierarchy section, select Enable for the classification criteria.
More than one criterion can be selected.
To enable all first hierarchy criteria, select Enable all.
To disable all first hierarchy criteria, select Disable all.
3 In the Second Hierarchy section, select Enable for the classification

criteria:

4 In the Third Hierarchy section, select Enable for the classification criteria.
5 Click Apply.
13.3.5.4 Setting the Default Classification Settings

You can configure the default frame color and CoS for all unclassified frames.
Additionally, you can change the queuing hierarchy of the CoS settings. The
preconfigured setting for the CoS queuing hierarchy is that CoS 0 has the
highest priority and CoS 7 has the lowest.
To configure the default classification rule settings:
Classification. The Classification page opens. The default classification
settings are located at the bottom of the page, underneath the Third
Hierarchy section.
2 In the Default color field, select Green or Yellow to set the default frame
color.
3 In the Default CoS field, enter the default Class of Service for frames.

4 Click CoS to Queue Classification. The CoS to Queue Classification

window opens.
5 Expand a CoS.

6 In the Queue index field, enter the new Queue index for that CoS. Each
queue is a physical resource which can be assigned to accommodate
frames of a one or more CoS values.
7 Click Close to close the CoS to Queue Classification window.
8 In the Classification page, click Apply.
13.3.5.5 Configuring First Hierarchy Classification Rules

The first hierarchy contains the classification rules that apply to the most
specific traffic parameters. The first hierarchy contains following classification
criteria:
 Source MAC address
 UDP ports
 Known destination multicast MAC addresses
Any or all of these criteria can be used to classify the CoS for the frames.
Classification by Source MAC Address

Up to 16 separate MAC addresses can be configured.
To configure traffic classification rules according to the source MAC Address:
2 In the First Hierarchy section, click MAC Addresses Table to open the
MAC addresses configuration window.
3 Go to the Add New Entry section

4 In the Row number field, select the number to be displayed in the #
column for this classification rule.
5 In the MAC address field, enter the source MAC address that is being
classified.
6 In the CoS field, select the CoS to be assigned to traffic from this MAC
address (0 – 7).
7 In the Color field, select the traffic color to be assigned to traffic from this
MAC address. Options are Green (compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
8 Click Apply.
To edit the parameters of a MAC address that is already listed in the MAC
Addresses table:
1 Expand the MAC address.
2 Edit the MAC address, CoS, and/or Color fields.

3 Click Apply.
Classification by UDP Ports

Up to eight UDP port entries can be configured.
To configure traffic classification rules according to the UDP ports:
2 In the First Hierarchy section, click UDP Ports Table to open the UDP
Ports Table window.

3 Go to the Add New Entry section

4 In the Row number field, select the number to be displayed in the #
column for this classification rule.
5 In the Source port field, enter the number of the source UDP port that is
being classified.
6 In the Destination port field, enter the number of the destination UDP
port that is being classified.
7 In the CoS field, select the CoS to be assigned to traffic from this UDP port.
8 In the Color field, specify whether the frames associated with this UDP
port are designated as Green (compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
9 Click Apply.
To edit the parameters of a UDP source port that is already listed in the UDP
Ports table:
1 Expand the port.
2 Edit the Source port, Destination Port, CoS, and/or Color fields.
3 Click Apply.
UDP port configurations recommendations:

 To specify classification by UDP source port only, you should configure
Destination Port to 0.
 To specify classification by UDP destination port only, you should
configure Source Port to 0.
 When both the Source and Destination port parameters contain non-zero
values, the classification rule only applies to frames that match both the
Source and Destination ports.
Classification by Known Multicast MAC Address

You can classify the CoS and color of traffic that is being sent to one of the
predefined multicast MAC addresses.
The Known multicast MAC addresses table contains a list of 66 destination
MAC addresses which are reserved for network protocols use.
To configure traffic classification rules according to the known multicast MAC
addresses:
2 In the First Hierarchy section, click Known Multicast MAC Addresses
Table to open the Known Multicast MAC Addresses Table window.

3 Click the + icon next to a listed MAC address to view its details.
4 In the CoS field, select the CoS to be assigned to traffic from this MAC
address.
5 In the Color field, specify whether the frames associated with this MAC
address are designated as Green (compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant)
6 In the Validity field, select Valid or Not valid to specify whether the
classification rules are applied to frames that are sent to this destination
MAC address.
7 Click Apply.
13.3.5.6 Configuring Second Hierarchy Classification Rules

The second hierarchy enables you to determine CoS according to Service ID or
in-band management VLAN ID. The latter is used to give high priority to the
in-band management frames in order to prevent loss of the management
signal on the remote sites.
To configure the second hierarchy classification rules:

2 Go to the Second Hierarchy section.
3 In the 1st criterion, by in-band management VLAN ID field, select

Enable to Enable in-band management by VLAN ID.
4 In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID for the in-band management
signal.
Note: The VLAN ID is configured in the Management Ports section
of the Management window. Refer to Configuring In-Band
Management on page 89.
5 In the Color field, select Green or Yellow to specify the classification color
for the in-band management signal.
Green - The in-band management signal complies with the CIR.
Yellow - The in-band management signal complies with the EIR.
6 In the CoS field, enter a number between 0-7 as the CoS value for the in-
band management signal.
7 In the 2nd criterion, by Service Id field, click Service to CoS and Color
Classification Table. The Service to CoS and Color Classification Table
opens.

8 Click + next to the service to which you want to assign a CoS and color to
expand the service.
9 In the Service Name field, enter a name for the service.

10 In the CoS field, enter the CoS you want to assign to the service.
11 From the Color drop down list, select the color you want to assign to the
service.
12 From the Validity drop down list, select Valid.
13 Click Apply to save the settings.
14 When you have finished configuring services, click Close to close the
Service to CoS and Color Classification Table.
15 Click Apply to save the second hierarchy settings.
13.3.5.7 Configuring Third Hierarchy Classification Rules

The third hierarchy contains the classification rules that apply to the most
general traffic parameters. The third hierarchy contains three classification
criteria:
 VLAN P-Bits to CoS
 DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS
 MPLS exp Bits to CoS
VLAN P-bits to CoS

The first classification rule in the third hierarchy manages the outgoing traffic
according to the VLAN P-bits value that already exists on the frame.
You can configure the CoS and frame color of the traffic according to the P-bits
and CFI value of each frame.
There are two CFI options for each P-bit and a total of 16 classification rules
according to the VLAN P-bits.
To view VLAN P-bits traffic classification rules:

2 In the Third hierarchy section, click VLAN P-Bits to CoS and Color
Classification Table to open the VLAN P-bits to CoS and Color
Classification table.
In the VLAN P-bits to CoS and Color Classification table:

 # - Indicates the number of the classification rule.
 802.1 UP - Indicates the P-bit value for this classification rule. The range of
options is 0 to 7.
 CFI/DEI - Indicates the CFI/DEI value for this classification rule. The
options are 0 or 1.
 Class of Service - Indicates the configured CoS for this classification rule.
 Color - Indicates the configured color for this classification rule.

To configure VLAN P-bits traffic classification rules:

1 Click the + icon for a selected rule to view its details.
2 In the CoS field, enter the Class of Service you want to assign to the rule.
3 In the Color field, select Green or Yellow to specify whether frames with
the P-Bit and CFI/DEI value assigned to this rule are designated as Green
(compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
4 Click Apply.
DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS

Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) or Type of Service (TOS) is a 6 bit
length field inside the IP datagram header carrying priority information.
Classification by DSCP bits can be used for untagged frames, as well as 802.1Q
tagged or provider VLAN tagged frames. The classifier also supports
classification by Traffic Class (TC) of the IPv6.
Whichever IP protocol version is used, the classifier extracts the adjacent field
automatically.

To configure DSCP/TOC P-bits traffic classification rules:

2 In the Third Hierarchy section, click DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS and Color
Classification table to open the DSCP/TOS Bits to CoS and Color

the DSCP/TOS value assigned to this rule are designated as Green
(compliant) or Yellow (non-compliant).
6 Click Apply.
MPLS exp Bits to CoS

MPLS experimental bits are used to provide QoS capabilities by utilizing the
bits set in the MPLS labels.
MPLS Label Format
Classification by MPLS experimental bits is supported in both untagged and

802.1Q/provider tagged frames.
To configure MPLS experimental bits traffic classification rules:

2 In the Third Hierarchy section, click MPLS exp bits to CoS and Color
Classification Table to open the MPLS exp bits to CoS and Color
the MPLS value assigned to this rule are designated as Green (compliant)
or Yellow (non-compliant).
6 Click Apply.

13.3.6 Configuring Egress Policers

You can define up to 256 egress policers and map services to policers.
To define egress policers:
Egress Policing. The Egress Policing page opens.
2 Select Enable.
3 Click Policer Configuration Table. The Policer Configuration Table opens.
4 Click + next to the policer you want to define to display the policer
configuration settings.

5 In the Policer Name field, enter a name for the policer.

6 In the CIR field, enter the CIR value. The default value is 0.
7 In the CBS field, enter the CBS value. The default value is 12288 bytes.
8 In the EIR field, enter the EIR value. The default value is 0.
9 In the EBS field, enter the EBS value. The default value is 12288.
10 In the Color mode field, select Color aware or Color blind:
In Color aware mode, all packets that ingress with a CFI/DEI field set to
1 (yellow) are treated as EIR packets, even if credits remain in the CIR
bucket.
In Color blind mode, all ingress packets are treated as green regardless
of their CFI/DEI value. A color-blind policer discards any former color
decisions.
11 In the Coupling admin field, select Enable or Disable.
When enabled, frames that ingress as yellow may be converted to
green when there are no available yellow credits in the EIR bucket.
Note: Coupling admin is only relevant in color aware mode.
12 In the Line compensation field, enter the IFG + Preamble. The default
value is 20 bytes. The policer adds this value to the size of each arriving
frame size (e.g., frame size of 64 bytes will be handled as a frame size of
64+20=84 bytes). When Line compensation is 20, the policer operates as
Layer 1. When Line compensation is 0, the policer operates as Layer 2.
13 In the Admin field, select Enable to enable the policer.
14 Click Apply to save the policer’s configuration.
15 When you have finished configuring policers, click Close to close the
Policer Configuration Table.

16 In the Egress Policing page, click Service to Policer Mapping Table. The
Service to Policer Mapping Table opens.
17 In the Service ID field, enter the Service ID of the service you want to map.
18 In the Policer ID field, enter the Policer ID of the policer to which you
want to map the service. An ID of 0 is void, which means that no policer is
attached to the service.
Note: A service can only be mapped to one policer, unless you
select the Policer per CoS option described in the next step.
A policer can be mapped to multiple services.
19 Optionally, to use the Policer per CoS option (refer to Policer per Cos Option
on page 229).
i Select a Policer ID of 8 or a multiple of 8.
ii In the Value field, select On.
iii Click Apply.
20 Click Apply.
21 When you have finished mapping services to policers, click Close to close
the Service to Policer Mapping Table.
22 In the Egress Policing page, click Apply.

13.3.6.1 Policer per Cos Option

The Policer per Cos option allocates eight consecutive policers to the same
service. Each policer is assigned a different CoS value, and can be configured to a
different bandwidth profile. For example, if Service 3 is mapped to Policer 8 and
the Policer per CoS option is enabled:
 Policer8 > Service3; Cos=0
 Policer9 > Service3 ; Cos=1
Using the Policer per CoS option will consume eight policers from the total
pool of 255 policers.
Note: The Policer per CoS option can be enabled only for a Policer
with a Policer ID of 8 or a multiple of 8, e.g., Policer8,
Policer16,Policer24, …, Policer248 . When using the Policer
per CoS option, none of the 8 policers that are allocated to
the service can be used by other services.

13.3.7 Configuring WRED

Weighted Random Early Detect (WRED) mechanism can increase capacity
utilization of TCP traffic by eliminating the phenomenon of global
synchronization. Global synchronization occurs when TCP flows that share
bottleneck conditions receive loss indications at the same time. This can result
in periods during which link bandwidth utilization drops significantly as a
consequence of simultaneous falling to ‘slow start’ of all the TCP flows.
To enable WRED:
WRED. The WRED page opens.
2 In the WRED admin section, click Enable.

3 Click Apply.
The WRED profile curve describes the probability of randomly dropping
packets as the specific queue uses more bandwidth.
You can configure a separate WRED profile curve for each priority queue.
Additionally, you can configure different weights for yellow (non-compliant)
and green (compliant) packets so that the system drops yellow packets first.
To configure WRED traffic classification thresholds:
1 Go to the WRED Thresholds section of the WRED page.

2 Click the + icon for a selected queue to view its details.
3 In the Green packets low threshold field, specify the minimum

throughput of green packets for this queue. When this value is reached, the
system begins dropping green packets in this queue.
4 In the Green packets high threshold field, specify the maximum
throughput of green packets for this queue. When this value is reached, all
green packets in this queue are dropped.
5 In the Green packets maximal drop percentage field, specify maximum
percentage of dropped green packets for this queue.
6 In the Yellow packets low threshold field, specify the minimum
throughput of yellow packets for this queue. When this value is reached,
the system begins dropping yellow packets in this queue.
7 In the Yellow packets high threshold field, specify the maximum
throughput of yellow packets for this queue. After this value is reached, all
yellow packets in this queue are dropped.
8 In the Yellow packets maximal drop percentage field, specify the
maximum percentage of dropped yellow packets for this queue.
9 Click Apply.

13.3.8 Configuring the Egress Shaper and Scheduler

The Egress shaper feature is used to shape the traffic profile sent to the radio.
The Enhanced Traffic Manager enables you to configure an Egress shaper for
each priority queue.
When using the Enhanced Traffic Manager feature, the egress scheduler uses
the Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ) algorithm instead of Weighted Round Robin
(WRR).
Each priority queue is assigned a strict priority between 1 and 4 (4=High;
1=Low). WFQ weights are used to partition bandwidth between the queues of
the same priority.
To enable the enhanced egress shaping and scheduling:
Egress Shaper & Scheduler. The Egress Shaper & Scheduler page opens.
2 In the Global Shaper admin section, select Enable.
3 Click Apply.
To configure Egress shaper and scheduler for the priority queues:
1 Go to the Queue Configuration section of the Egress Shaper & Scheduler
page.

2 Select a queue and click the + icon to view its details.
3 In the Priority field, enter a number between 1-4 as the egress priority for
this queue. The queue with a higher priority egresses before a lower one
regardless of WFQ weights.
4 In the WFQ weight field, enter a number between 1 and 15 to set the WFQ
weight. This weight determines the ratio for allowed bandwidth to queues
with the same priority. For example, if queue 5 has a WFQ weight of 4, and
queue 7 has a WFQ weight of 8, then under congestion conditions, queue 7
will be allowed to transmit twice as much bandwidth as queue 5.
5 In the Shaper admin field, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable
the Egress shaper and scheduler for this priority queue.
6 In the CIR field, enter the number of Kbps to be allocated for CIR for this
queue.
7 In the CBS field, enter the number of bytes to be allocated for CBS for this
queue.
8 In the Line compensation field, enter the number of bytes that is
compensated in the shaper credits counting for the Inter-Frame Gap (IFG)
and the preamble + SFD fields between the two consecutive Ethernet
frames. The default value is 20 bytes which is the number of bytes used for
IFG + preamble + SFD according to the Ethernet standard.
9 Click Apply.
Note: You may want the Egress shaper to count in L2 by setting
line compensation to 0. You can also “punish” short frame
senders for the overhead they cause in the network by
increasing the line compensation above 20 bytes.

14. Setting Up Protected Configurations

 Protection Overview
 Configuring a 2+0
 Configuring Switchover Criteria
 Viewing Mate Parameters
 Configuring Multi-Unit LAG
Related topics:
 Troubleshooting Protection

14.1 Protection Overview

Equipment protection is possible in both standalone and nodal configurations.
The following protected configurations are available:
 1+1 HSB
 2+0 Multi-Radio
 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and Line Protection
 2+2 HSB and Multi-Radio
The following table summarizes the degree of protection provided by the
various IP-10G/E configuration options.
Comparison of IP-10G/E Protection Options
Configuration # of IDUs # of RFUs Radio Radio Capacity – Unit Native TDM Protection1 XPIC ACM BBS
per per Capacity – Failure Support Support (SD/FD)
Terminal Terminal Normal Support
1+1 HSB 2 2 1 1 Protected – TDM trails No Optional2 Optional

are duplicated in the
active and standby IDUs.
2+0 Multi-Radio 2 2 2 RFU Failure – 13 TDM capacity is doubled Optional Optional No

IDU (Slave) Failure – 14 but not protected.5
IDU (Master) Failure - 0
2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU 2 2 2 RFU Failure – 16 Protected – TDM trails Optional Optional8 No
and Line Protection IDU (Slave or Master) are duplicated in the
Failure - 17 active and standby IDUs.
2+2 HSB with Multi-Radio 4 4 2 2 Full protection Optional Optional No
1
TDM protection is not relevant to the IP-10E.
2
ACM is not supported when BBS (SD/FD) is used.
3
With graceful degradation.
4
5
Protection can optionally be provided using the SNCP/ABR mechanism. This
is done by defining a primary TDM trail over one radio carrier and a secondary trail
over the other radio carrier. The secondary trail will back up the primary trail in the
event of any failure (assuming the main IDU performing the node TDM XC is
functional).
6
7
8
ACM support is only provided for Ethernet traffic, not for TDM trails.
14.2 Configuring 1+1 HSB

 1+1 HSB Overview
 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Standalone System
 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Standalone System
 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Nodal System
 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Nodal System

 Multi-Radio
 2+0 Multi-Radio with IDU and line protection
 XPIC
Related topics:
 ACM with 1+1 HSB Protection

14.2.1 1+1 HSB Overview

A 1+1 configuration scheme can be used to provide full protection in the event
of IDU or RFU failure. The two IDUs operate in active and standby mode. If
there is a failure in the active IDU or RFU, the standby IDU and RFU pair
switches to active mode. TDM trails are duplicated in the active and standby
IDUs, so that both Ethernet and TDM traffic is protected.
In a 1+1 configuration, the protection options are as follows:
 Standalone – The IDUs must be connected by a dedicated Ethernet
protection cable. Each IDU has a unique IP address.
 Nodal – The IDUs are connected by the backplane of the nodal enclosure.
There is one IP address for each of the main units.
1+1 HSB can be used with BBS Space or Frequency Diversity.
The following figure illustrates a 1+1 HSB configuration in a standalone setup,
with an Ethernet protection cable connecting the two IDUs via their Protection
ports.
1+1 HSB Protection – Connecting the IDUs
A Protection Panel or protection split cable is designed to implement E1/DS1

splitters. Split cables must be used for Ethernet signals. Cables for other units
should be connected to the protection panel and cables. The traffic,
management, and wayside interfaces for both the active and the standby IDUs
should also be connected to the protection panel. It is also possible to use
Ethernet splitters to the FE and SFP (Optical GbE) ports.
The electrical GbE (10/100/1000) interface can be split by means of the
protection panel or protection split cables, subject to the following limitations:
 The interface should be set to Auto negotiation = OFF, Rate=100, and
Duplex=Full.
 When the standby unit is powered Off and back On, Ethernet traffic
running through electrical GbE ports in the active unit may be affected.

 Configuring Ethernet Ports

14.2.2 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Standalone System

For a 1+1 configuration, in a standalone system the IDUs must be connected
by a dedicated Ethernet protection cable.
Perform the following preliminary steps:
 Check the serial/part numbers section in the Configuration > General >
Unit Parameters page to verify that all the IDU’s are using the same
hardware versions.
 Check the software versions in the Versions table in the Configuration >
General > Versions > IDU page to verify that all the IDU’s are using the
same software versions.
 Check the license compatibility in the License features section in the
Configuration > General > Licensing page to verify that all the IDU’s are
using the same license.
 Check the IP Addresses Local IP configuration section in the Configuration
> General > Management page to verify that each IDU has a unique IP
Address and that all addresses are within the same subnet.
 Check the Type field in the Management Ports section in the Configuration
> General > Management page to verify that each IDU has the same
Management mode (In-Band or Out-of-Band).
For In-Band management, ensure that all IDUs have the same In-Band
VID.
To configure 1+1 HSB protection in a standalone system:
1 Disconnect all cables (radio, traffic, wayside, and protection), except for
the Management cable, from the units.
2 Turn on the Active unit.
3 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Active
IDU, or configure the IDU via terminal:
i Install the license (if necessary). Refer to Loading a New License Key on
page 77.
ii Upgrade the software (if necessary). Refer to Upgrading the IDU
Software Version on page 62.
iii Configure the radio parameters. Refer to Configuring the Radio
Parameters on page 152.
iv Configure the Ethernet Application Type to set the Switching mode.
Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch.
Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode on page 97.
4 Configure the required Management Type (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If you
use In-Band management, configure a management VLAN ID. Refer to
Configuring Unit Management on page 84.
5 For the Active IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
management might be lost for approximately 50 seconds.
6 For the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
7 Turn on the Standby IDU.
8 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Standby
IDU.

9 Perform the following configuration steps on the Standby IDU:

page 77.
iii Configure the Ethernet Application Type to the same Switching mode
as the Active IDU. Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch,
and Metro Switch. Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode
on page 97.
iv If you are using Metro Switch, set its Ether Type to the same value as
the Active unit’s Ether Type. Possible values are: 0x88a8, 0x8100,
0x9100 and 0x9200.
v Configure the Standby IDU to the same Management Type as the Active
IDU (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If you use In-Band management,
configure a management VLAN ID. Refer to Configuring Unit
10 For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
both units should start communicating, and transmitting their local MAC
and IP addresses to each other.
11 To verify communication between the two IDUs, check both IDUs to ensure
that there is no Mate Communication Failure alarm. If this alarm is active
on either IDU, installation of 1+1 HSB Protection has failed.
12 The management cable can be disconnected from the Standby IDU. Use a Y
splitter cable or the Protection Panel to connect both units’ management
interfaces.
13 Check if there is a Configuration Mismatch alarm on either IDU. This alarm
indicates that the IDUs do not have an identical configuration. If a
Configuration Mismatch alarm is raised:
i Enter a Copy to Mate command on the Active IDU. This copies the
configuration of the Active IDU to the Standby IDU.
ii Perform a Cold Reset on the Standby IDU. When the Standby IDU
comes back online, its configuration should be identical to that of the
Active IDU, and the Configuration Mismatch alarm should be cleared on
both IDUs.
14 Connect all traffic, radio, and wayside cables to both units (via the
protection panel, or via splitters).
15 Configure the Ethernet and E1/DS1 interfaces to Enable.
16 Perform a Copy to Mate operation to ensure that both IDUs remain
synchronized:
both IDUs.
17 Disable Protection Lockout and verify that there are no alarms on either
IDU.

18 Verify that the IDU connected to the RFU fed by the lower attenuation
channel of the RF coupler is in Active mode. If this IDU is in Standby mode,
enter a Manual Switch command.
Note: The same procedure should be performed on the remote
end while installing the radio.
14.2.3 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Standalone System

1 On the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
2 Disconnect all cables, including management, Ethernet, and radio cables,
from the Standby unit.
3 Remove the unit.
4 Insert the new Standby IDU in place of the old Standby IDU.
5 Connect only the management cable and/or the serial COM to the Standby
unit.
Note: It is important to connect a separate management cable to
the Standby IDU, rather than managing it via the Y splitter.
Radio and other line interfaces should not be connected at
this stage.
6 Set the IP address and Subnet address of the new Standby IDU. You can do
this via the CLI or the Web EMS.
7 Configure the new Standby IDU as follows:
page 77.
ii Upgrade to the software of the new Standby unit to match the software
version of the Active unit. Refer to Upgrading the IDU Software Version
on page 62.
on page 97.
iv If you are using Metro Switch, set its Ether Type to the same value as
the Active unit’s Ether Type. Possible values are: 0x88a8, 0x8100,
0x9100, and 0x9200.
8 Configure the Standby IDU to the same Management Type as the Active
IDU (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If you use In-Band management, configure a
management VLAN ID. Refer to Configuring Unit Management on page 84.
9 For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
both IDUs should start communicating, and transmitting their local MAC
address and IP address to each other.
on either IDU, installation of 1+1 HSB Protection has failed. Disconnect the
management cable from the new Standby unit.
11 Use a Y Ethernet splitter cable or the Protection Panel to connect both
units’ management interfaces.
12 Verify that the new Standby IDU is set to Standby mode.
13 Connect all traffic, RFU, and WSC cables to the new Standby IDU.


indicates that the IDUs do not have an identical configuration. To remedy
this:
both IDUs.
15 Verify that there are no alarms on either IDU.
16 For the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: Off.
14.2.4 Configuring 1+1 HSB Protection in a New Nodal System

For a 1+1 configuration, in a nodal system, the IDUs are connected by the
backplane of the nodal enclosure.
Perform the following preliminary steps:
 Check the serial/part numbers section on the Configuration > General >
Unit parameters page to verify that all the IDU’s are using the same
hardware versions.
 Check the software versions in the Versions table on the Configuration >
General > Versions > IDU page to verify that all the IDU’s are using the
same software versions.
 Check the license compatibility in the License features section on the
Configuration > General > Licensing page to verify that all the IDU’s are
using the same license.
 Check the IP Addresses Local IP configuration section on the Configuration
> General > Management page to verify that each IDU has a unique IP
Address and that all addresses are within the same subnet.
 Check the Type field in the Management Ports section on the
Configuration > General > Management page to verify that each IDU has
the same Management mode (In band or OOB).
For In-Band management, ensure that all IDUs have the same In-Band
VID.
To configure the protection:
1 Disconnect all cables (radio, traffic, wayside, and protection), except for
the Management cable, from the units.
2 Turn on the Active IDU.
3 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Active
IDU, or configure the IDU via a terminal.
4 Perform the following configuration steps on the Active IDU:
page 77.
iii Configure the radio parameters. Refer to Configuring the Radio
Parameters on page 152.

iv Configure the Ethernet Application Type to set the Switching mode.

Possible values are Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch.
Refer to Configuring the Ethernet Switching Mode on page 97.
v Configure the required Management Type (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If
In-Band management is used, configure a management VLAN ID. Refer
to Configuring Unit Management on page 84.
5 For the Active IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB. At this point,
management might be lost for approximately 50 seconds.
6 For the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
Note: Do not insert the Standby unit into its slot or turn its power
on at this point.
7 Connect a management cable to the management interface of the Standby
IDU.
page 77.
on page 97.
iv Configure the Management Type to the same Management Type as the
Active IDU (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If In-Band is used, configure a
management VLAN ID. Refer to Configuring Unit Management on
page 84.
9 For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB.
10 Turn off the power of the Standby IDU.
11 Insert the Standby IDU into its slot in the nodal enclosure.
12 Turn the power of the Standby IDU on. At this point, both IDUs should start
communicating, and transmitting their local MAC address and IP address
to each other.
14 The management cable can be disconnected from the Standby IDU. Use a Y
interfaces.
this:
both IDUs.
16 Connect all traffic, radio, and wayside cables to both units via the
Protection Panel, or via splitters.
17 Set the Ethernet and E1/DS1 interfaces to Enable.

18 Perform an additional Copy-to-Mate operation to ensure that both IDUs
remain synchronized:
both IDUs.
20 Verify that there are no alarms on either IDU.
21 Verify that the IDU connected to the RFU fed by the lower attenuation
channel of the RF coupler is in Active mode. If this IDU is in Standby mode,
enter a Manual switch command.
Note: The same procedure should be performed on the remote
end, while installing the radio.
14.2.5 Replacing the Standby Unit in a 1+1 HSB Nodal System

1 On the Active IDU, set Protection Lockout to: On.
2 Power down the Standby unit (the unit that needs to be replaced).
Note: Make sure not to power-down or otherwise re-configure the
Active unit to ensure that live traffic is not interrupted.
3 Disconnect all cables from stand-by unit, including management, Ethernet
and radio cables.
4 Remove the Standby IDU.
5 Turn on the power on the new Standby IDU, but do not insert it into the
nodal enclosure at this point.
6 Connect only the Management cable and/or serial COM (craft terminal) to
the new Standby IDU.
Note: It is important to connect a separate management cable to
the Standby IDU, rather than managing it via the Protection
Panel or a Y splitter. Radio and other line interfaces should
not be connected at this stage. Set the IP address and Subnet
address of the new Standby IDU using the CLI or the Web
EMS.
page 77.
ii Upgrade the software version of the Standby IDU to the same version
used in the Active IDU. Refer to Upgrading the IDU Software Version on
page 62.
on page 97.

iv Configure the Standby IDU to the same Management Type as the Active
IDU (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If In-Band management is used,
configure a management VLAN ID. Refer to Configuring Unit
v For the Standby IDU, set Protection Admin to: 1+1 HSB.
8 Turn off the power of the new Standby IDU.
9 Insert the Standby IDU into its slot in the nodal enclosure.
10 Turn the power of the Standby IDU on. At this point, both IDUs should start
communicating, transmitting their local MAC address and IP address to
each other.
12 The management cable can be disconnected from the Standby unit. Use a Y
interfaces.
13 Verify that new Standby IDU is set to Standby mode.
14 Connect all traffic, radio, and WSC cables to the new Standby IDU.
this:
both IDUs.

14.3 Configuring a 2+0 System

 2+0 Overview
 Configuring 2+0 Protection
Incompatible features
 1+1 HSB
 2+2 HSB
 Space and frequency diversity
Related topics

14.3.1 2+0 Overview

You can set up an IP-10G or IP-10E system in a 2+0 configuration. You can use
the XPIC, Multi-Radio, or both in a 2+0 configuration.
In a 2+0 configuration, each RFU is connected to an IDU via the IDU’s RFU
interface.
While a standard 2+0 Multi-Radio configuration protects against radio
malfunction or failure, a 2+0 Multi-Radio configuration with line protection
adds protection for the line interfaces, guaranteeing that there will be no
single points of failure.
Multi-Radio with line protection is only available for adjacent pairs of IDUs in
a nodal enclosure (slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6).
Selecting 2+0 HSB automatically configures Multi-Radio for the selected pair
of units. The active unit is the IDU that currently holds the line interfaces. This
unit will be the Multi-Radio master unit.
2+0 HSB radio blocking criteria consists of:
 Minimum ACM point and enable/disable
 Radio Excessive BER enable/disable
 Radio Signal degrade enable/disable
 Block/unblock traffic from radio link
2+0 HSB automatic state propagation criteria consists of:
 Radio LOF
 Excessive BER

14.3.2 Configuring 2+0 Protection

1 Select Configuration > Protection >Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page is displayed.
2. In the Protection configuration section:

i In the Protection admin field, select 2+0 HSB.
ii If no mate is associated with the unit, the Protection mode field will
be read-only, and the mode will be set to Active.
3. Click Apply.

14.4 Configuring 2+2 HSB

This section includes
 2+2 Overview
 Deploying a 2+2 Configuration
 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection
 XPIC and 2+2 Protection
 Replacing Units in a 2+2 Configuration

 Nodal configuration

 2+0 Multi-Radio with line protection
 Space and Frequency Diversity

14.4.1 2+2 Overview

2+2 HSB protection provides full redundancy between two pairs of IDUs. Each
pair is a 2+0 link, which can be configured for XPIC or in different frequencies.
If there is a failure in one of these pairs, the other pair takes over.
A 2+2 protection scheme must be implemented by means of a nodal
configuration. Each pair is inserted into its own main nodal enclosure, with a
protection cable to connect the main IDUs (in slot 1) in each pair. Protection is
performed between the pairs. At any given time, one pair is active and the
other is on standby. The Active IDUs transmit to the line and radio, and the
standby outputs of the IDUs are set to mute.
A 2+2 configuration scheme is only possible between units in a main nodal
enclosure (slots 1 and 2). Extension nodal enclosures (slots 3 – 6) are not
supported in a 2+2 configuration.
In a 2+2 configuration, the lower IDU in each pair is a master unit, and does
the following:
 Sends and receives traffic to and from the user through line interfaces.
 Receives protection information from the slave unit in the pair.
 Sends and receives protection information to and from a second master
unit. At any one time, one master unit is the decision unit, and the other is
the report unit.
In a 2+2 configuration, the upper IDU in each pair is a slave unit, and does the
following:
 Sends and receives traffic through line interfaces.
 Sends protection information to the master unit in the pair.
 Slave units always behave as report units. In other words, they are told by
the master unit whether to be in active or standby mode.
2+2 operation is similar to 1+1, as follows:
 Locking, forcing protection is done from master units only
 Copy-to-Mate operations are available separately in master units and slave
units.
 The same criteria (interfaces LOS, LOC, LOF) are monitored and compared
between active and standby units, with the comparison carried out by
master units.
 All enabled interfaces of all four IDUs are monitored.
 A missing slave unit is interpreted as LOS in its interfaces. A missing
master causes a No Mate condition.

14.4.2 Deploying a 2+2 Configuration

In order to deploy a 2+2 configuration, insert the two IDU pairs into separate
main nodal enclosures, and connect a protection (RJ-45) cable between the
lower IDUs (slot #1) using the protection connector on the front panel. Fast
Ethernet, TDM, and optical SFPs must be split between both lower units and
between both upper units.
There are three configuration options: protection disabled, 1+1 protection,
and 2+2 protection. The configuration is separate in each of the four IDUs, and
you must configure 2+2 in all four IDUs.
In a 2+2 configuration, a protection cable must be connected between the two
nodes via the Protection interface (RJ45).
All four IDUs in a 2+2 configuration must be the same hardware type (part
number) and must be configured to 2+2 protection mode. In addition, both
master IDUs need to comply with the following requirements (as in a 1+1
configuration):
 Same Ethernet switch application (Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, or Metro
Switch).
 Same management type (In-Band or Out-of-Band).
 Same In-Band VLAN. This VLAN may not be used for traffic.
 Different IP addresses within the same subnet.
2+2 external protection can work with or without XPIC, and with or without
Multi-Radio. In particular, in this case, all four IDUs must be configured with
the same script. Note that changing the script and radio frequencies in the
lower IDU will be copied automatically to the upper IDU.
Note: If you are switching from 1+1 to 2+2 configuration, you
must first set Protection admin to Disable.


14.4.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection

1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page opens.
2. In the Protection configuration section:

i In the Protection admin field, select 2+2 HSB.
ii If no mate is associated with the unit, the Protection mode field will
be read-only, and the mode will be set to Active.
3. Click Apply.

14.4.4 XPIC and 2+2 Protection
Related topics
 XPIC Recovery Mechanism
The XPIC recovery mechanism is disabled in a 2+2 HSB configuration. The
reason for this is that in case of a failure in a link, the system must switch to
the standby pair instead of attempting to recover the link, as in 2+0 XPIC.
Additionally, in order to assure that the conditions for XPIC exist (in
particular, having the same radio script and frequencies), the following
mechanisms are active in a 2+2 XPIC configuration:
 The following parameters can be changed only in the master units. The
changes are implemented in the corresponding slave units automatically:
Radio script
Radio TX frequency
Radio RX frequency
 If the change failed to be implemented in the slave unit for any reason, the
change in the master unit is rolled back, and an error message is displayed.
For addition information:


14.4.5 Replacing Units in a 2+2 Configuration

To replace a slave unit:
1 On the Master unit that is paired with the Slave unit you want to replace,
set Protection Lockout to: On.
2 Insert the new Slave unit.
3 Turn on the power on the new Slave unit.
4 For the new Slave unit, set Protection Admin to: 2+2 HSB.
i On the Master unit, perform a Copy to Mate operation to ensure that
both IDUs remain synchronized: Enter a Copy to Mate command on the
Active IDU. This copies the configuration of the Active IDU to the
Standby IDU.
both IDUs.
5 Connect the RFU to the relevant Ethernet, and PDH/SDH Y-cables/fibers.
To replace a standby master unit:
1. On the Standby Master unit, set Protection Lockout to: On.
2. Set the new IDU to default configuration while it is in standalone mode
(i.e., before inserting the IDU into the nodal enclosure).
3. Perform a Cold Reset on the new Master unit..
4. Configure the new Standby Master unit to the same Management Type as
the other IDUs in the system (Out-of-Band or In-Band). If you use In-Band
management, configure the same management VLAN ID as the other IDUs
in the system.
5. Insert the new Standby Master unit into Slot 1 of the Standby nodal
enclosure.
6. Turn on the power on the new Standby Master unit.
7. Connect the protection cable between the active master and the standby
master units.
8. For the new Standby Master unit, set Protection Admin to: 2+2 HSB.
9. On the Master unit, perform a Copy to Mate operation to ensure that both
IDUs remain synchronized.
10. Connect the RFU to the relevant Ethernet and PDH/SDH Y-cables/fibers.

14.5 Specifying Active and Standby Mode

If a mate unit is configured, you can specify which unit is the active unit.
To specify the protection mode:
1 Select Configuration > Protection >Protection parameters.
2 In the Protection Configuration section, in the Protection mode field,

select Active or Standby. If no mate is associated yet with the unit, the
Protection mode field will be read-only, and the mode will be set to
Active.
3 Click Apply to modify the protection mode.

14.6 Configuring Switchover Criteria

In the Protection parameters page, you can specify the protection switchover
criteria.
To disable protection switchover:
1 Select Configuration > Protection >Protection Parameters.
2 In the Protection Commands section, select On or Off from the Protection

lockout drop down list to enable or disable protection lockout.
To force a protection switch:
1 Select Configuration > Protection >Protection parameters.
2 In the Protection Commands section, in the Protection force switch field,
select On to force a protection switchover and freeze the protection state.
To manually switch protection:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection parameters.
In the Protection Commands section:
1 Click Manual switch to issue a switchover that will take affect when no
other protection related alarms are raised.
To enable radio excessive BER switching:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection parameters.
2 In the Protection Switch Criteria section Enable forced switchovers for

specific types of alarms.
i Radio excessive BER – Select Enable to initiate a switchover when a
radio excessive BER alarm is raised. This option is only displayed when
the MRMC script is regular or ACM is running in Fixed mode.
ii External alarm #1 – Select Enable to initiate a switchover when
external alarm #1 is raised.
Note: Since multi-radio protects against radio channel failure by
blocking the defective radio, in 2+0 HSB, radio failure or
excessive BER will not cause a protection switchover.

14.7 Viewing Mate Parameters

The Protection parameters page displays the mate unit’s IP and MAC
addresses, and provides a link to open the mate unit management system.
To specify the mate unit:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters.
In the Mate Parameters section:

 Mate IP address - Indicates the IP address of the mate unit.
 Mate MAC address - Indicates the MAC address of the mate unit.
To open the mate unit’s management system:
1 Click Open mate.
To copy the main unit’s configuration settings to the mate unit:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Protection Parameters.
2 Click Copy to Mate.
In the Protection Commands section:
 Copy to mate status - Indicates the status of the Copy to Mate command.

14.8 Configuring Multi-Unit LAG

Multi Unit LAG provides Ethernet line protection for the Gigabit Ethernet
(GbE) electrical and optical interfaces.
An external switch is connected to the HSB protected IP-10 link by means of
two static Link Aggregation (LAG) ports. The external switch can be another
IP-10 IDU or any third party equipment that supports static LAG protocol.
Multi-Unit LAG is supported with any of the following protection features:
 1+1 HSB
 1+1 Space or Frequency Diversity
 2+2 HSB
 2+0 Multi Radio with Line Protection
The following are some important Multi-Unit LAG configuration notes:
 Multi-Unit LAG is only supported in Smart Pipe mode.
 Multi-Unit LAG is supported in both standalone and nodal configurations.
 Multi-Unit LAG supports both electrical and optical interfaces.
In Multi-Unit LAG, an external switch is connected to the protected IP-10 link
by means of two static Link Aggregation (LAG) ports. The external switch can
be another IP-10G or IP-10E IDU or any third party equipment that supports
static LAG protocol.
Ethernet port 2
Ethernet port 1 (mirroring)
active
External LAG standby

switch
Ethernet port 2
Ethernet port 1 (mirroring)
The first LAG port of the external switch is connected to Ethernet port 1 of the
active IP-10G/E unit and the second LAG port is connected to Ethernet port 1
of the standby IP-10G/E unit.
In the 2+0 uplink direction (toward the radio), the external switch splits the
packets between the two LAG interfaces, which are connected to the primary
and the secondary IP-10G/E units. Ethernet packets received from the LAG
interface in the active IP-10G/E unit are sent to the radio.
To configure Multi-Unit LAG:
1 Enable protection. Each of the IP-10G/E protection features can work with
Multi-Unit LAG.
2 Enable static LAG on the External switch.

3 Connect the External switch LAG interfaces to port 1 of the active and
standby IP-10 units respectively.
4 Connect Ethernet port 2 of the active IP-10G/E unit to the Ethernet port 2
of the standby IP-10 unit.
5 Select Configuration > Protection> Multi-Unit LAG to open the Multi-
Unit LAG page.
6 In the Multi-Unit LAG admin section select Enable and click Apply to
Enable Multi-Unit LAG in the active IP-10 unit. Upon enabling, each IDU
will perform the following configurations automatically in both active and
standby units:
Enable port 2.
Set a LAG on port 1 and port 2.
Enable mirroring.
7 Upon disabling Multi-Unit LAG, the configuration implemented in Step 6

will be disabled automatically.
In 2+2 HSB configuration, Multi-Unit LAG can be activated between slot 1 of
the active nodal enclosure and slot 1 of the standby nodal enclosure and/or
between slot 2 of the active nodal enclosure and slot 2 of the standby nodal
enclosure, respectively.
Note: To improve protection switchover delays, it is
recommended to disable auto-negotiation and automatic
state propagation on all of the interfaces.

15. Configuring Diversity

This chapter includes
 Diversity Overview
 Configuring 1+1 Space Diversity
 Configuring 1+1 Frequency Diversity (BBS)
 Configuring IF Combining Diversity

15.1 Diversity Overview

Space Diversity and Frequency Diversity are common methods to negate the
effects of fading caused by multipath phenomena.
Space Diversity is implemented by placing two separate antennas at a distance
from one another that makes it statistically likely that if one antenna suffers
from fading caused by signal reflection, the other antenna will continue to
receive a viable signal.
Frequency Diversity is implemented by configuring two RFUs to separate
frequencies. The IDU selects and transmits the better signal.
IP-10G and IP-10E offer Frequency Diversity and two methods of Space
Diversity:
 Baseband Switching (BBS) Frequency and Space Diversity – Each IDU
receives a separate signal from a separate antenna. Each IDU compares
each of the received signals, and enables the bitstream coming from the
receiver with the best signal. Switchover is errorless (hitless switching).
 IF Combining (IFC) Space Diversity – Signals from two separate
antennas are combined in phase with each other to maximize the signal to
noise ratio. IF Combining is performed in the RFU.
Note: Frequency and Space Diversity configurations offer the
option of Ethernet line protection using Multi-Unit LAG.

15.2 Configuring 1+1 Space Diversity (BBS)

 Two antennas
 Two RFUs
 1+1 HSB configuration

 ACM
 Multi-Radio
BBS Space Diversity requires a 1+1 configuration in which there are two IDUs
and two RFUs protecting each other at both ends of the link. In the event of
IDU failure, Space Diversity is lost until recovery, but the system remains
protected through the ordinary switchover mechanism.
For BBS Space Diversity, the antennas must be separated by approximately 10
to 20 meters. In addition, 1+1 Protection must be enabled.
To configure 1+1 Space Diversity:
1 Select Configuration > Protection > Radio Diversity. The Radio Diversity
page opens.
2 In the Radio Diversity section, in the Radio diversity type field, select
Space diversity.
3 Click Apply.

15.3 Configuring 1+1 Frequency Diversity (BBS)

 Two antennas
 Two RFUs
 1+1 HSB configuration

 ACM
 Multi-Radio
BBS Frequency Diversity requires a 1+1 configuration in which there are two
IDUs and two RFUs protecting each other at both ends of the link. In the event
of IDU failure, Frequency Diversity is lost until recovery, but the system
remains protected through the ordinary switchover mechanism.
In frequency diversity, ATPC and Green mode can be enabled on each RFU
independently. You can enable and disable ATPC and Green mode, and can set
thresholds on each IDU independently. Since radio channel fading may have a
different impact on each frequency, it is recommended to allocate different
fade margins for each frequency.
For BBS Frequency Diversity, 1+1 Protection must be enabled.
To configure 1+1 Frequency Diversity:
1 Select Configuration > Protection >Radio Diversity. The Radio Diversity
page opens.
2 In the Radio Diversity section in the Radio diversity type field, select
Frequency diversity.
3 Click Apply.
Configurable options after enabling frequency diversity:
 Frequency diversity enabled/disabled (to be operational, 1+1 HSB must be
enabled as well)
 Revertive mode enable/disable
 Primary radio for revertive switches
 Revertive timer
 Switching commands
 Force to radio
 Manual switch
 Clear switch counter command
15.4 Configuring IF Combining Diversity

 Dual-receiver RFU (FibeAir 1500HP)
The RFU receives and processes both signals, and combines them into a single,
optimized signal. The IFC mechanism gains up to 2.5 dB in system gain.
Note: 1500 HP (11 GHz) 40 MHz bandwidth does not support IF
Combining. For this frequency, space diversity is only
available via BBS.
1+0 (IFC - IF combining) is a feature for configurations that use a single RFU-
HP with two antennas, two Rx ports and a single IDU. The selected signal line
output is based upon the Rx signal at the RFU. 1500 HP (11 GHz) 40 MHz
bandwidth does not support IF Combining.
When enabled, IF Combining parameters are located at the bottom of the
Radio Parameters window.
To configure IF Combining diversity:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio parameters.
2 In the Configuration parameters section, select Enable or Disable from
the Radio IF interface drop down list.
Note: Changing the Radio IF interface requires a system reset.
The Radio IF operational status field displays the current status of the radio
interface.
3 In the RFU mode field in the IF Combining Parameters section, select
Combined.
4 In the RFU mode field select Main, Diversity, or Combined.

Main - Only the main antenna signal is selected.
Diversity - Only the diversity antenna signal is selected.
Combined - The best signal from both antennas is selected.
Note: To use Combined mode, you must perform delay calibration.
5 Select which antenna is the source for the external connector.

6 In the RSL connector source field, select either Main or Diversity.

Main - The main antenna is selected.
Diversity - The diversity antenna is selected.
7 For Manual delay calibration, in the Delay calibration field, enter the
number of nanoseconds to delay between the main and diversity signals.
Note: Manual delay is used only for Combined mode.
8 For Automatic delay calibration, click Calibrate. The system automatically
calibrates the required delay between the signals from the main and
diversity antennas. The Automatic delay calibration field displays the
system status of the Automatic Delay Calibration feature.
Success –Indicates that the system has successfully calibrated the
signal delay
Failure –Indicates that the system cannot automatically calibrate the
signal delay.
No action –Indicates that the system has not performed an automatic
delay calibration.
Note: Automatic delay calibration can only be performed when
the system is error-free and there are no negative weather
conditions.
The following are read-only fields:
 Rx level diversity – Indicates the Rx level of the diversity antenna.
 Rx level combined – Indicates the Rx level of the combined signals.

16. Configuring Multi-Radio

 Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio
 Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection

16.1 Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio


 1+1 HSB
 BBS Space Diversity
 BBS Frequency Diversity
Multi-Radio enables two separate radio links to be shared by a single Ethernet
port. Multi-Radio can be used in 2+0 and 2+2 configurations. In a 2+0 Multi-
Radio configuration, the IDUs perform in master and slave mode in which each
Multi-Radio channel can carry up to 500 Mbps, resulting in a total 1 Gbps
capacity.
Because the Multi Radio interface uses the nodal backplane, a nodal
configuration is required for Multi Radio. Like XPIC, IDUs in Multi-Radio mode
can be placed inside a main node or extension node in any of the following
slots: 1 and 2 (main node), 3 and 4 (extension node), and 5 and 6 (second
extension node). Slot 1 is the bottom slot in the main node.
Ethernet traffic should be connected only to the lower IDU in a Multi-Radio
couple (slots 1, 3, or 5). TDM traffic can be connected to either slot.
Multi-Radio feature is applicable for Ethernet data only. For TDM, each link
remains separate, and users can decide to configure trails to either radio (or
both, by using SNCP or ABR).
Multi Radio can operate with both XPIC and ACM, and with any switching
mode such as Smart Pipe, Managed Switch, and Metro Switch.
Multi Radio requires that every IDU in the system be configured with Multi
Radio Enabled. Each unit must also use the same script and the same
hardware version.
Multi-Radio configuration options are only displayed after Multi-Radio is
enabled.
To enable or disable Multi-Radio:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters.
2 In the Multi radio section, in the Multi Radio admin field, select Enable,
or Disable.
3 Click Apply.

16.1.1 Multi Radio Traffic Blocking

Since traffic is distributed between both carriers at layer 1 level, a failure in
one of the radio links may cause all Ethernet frames to be affected. Therefore,
Multi-Radio take steps to ensure graceful degradation in the case of a failure.
You can configure a link to be blocked, so that the transmitter does not
distribute data to this link and the receiver ignores it when combining. By
default, blocking is disabled.
To enable traffic blocking:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio Parameters.
2 To enable the traffic blocking for either slot#1 or slot#2, in the Multi-Radio
section, select On for the corresponding slot field. All traffic is then sent to
the radio interface in the other slot.

16.1.2 Setting Multi-Radio Thresholds

You can configure Multi-Radio to shut down links when they drop below
configured thresholds.
To configure Multi-Radio thresholds:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Radio parameters.
2 To enable or disable shutting down the link if it drops below the signal
degrade threshold, in the Multi radio section in the Signal degrade admin
field, select Enable or Disable.
3 To enable or disable shutting down the link if it drops below the Excessive
BER threshold, in the Excessive ber admin field, select Enable or Disable
4 Click Apply to save your settings.

16.2 Configuring 2+0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection


 1+1 HSB
 BBS Space Diversity
 BBS Frequency Diversity
Another Multi-Radio option is 2+0 with Line Protection. 2+0 Multi-Radio with
line protection supplies additional protection for the line interfaces,
guaranteeing no single point of failure. In case of failure of any line interface, a
protection switch is initiated.
Note: 2+0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection cannot be used with
other protection configurations (1+1 HSB and 2+2 HSB).
In the case of Multi-Radio 2+0 with line protection every IDU in the system
must be configured with 2+0 with line protection enabled. As with ordinary
Multi-Radio, each unit must use the same script and the same hardware
version.
To configure 2+ 0 Multi-Radio with Line Protection:
1 Select Configuration > Protection >Protection Parameters. The
Protection Parameters page is displayed.
2 In the Protection admin field, select 2+0 with line protection.

3 Click Apply.

17. Configuring XPIC

 Conditions for XPIC
 Configuring the Antenna and RFU for XPIC
 Displaying XPI Values

 2+0 or 2+2 HSB configuration
Related topics
 XPIC Recovery Mechanism
Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is a feature that enables two
radio carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity separation between
them. Since they will never be completely orthogonal, some signal cancelation
is required.
In addition, XPIC includes an automatic recovery mechanism that ensures that
if one carrier fails, or a false signal is received, the mate carrier will not be
affected. This mechanism also assures that when the failure is cleared, both
carriers will be operational.
XPIC can be used in a 2+0 or 2+2 configuration. XPIC can be, but does not have
to be, used in conjunction with Multi-Radio.

17.1 Conditions for XPIC

XPIC is achieved using two IDUs inserted in a main nodal enclosure. One IDU is
used for the horizontal polarization and the other is used for the vertical
polarization.
XPIC IDUs can be placed inside a main node or extension node in any of the
following slots: 1 and 2 (main node), 3 and 4 (extension node), and 5 and 6
(second extension node). Slot 1 is the bottom slot in the main node. The data
of each polarization is marked by a different value, so the modem cannot lock
on the signal of the mate polarization.
When installing an XPIC system, each IDU and each RFU must be the same
hardware type. In addition, each IDU on both sides of the link must be set to
the same frequency. An appropriate alarm is raised if these requirements are
not met.
In order to activate XPIC, an XPIC script should be selected during initial
configuration. The same script must be used in all the IDUs on both sides of
the link.
After changing a script, the IDU must be reset.
17.2 Configuring the Antenna and RFU for XPIC

1 Install the dual polarization antenna and point it in the direction of the
other site.
2 Following alignment, verify that the link achieves its required RSL.
3 The antenna feeders may also need to be aligned (slight rotations) in order
to achieve the highest XPI (in absolute value) during installation, and no
less than 25dB. Refer to Displaying XPI Values on page 272.
4 Install the two RFUs on a dual polarization antenna using the appropriate
mounting kit, and mark the RFUs as V. and H. respectively.
17.2.1 IDU-RFU Cable Installation

1 Install two cables between the RFUs and the IDU. Note that the cable
length difference should not exceed 10 meters.
2 Mark the cables with V. and H. respectively and connect them respectively
to the IDU and RFU.
3 It is recommended to connect IP-10G/E units in the lower slots of a pair
(slots 1, 3, and 5) to the RFUs with vertical polarization, and the IP-10G/E
units in the upper slots of a pair (slots 2,4, and 6) to the RFUs with
horizontal polarization.
17.2.2 Antenna Alignment

1 Power up the lower IDU (V) on both ends of the link and configure it to the
desired frequency channel, and using the XPIC script with the maximum
power.
2 Align the antennas, one at a time, until the expected RSL is achieved. Make
sure the RSL achieved is no more than +/-2 dB from the expected level.

17.2.3 Polarization Alignment

Polarization alignment is required to verify that the antenna feeds are
adjusted, ensuring that the antenna XPD (Cross Polarization Discrimination) is
achieved.
Polarization adjustment should only be performed on one antenna.
1 Disconnect the V cable from the V RFU and connect it to the H RFU.
2 Check the RSL achieved in the H RFU and compare it to the RSL achieved
by the V RFU.
3 Verify that the XPI (Cross Polarization Interference) is at least 25dB
where:
XPI  RSL POL  RSL XPOL
RSL POL  Link RSL with the same polarization used at both sites.
RSL XPOL  Link RSL with orthogonal polarizations used at both sites.
4 If the XPI is less than 25dB, adjust the feed polarization by opening the
polarization screw and gently rotating the feed to minimize the RSLXPOL.
Note: Polarization alignment is not always possible since the
RSLXPOL might fall below the sensitivity threshold of the
RFU.
17.3 Displaying XPI Values

The current XPI value can be displayed in the Web EMS and the CLI (the value
is valid only when the modem is locked on a signal).
 Using CLI, enter the command xpi.
 Using Web-Based Management:
To view the current XPI value, select Configuration > Radio > Radio
Parameters from the menu bar on the left side of the main
management page.

Note: The XPI level field only appears if the IDU is using an XPIC
script.
To view XPI performance for intervals of 15 minutes or daily, select PM
& Counters > Radio > XPI from the menu bar on the left side of the
main management page. The XPI PM Report is displayed.
XPI PM Report
Note: In “clear sky” conditions, a normal XPI level is between 25

and 30dB.

18. Configuring TDM Trails

 TDM Trails Overview
 Viewing the Trails List
 Adding New Trails
 Activating and Reserving Trails
 Deleting Trails
 Configuring SNCP and ABR Trail Protection
 Configuring AIS Detection and Signaling

18.1 TDM Trails Overview

IP-10G provides the capability for the user to map any pair of interfaces in
order to created TDM trails. Interfaces may be the following:
 E1/DS1 line ports: Ports 1-16 are available in the lower SCSI connector;
ports 17-32 are available in the upper one (if a T-card is installed in the IP-
10G).
 VC-11/12 in STM-1 line port: Available as a T-card.
 Radio VCs: Each radio in the system has designated channels each of
which can carry a duplex TDM signal. These channels are called VCs and in
addition to the TDM signal they carry extra data used for monitoring.
Note: Radio VCs are proprietary and do not conform to SDH VCs.
They are terminated at line interfaces.
After a trail is created:
 TDM traffic (E1/DS1) is exchanged between the two interfaces.
 Line interfaces are enabled (if no trails are assigned to them, they are
disabled).
 The trail is monitored in order to raise indications and measure PMs.
The switching fabric is located in the main unit. Therefore, a failure in this unit
will cause all TDM traffic to fail unless the main unit is protected.

18.2 Viewing the Trails List

To view the trails list:
1 Select Configuration > Trails > TDM Trails.
In the TDM Trails List table:

 ID – Indicates the trail ID.
 Description – Indicates the trail description.
 Interface #1 and Interface #2 – Indicate the trail end points.
 Alarms status – Indicates the severity of the trail’s most severe alarm.
 ACM priority - Indicates the priority for which trails will be dropped first
from radio links when bandwidth is reduced.
 Operational status - Indicates whether the selected trail is Operational or
Reserved.
 Protected – Indicates if the trail is protected.

18.3 Adding New Trails

To add a new trail:

2 Click Add underneath the trails list to open the Add new trail window.
3 In the Add new trail window, select the first interface for the trail.
The interface can be a line (E1/DS1, STM-1/OC-3 VC-11/12, PW E1)
interface or radio interface in the system that is not used by any other
TDM trails.
For IDUs in a 1+1 configuration, TDM trails can contain interfaces in
only one of the IDUs.
4 Select the second interface. Interfaces 1 and 2 cannot be in the same radio
or IDU.
5 In the Trail ID field, enter a 15-character string to identify the trail. This
string cannot include spaces.
6 In the Trail description field, enter a 30-character string to describe the
trail. The trail description is provided to help users identify the trail. It is
not used by the system.

7 Select High or Low from the ACM priority drop down list. ACM priority
determines the order in which trails will be dropped from radio links
when bandwidth is reduced (in ACM).
8 Select Operational or Reserved from the Reserved/Operational drop
down list.
Operational trails occupy bandwidth and pass traffic.
Reserved trails do not occupy bandwidth and pass traffic, but they are
saved in the database, and new trails cannot be configured to these
interfaces.
9 To set up a secondary trail to cover the main trail if it fails, configure the
trail protection options. If you chose Protected 1+1 or Protected ABR,
you’ll be asked to select a third interface that will function as the end point
for the secondary path.
Unprotected trails are point-to-point. Protected trails allow traffic from
two different paths to be chosen.
i Select Protected 1+1 for an SNCP protected trail with permanent use of
bandwidth in both paths.
ii Select Protected ABR for an SNCP protected trail with better use of the
radio capacity in the unused path.
TDM trails configuration notes:
 Up to 180 TDM trails can be configured. A path-protected trail counts as
two trails.
 Trails must be configured accordingly on both sides of the link.
 If an IDU is disconnected from the nodal enclosure and ceases to function
as part of the shelf configuration, the removal will be treated as an alarm.
 The IDU can then function as a stand-alone unit, using a default E1/DS1
configuration.

18.4 Activating and Reserving Trails

To set the operational status of selected trails:
2 In the Activate and Reserve Trails section select Operational or Reserved

from the Status drop down list.
3 Click Set Selected.

18.5 Deleting Trails

To delete selected trails:
2 In the TDM Trails List table:

i Select the trails that you want to delete.
ii Mark the checkbox corresponding to each trail that you wish to include
in the delete operation.
iii Click Delete Selected below the trail list.
To delete all trails:
2 Click Delete All below the trail list.

18.6 Configuring SNCP and ABR Trail Protection

Path-protected trails are a special case of TDM trails, in which three interfaces
are configured in order to protect traffic from any failure along its end-to-end
path.
SNCP trails differ from unprotected trails in the roles of their interfaces:
 Interface 1: The end-point interface. Outgoing traffic is split between
interfaces 2 and 3.
 Interface 2: The primary interface; it will be initially active.
 Interface 3: The secondary interface; it will be initially standby.
Traffic will switch from the currently active interface to the standby interface
in the following cases:
 Signal failure
Note: When line interfaces (STM-1) are used along a TDM trail
path, AIS detection must be enabled for SNCP to work
properly.
 User command to force traffic to the standby interface
Note: Forcing traffic will cause the selected interface to become
active (even if its signal fails) until the user cancels this
setting (revertive mode is not supported at this stage).
To configure switch timeout for revertive protected trails
2 In the Switch timeout for revertive protected trails section, In the Trails
revertive switch timeout field, specify the number of seconds.

18.7 Configuring AIS Detection and Signaling

If enabled, a signal failure is generated at the corresponding trail, which will
prevent the far end from receiving a signal (including trail ID indications). The
trail status displays a Signal Failure message. In addition, an indication is sent
to the relevant interface.
This is not a system alarm, since the problem originates elsewhere in the
network.
To enable /disable AIS line detection:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > AIS.
2 In the AIS line detection admin section, select Enable or Disable.

3 Click Apply.

19. Configuring Synchronization

 Synchronization Overview
 Configuring the Synchronization Source
 Configuring the Outgoing Signal Clock
 Configuring PRC Regenerator Mode and Direction
Note: IP-10E does not support E1/DS1, STM-1/OC-3, and
pseudowire, so all references to these types of lines in this
chapter are only relevant to IP-10G.

19.1 Synchronization Overview

Frequency signals can be taken by the system from a number of different
interfaces (one reference at a time). The reference frequency may also be
conveyed to external equipment through different interfaces.
The available interfaces for frequency distribution depend on the hardware
assembly, as summarized in the following table:
Available interfaces as frequency Available interfaces as frequency

Hardware type
input (reference sync source) output
IP-10G R2  TDM trails  E1/DS1 interfaces
 E1/DS1 interfaces  STM-1/OC-3 signal
 STM-1/OC-3 signal  STM-1/OC-3 VC-11/12s
 STM-1/OC-3 VC-11/12s  Radio channels
 Radio channels  Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
 PW clock port  PW clock port
 Incoming PW signal  Reference clock for PW signals
IP-10G R3  TDM trails  E1/DS1 interfaces
 E1/DS1 interfaces  STM-1/OC-3 signal
 STM-1/OC-3 signal  STM-1/OC-3 VC-11/12s
 STM-1/OC-3 VC-11/12s  Radio channels
 Radio channels  Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces  PW clock port
 PW clock port  Reference clock for PW signals
 Incoming PW signal
IP-10E R3  Radio channels  Radio channels
 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces  Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
When using a radio channel to distribute a frequency, 2Mbps of bandwidth is

used for this purpose. However the following facts mitigate the loss of
bandwidth:
 When using TDM trails as a synchronization source (co-located mode), no
additional bandwidth is taken (the 2Mbps is already used by the trail).
 When distributing through a network, a single channel per radio link is
necessary to synchronize all the nodes in the network, regardless of their
number.
It is possible to configure up to eight synchronization sources in the system. At
any given moment, only one of these sources is active; the clock is taken from
the active source onto all other appropriately configured interfaces.
Note: At this point there is support for loops and for quality
indicators (SSM) in the radio interfaces only.

19.2 Configuring the Synchronization Source

To configure a synchronization source:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Synchronization > Sync Source. The
Synchronization page opens.

2 Select an interface from the displayed IDU to specify the synchronization

source. A drop-down list appears to the left of the IDU representation, and
the relevant fields beneath the IDU representation are automatically
populated.
3 In the drop down list to the left of the IDU representation, select the exact
synchronization source. For example, if you select a pseudowire interface,
you can select from PW reference clock or any of the E1 pseudowire
ports, as shown in the following figure.
4 Select a priority level for the selected synchronization source from the
Sync source priority drop down list.
Note: No two interfaces may have the same priority.
5 In the Quality field, apply a quality level to the selected source. This
enables the system to select the source with the highest quality as the
current synchronization source. Options are Automatic, G.811, SSU A,
SSU B, or g813/8262.
6 Click Apply.
7 Optionally, to configure a synchronization source revertive timer, go to the
Sync Parameters section and in the Sync source revertive timer field,
specify the number of seconds before timing out a synchronization source.
8 Click Apply.
At any given moment, only one of these sources is active; the clock is taken
from the active source onto all other appropriately configured interfaces.

The following restrictions exist for frequency distribution configuration:

 Synchronization source interfaces must not be assigned to a TDM trail,
unless the “tdm trail” interface is used. In this case, a pre-existing trail
must be configured.
 An interface can either be used as a synchronization source or can take its
signal from the system reference, but not both, except for SDH interfaces
which allow local loop timing.
 If no interface is configured as a synchronization source, no interfaces may
take its outgoing clock from the reference.
 If at least one interface is currently taking its outgoing clock from the
reference, the synchronization source cannot be removed.
 The clock taken from a line interface (E1/DS1, SDH, VC-11/12, PW E1,
Ethernet) cannot be conveyed to another line interface in the same IDU.
 The clock taken from a radio channel cannot be conveyed to another radio
channel in the same radio.
 In each IDU, only one line interface at the main board and only one at the
T-card can take its outgoing clock from the reference clock at any given
time. All other interfaces in the same board must make use of the local
clock.
19.2.1 Viewing Current Synchronization Sources

To view configured synchronization sources:
Synchronization page opens.
In the Current Sync Sources table:

 # - Indicates the number of the synchronization sources. There can be up
to eight synchronization sources.
 Valid – Indicates whether the configuration is valid.
 Slot Number – Indicates the slot number of the synchronization source.
 Interface Type – Indicates the interface type.
 Interface Index – Indicates the priority of the synchronization source.
 Quality – Indicates the synchronization source quality.
 Status – Indicates the status of the synchronization source.

In the Sync Parameters section:

 Transmitted SSM value – Indicates the SSM value derived from the clock
source.

19.3 Configuring the Outgoing Signal Clock

The Clock Source window configures the ports that output the clock source.
For each type of interface, you can specify whether the clock source is based
on a received sync source or the local internal IDU source.
19.3.1 Configuring Clock Sources

To configure the clock source:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Synchronization > Clock Source.
The Clock Source page opens.
2 Click an interface in the displayed IDU to configure its clock source.

3 From the Clock source drop down list, specify the clock source for the
selected interface. Options in the Clock source drop down list vary
according to the selected interface:
For radio interfaces, select the radio channel.
For line interfaces, select the port number.
For Ethernet interfaces, select Local for internal, or Sync if the clock
source is received from the sync source.
For STM-1 interfaces, select Internal to use the local clock source, Loop
to sync between the selected interface and the output destination, Sync
to use the sync source as the outgoing clock source value, and STM-1/
OC/3 VC to use one of the VC channels as the clock source value.
For pseudowire interfaces, select one of the E1 ports in the PW T-Card.

19.3.2 Viewing Clock Sources

To view configured clock sources:
1 Select Configuration > Interfaces > Synchronization > Clock Source.
The Clock Source page opens.
In the Current configuration table:

 Interface – Indicates the type of interface.
 Configuration – Indicates whether the interface is configured for
synchronization input or output.
 Clock source – Indicates the source of its outgoing signal clock.
None – Indicates that a clock source has not been configured for this
interface.
Local clock – Causes the interface to generate its signal from a local
oscillator, unrelated to the system reference frequency.
Synchronization reference – Causes the interface to generate its
signal from the system reference clock, which is taken from the
synchronization source.

19.4 Configuring PRC Regenerator Mode and Direction

Regenerator mode is a special mode for reproducing PRC quality reference
clock in SP application. This mode will be available only in SP applications and
will be activated upon user configuration (as in IP10). The reference clock
reproduction will be performed in 2 directions: from the interface to the radio
and from the radio to the interface (as described in the figure below). Both
operations are performed at the same time.
In IP-10 R3 systems operating in Smart Pipe mode, an additional
synchronization mode is available called PRC pipe regenerator mode. In this
mode, frequency is transported between the GbE interfaces through the radio
link.
PRC pipe regenerator mode makes use of the fact that the system is acting as a
simple link (so no distribution mechanism is necessary) in order to achieve
the following:
 Improved frequency distribution performance:
PRC quality
No use of bandwidth for frequency distribution
 Simplified configuration
19.4.1 Basic Operation

In PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is taken from the incoming GbE
Ethernet signal, and used as a reference for the radio frame. On the receiver
side, the radio frame frequency is used as the reference signal for the outgoing
Ethernet PHY.
Frequency distribution behaves in a different way for optical and electrical
GbE interfaces, because of the way these interfaces are implemented:
 For optical interface, separate and independent frequencies are
transported in each direction.
 For electrical interfaces, each PHY must act either as clock master or as
clock slave in its own link. For this reason, frequency can only be
distributed in one direction, determined by the user.
PRC regenerator mode does not completely override the regular
synchronization distribution, but since it makes use of the Ethernet interfaces,
the following limitations apply:
 In PRC regenerator mode, Ethernet interfaces cannot be configured as a
synchronization source for distribution.
 In PRC regenerator mode, Ethernet interfaces cannot be configured to take
the system reference clock for their outgoing signal.
 Frequency distribution through the radio is independent for each
mechanism and is carried out at a different layer.

19.4.2 User Configuration

For PRC pipe regenerator mode to work, the following is necessary:
 The system must be configured to Smart Pipe mode.
 Ethernet port #1 (GbE) must be enabled.
 Ethernet interfaces must not be configured as the system synchronization
source.
User can configure the following:
 PRC regenerator mode admin
 Direction of synchronization distribution (applicable only for electrical
GbE interfaces; for optical interfaces, this parameter is ignored)
Line to radio
Radio to line
Note: PRC regenerator mode is available only for R3 hardware

releases, and can only be enabled for Smart Pipe
applications.

To configure PRC regenerator mode:

Sync Source page opens.
2 In the Sync source regenerator admin field, select Enable or Disable to

enable or disable PRC regenerator mode.
3 In the Frequency transport direction for electrical GBE field, select
Line to radio or Radio to line to specify the PRC regenerator mode
direction.
4 Click Apply.

20. Configuring RSTP

 Network Resiliency Overview
 Setting the xSTP Protocol
 Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP
 Configuring Ethernet Ports to Support RSTP
 Configuring RSTP Priority

20.1 Network Resiliency Overview

IP-10G and IP-10E support the following spanning tree Ethernet resiliency
protocols:
 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) (802.1w)
 Carrier Ethernet Wireless Ring-optimized RSTP (proprietary)
Standard RSTP configurations are identical to those for Ring-Optimized RSTP.
The two protocols differ in the following respects:
 Topologies supported
Standard RSTP is meant to work with any mesh topology
Ring-Optimized RSTP is meant for ring topologies only
 Interoperability
Standard RSTP is fully interoperable
Ring-Optimized RSTP is proprietary
 Performance
Standard RSTP converges in up to a few seconds
Ring-Optimized RSTP converges in under 200ms in most cases
20.1.1 Standard RSTP

Standard RSTP is supported in both Managed Switch mode (regular VLANs)
and Metro Switch mode (Provider Bridge). Provider Bridge RSTP is
automatically activated when RSTP is enabled in a Metro Switch bridge.
In addition, Cisco PVST proprietary address is supported.
The following tables describe the behavior of provider bridge RSTP PDUs.
Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in CN Ports
Spanning Tree type Destination Address Ingress Action

Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to
all PN ports
Provider Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-08 Discard
CISCO PVST 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to
all PN ports
Provider Bridge RSTP PDUs in PN Ports
Spanning Tree type Destination Address Ingress Action

Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to
all the ports
Provider Bridge Group Address 01-80-C2-00-00-08 Perform Ring-Optimized RSTP
CISCO PVST 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD Add S-Vlan tag and multicast it to
all the ports

20.1.2 Carrier Ethernet Wireless Ring-Optimized RSTP

IP-10G/E’s proprietary RSTP implementation is optimized for Carrier
Ethernet wireless rings. Ring-optimized RSTP enhances the RSTP algorithm
for ring topologies, accelerating the failure propagation relative to ordinary
RSTP.
Ring-Optimized RSTP uses the standard RSTP BPDUs: 01-80-C2-00-00-00.
With IP-10G/E’s ring-optimized RSTP, failure propagation is much faster than
with regular RSTP. Instead of link-by link serial propagation, the failure is
propagated in parallel to all bridges. In this way, the bridges that have ports in
alternate states immediately place them in the forwarding state.
The ring is revertible. When the ring is set up, it is converged according to
RSTP definitions. When a failure appears (e.g., LOF is raised), the ring is
converged. When the failure is removed (e.g., LOF is cleared), the ring reverts
back to its original state, still maintaining service disruption limitations.
RSTP PDUs coming from Edge ports are discarded (and not processed or
broadcasted).

20.2 Setting the xSTP Protocol

 Network Resiliency license
Related topics:
To set the xSTP protocol:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch> STP Protocol. The STP Protocol
page opens.
2 Select RSTP or Ring RSTP.

3 Click Apply.

20.3 Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP

 Network Resiliency license
 Managed Switch or Metro Switch mode
Related topics:

 Ring RSTP Limitations
 Ring RSTP Supported Topologies
 Ring RSTP Performance
 Ring RSTP Management
 Ring RSTP Configuration
 Ring RSTP Installation

20.3.1 Ring RSTP Limitations

Users should be aware of the following Ring RSTP limitations:
 Ring RSTP is a proprietary implementation of Ceragon Networks, and is
not interoperable with other Ring RSTP implementations from third party
vendors.
 Ring RSTP provides improved performance for ring topologies. For any
other topology, the algorithm will converge but performance may take
several seconds.
 Ring RSTP can be used in Managed Switch mode and Metro Switch mode.
It is not available in Smart Pipe mode.
 Ring RSTP can be used with 1+1 HSB protection, but in some cases (change
of root node) the convergence time may be above 1 second.
20.3.2 Ring RSTP Supported Topologies

This section describes the IP-10G and IP-10E node configurations that can be
used as part of a ring topology using Ring-Optimized RSTP. For configuration
instructions for these two topologies, see Ring RSTP Configuration on
page 304.
Node Type A
The node is connected to the ring with one radio interface (e.g., East) and one
line interface (e.g., West). The node contains only one IP-10 IDU.
The Radio interface is directed towards one direction (e.g., East), and one of
the Gigabit interfaces (electrical or optical) is directed towards the second
direction (e.g., West).
The other line interfaces are in Edge mode, which means that they are user
interfaces, and do not belong the ring itself.

Node Type B
Using two IP-10G or IP-10E IDUs, this node is connected to radios in both
directions of the ring (East and West). Each IDU supports the radio in one
direction.
In this topology, Ring RSTP is enabled in one IDU. The other IDU operates in
Smart Pipe mode.
The IDUs are connected to each other using one of their Gigabit interfaces
(either optical or electrical). Other line interfaces are in Edge mode.
20.3.3 Ring RSTP Performance

The following failures will initiate convergence:
 Radio LOF
 Link ID mismatch
 Radio Excessive BER (optional)
 ACM profile is below a pre-determined threshold (optional)
 Line LOC
 Node cold reset (“Pipe” and/or “Switch”).
 Node power down (“Pipe” and/or “Switch”).
 xSTP port Disable/Shutdown
Notes: Ring port (non-edge port) shutdown will initiate
convergence, but since this is a user configuration, it is not
considered a failure, and is not propagated. When the user
issues a port shutdown, fast convergence should not be
expected.
The ring is converged in order to cope with physical layer
failures. Any other failure that might disrupt data, such as
interface configuration that excludes necessary VLANs will
not be taken care of by Ring RSTP.

The ring shall NOT converge optimally upon path cost

configuration, since such a configuration might force the
ring to converge into a different steady state (CQ19998).
The ring acquires its steady state in a non optimal time,
similar to standard RSTP.
Convergence performance is as follows:
 Up to 4 nodes < 150mSec
 Up to 8 nodes < 200mSec
Exceptions:
 10% of convergence scenarios might take 600mSec.
 Excessive BER convergence might end within 600mSec (CQ19230).
 HW (cold reset) resets, convergence might end within 400-600 mSec
(CQ20697).
 Radio TX mute/ un-mute convergence takes, in 5-10% of cases, 500 – 1000
mSec (CQ19926).
20.3.4 Ring RSTP Management

You can use either in-band or out-of-band management in a node using RSTP.
The advantages of in-band management are that management is protected by
RSTP along with other data traffic, and an additional interface in each node is
left free for traffic.
20.3.4.1 In-Band Management

In-band management is part of the data traffic. RSTP therefore protects
management traffic along with the other network traffic when the ring is re-
converged as a result of a ring failure.
When in-band management is used, IDUs set to Managed Switch are
configured to In-Band, while IDUs set to Smart Pipe mode are configured to
Out-of-Band. Out-of-Band. IDUs using Smart Pipe mode are connected to their
mates, which are using Managed Switch mode, via an external Ethernet cable
for management. This is because an IDU in Smart Pipe mode shuts down its
Gigabit traffic port in the event of failure, which would prevent management
traffic from reaching the IDU.
Note: If the IDU in Managed Switch mode loses power, its mate in
Smart Pipe mode will lose management access. As a result,
the entire node will lose management access. However, if
the IDU in Smart Pipe mode loses power, its mate in
Managed Switch mode will retain management access.
In band management provides additional free interfaces for traffic in each

node.

The following figure illustrates a ring with four nodes using in-band
management:
Resilient In-Band ring WSC Mng Mng

Eth1 Eth2 Eth3 Eth4 Eth5 Eth6 Eth7 Eth8
management
Managed Switch: In-Band
WSC Mng Mng

Management Single Pipe: Out-of-Band
Traffic Connectivity Radio

Radio
WSC Mng Mng WSC Mng Mng

Eth1 Eth2 Eth3 Eth4 Eth5 Eth6 Eth7 Eth8 Eth1 Eth2 Eth3 Eth4 Eth5 Eth6 Eth7 Eth8
Single Pipe: Out-of-Band Managed Switch: In-Band

Managed Switch: In-Band Single Pipe: Out-of-Band
Radio
Radio
Network
Management WSC Mng Mng
Managed Switch: In-Band

WSC Mng Mng
Single Pipe: Out-of-Band
20.3.4.2 Out-of-Band Management

Out-of-band management uses the Wayside Channel (WSC) for management
access to the IDUs in the network. An external switch using some form of STP
should be used in order to obtain resilient management access and resolve
management loops.
When out-of-band management is used, all IDUs must be configured to:
 Out-of-Band
 WSC Enabled

The following figure illustrates a ring with four nodes using out-of-band
management:
Resilient Out-of-Band
WSC Mng Mng
ring management Eth1 Eth2 Eth3 Eth4 Eth5 Eth6 Eth7 Eth8
Managed Switch
WSC Mng Mng

Management Single Pipe
Traffic Connectivity Radio

Radio

Single Pipe Managed Switch
WSC Mng Mng Mng WSC Mng Mng

Managed Switch Single Pipe
Radio
xSTP External
Switch, resolving
management loops. Radio
WSC Mng Mng

Network
Management Managed Switch
WSC Mng Mng

Single Pipe
20.3.5 Ring RSTP Configuration

This section explains how to configure Ring-Optimized RSTP in each of the
two node configuration types described in Ring RSTP Supported Topologies on
page 300.
20.3.5.1 Node Type A Configuration

The following are the basic configuration settings for the IDUs in a Type A
node:
 Switch application: Managed Switch
 Automatic State Propagation: Enable. The user can choose which faults
to propagate. It is recommended to enable all the options to gain
convergence upon any failure.
Note: Fast convergence cannot be guaranteed if Automatic State
Propagation is not enabled (CQ19363).
 Ring management:
For out-of-band management, at least three management ports in the
management gateway node, and two management ports in the other
nodes. WSC should be set to Enable.
For in-band management, at least two management ports in the
management gateway node, and one port in any other node. WSC
should be set to Disabled.
 Ethernet-Fast-Ring-RSTP: Enable
 Bridge level Ring-RSTP parameters should be configured (“Bridge
Priority”)

 Port Level Ring-RSTP parameters:

Only two interfaces that connect the node to the ring should be
configured as non-edge interfaces.
Non edge ports should have their Port Priority and Path Cost
configured.
Traffic ports should be configured to be Edge ports.
The Management and WSC ports should be configured to be Edge
ports.
20.3.5.2 Node Type B Configuration

The IDUs using Managed Switch mode should be configured using the same
settings described for a Node Type A configuration. Refer to Node Type A
Configuration on page 304.
The IDUs using Smart Pipe mode should be configured as follows:
 Switch application: Smart Pipe
 Automatic State Propagation: Enable. You can choose which faults to
propagate. It is recommended to enable all the options to gain re-
convergence upon any failure.
Note: Fast convergence cannot be guaranteed if Automatic State
Propagation is not enabled (CQ19363).
Note: It is recommended to design the ring to be constructed of
symmetrical radio links. This means that the radio links must
use the same switch application on both ends, e.g., Smart
Pipe with a Smart Pipe link, or Managed Switch with a
Managed Switch link. This is because Managed Switch does
not react to an LOC fault that might be propagated by a Smart
Pipe when they are in the same link. This can affect ring re-
convergence performance.
 Ring management: Out-of-Band. At least two ports must be configured as
management ports, with WSC enabled.
20.3.6 Ring RSTP Installation

This section describes two installation scenarios:
 Scenario 1: Configuring Ring-Optimized RSTP from scratch.
 Scenario 2: Replacing an IDU in a ring that uses Ring-Optimized RSTP.
20.3.6.1 Installation Scenario1: Node with no STP

1 Disconnect all Ethernet cables from the relevant IDU (except local
management if needed).
2 Insert the new IDU into its slot, and turn it ON.
3 Install licenses for L2 Switch and Network Resiliency in the IDU..
4 Configure the IDU, as explained in Ring RSTP Configuration on page 304.
5 Connect one “arm” of the ring to the node (the radio for example, without a
line).
6 Make sure the node “understands” its role in the network.

7 Connect the second “arm” of the ring. At this point, the ring should be re-
converged, and the alternate port should appear again.
8 Make sure the ring is converged properly, and all nodes are accessible.
20.3.6.2 Scenario2: Replacing an IDU in an RSTP Ring

1 Identify the port in the network that is now shut down due to ring failure.
2 Identify whether the IDU that should be replaced is or is not a root.
3 Turn OFF the IDU with the port that is shut down.
4 Disconnect all Ethernet cables from the IDU that is to be replaced.
5 Remove the IDU.
6 Insert the new IDU into its slot, and turn it ON. Do not connect Ethernet
cables to new units (except local management if needed).
7 Install licenses for L2 Switch and Network Resiliency in the new unit.
8 Configure the new IDU according to the configuration of the previous IDU.
It is recommended to download a backup configuration.
If the IDU was not root, it is recommended to configure its Bridge
Priority to a higher value than the current root, to ensure that the new
IDU will not be root.
If the IDU was root, it is recommended to configure its Bridge Priority
to a lower value than the new root, to ensure that it will become root.
If the IDU was operating in Smart Pipe mode, its configuration is not
relevant for RSTP.
9 Connect one “arm” of the ring to the node (radio for example, without a
line).
10 Make sure the node “understands” its role in the network.
11 Connect the second “arm” of the ring. At this point the ring should be re-
converged, and the alternate port should appear again.
12 Make sure the ring is converged properly, and all nodes are accessible.

20.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports to Support RSTP

In the Ethernet Ports that Support (Ring) RSTP table, each interface in the IDU
can be configured to support RSTP.
To configure supporting Ethernet ports for RSTP:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > RSTP. The RSTP page opens.
2 Click the + icon next to the port number to open port configuration.
3 In the Priority field, enter a number between 0-240 as the priority for the
selected port.
4 In the Path cost field, enter a path cost between 1 and 200000000. The
lower the value, the more likely that port is used.
5 In the Edge port field, select Yes or No to specify whether or not the port
is an edge port. Non edge ports are used as service access ports that
construct the ring.
6 Click Apply.

20.5 Configuring RSTP Priority

Configuring (Ring) RSTP priority allows you to determine the root bridge,
providing more control over the spanning tree path design.
There are two options for determining the root bridge:
 The IDU with the lowest priority.
 The IDU with the lowest MAC address.
The system first checks the priority field. If priority is configured for all of the
RSTP IDUs, the root bridge will be the IDU with the lowest priority.
If the system is unable to determine which IDU has the lowest priority – if the
priority isn’t set for all of the RSTP IDUs, or the priority is the same for all the
IDUs – the root bridge will be the IDU with the lowest MAC address.
You can avoid this by configuring priority for the path IDUs.
To specify the (Ring) RSTP root bridge:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch > RSTP. The RSTP page opens.
2 In the Priority field, specify the bridge priority by entering a number

between 0 and 61440, in multiples of 4096 (4096, 8192, 12,288, etc.). By
default the IDU priority is set to 32768. Enter a lower priority for the IDU
that you wish to serve as the root bridge.

21. Working with Service OAM

 Working with MAIDs
 Managing Local MEPs
 Managing Remote MEPs
 Working with MEPs
 Working with MIPs
 Performing Manual Ping and Linktrace Operations

21.1 Working with MAIDs

 Viewing MAID List Status and Details
 Adding MAIDs
 Deleting MAIDs

21.1.1 Viewing MAID List Status and Details

The MAID list table section displays details about each MAID.
To view a MAID’s details:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List page opens.
In the MAID list section:

 # - Indicates the domain number (internal number of the displayed
function).
 Status - Indicates the status of the current domain:
No MEPs – Indicates that no MEPs are configured yet for the selected
MAID. This state is used for empty domains, before defining MEPs, or
for a domain that contains only MIPs.
Monitoring - CFM (CCM) – Indicates that proactive monitoring is
running, no error found.
Failure – Indicates a connectivity error in at least one MEP.
 Domain name - Displays the maintenance domain name.
 Level - Indicates the maintenance domain level.
 Association name - Displays the maintenance domain association name.
 VLAN ID - Displays the identification # of the VLAN
 Send CCM - Displays the CCM status:
Disable - no continuity (CCM) frames are sent from the local MEP to
remote MEPs.

Enable - continuity (CCM) frames are sent from the local MEP to
remote MEPs.
 CCM interval - Indicates the (periodic) time interval during which CCM
messages are sent.
Valid values include 1Sec, 10Sec, 1Min, and 10Min.
Click the + in each MAID entry for more options.
21.1.2 Adding MAIDs

To add a new MAID:
2 Click Add to open the Add MAID configuration window.
3 In the Domain Name field, enter the name of the maintenance domain.
4 In the Level field, select the maintenance domain level.
5 In the Association name field, enter the maintenance domain association
name.
6 In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 as the MAID VLAN
ID.
7 Click Apply.
21.1.3 Deleting MAIDs

To delete MAIDs:
2 Select each MAID you want to remove.
3 Click Delete selected at the bottom of the page.
4 Click OK to confirm the deletion.

21.2 Managing Local MEPs

 Viewing Local MEPs
 Adding Local MEPs
 Deleting local MEPs

21.2.1 Viewing Local MEPs

The Local MEP section displays details for all the local MEPs that are
configured for the selected MAID.
To view local MEPs:
1 Select Service OAM > MAID List. The MAID List opens.
2 Select a MAID from the list.
In the Local MEP section:

 Local MEP ID – Indicates the ID of the MAID local MEP.
 Ethernet port – Displays the selected port number on which the local MEP
is located.
 MAC address – Displays Ethernet protection MAC address.
 Priority – Displays the P-bit priority that the CCM message carries.
 LDI - Local Defect Indication. If the value is Yes, click the + in the right
corner of the table to view the reasons for this bug.
 Connected – Indicates the connection status of the local MEP.

21.2.2 Adding Local MEPs

You can define additional local MEPs for the selected MAID.
To add a local MEP:
3 In the Local MEP section, click Add underneath the list of local MEPs to
open the Add MEP window.
4 In the Ethernet port field, enter the port number of the local MEP.
5 In the Local MEP ID field, enter a number between 1-8191 for the MEP ID.
6 In the Level field, select the MAID domain level.
7 In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 for the MAID VLAN
ID.
8 In the Direction field, select either Up or Down as the MEP direction.
9 In the Priority field, select the P-bit priority for the CCM message.
10 Click Apply.
21.2.3 Deleting local MEPs

To delete a MEP from a port:
2 In the Local MEP section, select each MEP you want to remove.
3 Click Delete selected underneath the list of local MEPs.

21.3 Managing Remote MEPs

 Viewing Remote MEPs
 Adding Remote MEPs
 Deleting Remote MEPs
 Pinging Remote MEPs
 Remote MEP Linktrace
 Enabling Automatic Linktrace for a MAID

21.3.1 Viewing Remote MEPs

The Remote MEP section displays details for all the remote MEPs that are
configured for the selected MAID.
To view remote MEPs:
In the Remote MEP section:

 MEP ID – Displays the remote MEP ID.
 Actual MAC address – Indicates the MAC address of the remote MEP,
which the local MEP recognizes.
 Configured MAC address – Indicates the configured MAC address. This is
USED when you decide to specify a selected MAC address for the remote
MEP.
 Status – Indicates the remote MEP connection status.
 Cross Check – Indicates whether current remote MEP was cross checked
(pre-configured) or learned from incoming CCMs.
 RDI – Indicates the Remote Defect Indication status.
 Ping – Allows you to ping (run a loopback) from the local MEP to a specific
remote MEP ID.
 Automatic Linktrace – Indicates whether Automatic Linktrace is enabled
for this MEP.
 The checkbox column is used to delete the selection or issue a linktrace
(ETH-LT) command from the local MEP to the current remote MEP.
21.3.2 Adding Remote MEPs

To add a remote MEP:

3 In the Remote MEP section, click Add underneath the Remote MEP list to
open the Add Remote MEP configuration window.
The upper part of the window displays a short summary of the MAID where
the remote MEP is being added.
 MAID <ID #> - Indicates the ID of the selected MAID.
In the bottom part of the Add Remote MEP window, define the new MEP.
1 In the Remote MEP ID field, enter a number between 1-8191 as the remote
MEP ID.
2 Optionally, in the Configured MAC address field, specify a selected MAC
address for the remote MEP.
3 Click Apply.
21.3.3 Deleting Remote MEPs

To delete a remote MEP:
3 In the Remote MEP section, select each MEP you want to remove.
4 Click Delete selected underneath the list of port MEPs.
5 Click OK.
21.3.4 Pinging Remote MEPs

You can ping remote MEPs. To perform a remote ping:

3 In the Remote MEP section, click the Ping icon for any MEP in the list to
open the Remote ping window.
The upper part of the window provides a short summary of the MAID.
The Ping to section provides a short summary of the remote MEP being
pinged.
 Remote MEP ID – Displays the remote MEP ID.
 Remote MAC address – Indicates the MAC address of the remote MEP,
which the local MEP recognizes.
The ping success rate percentage is displayed at the bottom of the window.
The success rate is the percentage of LBM packet transmission over the
received LBR packets.
21.3.5 Remote MEP Linktrace

You can perform a linktrace for any of the MAID’s remote MEPs. To perform a
remote linktrace:
3 In the Remote MEP section, select the MEP you want to trace.

4 Click Linktrace selected underneath the Remote MEP list.

Note: You can only trace one MEP at a time.
The Linktrace result section provides a short summary of the MAID and the
Remote MEP being traced.
 From - Indicates the ID and MAC address of the source of the trace.
 To - Indicates the ID and MAC address of the destination of the trace.
 Priority – Indicates the P-bit priority that the CCM message carries.
Linktrace results are displayed at the bottom of the page.
The table is refreshed automatically every fixed period of time (configurable,
set to 15 min by default), displaying the last updated date and time.
 Reply TTL - Displays the hop number.
 Mac address - Displays the hop (MEP/MIP) MAC address.
 Relay action - Displays the hop LTM relay action.
Click Ping to perform a ping on the returned linktrace hops or results.

21.3.6 Enabling Automatic Linktrace for a MAID

To configure automatic linktrace for a MAID:
3 Go to the Automatic linktrace parameters section.
4 In the Automatic linktrace interval field, enter a number between 60 and
3600 as the number of seconds for the linktrace interval.
5 Click Apply.

21.4 Working with MEPs

 Configuring CCM
 Viewing MAID Ethernet Ports
 Viewing Port MEPs
 Adding MEPs to a Port
 Deleting MEPs from a Port

21.4.1 Configuring CCM

Continuity check messages (CCM) are heartbeat messages sent by the MAID’s
MEPs to confirm connectivity with the other MAID entities. When enabled, the
settings will be applied to all MEPs and MIPs in the selected MAID.
To configure CCM:
3 Go to the CCM configuration section.
4 In the Send CCM field:

Select Enable to allow continuity messages to be sent over the MAID.
Select Disable if you do not want continuity messages (CCM) sent over
the selected MAID.
5 In the CCM Interval field, select the CCM interval. The interval can be 1
second, 10 seconds, 1 minute, or 10 minutes.
6 Click Apply.
21.4.2 Viewing MAID Ethernet Ports

The Ethernet ports section displays details for all the selected MAID Ethernet
ports. To view Ethernet port details:
1 Select Service OAM > MEP and MIP List. The MEP and MIP List page
opens.
In the Ethernet ports section:

 Ethernet port – Displays the Ethernet port number.
 MAC address – Displays the Ethernet port MAC address.
 Connector type – Displays the Ethernet port connector type.
 Function – Displays the Ethernet port function.
 MEP or MIP defined – Indicates with a check indicates that you defined an
MEP or MIP on this port.

21.4.3 Viewing Port MEPs

The Port MEPs section of the MEP and MIP list displays details for all the
selected MAID Ethernet port MEPs.
To view port MEPs:
opens.
2 Select an Ethernet port.
In the Port MEPs section:

 Local MEP ID – Indicates the ID of the MAID local MEP.
 Direction- Indicates the MEP direction: Up or Down.
 Send CCM - Displays the CCM status:
Disable - no continuity (CCM) frames are sent from the local MEP to
remote MEPs.
Enable - continuity (CCM) frames are sent from the local MEP to
remote MEPs.
 CCM interval - Indicates the (periodic) time interval during which CCM
messages are sent. Valid values include 1Sec, 10Sec, 1Min, and 10Min.
 Priority - The P-bit priority that the CCM message carries.
 LDI - Local Defect Indication. If the value is Yes, click the + in the right
corner of the table to view the reasons for this bug.
21.4.4 Adding MEPs to a Port

To add a MEP to a port:
opens.

3 In the Port MEPs section, click Add underneath the list of port MEPs. The
Add MEP to Port window opens.
4 In the Ethernet port field, enter the port number of the local MEP.
5 In the Local MEP ID field, enter the ID of the MAID local MEP.
6 In the Level field, select the MAID domain level.
7 In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 for the MAID VLAN
ID.
8 In the Direction field, select Up or Down to specify the MEP direction.
9 In the Priority field, select the P-bit priority for the CCM message.
10 Click Apply.
21.4.5 Deleting MEPs from a Port

To delete a MEP from a port:
opens.
3 In the Port MEPs section, select each MEP you wish to remove.
4 Click Delete selected underneath the list of port MEPs.

21.5 Working with MIPs

 Viewing Port MIPs
 Adding MIPs to a Port
 Deleting MIPs from a Port

21.5.1 Viewing Port MIPs

The Port MIPs section of the MEP and MIP list displays details for all the
selected MAID Ethernet port MIPs.
To view port MIPs:
opens.
In the Port MIPs section:
21.5.2 Adding MIPs to a Port

To add a MIP to a port:
opens.
3 In the Port MIPs section, click Add underneath the list of port MIPs to open
the Add MIP to port window.
4 In the Ethernet port field, enter the [Name | Number] of the Ethernet port
to which you want to add a MIP.
5 In the Level field, select the MIP level.
6 Click Apply.
21.5.3 Deleting MIPs from a Port

You can delete MIPs from a port. To delete a MIP from a port:
opens.
3 In the Port MIPs section, select each MIP you want to remove.
4 Click Delete selected underneath the list of port MIPs.

21.6 Performing Manual Ping and Linktrace Operations

 Pinging Remote MEPs and MIPs
 Performing a Manual Linktrace

21.6.1 Pinging Remote MEPs and MIPs

You can manually ping remote MEPs and MIPs.
To configure a manual ping:
1 Select Service OAM > Advanced > Manual Ping. The Manual Ping page
opens.
2 In the MAC address field, enter the target MEP/MIP MAC address.
3 In the Level field, select the MAID level.
4 In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 for the VLAN ID.
5 In the Priority field, select the P-bit priority bit for the outgoing ETH-LTM
packets.
6 Click Apply.

21.6.2 Performing a Manual Linktrace

To perform a manual linktrace:
1 Select Service OAM > Advanced > Manual Linktrace. The Manual
Linktrace page opens.
2 In the MAC address field, enter the target MEP/MIP MAC address.
3 In the Level field, select the MAID level.
4 In the VLAN ID field, enter a number between 1-4090 for the VLAN ID.
5 In the Priority field, select the P-bit priority bit for the outgoing ETH-LTM
packets.
6 Click Apply.

22. Viewing System Activity and Performance

 Displaying and Clearing PMs
 Displaying and Resetting RMON Counters
 Displaying Ethernet Statistics
 Displaying TDM PMs
 Displaying Radio PMs
 Viewing Radio Status
 Viewing Ethernet Interface Status
 Viewing RSTP Status
 Viewing Enhanced Traffic Management Statistics
Related topics:
 LED Indicators
 Viewing Current Alarms
 Viewing the Event Log
 Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface

22.1 Displaying and Clearing PMs

The Performance Monitoring commands window enables you to clear all
performance monitoring measurements in the unit, except for RMON.
To clear performance monitoring data:
1 Select PM & Counters > PM Commands. The PM Commands page opens.
2 Click Clear.
Many of the Performance Monitoring (PM) windows contain an option to
display the PM data as a graph.
All the reports described in this section can be displayed for the previous 24
hours in 15 minute intervals, or for the past month in daily intervals.
 To display reports in 15 minute intervals, select 15 Minutes.
 To display reports in daily intervals, select Daily.
To display a PM graph:
1 Click the graph icon at the top of the PM window, located to the left in the
figure above. The PMs appear in a graph format.

22.2 Displaying and Resetting RMON Counters

IP-10G/E supports Ethernet statistic counters (RMON) display. The counters
are designed to support:
 RFC 2819 – RMON MIB.
 RFC 2665 – Ethernet-like MIB.
 RFC 2233 – MIB II.
 RFC 1493 – Bridge MIB.
The statistic counters are divided into ingress statistics and egress statistics
To reset RMON counters:
1 Select PM & Counters > RMON. The Running Counters page opens.

In the Running Counters page:

 To reset a specific counter, click Clear at the top of the column.
 To reset all counters, click Clear All at the bottom of the page.
 Good octets received – Indicates the number of

 Bad octets received – Indicates the number of

 Unicast frames received – Indicates the number of
 Multicast frames received – Indicates the number of
 Broadcast frames received – Indicates the number of
 Pause frames received – Indicates the number of flow-control pause
frames received.
 Undersize frames received – Indicates frames shorter than 64 bytes
 Fragmented frames received – Indicates the number of
 Oversize frames received – Indicates frames longer than 1632 bytes
 Jabber frames received – Indicates the total number of frames received
with a length of more than 1632 bytes, but with an invalid FCS
 Fragments frames received – Indicates the total number of f frames
received with a length of less than 64 bytes, and an invalid FCS
 FCS frames received – Indicates the total number of f frames received
with CRC error, not counted in "Fragments", "Jabber" or "Rx error"
counters
 Rx error frames received – Indicates the total number of f frames
received with Phy-error
 In discard frames – Counts good frames that cannot be forwarded due to
lack of buffer memory
 In filtered frames – Counts good frames that were filtered due to egress
switch VLAN policy rules
 Frames 64 octets – Indicates the total number of frames transmitted with
a length of exactly 64 octets.
 Frames 65-127 octets – Indicates total number of frames transmitted
with a length of 65-127 octets.
 Frames 128-255 octets – Indicates the total number of frames
transmitted with a length of 128-255 octets.
 Frames >=1024 octets – Indicates the total number of frames transmitted
with a length of 1024 octets or higher.
 Good octets sent – Indicates the sum of the lengths of all Ethernet frames
sent from this MAC.
 Unicast frames sent – Indicates the number of unicast frames transmitted
to the radio port.
 Broadcast frames sent – Indicates the number of broadcast frames
transmitted to the radio port.
 Multicast frames sent – Indicates the number of multicast frames
transmitted to the radio port.
 Pause frames sent – Indicates the number of pause frames sent.
 Out FCS error frames – Indicates the number of frames transmitted with
an invalid FCS.
 Out filtered frames sent – Counts the number of good frames that were
filtered due to egress policy rules.
 Deferred frames sent – Indicates the total number of successfully
transmitted frames that experienced no collisions but are delayed because
the medium was busy during the first attempt. This counter is applicable in
half-duplex only.
 Collision events – Indicates the number of collision events seen by the
MAC not including those counted in 'Single', 'Multiple', 'Excessive', or
'Late'. This counter is applicable in half-duplex only.
 Single collision frames – Indicates the total number of successfully
transmitted frames that experienced exactly one collision. This counter is
applicable in half-duplex only.
 Multiple collision frames – Indicates the total number of frames that
have been successfully transmitted and have also experienced more than
one collision. This counter is applicable in half-duplex only.
 Late collision detect – Indicates the number of times a collision is
detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a frame. This
counter is applicable in half-duplex only.

22.3 Displaying Ethernet Statistics

 Displaying Frame Error Rate Statistics
 Displaying Throughput Statistics
 Displaying Capacity Statistics
 Displaying Utilization Statistics

22.3.1 Displaying Frame Error Rate Statistics

The Frame Error Rate report displays statistics about the Ethernet frame error
rate (%) measured on the radio Ethernet port.
To view Frame error rate performance:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Frame Error Rate. The
Frame Error Rate PM report opens.
In the Frame Error Rate PM report:

 Frame Error Rate (%) - Indicates the percentage of received error frames
relative to all frames received by the radio Ethernet port.
 Integrity - Indicates whether the values received at that time and date are
reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to
a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.

22.3.2 Displaying Throughput Statistics

The Throughput PM report displays radio Ethernet throughput statistics
(excluding TDM traffic), measured on the radio port.
To view Throughput PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Throughput. The
Throughput PM report opens.
In the Throughput PM report:

 Peak Throughput (bps) - Indicates the maximum throughput measured
during the last interval.
 Average Throughput (bps) - Indicates the average throughput measured
during the last interval.
 Throughput Exceed (Seconds) - Indicates the number of seconds the
throughput exceeded the threshold (configured in the field below the
table) during the last interval.

22.3.3 Displaying Capacity Statistics

The Capacity PM report displays statistics of the Ethernet capacity, including
Ethernet data and overhead bytes, measured on the radio port.
To view Capacity PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Capacity. The Capacity PM
report opens.
In the Capacity PM report:

 Peak Capacity (bps) - Indicates the maximum capacity measured during
the last interval.
 Average Capacity (bps) - Indicates the average capacity measured during
the last interval.
 Capacity Exceed (seconds) - Indicates the number of seconds the
throughput exceeded the threshold during the last interval.

22.3.4 Displaying Utilization Statistics

The Utilization PM report displays statistics of Ethernet utilization (%)
measured on the radio port.
Ethernet utilization is a measurement of actual Ethernet throughput, relative
to the potential Ethernet throughput of the radio, excluding TDM channels.
Ethernet utilization during the last interval is displayed as one of five bins:
 0-20% | 20-40% | 40-60% | 60-80% | 80-100%
To view Ethernet utilization statistics:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Ethernet > Utilization. The Utilization
PM report opens.
In the Utilization PM report:

 Range of Peak Utilization (%) - Indicates the maximum utilization
measured during the last interval.
 Range of Average Utilization (%) - Indicates the average utilization
measured during the last interval.
 Utilization Exceed (Seconds) - Indicates the number of seconds the value
exceeded the threshold during the last interval.

22.4 Displaying TDM PMs

 Displaying E1/DS1 Line PMs
 Displaying TDM Channel PMs
 Displaying TDM Trail PMs
 Displaying STM-1/OC-3 Line PMs
 Displaying Pseudowire PMs

22.4.1 Displaying E1/DS1 Line PMs

You can display E1 or DS1 line PMs. The E1 and DS1 PM pages contain a
separate PM window for each E1 or DS1 link in use.
To view E1 or DS1 PMs:
1 Select PM & Counters > E1> Port# or PM & Counters > DS1 > Port#. The
E1 or DS1 line PM report opens.
In the E1 or DS1 PM report:

 ES – Indicates the number of seconds during which errors occurred.
 SES – Indicates the number of seconds during which severe errors
occurred.
 UAS – Indicates the Unavailable Seconds value of the current interval. The
value can be between 0 and 900 seconds (15 minutes).
 BBE – Indicates the number of background block errors.

22.4.2 Displaying TDM Channel PMs

The TDM Channel report displays the unavailable seconds (UAS) of the
expected E1/T1 trails on the radio.
When ACM decreases, the capacity of the radio is reduced. Trails with
insufficient bandwidth in the radio link capacity may be dropped.
When a trail is dropped, its UAS counter will start counting the seconds for
which the trail was not serviced.
To view TDM radio PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > TDM channels > Channel#. The Channel
PM report opens.
In the Channel PM report:


22.4.3 Displaying TDM Trail PMs

End-to-end PM measurements are taken for TDM trails. This PM is based on
BER measurement, and not on code violation, which distinguishes it from line
interface PMs.
The measurements are the same as those for line interfaces (ES, SES, UAS,
BBE), but are based on BER measurements.
PM for trails is measured in the following cases, and is maintained in the
relevant IDUs:
 End point interfaces: trail end line interfaces
 Radio interfaces that perform SNCP
If TDM trail path protection is configured, the system performs measurement
on both the primary and secondary paths.
To display PMs for a trail:
1 Select PM & Counters >TDM Trails.
2 Select a trail from the Trails List section. The TDM Trail report opens.

22.4.4 Displaying STM-1/OC-3 Line PMs

The STM-1/OC-3 PM page contains a separate PM window for each STM-
1/OC-3 link in use.
You can set display to show PMs for the previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals,
or for the past month in daily intervals.
To view STM-1/OC-3 PMs:
1 Select PM & Counters > STM-1> Port#. The STM-1/OC-3 PM report
opens.
In the STM-1/OC-3 PM report:

occurred.

22.4.5 Displaying Pseudowire PMs

When a pseudowire T-Card is installed, you can display statistics for the
pseudowire ports, the Ethernet port associated with the pseudowire ports,
and pseudowire services.
To display PMs for the Ethernet port associated with the pseudowire ports:
1 Select PM & Counters > Pseudowire> Port RMON. The Port RMON PM
report opens.
The following is a brief description of the pseudowire PMs:

 txrx_frames_64: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of good or bad frames
transmitted and received that are 64 bytes in length inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including FCS bytes).
transmitted and received that are 65 to 127 bytes in length inclusive
(excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes).


 rx_bytes: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of byte count of frames received
with 0 to 1518 bytes, including those in bad packets, excluding framing
bits but including FCS bytes.
 rx_packets: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of received packets
(including bad packets, all Unicast, Broadcast, and Multicast packets).
 rx_err_fcs: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received that have a
integral 64 to 1518 byte length and contain a Frame Check Sequence error.
 rx_multicast: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of multicast good
frames of length 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes excluding
Broadcast frames.
Note: This statistic does not take into account frames with
range/length errors.
 rx_broadcast: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of broadcast
good frames of length 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes
excluding Broadcast frames.
Note: This statistic does not take into account frames with
 rx_mac_control: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of MAC Control frames
received (PAUSE & Unsupported).
 rx_mac_pause: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of valid PAUSE MAC
Control frames received.
 rx_mac_unknown: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of MAC Control Frames
received that contain an opcode other than a PAUSE.
 rx_err_alignment: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of received frames
from 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes in length that contain
an invalid FCS and are not an integral number of bytes.
 rx_err_length: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received in
which the 802.3 length field did not match the number of data bytes
actually received (46 - 1500 bytes). The counter is not incremented if the
length field is not a valid 802.3 length, such as an EtherType value.
 rx_err_code: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of instances
where a valid carrier was present and at least one invalid data symbol was
detected.
 rx_err_false_carrier: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of false
carriers detected during idle, as defined by a 1 on RX_ER and an '0xE' on
RXD. The event is reported along with the statistics generated on the next
received frame.
Note: Only one false carrier condition can be detected and logged
between frames.
 rx_undersize: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received that are
less than 64 bytes in length, contain a valid FCS, and were otherwise well
formed.
Note: This statistic does not look at range/length errors.

 rx_oversize: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received that

exceeded 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes in length, contain a
valid FCS, and were otherwise well formed.
Note: This statistic does not look at range/length errors.
 rx_fragments: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received which
are less than 64 bytes in length and contain an invalid FCS, including
integral and non-integral lengths.
 rx_jabber: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received which
exceed 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes in length and contain an
invalid FCS, including alignment errors.
 rx_dropped: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames received that are
streamed to the system but are later dropped due to lack of system
resources.
 tx_bytes: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of bytes that were
put on the wire including fragments of frames that were involved with
collisions. This count does not include preamble/SFD or jam bytes.
 tx_packets: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of transmitted packets
(including bad packets, excessive deferred packets, excessive collision
packets, late collision packets, all Unicast, Broadcast, and Multicast
packets).
 tx_multicast: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of Multicast valid frames
transmitted (excluding Broadcast frames).
 tx_broadcast: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of Broadcast frames
transmitted (excluding Multicast frames).
 tx_mac_pause: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of valid PAUSE MAC
Control frames transmitted.
 tx_defer: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames that were deferred
upon first transmission attempt. Does not include frames involved in
collisions.
 tx_excess_defer: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of frames
aborted that were deferred for an excessive period of time (3036 byte
times).
 tx_single_collision: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames transmitted
which experienced exactly one collision during transmission.
 tx_multi_collision: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames transmitted
which experienced 2-15 collisions (including any late collisions) during
transmission as defined using the RETRY [3-0] field of the TX function
control register.
 tx_late_collision: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames transmitted
that experienced a late collision during a transmission attempt. Late
collisions are defined using the LCOL[50] field of the TX Function control
register.
 tx_excess_collision: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of frames that
experienced 16 collisions during transmission and were aborted.
 tx_no_collision: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of frames
transmitted that had no collision.

 tx_mac_pause_honored: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of

times a valid PAUSE MAC Control frame was transmitted and honored.
 tx_dropped: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of times the input
PFH is asserted.
 tx_jabber: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of oversized transmitted
frames with an incorrect FCS value.
 tx_err_fcs: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of valid sized packets
transmitted with an incorrect FCS value.
 tx_control: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of valid size frames
transmitted with a Type Field signifying a Control frame.
 tx_oversize: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of oversized transmitted
frames with a correct FCS value.
 tx_undersize: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of transmitted frames less
than 64 bytes, with a correct FCS value.
 tx_fragments: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of transmitted frames less
than 64 bytes, with an incorrect FCS value.
 rx_host_frames: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of complete
good Ethernet frames received and terminated to the host.
 rx_iw_frames: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of the number of received
Ethernet Interworking frames that were received and sent to the L3
Interworking module.
 rx_err_host_full: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of FIFO
overrun errors.
 rx_err_fbp_underrun: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of the number of
received Ethernet Interworking frames which were dropped due free
buffer pool (FBP) Overrun
 rx_err_nonvalid_mac: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of the number of
received Ethernet frames whose MAC-DA is not valid. (Unrecognized by
address recognition routine in DPS).
 rx_err_mru: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of the number of received
Ethernet Interworking frames which were dropped due the Maximum
Receive Unit frame size being exceeded.
 rx_err_sdu: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of the number of Ethernet
frames which were closed due the maximum frame size has been exceeded
 tx_err_underrun: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of times
Ethernet transmitter underun occurred.
 rx_err_overrun: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of received
Ethernet frames which were closed (in a middle of a frame) or discarded
due to a receive buffer overrun event (no available buffers).
 tx_frames: Unsigned 64-bit modulo counter of number of complete good
frames transmitted.

To display pseudowire line PMs:

1 Select PM & Counters > Pseudowire> TDM Ports > Port#. The
Pseudowire PM report opens.
In the Pseudowire PM report:

occurred.

To display PMs for pseudowire services:

1 Select PM & Counters > Pseudowire> Pseudowire Services > Service#.
The Pseudowire Service report opens.
In the Pseudowire Service report:

occurred.
 FC – Failure counts. A failure is an LOPS event.
 FER – Frame error ratio.
 Missing Packets – Number of missing packets.
 Misorder Dropped – Number of packets detected out of order that could
not be re-ordered or could not fit in the jitter buffer.
 Malformed Packets – Number of packets detected with unexpected size,
or bad headers stack.

22.5 Displaying Radio PMs

 Displaying Signal Level PMs
 Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs
 Displaying Radio MRMC PMs
 Displaying Radio MSE PMs
 Displaying Radio XPI PMs

22.5.1 Displaying Signal Level PMs

The Signal Level PM report shows signal level performance.
You can set display to show PMs for the previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals,
or for the past month in daily intervals.
To view signal level performance:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Signal Level. The Signal Level PM report
opens.
In the PM report section:

 Min RSL – Indicates the minimum received level measured during the
interval.
 Max RSL – Indicates the maximum received level measured during the
interval.
 RSL Exceed #1 - Displays the number of seconds the RSL threshold
#1value was exceeded during the current interval.
 RSL Exceed #2 - Displays the number of seconds the RSL threshold #2
value was exceeded during the current interval.
 Min TSL – Indicates the minimum transmitted level measured during the
interval.
 Max TSL – Indicates the maximum transmitted level measured during the
interval.
 TSL Exceed - Displays the number of seconds the TSL threshold value was
exceeded during the current interval.
22.5.2 Displaying Aggregate Radio PMs

The Aggregate PM report page displays tributary values measured for the
previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals, or for the past month in daily intervals.
To view aggregate radio performance:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > Aggregate. The Aggregate PM report
opens.
In the Aggregate PM report:

occurred.

22.5.3 Displaying Radio MRMC PMs

The MRMC PM report displays Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation performance for
the previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals, or for the past month in daily
intervals.
To view MRMC PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > MRMC. The MRMC PM report opens.
In the MRMC PM report:

 Min Profile - Indicates the minimum radio profile during the last interval.
 Max Profile - Indicates the maximum radio profile during the last interval.
 Min BitRate (Mbps) - Indicates the minimum total radio throughput
(Mbps), delivered during the last interval.
 Max BitRate (Mbps) - Indicates the maximum total radio throughput
(Mbps), delivered during the last interval.
 Min number of allocated TDM VCs - Indicates the minimum number of
TDM voice channels (E1/T1) delivered over the radio during the last
interval.
 Max number of allocated TDM VCs - Indicates the maximum number of
TDM channels (E1/T1) delivered over the radio during the last interval.

22.5.4 Displaying Radio MSE PMs

The MSE PM report displays the modem’s Minimum Square Error
performance statistics for the previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals, or for the
past month in daily intervals.
To view MSE PM:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > MSE. The MSE PM report opens.
In the MSE PM report:

 Min MSE - Indicates the minimum MSE in dB, measured during the last
interval.
 Max MSE - Indicates the maximum MSE in dB, measured during the last
interval.
 MSE Exceed - Indicates the number of seconds the MSE exceeded the
threshold (configured in the field below the table) during the last interval.

22.5.5 Displaying Radio XPI PMs

The XPI PM report displays the Cross Polarization Interference value for the
previous 24 hours in 15 min intervals, or for the past month in daily intervals.
To view cross polarization interference performance:
1 Select PM & Counters > Radio > XPI. The XPI PM report opens.
In the XPI PM report:

 Min XPI - Indicates the minimum XPI in dB, measured during the last
interval.
 Max XPI - Indicates the maximum XPI in dB, measured during the last
interval.
 XPI Exceed - Indicates the number of seconds the XPI exceeded the
threshold (configured in the field below the table) during the last interval.

22.6 Viewing Radio Status

 Viewing RFU Status
 Viewing MRMC Status
 Viewing Current Tx Status
 Viewing Current Rx Status
 Viewing Remote Radio Parameters
 Viewing XPIC Status

22.6.1 Viewing RFU Status

To view the RFU status parameters:
In the Status Parameters section:

 RFU type – Indicates the type of RFU used in the system.
 Tx/Rx frequency separation – Displays Tx/Rx separation values.
 Tx/Rx level – Displays current Tx/Rx level values.
 MSE – Displays Mean Square Error value, which quantifies the
performance of the receiver.
 XPI level – Displays the current cross polarization interference value.
Note: This field only appears if XPIC is enabled.
 Defective blocks – Indicates the number of blocks in which errors were
detected. The larger the amount, the poorer the radio link quality.

22.6.2 Viewing MRMC Status

To view MRMC status:
In the MRMC configuration section:

 MRMC script – Displays the current selected radio script.
 Occupied bandwidth (MHz) – Displays the actual bandwidth occupied by
the radio signal.
This should not be confused with Channel Spacing, which indicates the
allocated bandwidth for the RF channel.
If an asymmetrical script is enabled, this field will be replaced with
separate Rx and Tx occupied bandwidth status.
 Operational mode – Displays the ACM mode: ACM Adaptive, ACM Fixed,
or Regular (non ACM radio script).
 Min adaptive ACM profile – Indicates the minimum configured profile
that will never be exceeded when ACM is active.
 Max adaptive ACM profile – Indicates the maximum configured profile
that will never be exceeded when ACM is active.
 Adaptive Tx power admin – Indicates whether power admin is enabled.
When enabled, the radio power is adjusted to the current profile that is
being used.

22.6.3 Viewing Current Tx Status

The Current TX section displays ACM transmission settings
To view current Tx settings:
In the Current TX section:

 Profile – Indicates the current ACM profile used for transmission.
 QAM – Indicates the current modulation used for transmission.
 Bitrate – Indicates the current transmitted bit rate, in Mbps.
 Number of TDM channels – Indicates the number of TDM channels.

22.6.4 Viewing Current Rx Status

The Current Rx section displays ACM received settings
To view current RX settings:
In the Current Rx section:

 Profile – Indicates the current ACM profile used by the receiver.
 QAM – Indicates the current modulation used by the receiver.
 Bitrate – Indicates the current receiving bit rate, in Mbps.
 Number of TDM channels – Indicates the number of TDM channels.

22.6.5 Viewing Remote Radio Parameters

To view the current remote Rx level:
1 Select Configuration > Radio > Remote Radio. The Remote Radio page
opens.
In the Remote radio parameters section:

 Remote communication – Indicates the current communication status of
the remote unit.
 Remote Rx level – Indicates the current Rx level of the remote unit.
22.6.6 Viewing XPIC Status

XPIC enables two radio carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity
separation between them by adaptively subtracting from each carrier the
interfering cross carrier at the proper phase and level, with the ability to
detect both streams even under the worst levels of cross polar discrimination
interference such as 10 dB.
To view XPIC status:
In the XPIC parameters section:

 XPI enabled – Indicates whether XPIC is enabled.

22.7 Viewing Ethernet Interface Status

The Ethernet ports table displays the configuration settings for each port.
To view Ethernet port status:
page opens.
In the Ethernet ports table:

 Operational status – Indicates whether the port is Up or Down.
 Enabled – Indicates whether the port is enabled.
A check mark indicates that this port is enabled.
An X indicates that the port is disabled.
 Interface – Displays the port number.
 Connector type – Displays whether this port is using copper (RJ-45) cable
or optical fiber.
 Speed & duplex – Displays available parameters regarding rate and
duplex:
Auto negotiation – Indicates whether auto-negotiation is enabled for
the port.
 Rate – Indicates the configured rate for the port.
 Actual rate – Indicates the actual rate for the port.
 Actual duplex – Indicates whether actual duplex is Half or Full.
 Function – Displays whether the port is being used for Trunk, Access, or
Management.
For Metro switches – Indicates whether the port is being used for C/N,
P/N, or Management.
 VLAN ID – Displays all allowed VIDs for this port.
 Learning – A check mark indicates that Port learning is enabled. An X
indicates that Port learning is disabled.
 Flow control – Displays whether Flow control is On or Off.
 Service type – Displays whether this port is a network or access point.
22.8 Viewing RSTP Status

Related topics:
 Configuring RSTP
The RSTP and Ring RSTP windows enable you to view status information and
to configure RSTP parameters.
The configurations of RSTP and Ring RSTP parameters are identical.
To view RSTP status:
1 Select Configuration > Ethernet Switch> (Ring) RSTP. The RSTP page
opens.
The (Ring) RSTP Status section displays the current RSTP status information:
 Bridge ID – Displays the ID of the bridge in the current monitored IDU.
 Root ID – Displays the ID of the root bridge.
 Root Path Cost – Displays the cost of the path from the current monitored
IDU to the root bridge.
 Bridge Role – Displays the role of the bridge: Root or Designated.

22.9 Viewing Enhanced Traffic Management Statistics

 Enhanced QoS license
You can view a PM report for the Enhanced traffic manager of each queue. The
report contains data from the most recent report interval.
Each PM is measured per queue in Max/Avg format. Green traffic refers to
frames that comply with the configured Committed Information Rate (CIR).
Yellow traffic refers to frames that exceed the configured CIR but are below
the configured Excess Information Rate (EIR).
In addition to the Enhanced Traffic Manager (Enhanced QoS) statistics
available in earlier versions, hardware version R3 and software version i6.9
provide additional counters, as shown in the following table:
Per-Queue Counters Availability
Software Version
i6.7 Green bytes passed
Green frames dropped
Yellow bytes passed
Yellow frames dropped
i6.9 Same as i6.7, with the addition of:
 L1 support for green and yellow bytes passed (i6.7 supports L2 only)
 Green frames passed
 Yellow frames passed

To view traffic statistics for a managed Ethernet queue:

1 Select PM & Counters > Enhanced Traffic Manager > Queue#.
In the Bytes section:

 Avg. Green Passed – Displays the average green traffic in bytes per
seconds (Bps) during the report interval.
 Max Green Passed - Displays the peak green traffic for one second during
the report interval.
 Avg. Yellow Passed – Displays the average yellow traffic in Bps during the
report interval.
 Max Yellow Passed - Displays the peak yellow traffic for one second
during the report interval.
 Avg. Red Dropped – Displays the average red dropped traffic in Bps
 Max Red Dropped - Displays the peak red dropped traffic for one second
In the Frames section:
 Avg. Green Dropped – Displays the average number of dropped green
frames during the report interval.
 Max Green Dropped – Displays the maximum number of dropped green
 Avg. Yellow Dropped – Displays the average number of dropped yellow

 Max Yellow Dropped – Displays the maximum number of dropped yellow

 Avg. Green Passed – Displays the average number of green frames
dropped during the report interval.
 Max Green Passed - Displays the maximum number of green frames
 Avg. Yellow Passed – Displays the average number of yellow frames
 Max Yellow Passed - Displays the maximum number of yellow frames
 Avg. Red Dropped – Displays the average number of dropped red frames
 Max Red Dropped – Displays the maximum number of dropped red
The RMON counters page displays values relating to the bridge performance.
The counters are designed to support:
 RFC 2819, RMON MIB
 RFC 2665, Ethernet-like MIB
 RFC 2233, MIB II
 RFC 1493, Bridge MIB
The statistic counters are divided into ingress statistics and egress statistics.

23. Fault Management

 Overview of Fault Management
 LED Indicators
 Configuring External Alarms
 Configuring Traps
 Configuring Power Supply Alarms
 Viewing Current Alarms
 Viewing the Event Log
 Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface
 Loopback
 Troubleshooting Protection
 Activating the All-ODU Enclosure

23.1 Overview of Fault Management

FibeAir IDUs are designed to be highly reliable and relatively maintenance
free. In the event of a system failure, the system will provide detailed
indications to assist troubleshooting and fault isolation. This chapter explains
the alarm indications in a FibeAir system, and contains procedures for
troubleshooting and fault isolation.
To ensure simple and efficient system maintenance, the on-site technician will
only replace IDU or RFU modules, and not repair them. Under no circumstance
will the technician be permitted to open the equipment in order to repair a
module or circuit board. Opening equipment will terminate the Ceragon
warranty.
Maintenance procedures the technician can perform include visual inspection,
cleaning, cable/connector repair, link alignment/adjustment, and retorquing
antenna mount bolts.
The following table lists the suggested preventive maintenance procedures,
which include visual inspection of the equipment and verification of
operational parameters.
It is recommended to perform the procedures as often as local environmental
conditions require. It is recommended to notify the end customer prior to
performing any preventive maintenance procedures that could affect service
on the circuit.
What to check Check for… Comments

IDU alarm LEDs All green If not, perform troubleshooting
Coax cable connection Tight, no corrosion or Clean/repair as required
moisture
Coax cable No cracks or kinks Replace as required
All equipment Dust or dirt Clean as required
Receive level (voltage in Per installation records Align/adjust as required
IDU/ODU/RFU, or using
management)
Torque on antenna mount bolts Tight mount Adjust as required

Corrective maintenance consists of the steps described below. The steps

provide a logical, sequential method for diagnosing and resolving system
problems.
Step 1: Define the Symptom
This step is generally performed by the customer's field technician or

supervisor. Examples of symptoms include “IDU alarm is red”, “complete loss
of service”, and “excessive errors”.
Symptoms may be constant or intermittent. Constant symptoms require
immediate troubleshooting attention. Intermittent symptoms may require
circuit monitoring or robust test procedures prior to troubleshooting.
Step 2: Isolate the Problem
After you have a clear definition of the symptom, the malfunction can be
isolated using diagnostics, loopback testing, fault isolation tables/flow charts,
test equipment, and manual procedures.
This step will identify the specific piece of equipment that is failing.
Although it may be difficult at times to immediately determine which part of a
radio link is causing the fault, the initial suspicion should be focused on one of
the following near-end or far-end issues:
 Power supplies
 Fading (due to heavy rain, new obstacle in path, antenna misalignment)
 External equipment (SDH/SONET, ATM, Fast Ethernet, etc.)
 Indoor Unit (IDU)
 Radio Frequency Unit (RFU)
 RF cable between the RFU and IDU
 Exposure of equipment to severe conditions (high temperature, etc.)
 System configuration
Step 3: Understand the Problem
Once the fault has been isolated, you will need to understand why the fault
occurred and what is required to correct it. Use the tables provided in the
following sections to understand the problem, and for suggestions of possible
solutions.
Step 4: Solve the Problem
Use the troubleshooting information in this chapter to help solve the problem.

23.2 LED Indicators

The following LEDs are located beneath the external alarms on the front
panel:
 LINK – Indicates status of the radio link.
 IDU – Indicates status of the Ethernet interface.
 RFU – Indicates status of the RF module.
 PROT – Indicates the main and standby unit alarm and protection status.
 RMT – Indicates status of the remote unit.
These LEDs indicate the following:
 LINK
Green – Radio link is operational
Orange – Minor BER alarm on the radio
Red – Loss of signal, major BER alarm on the radio
 IDU
Green – IDU is functioning normally
Orange – Fan failure
Red – Alarm on IDU (all severities)
 RFU
Green – RFU is functioning normally
Orange – Loss of communication between the IDU and the RFU
Red – RFU failure
 PROT
Main Unit – Green – No alarms
Standby Unit – Yellow – No alarms
Orange – Forced switch, protection lock
Red –Physical errors (no cable, cable failure)
Off – Protection is disabled, or not supported on the device
 RMT
Green – Remote IDU is functioning normally
Orange – Minor alarm on the remote IDU
Red – Major alarm on the remote IDU

23.3 Configuring External Alarms

IP-10G and IP-10E include a DB9 dry contact external alarms interface. The
external alarms interface supports five input alarms and a single output alarm.
The input alarms are configurable according to:
1 Intermediate
2 Critical
3 Major
4 Minor
5 Warning
The output alarm is configured according to predefined categories.
To configure external alarms:
1 Select Configuration > General > External Alarms. The External Alarms
page opens.
2 In the Alarm Input section:

i Click + to expand the alarm you want to configure.
ii In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to activate or disable he
alarm input.
iii In the Text field, specify a string to use as the alarm description. When
an alarm input is raised, this text will appear as the alarm description
text.
iv In the Severity field, specify the alarm input severity.
3 In the Alarm Output section:
i In the Admin field, select Enable or Disable to activate or disable he
alarm output.
ii In the Group field, specify the group of alarms that will trigger an
alarm output:
 Communication - Alarms related to traffic: radio, Ethernet line,
TDM line
 Quality of Service - Alarms related to QoS.
 Processing - Alarms related to software: configuration, resets,
corrupted files
 Equipment - Alarms related to hardware, fan, RFU mute, power
supply, and inventory.
 Environmental - Alarms relating to temperature.
 All groups - All of the above groups.
4 Click Apply.

23.4 Configuring Traps

The Trap manager page is used to configure trap forwarding parameters.
Each line in the Trap Managers table displays the setup for a manager defined
in the system.
To configure a trap manager:
1 Select Configuration > General > Traps Configuration. The Traps
2 Click the + at the beginning of the line to expand a trap manager.
3 From the Traps admin drop down list, select Enable or Disable to enable
or disable the selected trap manager.
4 In the Trap manager field, enter the destination IP address. Traps will be
sent to this IP address.
5 In the Manager name field, enter the trap manager’s name.
6 In the Trap port field, enter the number of the port through which traps
will be sent.
7 In the SNMP trap Community field, enter the SNMP community name.
8 In the Heartbeat period field, specify the number of minutes between
generating heartbeat traps.
9 Optionally, in the Trap CLLI field, enter free text that will be sent with the
trap.
10 In the Trap status change filter field, select On if you want a trap to be
sent to the manager you defined only when the most-severe alarm of the
unit changes. For example, if the most severe status in the system is
warning, and a new warning alarm is raised, no trap will be sent (if you
selected On for this option). On the other hand, if the new alarm has the
severity major, a trap will be sent to the manager you defined.
11 In the Send traps for alarms with severity field, select which severity
levels of alarms will be forwarded.

23.5 Configuring Power Supply Alarms

Some IP-10G/E systems are equipped with a dual-power input. In dual-power
IDUs, the system indicates whether received voltage in each connector is
above or below the threshold power (approximately 40.5v). This is shown in
two ways:
 The LED (and its Web EMS representation) is only on if the voltage is
above the threshold.
 If voltage is below the threshold, a low-input-voltage alarm is raised
You can configure the system not to raise an alarm in case of under-voltage for
either power input. If the alarm is not disabled, a permanent alarm will exist
for a power input that is not in use.
To disable a power supply alarm:
1 Select Configuration > General > Dual Power Supply. The Dual Power
Supply page opens.
2 For a power supply input that is not in use, select Disable.

3 Click Apply.

23.6 Viewing Current Alarms

To view current alarms:
1 Select Faults > Current Alarms. The Current Alarms page opens.
In the Current Alarms table:

 Date & Time - The date and time the alarm was triggered appear in the
column.
 Severity - The color of the icon indicates the severity of the alarm.
 Module - The module that generated the alarm.
 Description - A description of the alarm.
To view details of a specific alarm:
1 In the Current Alarms table, click + in the left column to open the alarm
details.
 Probable Cause – Displays the most likely cause of the alarm.

 Corrective Actions – Displays recommended actions to clear the alarm.

23.7 Viewing the Event Log

The Event log displays a list of historical events and alarm information.
The log shows the last 200 events and alarms that occurred. If the number of
events/alarms exceeds 200, the oldest events/alarms will be removed.
To view the event log:
1 Select Faults > Event Log. The Event Log page opens.
In the Event Log table:

 # - Indicates the number of the event/alarm.
 Date & Time - Indicates the date and time the event/alarm was triggered.
 Severity - Indicates the alarm severity.
 Module - Indicates the module that generated the event/alarm.
 State - Indicates the event/alarm status [Raised or Cleared].
 Description – Provides a description of the event/alarm.
To clear the event log, click Clear.

23.8 Monitoring the IDU-RFU Interface

In the IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring page, you can monitor the IDU-RFU
traffic.
To view communication errors:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance > IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring.
The IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring page opens.
In the IDU-RFU Communication errors section:

 RFU receiver errors – Indicates the number of RFU interface errors.
 IDU receiver errors – Indicates the number of IDU interface errors.
To clear IDU error counters, click Clear IDU Errors.

23.9 Loopback
 Radio Loopback
 E1/DS1 Line Loopback
 STM-1/OC-3 Line Loopback
 Pseudowire Line Loopback

23.9.1 Radio Loopback

In the Radio loopback page, you can set the parameters for a radio loopback
test.
To configure radio loopback:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance > Loopback > Radio. The Radio page
opens.
2 In the Timeout field, specify the number of minutes before timing out a
loopback operation.
3 From the IF loopback drop down list, select On or Off to activate or
deactivate IF loopback.
4 From the RFU RF loopback drop down list, select On or Off to activate or
deactivate RFU RF loopback.
5 Click Apply.

23.9.2 E1/DS1 Line Loopback

In the PDH line loopback page, you can set the parameters for a loopback test
of the E1/DS1 lines.
To configure an E1/DS1 line loopback:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance > Loopback > PDH Line. The PDH
Line page opens.
loopback operation.
3 For each interface, select Loopback towards radio or Off from the State
drop down list to specify which ports to include in the loopback operation.
4 Click Apply.

23.9.3 STM-1/OC-3 Line Loopback

In the SDH line loopback page, you can set the parameters for an STM-1/OC-3
loopback test.
To configure loopback for an STM-1/OC-3 line:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance> Loopback > SONET Line. The
SONET Line page opens.
loopback operation.
3 In the STM-1/OC-3 line loopback field, select On if you want to perform a
loopback test or Off if you do not want to perform a test.
4 Click Apply.

23.9.4 Pseudowire Line Loopback

In the PDH line loopback page, you can set the parameters for a loopback test
of the E1/DS1 lines.
To configure an E1/DS1 line loopback:
1 Select Diagnostics & Maintenance > Loopback > Pseudowire TDM
Ports. The Pseudowire TDM Ports page opens.
2 In the Pw tdm timeout field, specify the number of minutes before timing
out a loopback operation.
3 For each interface, select Loopback towards radio or Off from the State
drop down list to specify which ports to include in the loopback operation.
4 Click Apply.

23.10 Troubleshooting Protection

 Switchover Triggers
 Copy-to-Mate
 Mismatch Mechanism

23.10.1 Switchover Triggers

Switchover triggers are described in the following table, according to their
priority, with the highest priority triggers on top.
Priority Fault Remark

1 Mate Power OFF -
2 Lockout Does not persist after cold-reset.
3 Force Switch Does not persist after cold-reset.
4 Local Radio LOF -
5 TDM Line LOS / SFP LOS / GBE LOC Electrical GBE LOC is configurable. Only
active unit is monitored in this case
This fault is only relevant for IP-10G.
6 Change Remote request due to "Radio LOF" -
7 Local Radio Excessive BER Configurable. Irrelevant in „ACM adaptive‟

mode
8 Change Remote due to Radio Excessive BER Irrelevant in ACM adaptive mode
9 Manual Switch -
23.10.2 Copy-to-Mate
In order to synchronize the configurations of both local and mate units, a
"copy-to-mate" command must be issued by the user on the Active unit. The
copy-to-mate command is required whenever a "Configuration Mismatch"
alarm is raised.
When issuing a copy-to-mate command on the Active unit, all configuration
data and files are copied from the Active (local) unit to the Standby (mate)
unit, and a cold-reset is automatically performed on the Standby unit.
Once the configuration of the units has been synchronized, all radio
parameters are automatically copied from the Active unit to the Standby unit
upon any user configuration.
If the configuration is set via CLI, a write command must be used in order to
save the new configuration to the disk. Only if the configuration is saved can it
be copied to the mate IDU.
In the CLI, adding the argument “—showDiff” to the copy-to-mate command
displays extra details about the progress of the process.

23.10.3 Mismatch Mechanism

This mechanism is responsible for detecting if there is a mismatch between
the configurations of the local and mate units. This mechanism is activated by
the system periodically and independently of other protection mechanisms, at
fixed intervals. It is activated asynchronously in both the Active and the
Standby units. Once the mismatch mechanism detects a configuration
mismatch, it raises a "Mate Configuration Mismatch" alarm. Once the Active
and Standby configurations are identical, the mechanism clears the "Mate
Configuration Mismatch" alarm.
In order to determine which parameters do not match between the units, the
user can use the CLI to query the details of the mismatch using the “cfg-
mismatch-details” command.
If the configuration is adjusting using the CLI, the user must enter a "write"
command in order to save the new configuration to the disk. The mismatch
mechanism only checks mismatches that have been saved to configuration
files.
The mismatch mechanism does not display the specific parameters that
caused the mismatch.
Note: It is important to enter a “copy-to-mate” command
whenever a "Mate Configuration Mismatch" alarm has been
raised, and to avoid configuring specific parameters in
attempting to clear this alarm.

23.11 XPIC Recovery Mechanism

Related topics:
The XPIC recovery mechanism is based on signal cancellation and assumes
that both of the transmitted signals are received (with a degree of polarity
separation). If for some reason, such as hardware failure, one of the carriers
stops receiving a signal, the working carrier may be negatively affected by the
received signals, which cannot be canceled in this condition.
The purpose of the XPIC recovery mechanism is to save the working link while
attempting to recover the faulty polarization.
The mechanism works as follows:
 The indication that the recovery mechanism has been activated is a loss of
modem preamble lock, which takes place at SNR~10dB.
 The first action taken by the recovery mechanism is to cause the remote
transmitter of the faulty carrier to mute, thus eliminating the disturbing
signal and saving the working link.
 Following this, the mechanism attempts at intervals to recover the failed
link. In order to do so, it takes the following actions:
The remote transmitter is un-muted for a brief period.
The recovery mechanism probes the link to find out if it has recovered.
If not, it again mutes the remote transmitter.
This action is repeated in exponentially larger intervals. This is meant
to quickly bring up both channels in case of a brief channel fade,
without seriously affecting the working link if the problem has been
caused by a hardware failure.
The number of recovery attempts is user-configurable
Note: Every such recovery attempt will cause a brief traffic hit in
the working link.
All the time intervals mentioned above (recovery attempt time, initial time
between attempts, multiplication factor for attempt time, number of retries)
can be configured by the user, but it is recommended to use the default values.
The XPIC recovery mechanism is enabled by default, but can be disabled by
the user.
23.11.1 XPIC Events

The XPIC events are meant to make system debugging in the field easier, and
provide the user with a detailed description of the various steps and actions
taken during the XPIC recovery process.
However, in a recovery scenario, so many events could be raised that they will
fill the alarms log; they can be disabled by the user.

The following is a list of events that can be raised by the XPIC mechanism:
 Condition for XPIC not met: This event will include a bitmap error code
indicating precisely which condition was not met. The list of conditions
and codes is as follows:
Bitmask Code Meaning
0x1 Local user configuration is not valid with XPIC
0x2 Mate user configuration is not valid with XPIC
0x4 Local IDU does not support XPIC
0x8 Mate IDU does not support XPIC
0x10 XPIC is not enabled in mate
0x20 Local and Mate scripts are different
0x40 Local RFU does not support XPIC
0x80 Mate RFU does not support XPIC
0x100 Local and Mate RFU type are different
0x200 Local and Mate Tx freq are different
0x400 Local and Mate Rx freq are different
Note: Depending on the precise timing, these conditions may be

listed in a single event (with the bitmask summing up all the
conditions) or in several events, each with a different
condition.
 XPIC state machine events: The following events indicate changes in the
XPIC state:
Remote TX Mute (try # n) was Set by XPIC Recovery on Slot # n
Remote TX Un-mute (try # n ) was Set by XPIC Recovery on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Started on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Finished Successfully on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Finished Unsuccessfully on Slot # n. Remote Mute was
Set
XPIC Recovery on Slot # n Stopped Due to an External Event
XPIC Recovery (XRSM) was disabled
XPIC Recovery (XRSM) was enabled

23.12 Activating the All-ODU Enclosure

The All ODU page allows you to activate support for the All ODU enclosure.
When enabled, the enclosure controller can then be powered to monitor fan
failure alarms.
 External Alarm Input #1 becomes an output, which together with 3.3V is
used to drive the enclosure’s electronic board.
 External Alarm Input #2 is set with a specific text & severity, and is used to
monitor any enclosure fan failure, and to raise an alarm for it (polarity
change was required to adapt it to the enclosure behavior).
To enable All ODU support:
1 Select Configuration > General > All ODU. The All ODU page opens.
2 In the All ODU section, select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the
All ODU interface.

24. Appendix A – CLI Reference

This appendix includes:
 Using the CLI
 CLI Commands and Parameters
 Basic System Configuration Using CLI

24.1 Using the CLI

This section explains how to work with the Command Line Interface (CLI).
The CLI is used to perform configuration and obtain system statistical and
performance information.
Using the CLI, you can perform configuration operations for single units, as
well as configure several units with a single batch command.
In a stacked configuration, all commands are available both in the main and
extension units unless otherwise stated.
24.1.1 Access rights

CLI access is granted for the following user groups:
 Viewer - This user only has read-only access. The user can only view
parameters and their values, not modify them.
 Operator - This user has read-write access. The user can read parameters
and their values, and modify them. However, this user cannot add or
remove other users.
 Admin - This user has read-write access. The user can read parameters
and their values, modify them, and add/remove other users.
 Technician - This user has read-write access to the OS CLI.
User access is controlled by the system Administrator and configured via the
Management command group.
24.1.2 Getting started

To log in to the CLI:
1 Power on your PC.
2 Make sure that your PC is connected to the management port on the front
panel of the IDU.
3 Open the telnet application. Type telnet <IP address of the unit>
and press Enter.
For a first-time login, login using:
 User: Admin
 Password: Admin
When using the Hyper Terminal, you should set the terminal speed (in your PC
terminal configuration) to 155200 kbps.
In addition, it is recommended to select the VT-100 terminal type and set the
terminal size to 24 rows, 80 columns.

24.1.3 Getting help

Once you are logged in, you can go to a main command group and its
subgroups, type the command you want, and press Tab twice for a list of
possible parameter values.
In addition, you can type a command and then type a question mark (?) for
location-specific information for the command. For example, for the set
command, typing set ? and pressing Enter will display a list of optional
parameters and a help line.
Wherever you are in the command tree, you can obtain a list of available
commands by typing Help or (?).
Available commands vary according to location in the CLI tree and the type of
user.
24.1.4 Basic commands

The following basic commands are available when you first log in, if you
belong to the Operator user group:
Command Function
ls List entities
get Get parameter
set Set parameter
help Help
cd Change directory
exit Exit CLI
logout Log out from CLI
cli-ver CLI version
cls Clear screen
shell Enter secondary shell
write Write the current switch configuration to the configuration file
show-tree Show entity tree
find Search for a string in the parameter name and information fields
lsp List entity parameters and commands
echo Echoing free text to the console
In addition, you can use the up/down arrow keys, or the “q” key, when the
word “END” appears at the end of the screen.

24.1.5 Finding commands

At any point in the CLI tree, a quick way to find a command is to type find
string, and press Enter. For string you can type any word that you think is
relevant for a command.
For example, if you type find user, and press Enter, you would get a list of
commands relating to "user":
1) management/mng-services /users /add-user Add user
<name> <group>
2) management/mng-services /users /delete-user Delete user
<name>
3) management/mng-services /users /show-users Show users
24.1.6 Command example

This example shows how to find a command within a subgroup, and then
execute the command. The example starts with the lsp (list parameters)
command, and ends with the activation of an interface loopback test.
-----------------------------------------------
IP10:/> cd diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback/
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> lsp
*********** configuration ********
timeout rw Loopback timeout in minutes
*********** statuses *************
counter ro Loopback time left
if-loopback rw IF loopback activation
rfu-rf-loopback rw RFU RF Loopback Enable Command
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set timeout 2
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set if-loopback
off on
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set if-loopback on
Caution: This action affects traffic.
This may cause permanent loss of Ethernet traffic & wayside.
Consider disabling or physically disconnecting the Ethernet
ports of the IDM and Wayside before the loopback activation.
Are you sure? (yes/no):yes
IP10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback>
-----------------------------------------------
Note: Bridge-related commands need to be followed by a “write”
command to be saved. Otherwise, the commands will not be
saved following a reset in the system.

24.1.7 Viewing the command tree

At any location within the command group structure, you can type show-tree
and press Enter for a list of all the commands in the group you are currently
in.
The following list appears when you type show-tree.
IP-10-SLOT-1:/>show-tree
management
mng-services
cfg-service
event-service
event-log
alarm-service
alarm-current
alarm-external
log-srv
security-log
pm-service
time-service
ntp
mng-software
users
radius
networking
ip-address
mng-protocols
snmp
platform
inventory
daughter-board
license
idc-board
fpga
mate-idu
all-odu
shelf-manager
multi-radio
radio-diversity
remote-idu
remote-co
remote-cl
radio
xpic
remote-cl
framer
mrmc
tdm-radio-pm[1-84]
modem
rfu
rfu-sw-upload
rfu-co
rfu-cl
rfic
enhanced-hc
interfaces
auxiliary
user-channel
eow
wayside
sync
ethernet
bridge
eth-port[1-8]
pdh
port-group
e1t1-port[1-16]

lag-port
trails
pw-tdm
pwc
tdm-ports
clock-1588
ds0-bundles
tunnels
pw-profiles
pws
eth-port
service-oam
diagnostics
rmon
loopback
line-loopback
radio-loopback

24.2 CLI Commands and Parameters

The following tables list the commands you can use in each command group
and sub group.
Note: When you enter a group or sub group, you can type a
command and then press the Tab key twice (or type a
question mark) for a list of values relevant to that command.
Group Command Type Description Privilege Access

IP-10G echo Command Display a line of text. Operator
IP-10G find Command Search for a string in the Viewer
parameter's entity name
and information fields.
IP-10G Lsp Command List entity name and Viewer
information fields.
IP-10G show-tree Command Show entity tree. Viewer
IP-10G write Command Write the current switch Operator
configuration into
configuration file.
24.2.1 management
24.2.1.1 mng-services
mng-services Ping Command Ping utility. Operator
mng-services telnet Command Telnet utility. Operator
24.2.1.2 cfg-service

cfg-service set-to-default Command Reset to factory default Operator Read-write
configuration.
24.2.1.3 event-service
event-log
event-log clear Command Clear event log. Operator Read-write
event-log event-to-syslog Parameter Add event to system log. Operator Read-write


event-log show Command Show the event log. Viewer Read-only
24.2.1.4 alarm-service
alarm-service alarms-set-to-default Command Set all user defined Operator
configurations to default.
alarm-service alarms-user-defined- Parameter Enable or disable user Operator Read-write
fields defined alarm fields.
alarm-service edit-alarm Command Edit the alarm severity or Operator
description.
alarm-service show-alarm Command Show alarm information. Operator
alarm-current
alarm-current most-severe Parameter Indicates the most severe Viewer Read-write
alarm in the system.
alarm-current show Command Show current alarms. Viewer Read-write
alarm-external
alarm-external external-input[5] Parameter Indicates the current Viewer Read-only
status of the external
alarm input.
alarm-external external- Parameter Enables or disables Operator Read-write
input.admin[5] external alarm input.
alarm-external external- Parameter Configures the external Operator Read-write
input.severity[5] input alarm severity.
alarm-external external-input.text[5] Parameter Configures the input Operator Read-write
alarm description.
alarm-external external-output Parameter Indicates the current Viewer Read-only
status of the external
alarm output.


alarm-external external-output.admin Parameter Enables / disables the Operator Read-write
external output alarm.
When Enabled
If no alarms are raised,
the normally open (N.O.)
contact will be opened,
while the normally closed
(N.C.) contact will be
connected to the COM
contact.
When an alarm is raised,
or the system power is
OFF, the N.O. will be
connected to the COM
contact, while the N.C.
contact will remain
opened.
When Test option is
selected, the dry contacts
behave as an alarm is
raised in the system.
alarm-external external-output.group Parameter Configures the external Operator Read-write
alarm output groups.
24.2.1.5 pm-service
pm-service clear-entire-pm Command Clear all PMs. Operator
24.2.1.6 time-service
time-service dst-end-day Parameter The end day of daylight Operator Read-write
saving time.
time-service dst-end-month Parameter The end month of daylight Operator Read-write
saving time.
time-service dst-offset Parameter Daylight saving offset. Operator Read-write
For a value different then
0, at the starting date of
daylight saving time the
time will jump forward in
this value.
At the end date of the
daylight saving time, the
time will jump backwards
in this value.


time-service dst-start-day Parameter The start day of daylight Operator Read-write
saving time.
time-service dst-start-month Parameter The start month of Operator Read-write
daylight saving time.
time-service gmt-offset-hours Parameter Daylight saving offset Operator Read-write
hours.
time-service gmt-offset-minutes Parameter Daylight saving offset Operator Read-write
minutes.
time-service time-and-date Parameter Current time and date. Operator Read-write
Time and date format:
day-month-year,
hours:mins:secs
ntp
ntp admin Parameter Enable / disable the Operator Read-write
Network Time Protocol
(NTP) administrator.
ntp poll-interval Parameter Polling interval of the Viewer Read-only
network time protocol, in
minutes.
ntp server Parameter Indicates the network Operator Read-write
time protocol server.
ntp status Parameter Service status of the Viewer Read-only
Network Time Protocol
(NTP) administrator.
ntp sync-server Parameter Identifies the IP address Viewer Read-only
of the NTP server with
which the system is
currently synchronized.
Returned strings:
The IP address of the
reference NTP server,
according to IPv4/v6
format.
LOCAL if synchronized
on local clock.
N/A if not synchronized.
Valid only when admin is
disabled.

24.2.1.7 mng-software
mng-software abort-timer Command Aborts a timed installation Admin
process.
Note that this command
will not stop an
installation that is already
in progress.
mng-software change-server- Command Change the remote Admin
password server password.
mng-software cleanup Command Remove old or duplicated Operator
(kernel) packages,
repackaged files, and
downgrade files.
mng-software common-version-idu Parameter Identifies which Viewer
application package
software version is
installed on the IDU.
mng-software common-version-rfu Parameter Identifies which Viewer
application package
software version is
installed on the RFU.
mng-software common-version-rfu- Parameter Indicates the software Viewer
downgrade version of the downgrade
package on the RFU.
mng-software common-version-rfu- Parameter Indicates the software Viewer
upgrade version of the upgrade
package on the RFU.
mng-software downgrade Command Downgrade application Admin
packages to an older
version (downloaded to
special downgrade
directory).
mng-software download Command Download updated Operator
software packages from a
remote server.
Note that software
installation is performed
locally. Software cannot
be installed directly from
a remote server.
mng-software download-status Parameter Status of the software Viewer Read-only
download.


mng-software installation-timer Parameter The number of minutes Operator Read-only
for timed software
installation operations to
this unit.
mng-software install-status Parameter Status of the software Viewer Read-only
installation.
mng-software kernel-reinstall Command Re-install last installed Admin
Linux kernel package.
Recommended for
corrupt kernel restoration.
mng-software package-download Command Download a new software Admin
package.
Note: specify the
package name without
the version number. For
example, 'abc', not 'abc-
0.0.1'.
mng-software package-install Command Specify the software Admin
package to install.
Note: specify the
package name without
the version number. For
example, 'abc', not 'abc-
0.0.1'.
mng-software package-uninstall Command Uninstall a software Admin
package.
mng-software rollback Command Rollback to the previous Admin
software version.
Note that any software
upgrades to the IDU that
were installed after
upgrading to the newer
version will also be rolled
back.
Note also that a rollback
will not revert a
downgrade operation. To
“rollback” a downgrade,
use the upgrade
command instead!
mng-software running-version-idu Parameter The running IDU software Viewer Read-only
version identified at the
last cold restart.


mng-software server-login Parameter User name for logging in Operator Read-write
to the remote server.
mng-software server-url Parameter URL of the remote Operator Read-write
software update server
where software updates
are located.
mng-software show-packages Command Show available software Operator
packages.
mng-software timer-downgrade Command Starts the installation Admin
timer for downgrading to
an older software version
(which has already been
downloaded).
mng-software timer-rollback Command Starts the installation Admin
timer for rolling back to
the previous software
version.
Note that any software
upgrades to the IDU that
were installed after
upgrading to the newer
version will also be rolled
back.
Note also that a rollback
will not revert a
downgrade operation. To
“rollback” a downgrade,
use the upgrade
command instead!
mng-software timer-upgrade Command Starts the installation Operator
timer for upgrading to a
downloaded software
version.
mng-software time-to-install Parameter The number of minutes Viewer Read-only
left before starting a
scheduled software
installation operation on
this unit.
mng-software upgrade Command Upgrade installed or Operator
requested software from
available downloaded
software packages.


mng-software verify-packages Command Verify the version of the Operator
installed software
packages.
Note that some packages
may be installed but not
running (for example, on
an IP10-G without a
daughter-board).
mng-software version-package- Parameter Common (version holder) Viewer Read-only
name package name
mng-software versions-idu Command Indicates the application Operator
version of the installed
software package on the
IDU.
mng-software versions-rfu Command Indicates the application Operator
version of the installed
software package on the
RFU.
24.2.1.8 users
users add-user Command Add a user to the system. Admin
Syntax:
add-user <user>
<privilege> <number of
days for password aging>
[account expired YYYY-
MM-DD]
users blocking-fail-login- Parameter The number of minutes Admin Read-write
time for blocking access to the
system after exceeding
the configured threshold
for consecutive failed
logins.
Optional values: 1-1440
users change-password Command Change a user's Viewer
password.
Syntax:
change-password
<username> <old-
password> <new-
password>
(separated with spaces)


users delete-user Command Delete a user from the Admin
system.
Syntax:
delete-user <user>
users idle-login-time Parameter Define the number of Admin Read-write
days before deleting an
idle user account.
Optional values: [0-90]
0 disables automatic
deletion of idle accounts.
users login-fail-threshold Parameter Specify the number of Admin Read-write
consecutive failed logins
before blocking a user
from attempting to login
again.
Optional values: [0-10]
Zero (0) disables blocking
users after failed login
attempts.
users password-first-login- Parameter Specifies whether a user Admin
change will be required to change
the password when
logging in for the first
time.
users show-users Command Show existing user Admin
accounts.
24.2.1.9 log-srv
security-log
security-log view-security-log Command View the security log Admin
entries.
24.2.1.10 networking
Networking auto-negotiation Parameter Enables or disables the Operator Read-write
Auto Negotiation option,
on all management ports.


networking block-management- Parameter Enable / disable blocking Operator Read-write
towards-line in-band management
frames in a Smart Pipe
application from
egressing via the
Ethernet line interface.
networking capacity Parameter Configures the Operator Read-write
management port‟s range
of capacity.
networking duplex Parameter Configures half or full port Operator Read-write
duplex value on all
management ports.
networking ethernet-rate Parameter Configures the Ethernet Operator Read-write
rate on all management
ports. (Mbps)
networking number-of-ports Parameter Configures the number of Operator Read-write
management ports.
networking type Parameter Configures the port Operator Read-write
management type.
(in-band or out-of-band)
networking vlan Parameter In-Band management Operator Read-write
VLAN ID [1-4090]
24.2.1.11 ip-address
ip-address default-gateway Parameter Configures the local Operator Read-write
default gateway.
ip-address hw-address Parameter Indicates the MAC Viewer Read-only
address used for
management (related to
the management IP
address of the system).
ip-address ip-address Parameter Configures the local IP Operator Read-write
address.
ip-address subnet-mask Parameter Configures the local Operator Read-write
subnet mask.

24.2.1.12 floating-ip-address
floating-ip- floating-ip Parameter Indicates the floating IP Operator Read-write
address used when the system is
in protection mode.
The floating IP address
must differ from both the
system's management IP
address and the mate
unit's address.
Additionally, both units
must be in the same
subnet.
Using 0.0.0.0 disables the
active unit from using a
floating IP address.
floating-ip- floating-ip-garp-retries Parameter Specify the floating IP Admin Read-write
address garp number of retries.
floating-ip- set-fip-lock-timer Command Set the floating IP lock Operator
address timer.
24.2.1.13 mng-protocols
mng-protocols communication- Parameter Define the Admin
inactivity-timeout communication inactivity
timeout period for the
management interfaces.
mng-protocols status-show Command Show management Operator
protocol status.
mng-protocols telnet-admin Parameter Enables or disables the Admin Read-write
Telnet server on the
network element.
mng-protocols telnet-status Parameter Indicates the Telnet Viewer Read-only
service status.
mng-protocols web-admin Parameter Enables / disables secure Admin Read-write
(HTTP/S) web access
protocol.
mng-protocols web-ca-certificate- Parameter Enables / disables the Admin Read-write
admin Web Certificate Authority
(CA) digital certificate.
mng-protocols web-inactivity-timeout Parameter Configures the number of Operator Read-write
minutes of allowed Web
inactivity before
automatically logging out.


mng-protocols web-protocol Parameter Specify secure or Admin Read-write
standard web protocol.
HTTP and HTTPS
mng-protocols web-restart Command Restart the web server. Admin
mng-protocols web-status Parameter Indicates the web service Viewer Read-only
status.
24.2.1.14 snmp
snmp admin Parameter Enable / disable SNMP Admin Read-write
access.
snmp change-user-settings Command Modify the SNMPv3 user Admin
security level, username,
and password settings.
SNMPv3 passwords must
be at least eight
characters long.
snmp mib-version Parameter Indicates which private Viewer Read-only
MIB version is required
for managing the unit.
snmp read-community Parameter Configures the password Operator Read-write
string for the SNMP read
community.
snmp status Parameter Indicates the SNMP Viewer Read-only
service status.
snmp status-show Command Indicates the SNMP Operator
service status.
snmp trap-admin[4] Parameter Enables / disables a Operator Read-write
specific manager.
The unit will not send
traps to a disabled trap
manager.
snmp trap-clli[4] Parameter Configures the Common Operator Read-write
Language Location
Identifier (CLLI), a
configurable string
specifying the type and
location of the unit, that is
added to forwarded traps.
snmp trap-community[4] Parameter Configures the trap Operator Read-write
manager community.


snmp trap-heartbeat[4] Parameter Specify the number of Operator Read-write
minutes for the heartbeat
trap interval.
Zero (0) disables sending
heartbeat traps to the
specified trap manager.
snmp trap-manager[4] Parameter Configures the IP address Operator Read-write
of the target trap
manager.
snmp trap-name[4] Parameter Configures the name of Operator Read-write
the target trap manager.
snmp trap-port[4] Parameter Configures the trap Operator Read-write
manager's port number.
Default: port 162
snmp trap-severity-filter[4] Parameter Bit mask value for Operator Read-write
masking traps according
to its severity.
There is a bit for each
severity:
Bit 1 – Indeterminate
Bit 2 – Critical
Bit 3 – Major
Bit 4 – Minor
Bit 5 – Warning
Bit 6 – Cleared
snmp trap-status-change- Parameter Enables or disables Operator Read-write
filter[4] filtering alarms according
to a change in the trap
severity filter.
snmp v3-auth-algorithm Parameter Configures the SNMPv3 Viewer Read-only
authentication algorithm.
SNMPv3 authentication
options:
MDS or SHA.
This parameter will not be
available if the security
mode is set to No
security.


snmp v3-security-mode Parameter Configures the SNMPv3 Viewer Read-only
security mode.
SNMPv3 security modes:
No security
Authentication
Authentication privacy
Default:
Authentication
snmp v3-username Parameter SNMPv3 username. Viewer Read-only
snmp version Parameter SNMP version. Admin Read-write
Options:
V1, V2c, or V3
snmp write-community Parameter Configures the password Operator Read-write
string for the SNMP write
community.
24.2.1.15 platform
platform fan-unit-type Parameter Indicates the fan type: Operator Read-only
SuckingAir15mm
SuckingAir28mm
ThrustingAir28mm
Other
platform lan-id Parameter Configures the LAN Operator Read-write
segment ID.
platform latitude Parameter Configures the unit's Operator Read-write
latitude coordinates.
platform longitude Parameter Configures the unit's Operator Read-write
longitude coordinates.
platform max-physical-ports Parameter Configures the maximum Viewer Read-only
number of physical PDS
ports.
platform max-physical-sdh- Parameter Configures the maximum Viewer Read-only
ports number of physical SDH
ports


platform power-supply-1- Parameter Enable or disable the Operator Read-write
alarm-admin power supply alarm on
one of the power supply
units.
This parameter is relevant
only for IDU with more
than one power supply
units.
platform power-supply-2- Parameter power-supply-2-alarm- Operator Read-write
alarm-admin admin
platform ps1-led Parameter ps1-led Viewer
platform ps2-led Parameter ps2-led Viewer
platform slot-label Parameter Configures the slot label, Operator Read-write
a user defined description
for the module in the slot.
platform system-contact- Parameter Enter the name of the Operator Read-write
person person to be contacted
when a problem with the
system occurs.
platform system-description Parameter Configures additional Viewer Read-only
identification details about
the system.
platform system-location Parameter Specify the physical Operator Read-write
location of the node.
platform system-location-bay Parameter System location bay Operator Read-write
platform system-location-shelf Parameter System location shelf Operator Read-write
platform system-name Parameter Configures a name for the Operator Read-write
node.
By convention, this is the
node‟s fully qualified
domain name.
platform system-services Parameter Number of services Viewer Read-only
provided by the system
according to the rfc3418.
24.2.1.16 Inventory
inventory board-modules Parameter Board modules Viewer Read-only
inventory board-sub-type Parameter Board sub-type Viewer Read-only
inventory board-type Parameter Board type Viewer Read-only


inventory chain-firmware Parameter Chain firmware Viewer Read-only
inventory chain-hardware- Parameter Chain hardware features Viewer Read-only
features
inventory chain-sub-type Parameter Chain sub-type Viewer Read-only
inventory chain-type Parameter Chain type Viewer Read-only
inventory comments Parameter Text description of the Operator Read-write
board
inventory company-name Parameter Company name Admin Read-write
inventory date-code Parameter Date of board testing Viewer Read-only
(number of seconds from
1/1/1970)
inventory firmware Parameter Firmware Viewer Read-only
inventory hardware Parameter Hardware Viewer Read-only
inventory hass-number Parameter Number of hass testing Viewer Read-only
inventory hw-feature Parameter HW features Viewer Read-only
inventory hw-inventory-version Parameter The hw inventory version Viewer Read-only
inventory hw-supported-bit-bate Parameter HW supported bit rate Viewer Read-only
inventory idc-firmware Parameter IDC firmware Viewer Read-only
inventory idc-hardware-features Parameter The hardware features of Viewer Read-only
the IDC
inventory idc-sub-type Parameter The sub-type of the IDC Viewer Read-only
inventory idc-type Parameter The type of IDC Viewer Read-only
inventory license-demo-timer Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
remaining hours for demo
mode.
The demo license is
limited to 60 days.
An event will be raised 10
days before expiration.
inventory license-register Parameter System license features Viewer Read-only
inventory logo Parameter Company logo Admin Read-write
inventory main-view Parameter Company main logo Admin Read-write
inventory modem-firmware Parameter The firmware of the Viewer Read-only
modem
inventory modem-hardware- Parameter The hardware features of Viewer Read-only
features the modem


inventory modem-sub-type Parameter The sub-type of the Viewer Read-only
modem
inventory modem-system-rate Parameter The frequency of the Viewer Read-only
clock for the PVG
inventory modem-type Parameter The type of modem Viewer Read-only
inventory mux-firmware Parameter The firmware of the MUX Viewer Read-only
inventory mux-hardware- Parameter The hardware features of Viewer Read-only
features the MUX
inventory mux-sub-type Parameter The sub-type of the MUX Viewer Read-only
inventory mux-type Parameter The type of MUX Viewer Read-only
inventory num-of-10-100-1000- Parameter Number of 10/100/1000 Viewer Read-only
interfaces interfaces
inventory num-of-fe-interfaces Parameter Number of fast Ethernet Viewer Read-only
interfaces
inventory num-of-radio- Parameter Number of Radio Viewer Read-only
inventory num-of-sfp-interfaces Parameter Number of SFP interfaces Viewer Read-only
inventory num-of-tdm-interfaces Parameter Number of TDM Viewer Read-only
interfaces
inventory num-of-working-hours Parameter Counter of working hours Viewer Read-only
of the board
inventory part-number Parameter Part number of the Viewer Read-only
application in the board
inventory pic-version Parameter The version of the pic Viewer Read-only
inventory production-inventory- Parameter The production inventory Viewer Read-only
version version
inventory product-name Parameter Product name Admin Read-write
inventory rx-master-iq-delay Parameter RX IQ delay - Rx Master Viewer Read-only
delay
inventory rx-master-iq-delay- Parameter RX IQ Delay - Rx Master Viewer Read-only
index-in-fdf-table index in fdf table
inventory rx-slave-iq-delay Parameter RX IQ delay - Rx slave Viewer Read-only
delay
inventory rx-slave-iq-delay- Parameter RX IQ delay - Rx slave Viewer Read-only
index-in-fdf-table index in fdf table
inventory serial-number Parameter The serial number of the Viewer Read-only
board


inventory signature Parameter The signature of the Viewer Read-only
board
inventory spare1 Parameter Spare 1 Viewer Read-only
inventory total-num-of- Parameter Total number of Viewer Read-only
inventory tx-iq-delay Parameter TX IQ delay - TX delay Viewer Read-only
inventory tx-iq-delay-index-in- Parameter TX IQ Delay - Tx index in Viewer Read-only
fdf-table fdf table
inventory type-of-tdm-interfaces Parameter Type of TDM interfaces Viewer Read-only
inventory xc-firmware Parameter The firmware of the XC Viewer Read-only
inventory xc-hardware-features Parameter The hardware features of Viewer Read-only
the XC
inventory xc-sub-type Parameter The sub-type of the XC Viewer Read-only
inventory xc-type Parameter The type of XC Viewer Read-only
24.2.1.17 daughter-board
daughter-board board-sub-type Parameter Viewer Read-only
daughter-board board-type Parameter Viewer Read-only
daughter-board comments Parameter Text description about the Viewer Read-only
daughter board
daughter-board date-code Parameter Date of daughter board Viewer Read-only
testing (number of
seconds from 1/1/1970)
daughter-board firmware Parameter Viewer Read-only
daughter-board hardware Parameter Viewer Read-only
daughter-board hass-number Parameter Number of hass DB Viewer Read-only
testing
daughter-board num-of-interfaces Parameter Viewer Read-only
daughter-board num-of-working-hours Parameter Counter of working hours Viewer Read-only
of the Daughter board
daughter-board part-number Parameter Part number of the Viewer Read-only
application in the
daughter board


daughter-board running-firmware- Parameter Viewer Read-only
version
daughter-board serial-number Parameter The serial number of the Viewer Read-only
daughter board
24.2.1.18 license
license acm-license Parameter Indicates whether user of Viewer Read-only
use of dynamic ACM
radio scripts is allowed.
license asymmetrical-scripts- Parameter Indicates whether Viewer Read-only
license asymmetrical scripts are
licensed for use.
This license helps to
optimize bandwidth
usage, by diverting
available capacity from
the uplink to the downlink.
license capacity-name Parameter Configures the radio Viewer Read-only
bandwidth capacity.
license current-license-code Parameter Indicates the license code Operator
that determines the unit‟s
license rights.
license date-code Parameter Indicates the license date Viewer
code.
license demo-admin Parameter Enables or disables the Operator Read-write
demo license.
This is a temporary
license that allows access
to maximum capacity and
all features.
license demo-timer Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
remaining hours for demo
mode.
The demo license is
limited to 60 days.
An event will be raised 10
days before expiration.
license enhanced- Parameter Indicates whether header Viewer
compression-license compression is allowed.


license license-code Parameter Configures the license Operator Read-write
code that determines the
unit‟s license rights.
license license-type Parameter Configures the unit‟s Viewer Read-only
license type: Default,
Normal, or Demo.
The license type
determines the availability
of system features.
license network-resiliency- Parameter Indicates whether the Viewer Read-only
license network resiliency license
is allowed.
This license allows
configuration of features
that make use of loop
network topologies such
as ring RSTP and SNCP
(TDM trails protection).
Note that for systems in
which these features
were enabled in previous
versions, the features will
be allowed even if no
resiliency alarm is
purchased.
license per-usage-license Parameter Indicates whether the per- Viewer Read-only
usage license is allowed.
This license allows
unlimited usage of all
features in the system.
Users are billed according
to actual use. The system
alerts users when a
chargeable feature is
activated.
license signature Parameter license signature Viewer Read-only
license switch-application- Parameter Allows use of Managed Viewer Read-only
license and Metro switch
Ethernet applications.


license syncu-license Parameter Indicates whether the Viewer Read-only
synchronization unit
license is allowed.
This license allows
configuration of external
source as a clock source
for synchronous Ethernet
output, provided that the
IDU‟s hardware supports
synchronization).
If this license is not
installed, the Ethernet
clock source can only be
a local (internal) clock.
license tdm-capacity-license Parameter Limits the bandwidth of Viewer Read-only
the radio script that can
be loaded.
Applies only if the TDM-
only license is disabled.
license tdm-capacity-value Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
TDM trails per radio
allowed by the current
license.
The TDM capacity value
is relevant only if the TDM
Capacity license is
enabled.
license tm-license Parameter Indicates whether Viewer Read-only
Enhanced QoS is
allowed.
license validation-number Parameter Indicates the license Viewer
validation number.
24.2.1.19 idc-board
idc-board change-user- Command Change the user Operator
password password for the current
FTP session.
When using default user
name (anonymous), login
with PC (host) as the
password.


idc-board cli-script Command Execute, show or delete a Operator
CLI configuration script.
idc-board cli-script-file-name Parameter Specifies the file name of Operator Read-write
the CLI script to be
downloaded to the NE.
idc-board config-creation-status Parameter Indicates the status of the Viewer Read-only
unit information archive
creation operation.
idc-board config-download- Parameter Indicates the status of the Viewer Read-only
status configuration backup file
transfer from an external
FTP site to the IDU.
idc-board config-install-status Parameter Indicates the status of the Viewer Read-only
configuration settings
restore operation.
idc-board config-upload-status Parameter Indicates the status of the Viewer Read-only
archive storage operation.
idc-board create-archive Command Creates a configuration Operator Read-write
archive file.


idc-board create-csr-file Command Create a Certificate Admin Read-write
Signing Request (CSR)
file, with optional
identification fields.
Common name
The identify name of the
element in the network
(e.g. IP address).
Organization
The legal name of the
organization.
Organizational Unit
The division of the
organization handling the
certificate.
City/Locality
The city where the
organization is located.
State/County/Region
The state/region where
the organization is
located.
Country
The two-letter ISO code
for the country where the
organization is location.
Email address
An email address used to
contact your organization.
The common name could
be network IP or the
FQDN of the element. If
the identifier is IP
address, then the creation
tool should support this
option.
idc-board download-archive Command Get an archive file from Operator Read-write
the PC (host) onto the
target.
Before activating this
command, make sure to
set host-ip, host-path,
user-name and user-
password.
idc-board download-cli-script- Parameter Indicates the download Viewer Read-only
status status of a CLI script.


idc-board download-security- Parameter Indicates the download Viewer Read-only
status status of the specified
security file.
idc-board file-transfer-protocol Parameter Specify the FTP protocol: Admin Read-write
SFTP or FTP.
idc-board host-ip Parameter Specify the IP address of Admin Read-write
an upload or download
operation.
idc-board host-path Parameter Relative path (under the Admin Read-write
ftp directory) on the host
where the archive is to be
stored.
Default ftp path:
set // for Windows or set /
for Linux.
idc-board hw-mode Parameter Hardware Mode Viewer Read-only
(standalone or xc)
idc-board idc-clli Parameter General CLLI field Operator Read-write
idc-board idu-led Parameter IDU LED Viewer Read-only
idc-board install-archive Command Install the requested Admin Read-write
archive file on target
idc-board kernel-modules- Parameter Identifies current kernel- Viewer Read-only
version modules package set
version
idc-board measurement-system Parameter Measurement system Operator Read-write
idc-board protection-led Parameter Protection LED Viewer Read-only
idc-board radio-led Parameter Radio LED Viewer Read-only
idc-board remote-led Parameter Remote LED Viewer Read-only
idc-board reset-idc-hw Command Reset the IDC - cold Operator
(HW) reset
idc-board rfu-led Parameter RFU LED Viewer Read-only
idc-board security-file-format Parameter The certificate format to Admin Read-write
use for authentication.
idc-board security-file-name Parameter The security filename (for Admin Read-write
upload/download
purpose)
idc-board show-csr-file Command Show Certificate Signing Admin
Request (CSR) file.
idc-board slot-id Parameter Slot ID (within the XC Viewer Read-only
node)


idc-board status-text- Parameter Internal status text Viewer Read-only
indication[2] indication array
idc-board system-up-time Parameter System up time (in Viewer Read-only
hundredths of seconds)
idc-board temperature Parameter IDU temperature Viewer Read-only
idc-board unit-info-creation- Parameter Status of the unit-info Viewer Read-only
status creation action
idc-board unit-info-upload- Parameter Status of the archive Viewer Read-only
status storage action
idc-board upload-archive Command Upload the archive file to Operator
the PC (host). Before
activating this command,
make sure to set host-ip,
host-path, user-name and
user-password
idc-board upload-csr-file-status Parameter Indicates the upload Viewer Read-only
status of the CSR file.
idc-board upload-pub-key- Parameter Status of the public key Viewer Read-only
status uploading
idc-board user-name Parameter User name for the ftp Admin Read-write
session
idc-board version Parameter IDC version Viewer Read-only
idc-board voltage-input Parameter Voltage input Viewer Read-only
idc-board warning-banner- Parameter Operational status of a Viewer Read-only
download-status warning banner
download.
idc-board warning-banner-file- Parameter Specify the warning Admin Read-write
name banner file name to be
downloaded to the NE.
idc-board xc-role Parameter XC Role (Main or Viewer Read-only
Extension)
24.2.1.20 fpga
fpga main-fpga-running-fw- Parameter Main FPGA running FW Viewer Read-only
version Version
fpga secondary-fpga- Parameter Secondary FPGA running Viewer Read-only
running-fw-version FW Version

24.2.1.21 mate-idu
mate-idu cfg-mismatch-details Command Show configuration Operator
mismatch details.
mate-idu copy-to-mate-cmd Command Copies configured Operator
parameters from the
active to the standby unit.
mate-idu copy-to-mate-status Parameter Indicates the status of the Viewer Read-only
Copy-to-Mate operation
when protection is
enabled.
mate-idu excessive-ber-switch- Parameter Enables or disables using Operator Read-write
admin the excessive bit error
rate (BER) alarm
threshold as protection
switch criteria.
When enabled, crossing
the excessive BER
threshold will cause a
protection switch.
mate-idu manual-switch-cmd Command Allows a manual Operator
protection mode switch.
mate-idu mate-communication- Parameter Indicates the mate unit‟s Viewer Read-only
status communication status
with protecting IDU.
mate-idu mate-ip-address Parameter Configures the mate IP Viewer Read-only
address.
For 1+1 protection, it is
the mate IP address of
the protected card.
the mate IP address of
the protected unit.
mate-idu mate-mac-address Parameter Configures the mate MAC Viewer Read-only
address.
the mate MAC address of
the protected card.
the mate MAC address of
the protected unit.


mate-idu multi-unit-lag-admin Command Enables the Multi Unit Operator Read-write
LAG feature.
It can only be activated in
Smart Pipe configuration,
and only when protection
is active (either 1+1 or
2+2).
mate-idu protection-admin Parameter Activates or deactivates Operator Read-write
protection.
For 2Plus2Hsb, this
parameter should be
configured in both the
main and extension slots.
mate-idu protection-force- Parameter Allows forcing a particular Operator Read-write
switch card to switch protection
mode.
mate-idu protection-lockout Parameter Locks the mode of each Operator Read-write
card in the protection, to
ensure that a protection
switch will not occur.
mate-idu protection-mode Parameter Indicates whether the Viewer Read-only
card is in active or
standby protection mode.
mate-idu switchover-on- Parameter Switchover on Copper Admin
copper-loc LOC
24.2.1.22 all-odu
all-odu admin Parameter Enable / disable Operator Read-write
configuring the unit as an
all outdoor unit.
24.2.1.23 shelf-manager
shelf-manager alive-slot- Parameter Indicates if the specified Viewer Read-only
population[6] slot is occupied or not.
shelf-manager archive-operating- Parameter Number of units still being Viewer Read-only
units processed by the last
archive operation
command.


shelf-manager archives-operation- Parameter Shelf-wide configuration Viewer Read-only
status archive operation status.
Used when creating or
restoring a unit
information archive.
shelf-manager cfg-backup-show Command Show extension unit Viewer
configuration backup
information.
shelf-manager config-backup Command Backup extension unit Operator
configuration archives on
the main unit's storage
device.
shelf-manager config-restore Command Restore extension unit Admin
configuration archives
from the main unit's
storage device.
shelf-manager extension-units- Parameter Activate or deactivate Viewer
protection-admin[6] protection for extension
units in the shelf.
shelf-manager logon-unit Command Login to an extension unit Viewer
in the shelf.
shelf-manager radio-interfaces[6] Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
available radio interfaces
in the specified slot.
shelf-manager reset-extensions Command Allow resets for extension Operator
units in the shelf.
shelf-manager reset-shelf Command Reset the entire shelf. Operator
shelf-manager reset-unit Command Reset a specific unit in Operator
the shelf.
shelf-manager sdh-interfaces[6] Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
available SDH interfaces
shelf-manager shelf-info-create Command Create unit information Operator Read-write
archive for units in the
shelf.
shelf-manager shelf-most-severe- Parameter Indicates the severity Viewer Read-only
alarm[6] level of the most severe
alarm for the module on
this slot.
shelf-manager shelf-versions Command Show SW version Viewer
information for all units in
a shelf.


shelf-manager slot-population[6] Parameter Indicates availability of Viewer Read-only
the specified slot.
shelf-manager TDM-interfaces[6] Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
available TDM interfaces
shelf-manager unit-config-backup Parameter Create configuration Operator Read-write
archives for all units in a
shelf.
24.2.1.24 remote-idu
remote-idu force-unmute Command Unmute a remote radio. Operator Read-write
remote-idu remote-atpc-admin Parameter Remote IDU ATPC Operator Read-write
enable/disable
configuration
remote-idu remote-atpc-ref-rx- Parameter Remote ATPC reference Operator Read-write
level Rx level configuration
remote-idu remote- Parameter Remote communication Viewer Read-only
communication status
remote-idu remote-default- Parameter Remote IDU default Operator Read-write
gateway gateway
remote-idu remote-floating-ip- Parameter Remote shelf floating IP Operator Read-write
address address
remote-idu remote-force-max-tx- Parameter Force remote Max Operator Read-write
level transmit level
configuration
remote-idu remote-force-mute-tx Parameter Force remote Mute Operator Read-write
transmit configuration
remote-idu remote-green-mode- Parameter Remote IDU green mode Operator Read-write
admin enable/disable
configuration
remote-idu remote-ip-address Parameter Remote IDU IP address Operator Read-write
remote-idu remote-link-id Parameter Remote IDU link ID Operator Read-write
remote-idu remote-management- Parameter Remote Management Operator Read-write
type type status
remote-idu remote-management- Parameter Remote Management Operator Read-write
vlan VLAN ID configuration
remote-idu remote-most-severe- Parameter Remote most severe Viewer Read-only
alarm alarm status


remote-idu remote-reset-idc-hw Command Reset the remote IDC - Operator
cold (HW) reset
remote-idu remote-rx-level Parameter Remote Rx level status Viewer Read-only
remote-idu remote-slot-id Parameter Remote slot id Viewer Read-only
remote-idu remote-subnet-mask Parameter Remote IDU subnet mask Operator Read-write
remote-idu remote-web-protocol Parameter Remote IDU web protocol Viewer Read-only
type
24.2.1.25 remote-cl
remote-cl clear-device-error Command clear device error counter Operator Read-write
remote-cl device-error Parameter Device errors Viewer Read-only
24.2.1.26 remote-co
remote-co clear-device-error Command clear device error counter Operator Read-write
remote-co device-error Parameter Device errors Viewer Read-only
24.2.1.27 radio-diversity
radio-diversity clear-switch-counter Command Clears the switch counter. Operator Read-write
radio-diversity force-to-radio Parameter Defines which radio to Operator Read-write
use for incoming traffic.
Should only be used for
testing purposes.
radio-diversity operation-mode Parameter parameters to indicate Viewer Read-only
whether the diversity
mechanism is in
operational mode
ON/OFF
radio-diversity primary-radio Parameter Configures which IDU to Operator Read-write
use as the primary radio
channel.
radio-diversity radio-diversity-type Parameter Configures the type of Operator Read-write
hitless diversity to be
used.
Relevant only when
protection is enabled.


radio-diversity receive-radio-traffic Parameter Indicates which radio is in Viewer Read-only
use for incoming traffic.
radio-diversity revertive-mode Parameter Determines whether Operator Read-write
hitless switches are
revertive in the event that
the primary radio channel
does not have any errors.
radio-diversity revertive-timer Parameter Configures the minimum Operator Read-write
amount of seconds
without a failure in the
primary radio, before
performing a revertive
switch.
radio-diversity switch-counter Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
diversity switches
performed since last time
counter was cleared.
radio-diversity switch-request Command Switch primary diversity Operator Read-write
radio.
24.2.1.28 multi-radio
multi-radio admin Parameter Enables/disables the Operator Read-write
Multi-Radio feature for
this radio.
Notice that for the feature
to work it must be
configured in two
adjacent radios (odd and
even slots).
multi-radio block-radio Parameter Allows stopping Operator
distribution of data to
different radios in Multi-
Radio mode for
debugging purposes.
multi-radio excessive-ber-admin Parameter Configures whether in Operator
Multi-Radio mode data
stops being distributed to
the radio when there is an
excessive BER condition.


multi-radio shutdown-link-on- Parameter Enables / disables Admin
radio-fault initiation of automatic
state propagation upon a
failure in each one of the
radios.
multi-radio signal-degrade-admin Parameter Configures whether in Operator
Multi-Radio mode data
stops being distributed to
the radio when there a
signal degraded
condition.
multi-radio unit-role Parameter Configures the role of the Viewer
current unit(master or
slave).
24.2.1.29 radio
radio current-available- Parameter Indicates the available Viewer Read-only
capacity capacity available for
Ethernet bandwidth.
radio compression-mode Command Configures the type of Operator Read-write
compression mode:
legacy or enhanced.
radio high-priority-ethernet- Parameter Configures the amount of Operator Read-write
bw bandwidth reserved for
high-priority Ethernet. (in
Kbps)
radio interface-alias Parameter Free text used to describe Operator Read-write
the interface.
This description can
contain up to 64
characters.
radio max-available-tdm- Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer Read-only
cap number of radio TDM
channels.
radio mhc-admin Parameter Enable or disable MAC Operator Read-write
header compression.
radio radio-if-interface Parameter Enable / disable the radio. Operator Read-write
radio radio-if-interface- Parameter Indicates the radio‟s Viewer Read-only
operational-status operational status.


radio radio-port-discarded- Parameter Shows the oversize Operator Read-only
oversize-frames discarded frames counter.
This counter will be reset
upon RMON reset.
radio sync-clock-source- Parameter VC number to be used Operator Read-write
channel when source is VC.
radio traffic-priority-scheme Parameter Configures the relative Operator Read-write
priority of different traffic
streams.
High-tdm-over-high-
ethernet priorities:
(1) TDM high priority (2)
Ethernet high priority (3)
TDM low priority (4)
Ethernet low priority.
High-Ethernet-over-tdm
priorities:
(1) Ethernet high priority
Ethernet low priority.
Tdm-over-ethernet
priorities:
Ethernet
radio xpic-mr-mate-position Parameter Configures the multi-radio Operator Read-write
mate position:
Horizontal or Vertical.
24.2.1.30 xpic
xpic debug-current-config- Parameter Current XPIC Viewer Read-only
status configuration status flag.
xpic events-enable Parameter Enable logging of XPIC Operator Read-write
events.
xpic slave-if-loopback Parameter Allows slave to update Viewer Read-only
master of IF loopback
event.
xpic slave-mute- Parameter Allows slave to update Viewer Read-only
transmitter master of RFU mute
event.


xpic slave-rfu-comm- Parameter Allows slave to update Viewer Read-only
status master of RFU comm
status event.
xpic slave-xpic-enable Parameter Allows slave to update Viewer Read-only
master of XPIC enable
event.
xpic slave-xpic-lop Parameter Allows master to request Viewer Read-only
slave XPIC LOP status.
xpic slave-xpi-mute Parameter Allows master to set slave Viewer Read-only
XPIC MUTE.
xpic user-rfu-mute Parameter Allows master to read Viewer Read-only
current status if RFU
mute on disk.
xpic xpic-status Parameter XPIC script has been Viewer Read-only
loaded.
xpic xrsm-cfg-delay- Parameter Delay duration between Operator Read-write
between-retries XRSM retries to re-
establish XPIC
communications.
xpic xrsm-cfg-duration-of- Parameter Delay duration of XRSM Operator Read-write
retry retry to re-establish XPIC
communications.
xpic xrsm-cfg-enable Parameter Enables the operation of Operator Read-write
XRSM when LOP is
detected.
xpic xrsm-cfg-num-of- Parameter Number or XRSM Operator Read-write
retries attempts to re-establish
XPIC communications.
xpic xrsm-cfg-retry-length- Parameter Multiplication factor of Operator Read-write
mul-factor time between XRSM
retries.
24.2.1.31 framer
framer link-id Parameter Link ID Operator Read-write
framer oper-status Parameter Indicates the radio‟s Viewer Read-only
operational status.
framer radio-ber Parameter Current radio bit rate error Viewer Read-only
(BER).
framer radio-excessive-ber- Parameter Configures the radio's Operator Read-write
threshold Excessive BER threshold.


framer radio-pm-15min- Parameter Radio 15 minute interval Viewer Read-only
interval[96] performance monitor.
framer radio-pm-24hour- Parameter Radio 24 hour interval Viewer Read-only
framer radio-signal-degrade- Parameter Configures the radio's Operator Read-write
threshold Signal Degrade threshold.
24.2.1.32 mrmc
mrmc acm-profile-degrade- Parameter Threshold for MRMC Operator Read-write
threshold profile degrade alarm
generation.
If enabled,, when an ACM
interrupt is received, the
software will initiate timer
when current profile is
below user defined
threshold.
If the profile changes but
remains above the
threshold, timer will be
stopped and no alarm will
be generated.
mrmc adaptive-tx-power- Parameter Enables/ disables the Tx Viewer Read-write
admin adaptive power option.
mrmc adaptive-tx-power- Parameter Indicates the Tx adaptive Viewer Read-only
reference-class power reference class.
mrmc change-script-cmd Command Change the modem Operator Read-write
script.
mrmc connected-rfu-grade Parameter Indicates the grade of the Viewer Read-only
RFU connection.
mrmc current-acm-adaptive- Parameter Indicates the current ACM Viewer Read-only
rx-profile receiving profile.
mrmc current-acm-adaptive- Parameter Indicates the current ACM Viewer Read-only
tx-profile transmitting profile.
mrmc current-acm-mode Parameter Indicates the current ACM Viewer Read-only
mode.
mrmc current-asymmetrical- Parameter Indicates the current Viewer Read-only
script-mode asymmetrical script
mode.
mrmc current-rx-bitrate Parameter Indicates the current Rx Viewer Read-only
bit rate.


mrmc current-rx-profile Parameter Indicates the modem's Viewer Read-only
current receiving profile.
mrmc current-rx-qam Parameter Indicates the current Viewer Read-only
modulation by the
receiver.
mrmc current-rx-vc Parameter Indicates the current Viewer Read-only
number of TDM Rx
channels.
mrmc current-script-capacity Parameter current-script-capacity Viewer Read-only
mrmc current-tx-bitrate Parameter Indicates the current Tx Viewer Read-only
bit rate.
mrmc current-tx-profile Parameter Indicates the current ACM Viewer Read-only
transmitting profile.
mrmc current-tx-qam Parameter Indicates the current Viewer Read-only
modulation for
transmission.
mrmc current-tx-vc Parameter Indicates the current Viewer Read-only
number of TDM Tx
channels.
mrmc en-alarm-on-acm- Parameter Enable / disable event Operator Read-write
profile-degrade and trap generation on
ACM profile degrade.
When enabled and if
current radio script
supports Adaptive Code
Modulation (ACM) event
and trap will be generated
upon TX ACM profile
degradation below the
user-defined threshold.
An alarm will be
generated only if the ACM
profile stays below the
threshold for at least 5
subsequent seconds.
The alarm will be cleared
after ACM profile returns
to be above the threshold
again.
mrmc eth-shutdown- Parameter Enables / disables Operator Read-write
threshold-profile initiation of automatic
state propagation upon a
failure in each one of the
radios.


mrmc loaded-script- Parameter Loaded script description Viewer Read-only
description
mrmc loaded-script-version Parameter Indicates the version of Viewer Read-only
the loaded modem script.
mrmc max-adaptive-acm-rx- Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer Read-only
profile adaptive ACM Rx profile.
mrmc max-radio-vc Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer Read-only
script capacity.
mrmc max-rx-vc Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer Read-only
Rx VC profile.
mrmc min-acm-profile Parameter Restricts the modem to a Viewer Read-only
minimal threshold.
mrmc min-adaptive-acm-rx- Parameter Restricts the modem to a Viewer Read-write
profile minimal receiving
threshold.
mrmc min-rx-vc Parameter Restricts the modem to a Viewer Read-only
minimum number of TDM
receiving channels.
mrmc mrmc-pm-15min- Parameter MRMC 15 minute interval Viewer Read-only
mrmc mrmc-pm-24hour- Parameter MRMC 24 hour interval Viewer Read-only
mrmc mrmc-script Parameter Radio scheme (Bit Rate, Viewer Read-only
Occupied BW, Modulation
and Grade).
Occupied BW Vs Channel
Separation are listed in
pairs: (Occupied BW
Range[MHz], Channel
Separation [MHz]):
(5-7,7)
(8-10,10)
(12-14,13.75-15)
(25-29,27.5-30)
(33-38,40)
(50-55,55-56)
mrmc occupied-bandwidth Parameter Indicates the actual Viewer Read-only
bandwidth occupied by
the radio signal. (MHz)
mrmc operation-mode Parameter Indicates the current ACM Viewer Read-only
mode.


mrmc rfu-chosen-grade Parameter Indicates the chosen RFU Viewer Read-only
grade.
mrmc rx-max-chosen-bitrate Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer
bit for the Rx profile.
mrmc rx-occupied-bw Parameter Indicates the actual Viewer
occupied Rx bandwidth.
mrmc script-package- Parameter Indicates the version of Viewer Read-only
version the modem script
package.
mrmc tx-max-chosen-bitrate Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer
bit for the Tx profile.
mrmc tx-occupied-bw Parameter Indicates the actual Viewer
occupied Tx bandwidth.
24.2.1.33 tdm-radio-pm
tdm-radio-pm tdm-radio-pm-15min- Parameter TDM radio UAS PM 15 Viewer Read-only
interval[96] minutes monitoring.
tdm-radio-pm tdm-radio-pm-24hour- Parameter TDM radio UAS PM 24 Viewer Read-only
interval[30] hours monitoring.
24.2.1.34 modem
modem clear-counters Command Clear accumulated Operator Read-write
counters.
modem defected-blocks Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
defective radio blocks.
modem ldpc-decoder-stress Parameter LDPC decoder stress Viewer Read-only
modem mse Parameter Mean Square Error Viewer Read-only
(MSE) of the Rx signal.
modem mse-threshold Parameter The threshold above Operator Read-write
which MSE exceeded
seconds will be counted
as errored seconds.
modem pm-15min-interval[96] Parameter Modem 15 minute interval Viewer Read-only
performance monitor.
modem pm-24hour- Parameter Modem 24 hour interval Viewer Read-only
modem slicer-input-scaling Parameter Slicer input scaling Viewer Read-only
information.


modem xpi Parameter Indicates the current XPI Viewer Read-only
level.
modem xpi-threshold Parameter The threshold below Operator Read-write
which Cross Polar
Interface (XPI) exceeded
as errored seconds.
24.2.1.35 rfu
rfu atpc-admin Parameter Enable / disable Operator Read-write
Automatic Transmit
Power Control (ATPC)
mode.
rfu atpc-override-state Parameter Indicates the ATPC Viewer
override state.
rfu atpc-override-tx-level Parameter Configures the default Operator Read-write
ATPC override
transmission signal level.
rfu atpc-ref-rx-level Parameter Configures the ATPC Operator Read-write
RSL reference level.
rfu atpc-timeout Parameter Configures the ATPC Operator Read-write
override timer.
When this timer expires,
the system transmits at
the defined default level.
rfu atpc-timer-counter Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer
seconds passed since
ATPC mode started.
ATPC override mode is
initiated when this counter
reaches the configured
ATPC timeout.
rfu atpc-timer-override- Command Cancels ATPC override Operator Read-write
cancel mode.
rfu automatic-delay- Command Automatic IF combining Operator Read-write
calibration delay calibration.
rfu automatic-delay- Parameter Automatic delay Viewer Read-only
calibration-status calibration status
(inbound frequency
combining parameter).
rfu band Parameter RFU band status. Viewer Read-only


rfu cable-tilt Parameter RFU cable tilt status. Viewer Read-only
rfu clear-com-device- Command Clear RFU Operator Read-write
error communication device
error.
rfu communication-status Parameter Indicates the Viewer Read-only
communication status of
the RFU with the remote
unit.
rfu data-sci-errors Parameter Number of data SCI Viewer Read-only
errors.
rfu delay-calibration Parameter IF combining delay Operator Read-write
calibration.
rfu en-alarm-gen-on-rsl- Parameter Enable/Disable alarm Operator Read-write
degrade generation on RSL
degradation.
If enabled, an alarm will
be generated when the
current RSL level
degrades below the user
defined threshold for 5
subsequent seconds.
Alarm will be cleared
once the RSL level stays
above the threshold for at
least another 5 seconds.
rfu fpga-version-number Parameter Indicates the version of Viewer Read-only
the firmware running on
the RFU.
rfu green-mode-admin Parameter Enables/disables RFU Operator Read-write
green mode.
This mode minimizes
power consumption while
ensuring the highest
transmission power
possible to get an RSL
not higher than the
defined Rx reference
level.
rfu green-mode-ref-rx- Parameter Configures the green Operator Read-write
level mode RSL reference
level.
rfu ifc-support Parameter RFU IFC support status. Viewer Read-only
rfu if-loopback-support Parameter RFU IF loopback support Viewer Read-only
status.

rfu internal-download- Parameter RFU internal download Viewer Read-only
counter counter.
rfu internal-download- Parameter RFU internal download Viewer Read-only
status status.
rfu log-admin Parameter Enables or disables the Operator Read-write
RFU internal log file.
rfu log-interval Parameter Specifies the number of Operator Read-write
seconds for RFU log file
polling interval.
rfu lo-sense Parameter RFU lo sense status Viewer Read-only
rfu max-bandwidth Parameter Indicates the RFU‟s Viewer Read-only
maximum bandwidth.
rfu max-rx-freq Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer Read-only
Rx frequency allowed by
the RFU.
rfu max-tx-freq Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer Read-only
Tx frequency allowed by
the RFU.
rfu max-tx-level Parameter Configures the RFU‟s Operator Read-write
maximum transmit level.
rfu min-bandwidth Parameter RFU minimum bandwidth Viewer
status
rfu min-rx-freq Parameter The minimum Rx Viewer
frequency allowed by the
RFU.
rfu min-tx-freq Parameter The minimum Tx Viewer
frequency allowed by the
RFU.
rfu mse-forward Parameter RFU MSE forward Operator Read-write
command
rfu mute-tx Parameter Mute the RFU‟s Tx Operator Read-write
output.
rfu part-number Parameter Indicates the RFU‟s part Viewer
number.
rfu pm-15min-interval[96] Parameter Performance monitoring Viewer
data for a specific 15
minute interval.
rfu pm-15min-interval- Parameter Aggregate performance Viewer
combined[96] monitoring data for a
specific 15 minute
interval.


rfu pm-15min-interval- Parameter Diversity performance Viewer
diversity[96] monitoring data for a
specific 15 minute
interval.
rfu pm-24hour- Parameter Performance monitoring Viewer
interval[30] data for a specific 24 hour
interval.
rfu pm-24hour-interval- Parameter Aggregate performance Viewer
combined[30] monitoring data for a
specific 24 hour interval.
rfu pm-24hour-interval- Parameter Diversity performance Viewer
diversity[30] monitoring data for a
specific 24 hour interval.
rfu pmax Parameter RFU Pmax status Viewer
rfu pmin Parameter RFU Pmin status Viewer
rfu pm-rx-level-threshold- Parameter The threshold above Operator Read-write
1 which Radio Signal Level
(RSL) 1 exceeded
as errored seconds.
rfu pm-rx-level-threshold- Parameter The threshold above Operator Read-write
2 which Radio Signal Level
(RSL) 2 exceeded
as errored seconds.
rfu pm-tx-level-threshold Parameter The threshold above Operator Read-write
which Transmitted Signal
Level (TSL) exceeded
as errored seconds.
rfu power-supply-status Parameter Indicates the status of the Viewer
RFU power supply.
rfu predistortion-support Parameter Indicates the status of Viewer
RFU pre-distortion
support.
rfu rf-loopback-support Parameter Indicates the status of Viewer
RFU RF loopback
support.
rfu rfu-address Parameter RFU address status Viewer
rfu rfu-d-copartner-carrier Parameter RFU-D copartner carrier Viewer
rfu rfu-installation Parameter RFU installation status Viewer


rfu rfu-mode Parameter Configures the RFU Operator Read-write
inbound frequency
combining mode.
rfu rfu-rf-loopback Parameter Enables / disables RFU Operator Read-write
RF loopback.
rfu rfu-temp Parameter Indicates the RFU Viewer Read-only
temperature according to
the chosen measurement
system.
rfu rfu-type Parameter Indicates the type of the Viewer Read-only
connected RFU.
rfu rfu-xpic-support Parameter Enables / disables XPIC Viewer Read-only
support for the current
script.
rfu rsl-connector-source Parameter Configures the RFU‟s Operator Read-write
inbound frequency
combining RSL connector
source.
rfu rsl-degrade-alarm- Parameter Configures the Operator Read-write
gen-degradation- degradation margin [in
margin dB] for RSL degradation
alarm and event
generation.
rfu rsl-degrade-alarm- Parameter Configures the nominal Operator Read-write
gen-nominal-level level [in dBm] for RSL
degradation alarm and
event generation.
rfu rx-freq Parameter Configures the RFU‟s Rx Operator Read-write
frequency.
rfu rx-freq-local-remote Parameter Configures the remote Rx Operator Read-write
frequency.
rfu rx-level Parameter Indicates the RFU receive Viewer Read-only
level status.
rfu rx-level-combined Parameter Indicates the Rx Viewer Read-only
combined inbound
frequency level.
rfu rx-level-diversity Parameter Indicates the Rx diversity Viewer Read-only
frequency level.
rfu serial-number Parameter Indicates the RFU's serial Viewer Read-only
number.


rfu software-version- Parameter Indicates the RFU‟s Viewer Read-only
number running software version
number.
rfu standard-organization Parameter RFU standard Viewer Read-only
organization
rfu synthesizer-status Parameter RFU synthesizer Viewer Read-only
rfu temp-in-celsius Parameter Indicates the RFU Viewer Read-only
temperature in Celsius.
rfu temp-in-fahrenheit Parameter Indicates the RFU Viewer Read-only
temperature, in
Fahrenheit.
rfu tx-freq Parameter Configures the Tx Operator Read-write
frequency level.
rfu tx-freq-local-remote Parameter Configures the remote Tx Operator Read-write
frequency.
rfu tx-level-status Parameter Indicates the RFU Viewer Read-only
transmit level.
rfu tx-rx-freq-separation Parameter For RFUs where the user Viewer Read-only
cannot set the Tx and Rx
frequencies separately,
configures the Tx to Rx
frequency separation.
rfu unfaded-rsl Parameter Configures the RFU Operator Read-write
Unfaded Rx level.
24.2.1.36 rfu-sw-upload
rfu-sw-upload internal-sw-download- Command Initiates the software Operator Read-write
action download to the RFU.
rfu-sw-upload internal-download- Parameter RFU internal download Viewer Read-only
counter counter.
rfu-sw-upload internal-download- Parameter RFU internal download Viewer Read-only
status status.
24.2.1.37 rfu-fw-upload
rfu-fw-upload internal-fw-download- Command Initiates a firmware Operator Read-write
action download operation.
rfu-fw-upload internal-fw-download- Command Cancel a firmware Operator Read-write
cancel download operation.


rfu-fw-upload internal-fw-download- Parameter Firmware download Viewer Read-only
counter counter.
rfu-fw-upload internal-fw-download- Parameter Indicates the firmware Viewer Read-only
status download status.
24.2.1.38 rfu-co
rfu-co clear-device-error Command Clear RFU device error Operator Read-only
counters.
rfu-co device-error Parameter RFU device error Viewer Read-only
counters.
24.2.1.39 rfu-cl
rfu-cl clear-device-error Command Clear RFU device error Operator Read-only
counters.
rfu-cl device-error Parameter View RFU device errors. Viewer Read-only
24.2.1.40 rfic
rfic if-loopback Parameter Activates IF loopback. Operator Read-write
24.2.1.41 enhanced-hc
Group command Type Description Privilege Access
enhanced-hc clear-enhanced-hc- Command Clears enhanced header Operator Read-write
counters compression counters.
enhanced-hc clear-excluding-rules- Command Clears the excluding rules Operator Read-write
table table.
enhanced-hc del-excluding-rule-by- Command Deletes the specified Operator Read-write
entry excluding rule (by table
entry).
enhanced-hc del-excluding-rule-by- Command Deletes the specified Operator Read-write
name excluding rule (by table
name).
enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-admin Parameter Enable / disable Operator Read-write
enhanced header
compression.


enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-input- Parameter Indicates the Viewer Read-only
bytes accumulated number of
bytes that ingress the
block.
enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-mode Parameter Specifies the Operator Read-write
compression depth for
enhanced header
compression.
enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-num- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
compressed-frames compressed frames.
learning-frames learning frames.
enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-num- Parameter Indicates the of currently Viewer Read-only
occupied-entries occupied entries in the
Enhanced Header
Compression learning
table.
uncompressed- uncompressed frames
frames-excl-rules due to excluding rules.
uncompressed- uncompressed frames
frames-intern-res due to internal reasons.
enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-output- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
bytes accumulated bytes that
egress the block.
enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-rx- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
bytes-in accumulated Rx bytes
before de-compression.
enhanced-hc enhanced-hc-rx- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
bytes-out accumulated Rx bytes
after de-compression.
enhanced-hc show-enhanced-hc- Command Show enhanced header Operator Read-only
counters compression counters.
enhanced-hc show-excluding-rules- Command Show the excluding rules Operator Read-only
table table.

24.2.1.42 interfaces
interfaces ais-line-detection- Parameter Enable or disable Operator Read-write
admin detection of AIS on the
interfaces.
Upon enabling,
monitoring is done for all
relevant interfaces, both
on the main board and
the inserted T-card, if
present.
interfaces available-radio- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
interfaces available radio interfaces.
interfaces available-sync-clk- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
radio-interfaces radio interfaces available
as synchronization
clocks.
interfaces available-sync-src- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
radio-interfaces radio interfaces available
as synchronization
sources.
interfaces available-sdh- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
interfaces available SDH interfaces.
sdh-interfaces SDH interfaces available
as synchronization
clocks.
sdh-interfaces SDH interfaces available
as synchronization
sources.
tdm-interfaces TDM interfaces available
as synchronization
clocks.
tdm-interfaces TDM interfaces available
as synchronization
sources.
interfaces available-tdm- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
interfaces available TDM interfaces.
interfaces sync-trail-radio- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
interfaces trail interfaces available
as synchronization
interfaces.


interfaces sync-trail-sdh- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
interfaces available SDH trail
synchronization
interfaces.
interfaces sync-trail-tdm- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
interfaces available TDM trail
synchronization
interfaces.
24.2.1.43 user-channel
user-channel admin Parameter Enables / disables the Operator Read-write
user channel.
user-channel type Parameter Configures the user Operator Read-write
channel type.
The asynchronous modes
allow two channels, one
in each port.
The twin asynchronous
mode uses port 1 for v.11
and port 2 for RS-232.
The synchronous modes
use two ports each.
24.2.1.44 eow
eow admin Parameter Enables / disables the Viewer Read-write
Engineering Order Wire
(EoW) channel.
24.2.1.45 wayside
wayside admin Parameter Enables / disables the Operator Read-write
Ethernet port as a
Wayside port.
Disabling this option will
cause the port to behave
as a normal traffic
Ethernet port.
wayside auto-negotiation Parameter Activates wayside port Operator Read-write
auto negotiation.


wayside capacity Parameter Configures the wayside Operator Read-write
Ethernet port capacity.
wayside duplex Parameter Configures the wayside Operator Read-write
port duplex.
wayside ethernet-rate Parameter Configures the wayside Operator Read-write
interface port rate.
24.2.1.46 sync
sync active-sync-source Parameter Indicates the interface Viewer Read-only
currently being used as
the system‟s active sync
source.
sync local-sync-ssm-tx Parameter Indicates the value of the Viewer Read-only
received SSM.
sync set-clock-source Command Determines which Operator Read-write
interface to use as the
system‟s frequency
reference source.
sync set-sync-mode Command Configures the Operator Read-write
synchronization mode to
automatic or force.
sync set-sync-source Command Enable the interface as a Operator Read-write
sync show-sync-clock- Command Assign a quality level to a Operator
quality synchronization source.
This enables the system
to select the source with
the highest quality as the
current synchronization
source.
sync show-sync-ssm-value Command Indicates the value of the Operator Read-write
received SSM.
sync show-system-clock- Command Indicates the quality of Operator Read-only
quality the current clock source.
sync sync-electrical-gbe- Parameter Sets the direction in Operator Read-write
direction which the frequency
signal is transported for
electrical GBE interfaces.


sync sync-pw-ref-clock- Determines whether the Operator Read-write
export system reference clock is
exported toward the
PWE3 T-Card.
This reference can be
exported towards front
panel.
Notice that either this or
any single one of the PW
T-card TDM interfaces
can export the reference
clock, but not both at the
same time.
sync sync-source- Parameter Enables/disables PRC Operator Read-write
regenerator-admin regenerator pipe mode.
Enabling sets the IDU to
point-to-point PRC quality
frequency distribution
mode.
sync sync-source- Enables/disables PRC Operator Read-write
regenerator-ssm- regenerator SSM
admin
sync sync-source- Parameter Sets the number of Operator Read-write
revertive-timer seconds to timeout an
interface after it recovers
from a failure.
After this timeout the
interface will be
considered stable and
can be used as a
sync view-clock-source Command View the clock sources of Viewer Read-only
all the interfaces in the
slot.
sync view-sync-source Command View the synchronization Viewer Read-only
sources of all the
interfaces in the slot.

24.2.1.47 ethernet
ethernet acm-ethernet- Parameter Select which profile Viewer Read-only
threshold enables propagation if the
radio ACM profile
degrades below a defined
profile.
Relevant only for non-
protected single-pipe
switch mode, and only
when ACM radio script is
running.
ethernet clock-source Parameter Configures the Ethernet Operator Read-write
port as the system‟s
frequency reference clock
source.
ethernet set-gbe-mute- Command Set GbE mute override. Operator Read-write
override
ethernet show-gbe-mute- Command Show GbE mute override. Viewer Read-only
override
24.2.1.48 bridge
bridge ageing-time Parameter Learned MAC address is Operator Read-write
removed from the
forwarding table after this
amount of time from the
last time this MAC
appeared in an ingressing
frame's source address.
bridge bridge-id Parameter Indicates the RSTP Viewer Read-only
bridge ID.
bridge bridge-role Parameter Indicates the RSTP Viewer Read-only
bridge role.
bridge clear-all-peer-info Command Clear all peer information. Operator Read-write
bridge ethernet-application Parameter Specifies the mode of the Operator Read-write
Ethernet switch
application.
bridge jumbo-mode-admin Enables / disables jumbo Operator Read-write
mode.
bridge lag-load-balance Parameter Configures the LAG Operator Read-write
distribution function.


bridge lldp-management- Parameter IP address that identifies Viewer
address the management address
component associated
with the local system.
bridge lldp-msg-tx-interval Parameter Interval in seconds Operator Read-write
between the transmission
of successive LLDP
frames.
bridge lldp-tx-delay Parameter Minimal interval between Operator Read-write
the transmission of
successive LLDP frames
initiated by value of status
changes.
bridge management-type Parameter Configures the port Viewer Read-only
management type.
bridge max-hops Parameter Maximum hops the BPDU Operator Read-write
will be valid.
bridge msti-bridge-priority Parameter Bridge priority for each Operator Read-write
defined MST instance.
bridge priority Parameter Configures the RSTP Operator Read-write
bridge priority.
bridge provider-port- Parameter Configures the Ethertype Operator Read-write
ethertype of the Marvell switch
provider VLANS (S-tag).
It applies to all Ethernet
ports.
bridge pw-interface-port Parameter Indicates which port Operator
number will be connected
to the PW card.
bridge qos-copy-rate- Command Copy QoS rate limiting Operator Read-write
limiting-configurations configuration from one
port to another.
bridge qos-ip-tos-tc-pbits- Parameter Configures the IP priority Operator Read-write
option options.
bridge qos-policer Command Add / remove a policer. Operator Read-write
bridge qos-policer-class Command Add / remove a policer Operator Read-write
class.
bridge qos-set-ip-pbit-val Command Set IP P-bits to queue Operator Read-write
allocation.
bridge qos-set-scheduler-q- Command Set scheduler queue's Operator Read-write
weight weight.


bridge qos-set-vlan-tag-pbit- Command Set VLAN tag P-bits to Operator Read-write
val queue allocation.
bridge qos-show-ip-pbit-val Command Show IP P-bits to queue Viewer Read-only
allocation.
bridge qos-show-policers Command Show QoS policers. Viewer Read-only
bridge qos-show-scheduler- Command Show scheduler queue Viewer Read-only
q-weight weights.
bridge qos-show-static-mac- Command Show static MAC Viewer Read-only
priorities priorities.
bridge qos-show-vlan-tag- Command Show VLAN tag P-bits to Viewer Read-only
pbit-val queue allocation.
bridge qos-show-vlan-to- Command Show QoS VLAN to Viewer Read-only
queue queue priorities.
bridge qos-static-mac-priority Command Set static MAC priorities. Operator Read-write
bridge qos-vlan-to-queue Command QoS VLAN to queue Operator Read-write
priority.
bridge root-id Parameter Indicates the RSTP root Viewer Read-only
ID.
bridge root-path-cost Parameter Indicates the RSTP root Viewer Read-only
path cost.
bridge show-all-traffic- Command Show Ethernet statistics Viewer Read-only
statistics for all ports.
bridge show-bridge-status Command Show the bridge status. Viewer Read-only
bridge show-eth-statistics Command Show Ethernet statistics. Viewer Read-only
bridge show-forwarding-table Command Show the forwarding table Viewer Read-only
for a specific VLAN/
bridge show-ports-status Command Show the status of all Viewer Read-only
ports/
bridge show-running-config Command Show the .current switch Viewer Read-only
operating configuration
bridge show-vlan-info Command Show the VLAN Viewer Read-only
database.
bridge stp-protocol Parameter Specifies the STP Operator Read-write
protocol.
bridge vlan Command Add, remove, or modify Operator Read-write
values associated with a
single VLAN.


bridge vlan-range Command Add, remove, or modify Operator Read-write
values associated with a
range of VLANs.
24.2.1.49 port-group
port-group disable-all-ports Command Disable all E1/DS1 ports. Operator Read-write
port-group enable-all-ports Command Enable all E1/DS1 ports. Operator Read-write
port-group exber-threshold Parameter Configures the bit error Operator Read-write
rate alarm threshold for
the group of E1s/T1s.
port-group line-code Parameter Configures the PDH line Operator Read-write
coding.
B8ZS is for T1.
HDB3 is for E1.
AMI is only for T1.
port-group line-code-1-8 Parameter Line coding for T1 Operator Read-write
interfaces 1-8.
interfaces 9-16.
interfaces 17-24.
interfaces 25-32.
port-group pdh-led[2] Parameter PDH LED color. Viewer Read-only
port-group sd-threshold Parameter Configures the Signal Operator Read-write
degrade alarm threshold
for the group of E1s/T1s.
24.2.1.50 eth-port
eth-port admin Parameter Enable / disable the port. Operator Read-write
eth-port auto-negotiation Parameter Enables or disables the Operator Read-write
Auto Negotiation option on
the Ethernet port.
eth-port bad-octets-rcv Parameter The sum of lengths of all Viewer
bad Ethernet frames
received.


eth-port brdc-pkts-rcv Parameter The number of good frames Viewer
received that have
broadcast destination MAC
address.
eth-port brdc-pkts-sent Parameter The number of good frames Viewer
sent that have a broadcast
destination MAC address.
eth-port capacity-threshold Parameter Configures the Ethernet Operator
capacity threshold (in
Mbps).
eth-port clear-peer-info Command Clear all peer information. Operator
eth-port clear-rmon Command Clear RMON statistics. Operator
eth-port collisions Parameter The number of collision Viewer
events seen by the MAC
not including those counted
in 'Single', 'Multiple',
'Excessive', or 'Late'.
This counter is applicable in
half-duplex only.
eth-port connector-type Parameter The physical interface type. Operator
For port 8 the only valid
value is radio.
For ports 3 to 7 the only
valid value is RJ45.
In IP10 port 1 is RJ45 and
port 2 is optical SFP.
In IP10G/E ports 1 and 2
can be either RJ45 or
optical SFP.
eth-port deferred Parameter The total number of Viewer
successfully transmitted
frames that experienced no
collisions but are delayed
because the medium was
busy during the first
attempt.
half-duplex only.
eth-port designated-path-cost Parameter Indicates the RSTP path Viewer
cost.
eth-port duplex Parameter Configures half or full Operator
duplex for the Ethernet port.


eth-port edge-port Parameter Enables the port as an Operator
edge port.
eth-port ethernet-rate Parameter Configures the duplex rate: Operator
10, 100 or 1000 Mbps.
eth-port evc-name Parameter Defines a name for the Operator
Ethernet service running
over this VLAN.
eth-port excess-collision-drop Parameter The number of frames Viewer
dropped in the transmit
MAC because the frame
experienced 16 consecutive
collisions.
half-duplex only.
eth-port flow-control Parameter Configures flow control for Operator
the port.
eth-port fragments-pkts Parameter Indicates the total number Viewer
of frames received with a
length of less than 64 octets
but with an invalid FCS.
eth-port functionality-led Parameter Functionality LED Viewer
eth-port good-octets-rcv Parameter Indicates the sum of the Viewer
lengths of all good Ethernet
frames received.
eth-port good-octets-sent Parameter Indicates the sum of the Viewer
lengths of all Ethernet
frames sent from this MAC.
eth-port if-table-indiscards Parameter The number of inbound Viewer
packets which were chosen
to be discarded, even
though no errors had been
detected, to prevent their
being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.
eth-port if-table-inerrors Parameter The number of inbound Viewer
packets that contained
errors preventing them from
being delivered to a higher-
layer protocol.
eth-port if-table-innucastpkts Parameter The number of non-unicast Viewer
packets delivered to a


eth-port if-table-inoctets Parameter The total number of octets Viewer
received on the interface,
including framing
characters.
eth-port if-table-inucastpkts Parameter The number of subnetwork- Viewer
unicast packets delivered to
a higher-layer protocol.
eth-port if-table- Parameter The number of packets Viewer
inunknownprotos received via the interface
which were discarded
because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.
eth-port if-table-outdiscards Parameter The number of outbound Viewer
packets which were chosen
to be discarded, even
though no errors had been
detected, to prevent them
from being transmitted.
eth-port if-table-outerrors Parameter The number of outbound Viewer
packets that could not be
transmitted because of
errors.
eth-port if-table-outnucastpkts Parameter The total number of packets Viewer
that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to
a non-unicast address,
including those that were
discarded or not sent.
eth-port if-table-outoctets Parameter The total number of octets Viewer
transmitted out of the
interface, including framing
characters.
eth-port if-table-outucastpkts Parameter The total number of packets Viewer
that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to
a subnetwork-unicast
address, including those
that were discarded or not
sent.


eth-port in-discards Parameter A 32 bit counter that counts Viewer
the number of good, non-
filtered frames that normally
would have been
forwarded, but could not be
due to a lack of buffer
space.
eth-port in-fcs-err Parameter Total frames received with Viewer
a CRC error not counted in
'Fragments frames
received', 'Jabber frames
received' or 'Rx error
frames received'.
eth-port in-filtered Parameter A 16 bit counter that counts Viewer
the number of good frames
that were filtered due to
ingress policy rules.
The rules include frames
that are dropped due to
802.1Q security checks.
eth-port in-pause Parameter The number of good frames Viewer
received that have Pause
eth-port in-rx-err Parameter Total frames received with Viewer
error signal from PHY.
eth-port interface-alias Parameter Free text used to describe Operator
the Ethernet port.
This description can contain
up to 64 characters.
eth-port interface-index Parameter Interface index Viewer
eth-port interface-type Parameter Configures the port type. Viewer
eth-port internal-connection Parameter Indicates whether the peer Viewer
is placed in the same
chassis (internal) or another
chassis (external).
eth-port in-uni-casts Parameter The number of good frames Viewer
received that have Unicast
eth-port jabber-pkts Parameter Total frames received with Viewer
a length of more than 1632
octets but with an invalid
FCS.


eth-port lag-port Parameter Configures the port group Operator I6.6ga
as a LAG port.
eth-port late-collision-detect Parameter The number of times a Viewer
collision is detected later
than 512 bit-times into the
transmission of a frame.
half-duplex only.
eth-port learning Parameter Enables or disables the Operator
MAC address learning
option on the selected port.
eth-port lldp-admin Parameter Configures the status of the Operator
local LLDP agent.
txOnly [1]
LLDP agent will transmit
LLDP frames on this port
and it will not store any
information about the
remote systems connected.
rxOnly [2]
LLDP agent will receive, but
it will not transmit LLDP
frames on this port.
txAndRx [3]
LLDP agent will transmit
and receive LLDP frames
on this port.
disabled [4]
LLDP agent will not transmit
or receive LLDP frames on
this port.
eth-port lldp-port-description Parameter Local port description that Viewer
will be advertised to the
peer by LLDP protocol.
eth-port lldp-system- Parameter Local system capabilities Operator
capabilities that will be advertised to the
peer by LLDP protocol.
eth-port mac-address Parameter Indicates the management Viewer
port MAC address.
eth-port management-auto- Parameter Indicates the management Viewer
negotiation port auto negotiation status.
eth-port management- Parameter Indicates the management Viewer
capacity port capacity limit.


eth-port management-duplex Parameter Indicates the management Viewer
port duplex value.
eth-port management- Parameter Indicates the management Viewer
ethernet-rate port Ethernet rate.
eth-port management-only Parameter Management only Viewer
eth-port management-port- Parameter Indicates the management Viewer
admin port capacity limit.
eth-port management-vlan Parameter Indicates the management Viewer
port VLAN ID.
eth-port mc-pkts-rcv Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer
good frames received that
have Multicast destination
MAC address.
This does not include
frames counted in 'Pause
frames received' or frames
counted in 'Broadcast
frames received'.
eth-port mc-pkts-sent Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer
good frames sent that have
a Multicast destination MAC
address.
This does not include
frames counted in 'Pause
frames sent' or frames
counted in 'Broadcast
frames sent'.
eth-port mep Command Add / remove a MEP. Operator
eth-port mip Command Add / remove a MIP. Operator
eth-port msti-port-path-cost Parameter Path cost for each defined Operator
MST instance.
eth-port msti-port-priority Parameter Interface priority for each Operator
defined MST instance.
eth-port multiple-collision- Parameter The total number of frames Viewer
frame that have been successfully
transmitted and have also
experienced more than one
collision. .
half-duplex only.
eth-port oper-status Parameter Indicates the port‟s Viewer
operational status.


eth-port out-fcs-err Parameter The number of frames Viewer
transmitted with an invalid
FCS.
eth-port out-filtered Parameter A 16 bit counter that counts Viewer
the number of good frames
that were filtered due to
egress policy rules.
The rules include frames
that passed the ingress
port's policy but are
dropped due to the egress
policy of this port, including
802.1Q security checks.
eth-port out-pause Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer
flow control frames sent.
eth-port out-uni-casts Parameter The number of frames sent Viewer
that have a Unicast
eth-port oversize-pkts Parameter The total number of frames Viewer
received with a length of
more than 1632 octets but
with a valid FCS.
eth-port path-cost Parameter Configures the RSTP path Operator
cost.
eth-port peer-description Parameter User defined description for Operator
the peer port.
eth-port peer-ip-address Parameter Configures the IP address Operator
of the peer port connected
on the local Ethernet port.
eth-port peer-mac-address Parameter Configures the MAC Operator
address of the peer port
connected on the local
Ethernet port.
eth-port peer-name Parameter Peer port name. Operator
eth-port peer-port-description Parameter User defined description for Operator
the peer port.
eth-port peer-port-number Parameter Configures the port number Operator
of the peer port connected
on the local Ethernet port.
The port number is
sequential starting with 1.
Zero [0] indicates not
connected.


eth-port peer-slot-id Parameter Configures the slot ID of the Operator
peer port connected on the
local Ethernet port.
Zero [0] indicates a
standalone unit.
eth-port peer-system- Parameter Configures the peer port Operator
capabilities system capabilities.
eth-port pkts-1024-max-octets Parameter Total frames received with Viewer
length of above 1024 octets
inclusive, including those
with errors.
eth-port pkts-128-255-octets Parameter Total frames received with Viewer
length of between 128 and
255 octets inclusive,
including those with errors.
eth-port pkts-64-octets Parameter Total frames received with Viewer
length of exactly 64 octets,
eth-port pm-15 Parameter 15 minute interval PMs. Viewer
eth-port pm-24 Parameter 24 hour interval PMs. Viewer
eth-port port-connection Parameter Configures the physical Operator
interface type.
For port 8 the only valid
value is radio.
For ports 3 to 7 the only
valid value is RJ45.
In IP10, port 1 is RJ45 and
port 2 is optical SFP.
In IP10-G and IP10-E, ports
1 and 2 can be either RJ45
or optical SFP.


eth-port port-service-type Parameter Configures whether the port Operator
is being used as a Service
Access Point (SAP) or as
a Service Network Point
(SNP) in a network-wide
Ethernet service.
Used by the NMS for
Ethernet service
configuration.
eth-port priority Parameter Configures the port priority. Operator
eth-port protection-only Parameter Protection only Viewer
eth-port protection-port-admin Parameter Activates or deactivates Viewer
protection for the Ethernet
port.
eth-port qos-classify-default Parameter Configures default criteria Operator
for frame classification.
eth-port qos-classify-initial Parameter Configures initial criteria for Operator
frame classification.
eth-port qos-classify-mac-da- Parameter Configures MAC DA based Operator
override frame classification, the first
level of classification criteria
for evaluating incoming
frames.
Allows classification of
frames according to their
static MAC destination
addresses, and overwrites
their VLAN P-bits.
Disable
No MAC DA classification
or VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten.
Queue Decision
Causes classification by
defined static MAC
address, without overwriting
VLAN P-bits.
Pbit Override
VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten without
classification to queue.
Queue and Pbit Override
Classification by both
defined static MAC address
and VLAN P-bits overwrite.


eth-port qos-classify-vid- Parameter If the first criteria is not Operator
override fulfilled, classifies frames
according to VLAN ID, the
second level of
classification criteria for
evaluating incoming frames.
Queue Decision
defined VLAN to queue
mapping.
Pbit Override
P-bits.
Queue and Pbit Override]
Overrides classification by
mapping, and changes the
P-bits accordingly.
eth-port qos-detach-policer Command Detach a policer from the Operator
port.
eth-port qos-egress-shaper Parameter Enables or disables egress Operator
shaping.
eth-port qos-egress-shaper- Parameter Configures the egress Operator
rate shaper rate.
The value should be in
steps of 64K for values less
than 1 Mbps. 1M steps for
values between 1 Mbps and
100 Mbps. 10M steps for
values between 100 Mbps
and 1000 Mbps (GbE ports
only).
eth-port qos-policer-name Parameter Configures the name for the Operator
policer associated with this
port.
eth-port qos-scheduling- Parameter Configures Egress Operator
scheme scheduler options.
eth-port qos-set-vlan-pbits- Command Allows you to remap VLAN- Operator
prio-remap priority bit values 0-7, to
any other preferable value
in the range of 0-7.
eth-port qos-show-policer- Command Show policer classes. Viewer
classes


eth-port qos-show-vlan-pbits- Command Show VLAN P-bits priority Viewer
prio-remap remap.
eth-port role Parameter Indicates the role of the Viewer
RSTP port.
eth-port set-allowed-vlans Command Configures in which ports Operator
this VLAN is allowed.
eth-port show-allowed-vlans Command Indicates in which ports this Viewer
VLAN is allowed.
eth-port show-if-table- Command Show IF table counters. Operator
counters
eth-port show-meps-list Command Show MEPs list. Operator
eth-port show-mips-list Command Show MIPs list. Operator
eth-port show-port-status Command Indicates the port status. Viewer
eth-port single-collision-frame Parameter The total number of Viewer
successfully transmitted
frames that experienced
exactly one collision.
half-duplex only.
eth-port state Parameter Indicates the state of the Viewer
RSTP port.
eth-port throughput-threshold Parameter Configures the Ethernet Operator
throughput threshold.
eth-port tx-mute-upon-rx-loc Parameter Mute Tx upon Rx loss of Operator
carrier.
eth-port type Parameter Configures the port type. Operator
eth-port undersize-pkts Parameter Total frames received with Viewer
a length of less than 64
octets but with a valid FCS.
eth-port utilization-threshold Parameter Configures the Ethernet Operator
utilization threshold (as a
percentage).
eth-port vlan Parameter Configures the port‟s Operator
default VLAN ID.
eth-port wayside-auto- Parameter Indicates if auto negotiation Viewer
negotiation is enabled on the wayside
port (On or Off).
eth-port wayside-capacity Parameter Indicates the wayside port Viewer
Ethernet capacity (Narrow
or Wide).


eth-port wayside-duplex Parameter Indicates the wayside port's Viewer
duplex value (Half or Full).
eth-port wayside-ethernet-rate Parameter Indicates the wayside port Viewer
Ethernet port rate (Mbps)
eth-port wayside-only Parameter Wayside only Viewer
eth-port wayside-port-admin Parameter Indicates whether wayside Viewer
is activated for this port.
24.2.1.51 enhanced-tm
enhanced-tm admin Parameter Enable/ disable the Operator Read-write
Enhanced traffic
manager.
enhanced-tm class-hier1-qos-by- Parameter Enable/Disable CoS and Operator Read-write
known-pdu-table- color classification by
admin known PDU MAC
addresses.
enhanced-tm class-hier1-qos-by- Parameter Enable / disable Operator Read-write
mac-table-admin classification by
destination MAC
addresses.
enhanced-tm class-hier1-qos-by- Parameter Enable / disable CoS and Operator Read-write
udp-ports-table-admin color classification by
UDP source and/or
destination ports.
enhanced-tm class-hier2-inband- Parameter Enable / disable Operator Read-write
mgmt-vlan-table- classification by in-band
admin management.
enhanced-tm class-hier3-reg-prio- Parameter Enable/Disable Cos and Operator Read-write
by-dscp-admin color classification by
DSCP/TOS bits.
enhanced-tm class-hier3-reg-prio- Parameter Enable /Disable CoS and Operator Read-write
by-mpls-admin color classification by
MPLS experimental bits.
enhanced-tm class-hier3-reg-prio- Parameter Enable /Disable CoS and Operator Read-write
by-vlan-pbits-admin color classification by
VLAN P-bits and CFI/DEI
bit.
enhanced-tm classifier-cos-to- Command CoS to queue mapping Operator Read-write
queue-tbl table.


enhanced-tm classifier-hier1-qos- Command CoS and color Operator Read-write
by-known-pdus-tbl classification by known
PDU MAC addresses
table.
by-mac-tbl classification by
destination MAC address
table.
by-udp-ports-tbl classification by UDP
source / destination ports
table.
enhanced-tm classifier-hier2- Command Classification by inband Operator Read-write
inband-management- management VLAN table.
vlan-tbl
enhanced-tm classifier-hier3-reg- Command Classification by default Operator Read-write
prio-by-def-port-tbl CoS and color table.
enhanced-tm classifier-hier3-reg- Command CoS and color Operator Read-write
prio-by-dscp-tbl classification by
DSCP/TOS bits table.
prio-by-mpls-tbl classification by MPLS
experimental bits table.
prio-by-vlan-pbits-tbl classification by VLAN S-
tag P-bits and DEI bit
table.
enhanced-tm clear-all-counters Command Clear all Enhanced TM Operator Read-write
counters.
enhanced-tm pm-queue-15min- Parameter Performance monitoring - Viewer Read-only
interval queue counters 15
minutes interval.
enhanced-tm pm-queue-24hr- Parameter Performance monitoring - Viewer Read-only
interval queue counters 24 hours
interval.
enhanced-tm ptp-optimized- Parameter Enable / disable Precision Operator Read-write
transport-admin Time Protocol.
Upon enabling all the
packets classified to the
8th queue will bypass the
scheduler and will be sent
directly to the radio frame.


enhanced-tm ptp-optimized- Parameter Configures the PTP Operator Read-write
transport-mode transport mode
In High-CoS-Queue-8
mode all the frames that
will be classified to the
8th queue in the traffic
manager will be send to
the PTP optimized
transport channel.
In IEEE-1588 mode IEEE
1588 frames will be
identified automatically
based on UDP ports
and/or ethertypes .
Options:
h-cos-queue-8
eee-1588
Default value:
h-cos-queue-8
enhanced-tm queues-queue-size- Command Configures the queue Operator Read-write
tbl sizes table.
enhanced-tm scheduler- Command Configures the priority Operator Read-write
configuration-tbl and weight schedule
table.
enhanced-tm shaper-configuration- Command Configures the shaper Operator Read-write
tbl features for each queue.
enhanced-tm shaper-global-admin Parameter Enables/disables shaping Operator Read-write
globally.
enhanced-tm show-classifier-cos- Command Show the CoS to queue Operator Read-write
to-queue-tbl mapping table.
enhanced-tm show-classifier-hier1- Command Show the CoS and color Viewer Read-only
qos-by-known-pdus- classification by known
tbl PDU MAC addresses
table.
qos-by-mac-tbl classification by
destination MAC address
table.
qos-by-udp-ports-tbl classification by UDP
source / destination ports
table.


enhanced-tm show-classifier-hier2- Command Show the classification by Viewer Read-only
inband-management- inband management
vlan-tbl VLAN table.
enhanced-tm show-classifier-hier3- Command Show the Classification Viewer Read-only
reg-prio-by-def-port- by default CoS and color
tbl table.
reg-prio-by-dscp-tbl classification by
DSCP/TOS bits table.
reg-prio-by-mpls-tbl classification by MPLS
experimental bits table.
reg-prio-by-vlan-pbits- classification by VLAN S-
tbl tag P-bits and DEI bit
table.
enhanced-tm show-queues-queue- Command Show the queue sizes Viewer Read-only
size-tbl table.
enhanced-tm show-scheduler- Command Show the priority and Viewer Read-only
configuration-tbl weight schedule table.
enhanced-tm show-shaper- Command Show the shaper Viewer Read-only
configuration-tbl configuration table.
enhanced-tm show-wred- Command Show the WRED Viewer Read-only
thresholds-tbl thresholds configuration
table.
enhanced-tm stats-port-counter- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
1024-max-oct-frames- frames transmitted via the
tx port with a length of 1024
to max octets.
128-255-oct-frames-tx frames transmitted via the
port with a length of 128-
255 octets.
256-511-oct-frames-tx frames transmitted via the
511 octets.
512-1023-oct-frames- frames transmitted via the
tx port with a length of 512-
1023 octets.


enhanced-tm stats-port-counter-64- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
oct-frames-tx frames transmitted via the
port with a length of 64
octets.
enhanced-tm stats-port-counter-65- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
127-oct-frames-tx frames transmitted via the
127 octets.
bcast-frames-tx broadcast frames
transmitted via the port.
bytes-tx bytes transmitted via the
port.
mcast-frames-tx multicast frames
ucast-frames-tx unicast frames
enhanced-tm stats-print-port- Command Print all port counters. Operator Read-write
counters
enhanced-tm stats-queue-green- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
bytes-passed green bytes passed
through the queue.
enhanced-tm stats-queue-green- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
packets-dropped green packets dropped by
the queue.
enhanced-tm stats-queue-yellow- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
bytes-passed yellow bytes passed
through the queue.
enhanced-tm stats-queue-yellow- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
packets-dropped yellow packets dropped
by the queue.
enhanced-tm wred-global-admin Parameter Enable / disable WRED. Operator Read-write
enhanced-tm wred-thresholds-tbl Command Configures the WRED Operator Read-write
thresholds per queue
table.

24.2.1.52 service-oam
service-oam association Command Add / modify / remove a Operator Read-write
maintenance association.
service-oam auto-linktrace Command Add / remove a remote Operator Read-write
MEP to the automatic
linktrace list.
service-oam auto-linktrace-interval Parameter Configures the number of Operator Read-write
seconds for the automatic
linktrace interval.
service-oam ccm-admin Command Modify the continuity Operator Read-write
check admin state.
service-oam ccm-interval Command Modify the continuity Operator Read-write
check interval.
service-oam domain Command Add / modify / remove a Operator Read-write
maintenance domain.
service-oam linktrace Command Trace a message to a Viewer Read-write
remote MEP or MIP.
service-oam ping Command Ping a message to a Viewer Read-write
remote MEP or MIP.
service-oam remote-mep Command Add / remove a remote Operator Read-write
MEP.
service-oam remote-meps- Parameter Configure the number of Operator Read-write
learning-time seconds for the remote
MEPs learning time.
service-oam show-auto-linktrace- Command Show the remote MEPs Viewer Read-only
list configured in the
automatic linktrace list.
service-oam show-auto-linktrace- Command Show the last auto Viewer Read-only
maid-status linktrace result for all
MAID remote MEPs.
service-oam show-auto-linktrace- Command Show the last auto Viewer Read-only
mep-status linktrace result for a
remote MEP.
service-oam show-configured- Command Show all local MEPs info. Viewer Read-only
local-meps
service-oam show-configured- Command Show all remote MEPs Viewer Read-only
remote-meps info.
service-oam show-domain-interval Command Show the domain & VLAN Viewer Read-only
CCM interval.
service-oam show-domain-list Command Show the maintenance Viewer Read-only
domain list.


service-oam show-local-meps-list Command Show the local MEPs list. Viewer Read-only
service-oam show-maid-list Command Show the MAID list. Viewer Read-only
service-oam show-mips-list Command Show the domain & VLAN Viewer Read-only
MIPs list.
service-oam show-remote-meps- Command Show the remote MEPs Viewer Read-only
list list.

24.2.2 pdh
24.2.2.1 e1t1-port
e1t1-port admin Parameter Enable / disable the E1 / Operator Read-write
T1 port.
e1t1-port ais-detection-status Parameter Indicates the status of the Viewer Read-only
AIS detection.
Supported only if AIS
detection is activated.
e1t1-port cable-length Parameter Determines the cable Operator Read-write
length range.
Valid only for T1
interfaces.
e1t1-port clock-source Parameter Configures which clock to Operator Read-write
use as the system‟s
frequency reference.
local-clock
Indicates that the
outgoing signal takes its
clock from an
independent local clock.
system-clock-source
indicates that the clock is
from the system
reference clock, as taken
from the synchronization
source interface.
e1t1-port e1t1-priority Parameter Indicates the ACM priority Operator Read-write
of the E1/T1.
Relevant only for stand-
alone configurations.
In a shelf, this parameter
is defined in the trail
configuration.
e1t1-port interface-alias Parameter Free text used to describe Operator Read-write
the E1/T1 port.
contain up to 64
characters.
e1t1-port interface-type Parameter Indicates the type of Viewer Read-only
interface.


e1t1-port line-loopback Parameter Configures the loopback Operator Read-write
test on the E1/T1.
e1t1-port line-pm-15[96] Parameter Shows 15 minute interval Viewer Read-only
line performance
monitoring data.
e1t1-port line-pm-24[30] Parameter Shows 24 hour interval Viewer Read-only
line performance
monitoring data.
e1t1-port oper-status Parameter Indicates the operational Viewer Read-only
status of the E1/T1 port.
e1t1-port port-curr-ber Parameter Indicates the bit error rate Viewer Read-only
alarm threshold for the
E1/T1.
24.2.2.2 lag-port
Enable / disable a
lag-port admin Parameter Operator Read-write
LAG port.
lag-port auto-negotiation Parameter Enables / disables auto Operator Read-write
negotiation option on the
LAG port.
lag-port designated-path-cost Parameter Indicates the LAG port‟s Viewer Read-only
designated path cost.
lag-port duplex Parameter Configures the LAG port‟s Operator Read-write
duplex value (Half or
Full).
lag-port edge-port Parameter Enables the LAG port to Operator Read-write
function as an edge port.
lag-port ethernet-rate Parameter Configures the LAG port‟s Operator Read-write
Ethernet rate (Mbps).
lag-port if-table-indiscards Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
inbound packets which
were chosen to be
discarded even though no
errors had been detected
to prevent their being
deliverable to a higher-
layer protocol.
lag-port if-table-inerrors Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
inbound packets that
contained errors
preventing them from
being deliverable to a

Enable / disable a
LAG port.
lag-port if-table-innucastpkts Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
non-unicast packets
delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
lag-port if-table-inoctets Parameter Indicates the total number Viewer Read-only
of octets received on the
interface, including
framing characters.
lag-port if-table-inucastpkts Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
sub-network unicast
packets delivered to a
lag-port if-table- Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
inunknownprotos packets received via the
interface which were
discarded because of an
unknown or unsupported
protocol.
lag-port if-table-outdiscards Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
outbound packets which
were chosen to be
discarded even though no
errors had been detected
to prevent their being
transmitted.
lag-port if-table-outerrors Parameter Indicates the number of Viewer Read-only
outbound packets that
could not be transmitted
because of errors.
lag-port if-table-outnucastpkts Parameter Indicates the total number Viewer Read-only
of packets that higher-
level protocols requested
be transmitted to a non-
unicast address, including
those that were discarded
or not sent.
lag-port if-table-outoctets Parameter Indicates the total number Viewer Read-only
of octets transmitted out
of the interface, including
framing characters.

Enable / disable a
LAG port.
lag-port if-table-outucastpkts Parameter Indicates the total number Viewer Read-only
of packets that higher-
level protocols requested
be transmitted to a sub-
network unicast address,
including those that were
discarded or not sent.
lag-port interface-alias Parameter Free text used to describe Operator Read-write
the LAG port.
contain up to 64
characters.
lag-port interface-index Parameter Interface index Viewer Read-only
lag-port interface-type Parameter LAG port interface type Viewer Read-only
lag-port lag-clear-rmon Command Clears a LAG port‟s Operator Read-write
RMON statistics.
lag-port lag-member Command Add or remove an Operator Read-write
Ethernet port to/from an
aggregation group.
lag-port lag-members-list Parameter Shows the list of Viewer Read-only
members associated with
the LAG port.
lag-port lag-port-remove Command Remove an aggregation Operator Read-write
group.
lag-port learning Parameter Enables or disables the Operator Read-write
MAC address learning
option on the selected
LAG port.
lag-port mac-address Parameter Indicates the LAG port's Viewer Read-only
MAC address.
lag-port management-only Parameter Management only Viewer Read-only
lag-port mep Command Add or remove a MEP. Operator Read-write
lag-port mip Command Add or remove a MIP. Operator Read-write
lag-port msti-port-path-cost Parameter Configures the path cost Operator Read-write
for each defined MST
instance.
lag-port msti-port-priority Parameter Configures the interface Operator Read-write
priority for each defined
MST instance.

Enable / disable a
LAG port.
lag-port oper-status Parameter Indicates the LAG port‟s Viewer Read-only
operational status.
lag-port path-cost Parameter Configures the cost of the Operator Read-write
path from the LAG port to
the root bridge.
lag-port port-service-type Parameter Service type to which the Operator Read-write
port is associated. Used
by the NMS for Ethernet
service configuration
lag-port priority Parameter Configures the port Operator Read-write
priority.
lag-port protection-only Parameter Protection only Viewer Read-only
lag-port qos-classify-default Parameter Configures default criteria Operator Read-write
lag-port qos-classify-initial Parameter Configures initial criteria Operator Read-write

Enable / disable a
LAG port.
lag-port qos-classify-mac-da- Parameter Configures MAC DA Operator Read-write
override based frame
classification, the first
level of classification
criteria for evaluating
incoming frames.
Allows classification of
frames according to their
static MAC destination
addresses, and
overwrites their VLAN P-
bits.
Disable
No MAC DA classification
or VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten.
Queue Decision
defined static MAC
address, without
overwriting VLAN P-bits.
Pbit Override
VLAN P-bits will be
overwritten without
classification to queue.
Queue and Pbit
Override
Classification by both
defined static MAC
address and VLAN P-bits
overwrite.

Enable / disable a
LAG port.
lag-port qos-classify-vid- Parameter If the first criteria is not Operator Read-write
override fulfilled, classifies frames
according to VLAN ID, the
second level of
classification criteria for
evaluating incoming
frames.
Queue Decision
mapping.
Pbit Override
P-bits.
Queue and Pbit
Override]
Overrides classification
by defined VLAN to
queue mapping, and
changes the P-bits
accordingly.
lag-port qos-scheduling- Parameter Configures Egress Operator Read-write
scheme scheduler options.
lag-port qos-set-vlan-pbits- Command Allows you to remap Operator Read-write
prio-remap VLAN-priority bit values
0-7, to any other
preferable value in the
range of 0-7.
lag-port qos-show-vlan-pbits- Command Show VLAN P-bits priority Viewer Read-only
prio-remap remap.
lag-port role Parameter Indicates the LAG port‟s Viewer Read-only
role.
lag-port set-allowed-vlans Command Set allowed VLANs. Operator Read-write
lag-port show-allowed-vlans Command Show allowed VLANs. Viewer Read-only
lag-port show-if-table-counters Command Show IF table counters. Operator
lag-port show-meps-list Command Show the MEPs list. Operator
lag-port show-mips-list Command Show the MIPs list. Operator
lag-port show-port-status Command Show the port status. Viewer Read-only
lag-port state Parameter Indicates the state of the Viewer Read-only
RSTP port.
lag-port type Parameter Configures the port type. Operator Read-write

Enable / disable a
LAG port.
lag-port vlan Parameter Configures the LAG port's Operator Read-write
default VLAN ID.
lag-port wayside-only Parameter Indicates if the LAG port Viewer Read-only
is configured as wayside
only.
24.2.2.3 trails
Activate or reserve all
trails act-all-trails Command Operator Read-write
trails.
trails act-trail-by-id Command Activate or reserve a trail Operator Read-write
by ID.
trails add-def-trails Command Add default trails (use on Operator Read-write
standalone units with an
empty database).
trails add-trail Command Add a trail. Operator Read-write
trails del-all-trails Command Delete all trails. Operator Read-write
trails del-trail-by-id Command Delete a trail by ID. Operator Read-write
trails del-trail-by-src Command Delete a trail by source. Operator Read-write
trails dump-hw-table- Command Dump the HW table Admin Read-write
configuration configurations for a
device.
trails dump-revertive- Command Dump the list of revertive Admin Read-write
timers-array timers.
trails dump-trails-db Command Dump the trail DB for Admin Read-write
[local|global] database
with options.
trails perform-local-trail- Command Verify that the local DB Admin Read-write
consistency-check configuration, including
HW, is valid.
trails protected-trail-force- Command Forces a protected trail to Operator Read-write
active a selected configuration
(Primary, Secondary,
None, or Idle).
trails protected-trail-force- Command Forces a specific Operator Read-write
active-by-id protected trail to a
selected configuration
(Primary, Secondary,
None, or Idle).
trails protected-trail-switch- Command Reset the switch counter Operator Read-write
reset for all protected trails.

Activate or reserve all

trails act-all-trails Command Operator Read-write
trails.
trails protected-trail-switch- Command Reset the switch counter Operator Read-write
reset-by-id for the specified trail.
trails show-all-trail-alarms Command Show all trails alarms. Operator
trails show-all-trail-pms Command Show all trails PMs. Operator
trails show-all-trails Command Show all trails. Viewer Read-only
trails show-local-trails- Command Show local trails Admin
statistics statistics.
trails show-trail-by-id Command Show a trail by trail ID. Viewer Read-only
trails show-trail-by-src Command Show a trail by source Operator
edge.
trails show-trail-pms-by-id Command Show trail PM's using a Operator
trail ID.
trails show-trails-statistics Command Show trails statistics. Operator
trails trail-revertive-switch- Parameter Configures the revertive Operator Read-write
timeout switch timeout in seconds
for revertive protected
trails.
trails trails-level-trail-trap- Parameter Enables / disables trail Admin Read-write
admin level traps.

24.2.3 sdh
24.2.3.1 stm1
stm1 admin Parameter Enable / disable receiving Operator
and transmitting traffic
through the STM-1
interface.
stm1 ais-detection-status- Parameter Indicates whether Viewer
on-vc[63] incoming AIS is currently
detected in the VC's
payload.
stm1 ais-vc-signaling- Parameter Enable or disable AIS Operator
admin signaling at the V5 byte
on the STM-1, OC-3
interface.
stm1 clock-source Parameter Configures the clock Operator
source used as a
reference for the outgoing
STM-1 signal.
stm1 clock-source-status Parameter Indicates the actual Viewer
source of the clock for the
outgoing STM-1 signal.
It may differ from the
desired source if the
source signal is missing
or corrupt.
stm1 concat-config-admin Parameter Controls concatenation Admin
configuration.
stm1 ds1-standard-klm- Parameter Allows choosing between Operator
mapping standard and proprietary
KLM mapping.
stm1 excessive-ber- Parameter Configures the excessive Operator
threshold bit error rate alarm
threshold on the STM-
1/OC-3 interface.
stm1 expected-trace- Parameter Configures the J0 trace Operator
identifier identifier signal that is
expected to be received
on the STM-1/OC-3
interface.
stm1 force-mute Parameter Enables or disables the Operator
mute Tx option on the
interface.


stm1 interface-type Parameter Indicates the interface Viewer
type.
stm1 line-loopback Parameter Configures the type of Operator
loopback to run.
stm1 line-tx-protection- Parameter Configures the behavior Operator
mode of the transmitting line in
a 1+1 HSB configuration.
In normal mode the
stand-by signal is
silenced.
In uni-directional MSP
mode, both units are
transmitting.
stm1 loopback-counter Parameter Shows the STM-1/OC-3 Viewer
line loopback counter.
stm1 loopback-timeout Parameter STM-1/OC-3 line Operator
loopback timeout, in
minutes.
0 means no timer.
stm1 max-num-of-vc Parameter Indicates the maximum Viewer
number of low-order path
VC (VC-11/12) in the
SDH interface.
stm1 node-to-node- Parameter Enable / disable Operator
connection connecting the STM-
1/OC-3 port with an
additional NE.
stm1 oper-status Parameter Indicates the operational Viewer
status of the STM-1
interface.
stm1 peer-description Parameter Adds a description of the Operator
remote STM1 element.
stm1 peer-ip-address Parameter Configures the IP address Operator
of the remote STM-1/OC-
3 interface.
stm1 peer-port-number Parameter Configures the port Operator
number of the remote
STM-1/OC-3 interface.
stm1 peer-slot-id Parameter Configures the slot ID of Operator
the remote STM-1/OC-3
port.


stm1 pm-15[96] Parameter Shows 15 minute interval Viewer
line performance
monitoring data.
stm1 pm-24[30] Parameter Shows 24 hour interval Viewer
line performance
monitoring data.
stm1 rdi-v-signaling-admin Parameter Disables sending VC- Operator
level RDI in the STM-
1/OC-3 interface.
stm1 received-trace- Parameter Indicates the J0 trace Viewer
identifier identifier signal that was
received on the on the
STM-1/OC-3 interface.
stm1 signal-degrade- Parameter Configures the signal Operator
threshold degrade alarm threshold
for the STM-1/OC-3.
stm1 stm1-clear-peer-info Command Clears all peer Operator Read-write
information.
stm1 stm1-led Parameter STM-1 SFP led. Viewer
stm1 sync-clock-source-vc Parameter Configures the outgoing Operator
VC signal to be taken as
the STM-1/OC-3
synchronization source, if
used as a sync source.
Use [0] if the clock source
is local.
stm1 sync-vc Parameter Configures the VC Operator
channel used to
synchronize the STM-1
interface.
stm1 trace-identifier-string- Parameter Configures the length of Operator
length the STM-1/OC-3 signal J0
trace identifier.
stm1 transmit-trace- Parameter Configures the string Operator
identifier used as the transmitted
STM-1/OC-3 signal J0
trace identifier.

24.2.4 pw
24.2.4.1 pw-tdm
pw-tdm ais-detection-status Parameter Indicates the status of Viewer
AIS detection on the port.
24.2.4.2 pwc
pwc card-up-time Parameter Time elapsed since last Viewer
reset of this PWC card.
pwc export-clk-front-panel Parameter Configure which clock the Operator
PWC card exports to the
front panel clock.
pwc export-clk-front-panel- Parameter TDM port serving as clock Operator
cr-port recovery reference if
export-clk-front-panel is
set to clock-recovery, 0 -
otherwise
pwc export-clk-sys-ref Parameter Configure which clock the Operator
PWC card exports to the
system reference clock.
pwc export-clk-sys-ref-cr- Parameter TDM port serving as clock Operator
port recovery reference if
export-clk-sys-ref is set to
clock-recovery, 0 -
otherwise
pwc front-panel-clock- Parameter Indicates whether the Operator
admin front panel clock is
enabled.
pwc front-panel-clock-led Parameter External clock input LED Viewer
pwc front-panel-clock- Parameter Configure the type of Operator
signal-input input clock signal of the
front panel port.
pwc front-panel-clock- Parameter Configure the type of Operator
signal-outp output clock signal of the
front panel port.
pwc ip-addr-udpip-traffic Parameter IP Address for outbound Operator
UDP/IP traffic
pwc ip-subnet-udpip-traffic Parameter IP Subnet for outbound Operator
UDP/IP traffic


pwc protection Parameter HSB Protection status as Viewer
known on this PWC card.
pwc pw-sw-version Parameter Software version of the Viewer
application running on
this PWC card.
pwc show-card- Command Show the PWC board Operator Read-only
configuration configuration
pwc tdm-interface-type Parameter TDM interface type Viewer
(E1/T1) of this PWC card
24.2.4.3 tdm-ports
tdm-ports admin Parameter Admin status of the TDM Operator
port
tdm-ports assigned Parameter Indication whether the Viewer
TDM port is assigned to a
trail
tdm-ports channelization Parameter Indication whether TDM Operator
port is dedicated for
CESoP or SAToP.
tdm-ports clock-source- Parameter Clock source reference: Operator
reference "sys-ref-clk" or "front-
panel" for absolute,
"none" for loop or clock-
recovery timing modes
tdm-ports clock-source-ref-port Parameter TDM port serving as a Operator
clock reference for loop or
clock-recovery timing
modes
tdm-ports counter Parameter Loopback time left (in Viewer
seconds)
tdm-ports idle-code Parameter Value transmitted on this Operator
TDM port in unused
timeslots
tdm-ports line-coding Parameter TDM port line coding Operator
tdm-ports line-pm-15 Parameter Line PM 15 minute Viewer
monitoring
tdm-ports line-pm-24 Parameter Line PM 24 hour Viewer
monitoring
tdm-ports line-status Parameter Indicates the line status of Viewer
the TDM port


tdm-ports line-type Parameter TDM port line type Operator
tdm-ports loopback Parameter Desired loopback Operator
configuration on this TDM
port
tdm-ports oper-status Parameter Operational status of the Viewer
TDM port
tdm-ports rx-cas-code Parameter CAS pattern received on Viewer
this TDM port
tdm-ports show-all-channels Parameter Show all DS0 channels: Operator
show-all-channels [id]
tdm-ports show-assigned- Command Show assigned DS0 Operator Read-only
channels channels: show-assigned-
channels [id]
tdm-ports show-available- Command Show available DS0 Operator Read-only
channels channels unassigned to
any DS0 bundle: show-
available-channels [id]
tdm-ports show-channels-cas- Command Show received and Operator Read-only
codes transmitted CAS code on
all DS0 channels of a
particular TDM port:
show-channels-cas-codes
<id>
tdm-ports show-port- Command Show port configuration: Operator Read-only
configuration show-port-configuration
[id]
tdm-ports timeout Parameter Loopback timeout in Operator
minutes (0 for unlimited)
tdm-ports timing-mode Parameter Timing mode for signal Operator
transmission on the TDM
port
tdm-ports tx-cas-code Parameter CAS pattern transmitted Viewer
on this TDM port
24.2.4.4 ds0-bundles
ds0-bundles add-bundle Command Add a bundle: add-bundle Operator Read-write
<id> <port-num> <chan-
start> <chan-end> [desc]
ds0-bundles add-channel Command Add channel to a bundle: Operator Read-write
add-chanel <id> <port-
num> <chan-num>.


ds0-bundles admin Parameter Admin status of this DS0 Viewer
bundle
ds0-bundles bundle-desc Parameter DS0 bundle description Operator
ds0-bundles bundle-ds0-list Parameter List of the assigned DS0 Viewer
channels on a particular
TDM port
ds0-bundles bundle-id Parameter DS0 bundle Id Viewer
ds0-bundles bundle-tdm-port Parameter TDM port assigned to Viewer
DS0 bundle
ds0-bundles delete-bundle Command Delete a bundle by Id: Operator Read-write
delete-bundle <id>
ds0-bundles delete-channel Command Delete channel from a Operator Read-write
bundle: delete-chanel
<id> <port-num> <chan-
num>
ds0-bundles disable-bundle-by-id Command Disable a DS0 bundle by Operator Read-write
its Id: disable-bundle-by-
id <id>
ds0-bundles disable-bundle-by- Command Disable DS0 bundles Operator Read-write
port-chan assigned to a TDM port:
disable-bundle-by-port
<port-num> [chan-num]
ds0-bundles enable-bundle-by-id Command Enable a DS0 bundle by Operator Read-write
its Id: enable-bundle-by-id
<id>
ds0-bundles enable-bundle-by- Command Enable DS0 bundles Operator Read-write
port-chan assigned to a TDM port:
enable-bundle-by-port
ds0-bundles oper-status Parameter Operational status of the Viewer
DS0 bundle
ds0-bundles show-bundle-by-id Command Show DS0 bundle by Id: Operator Read-only
show-bundle-by-id [id]
ds0-bundles show-bundle-by-port- Command Show DS0 bundle by Operator Read-only
chan port/channel: show-
bundle-by-port-chan

24.2.4.5 tunnels
tunnels actual-remote-mac- Parameter Actual Remote MAC Viewer
addr Address for this PSN
tunnel.
tunnels c-vid Parameter PSN Tunnel C-VLAN Id Viewer
tunnels dest-ip-addr Parameter Destination IP address for Viewer
UDP/IP tunnel
tunnels eth-tunnel Command Set/remove an Ethernet Operator Read-write
PSN tunnel: eth-tunnel
<set/remove> <id> <vlan-
type> <vlan-id> <p-bits>
[remote-mac-addr]
tunnels next-hop-ip Parameter Next hop IP address for Viewer
UDP/IP tunnel
tunnels p-bits Parameter PSN Tunnel P-bits Viewer
tunnels psn-type Parameter Type of this PSN tunnel Viewer
tunnels remote-mac-addr Parameter Remote MAC Address for Viewer
this PSN tunnel
tunnels show-tunnel-by-id Command Show PSN tunnel(s): Operator Read-only
show-tunnel-by-id [id]
tunnels source-ip-addr Parameter Source IP address for this Viewer
tunnel
tunnels source-mac-addr Parameter Source MAC Address for Viewer
this PSN tunnel
tunnels s-vid Parameter PSN Tunnel S-VLAN Id Viewer
tunnels tos-dscp Parameter PSN Tunnel ToS (DSCP) Viewer
tunnels tunnel-id Parameter PSN Tunnel Id Viewer
tunnels udpip-tunnel Command Set/remove a UDP/IP Operator Read-write
PSN tunnel: udpip-tunnel
<set/remove> <id> <dest-
ip> <next-hop-ip> <vlan-
type> <vlan-id> [tos-dscp]
[p-bits]
tunnels vlan-type Parameter VLAN type supported by Viewer
this PSN tunnel

24.2.4.6 pw-profiles
pw-profiles add-pw-profile Command Add a new PW profile Operator Read-write
with default values: add-
pw-profile <id>
pw-profiles alarm-thresh Parameter Delay (in msecs) for Operator
persistent alarm setting
pw-profiles cas-alarm-pattern Parameter CAS alarm pattern Operator
transmitted on E1
interface when packets
over/underflow the jitter
buffer
pw-profiles clear-alarm-thresh Parameter Delay (in msecs) for Operator
persistent alarm clearing
pw-profiles conseq-miss-pkts-out- Parameter Number of consecutive Operator
sync missing packets required
to enter LOPS.
pw-profiles conseq-packets-in- Parameter Number of consecutive Operator
sync packets with sequential
sequence numbers
required to exit LOPS
pw-profiles copy-pw-profile Command Copy PW profile with a Operator Read-write
given id into a new one:
copy-pw-profile <id>
<new-id>
pw-profiles delete-pw-profile Command Delete a PW profile: Operator Read-write
delete-pw-profile <id>
pw-profiles ds0-filler Parameter Byte pattern transmitted Operator
on ds0 channels when
packets over/underflow
the jitter buffer
pw-profiles excessive-pkt-loss- Parameter Alarm threshold (in Operator
thresh percent) for excessive
packet loss
pw-profiles jitter-buffer-depth Parameter Jitter buffer depth (in Operator
milliseconds) to allow
accommodation to the
PSN-specific packet
delay variation.
pw-profiles lops-detection Parameter If enabled, LOPS Operator
detection is supported.


pw-profiles missing-pkts-to-ses Parameter Percent of missing Operator
packets detected in 1
second window to cause
SES to be counted
pw-profiles payload-size Parameter Number of times DS0 Operator
channels are sampled in
order to create one
Ethernet packet.
pw-profiles payload-suppression Parameter Indicates whether Operator
payload suppression is
allowed for the PW.
pw-profiles payload-type Parameter Payload type. Operator
pw-profiles pkt-loss-time-window Parameter Time for computing Operator
average packet loss rate
to detect excessive
packet loss.
pw-profiles pw-profile-id Parameter PW Profile Id Viewer
pw-profiles rtp-header-used Parameter If set to False: an RTP Operator
header is not pre-pended
to the TDM packet.
pw-profiles rtp-timestamp-abs- Parameter Multiplication factor for Operator
factor 8KHz units in absolute
mode of RTP
timestamping.
pw-profiles rtp-timestamp-mode Parameter Indicates which RTP Operator
timestamp mode is used
by the PW.
pw-profiles show-pw-profile Command Show a PW profile: show- Operator Read-write
pw-profile [id]
24.2.4.7 pws
pws add-pw Command Add new PW: add-pw Operator Read-write
<pw-id> <pw-type> <psn-
type> <tdm-port-or-
ds0bundle> <tdm-profile-
id> <psn-tunnel-or-group-
id> <src-udp-port-or-ecid>
<dst-udp-port-or-ecid>
[cr-master]
[admin]
pws admin Parameter Admin status Viewer


pws clear-pw-stats Command Clear PW statistics: clear- Operator Read-write
pw-stats <id>
pws cr-master Parameter Clock Reference master Viewer
PW
pws curr-max-jitter-buff- Parameter Maximum jitter buffer Viewer
count usage registered for the
last second
pws curr-min-jitter-buff- Parameter Minimum jitter buffer Viewer
count usage registered for the
last second
pws delete-pw Command Delete a PW: delete-pw Operator Read-write
<id>
pws dst-udp-port-or-ecid Parameter Destination UDP Port for Viewer
UDP IP tunnel or ECID
for Ethernet tunnel
pws modify-pw Command Modify admin status of a Operator Read-write
PW: modify-pw <id>
pws oper-status Parameter Operational status of this Viewer
PW service
pws psn-type Parameter PSN type that the PW Viewer
uses over the network
pws pw-id Parameter PW Id Viewer
pws pw-jitter-buff-overruns Parameter Number of jitter buffer Viewer
overruns
pws pw-max-jitter-buff- Parameter Max Jitter Buffer Viewer
deviation Deviation
pws pw-pm-15 Parameter Line PM 15 minute Viewer
monitoring
pws pw-pm-24 Parameter Line PM 24 hour Viewer
monitoring
pws pw-profile-id Parameter TDM profile id for this Viewer
PW.
pws pw-rcvd-pkts Parameter Number of packets Viewer
received by this PW
pws pw-transitions-norm- Parameter Number of transitions Viewer
lops from the normal state to
the LOPS
pws pw-tx-pkts Parameter Number of packets Viewer
transmitted by this PW


pws pw-type Parameter The emulated service to Viewer
be carried over the PW
pws show-pw-by-id Command Show a PW by Id : show- Operator Read-only
pw-by-id [id]
pws show-pw-stats Command Show PW statistics: Operator Read-only
show-pw-stats <id>
pws src-udp-port-or-ecid Parameter Source UDP Port for UDP Viewer
IP tunnel or ECID for
Ethernet tunnel
pws tdm-port-or- Parameter TDM port number for Viewer
ds0bundle SATOP or DS0 bundle id
for CESoPSN PW
service.
24.2.4.8 eth-port-pwc
eth-port-pwc actual-duplex Parameter Actual duplex for Ethernet Viewer Read-write
port.
eth-port-pwc actual-ethernet-rate Parameter Actual line rate (Mbps) of Viewer
the Ethernet traffic port
eth-port-pwc admin Parameter Admin status of the Operator
Ethernet traffic port
eth-port-pwc auto-negotiation Parameter Auto negotiation of the Operator
eth-port-pwc clear-rmon Command Clear all RMON statistics Operator Read-write
on the Ethernet traffic port
eth-port-pwc duplex Parameter Half/Full duplex of the Operator
eth-port-pwc ethernet-rate Parameter Line rate (Mbps) of the Operator
eth-port-pwc flow-control Parameter Flow control mode of the Operator
eth-port-pwc mac-address Parameter MAC Address of the Viewer
eth-port-pwc oper-status Parameter Operational status of the Viewer


eth-port-pwc rx-broadcast Parameter The number of broadcast Viewer
good frames of length 64
to 1518 (non VLAN) or
1522 (VLAN) bytes
excluding Broadcast
frames. Note: This
statistic does not take into
account frames with
eth-port-pwc rx-bytes Parameter The number of byte count Viewer
of frames received with 0
to 1518 bytes, including
those in bad packets,
excluding framing bits but
including FCS bytes.
eth-port-pwc rx-dropped Parameter The number of frames Viewer
received that are
streamed to the system
but are later dropped due
to lack of system
resources.
eth-port-pwc rx-err-code Parameter The number of instances Viewer
where a valid carrier was
present and at least one
invalid data symbol was
detected.
eth-port-pwc rx-err-false-carrier Parameter The number of false Viewer
carriers detected during
idle, as defined by a 1 on
RX-ER and an '0xE' on
RXD. The event is
reported along with the
statistics generated on
the next received frame.
eth-port-pwc rx-err-fbp-underrun Parameter The number of received Viewer
Ethernet Interworking
frames which were
dropped due free buffer
pool (FBP) Overrun
eth-port-pwc rx-err-fcs Parameter The number of frames Viewer
received that have a
integral 64 to 1518 byte
length and contain a
Frame Check Sequence
error.


eth-port-pwc rx-err-mru Parameter The number of received Viewer
frames which were
dropped due the
Maximum Receive Unit
frame size being
exceeded.
eth-port-pwc rx-err-nonvalid-mac Parameter The number of received Viewer
Ethernet frames whose
MAC-DA is not valid.
(Unrecognized by
address recognition
routine in DPS).
eth-port-pwc rx-err-overrun Parameter The number of received Viewer
Ethernet frames which
were closed (in a middle
of a frame) or discarded
due to a receive buffer
overrun event (no
available buffers).
eth-port-pwc rx-err-sdu Parameter The number of Ethernet Viewer
frames which were closed
due the maximum frame
size has been exceeded
eth-port-pwc rx-fragments Parameter The number of frames Viewer
received which are less
than 64 bytes in length
and contain an invalid
FCS, including integral
and non-integral lengths.
eth-port-pwc rx-iw-frames Parameter The number of received Viewer
frames that were received
and sent to the L3
Interworking module.
eth-port-pwc rx-jabber Parameter The number of frames Viewer
received which exceed
1518 (non VLAN) or 1522
(VLAN) bytes in length
and contain an invalid
FCS, including alignment
errors.
eth-port-pwc rx-mac-control Parameter The number of MAC Viewer
Control frames received
(PAUSE & Unsupported).


eth-port-pwc rx-mac-pause Parameter The number of valid Viewer
PAUSE MAC Control
frames received.
eth-port-pwc rx-mac-unknown Parameter The number of MAC Viewer
Control Frames received
that contain an opcode
other than a PAUSE.
eth-port-pwc rx-multicast Parameter The number of multicast Viewer
good frames of length 64
to 1518 (non VLAN) or
1522 (VLAN) bytes
excluding Broadcast
frames. This statistic does
not take into account
frames with range/length
errors.
eth-port-pwc rx-oversize Parameter The number of frames Viewer
received that exceeded
1518 (non VLAN) or 1522
(VLAN) bytes in length,
contain a valid FCS, and
were otherwise well
formed. Note: This does
not look at Range Length
errors.
eth-port-pwc rx-packets Parameter The number of received Viewer
packets (including bad
packets, all Unicast,
Broadcast, and Multicast
packets).
eth-port-pwc rx-undersize Parameter The number of frames Viewer
received that are less
than 64 bytes in length,
contain a valid FCS, and
were otherwise well
formed. Note: This does
not look at Range Length
errors.
eth-port-pwc show-port-config Command Show the Ethernet traffic Operator Read-only
port configuration
eth-port-pwc show-rmon-counters Command Show RMON statistics on Operator Read-only
the Ethernet traffic port
eth-port-pwc status-led Parameter Status LED Viewer


eth-port-pwc tx-broadcast Parameter The number of Broadcast Viewer
frames transmitted
(excluding Multicast
frames).
eth-port-pwc tx-bytes Parameter The number of bytes that Viewer
were put on the wire
including fragments of
frames that were involved
with collisions. This count
does not include
preamble/SFD or jam
bytes.
eth-port-pwc tx-control Parameter The number of valid size Viewer
frames transmitted with a
Type Field signifying a
Control frame.
eth-port-pwc tx-defer Parameter The number of frames Viewer
that were deferred upon
first transmission attempt.
Does not include frames
involved in collisions.
eth-port-pwc tx-dropped Parameter The number of times the Viewer
input PFH is asserted.
eth-port-pwc tx-err-fcs Parameter The number of valid sized Viewer
packets transmitted with
an incorrect FCS value.
eth-port-pwc tx-err-underrun Parameter The number of times Viewer
Ethernet transmitter
underun occurred.
eth-port-pwc tx-excess-collision Parameter The number of frames Viewer
that experienced 16
collisions during
transmission and were
aborted.
eth-port-pwc tx-excess-defer Parameter The number of frames Viewer
aborted that were
deferred for an excessive
period of time (3036 byte
times).
eth-port-pwc tx-fragments Parameter The number of Viewer
transmitted frames less
than 64 bytes, with an
incorrect FCS value.


eth-port-pwc tx-frames Parameter The number of complete Viewer
good frames transmitted.
eth-port-pwc tx-jabber Parameter The number of oversized Viewer
transmitted frames with
an incorrect FCS value.
eth-port-pwc tx-late-collision Parameter The number of frames Viewer
transmitted that
experienced a late
collision during a
transmission attempt.
Late collisions are defined
using the LCOL[50]
field of the TX Function
control register.
eth-port-pwc tx-mac-pause Parameter The number of valid Viewer
PAUSE MAC Control
frames transmitted.
eth-port-pwc tx-mac-pause- Parameter The number of times a Viewer
honored valid PAUSE MAC
Control frame was
transmitted and honored.
eth-port-pwc tx-multicast Parameter The number of Multicast Viewer
valid frames transmitted
(excluding Broadcast
frames).
eth-port-pwc tx-multi-collision Parameter The number of frames Viewer
transmitted which
experienced 2-15
collisions (including any
late collisions) during
transmission as defined
using the RETRY [3-0]
field of the TX function
control register.
eth-port-pwc tx-no-collision Parameter The number of frames Viewer
transmitted that had no
collision.
eth-port-pwc tx-oversize Parameter The number of oversized Viewer
transmitted frames with a
correct FCS value.


eth-port-pwc tx-packets Parameter The number of Viewer
transmitted packets
(including bad packets,
excessive deferred
packets, excessive
collision packets, late
collision packets, all
Unicast, Broadcast, and
Multicast packets).
eth-port-pwc txrx-frames-1023 Parameter The number of good or Viewer
bad frames transmitted
and received that are 512
to 1023 bytes in length
inclusive (excluding
framing bits but including
FCS bytes).
FCS bytes).
and received that are
1024 to 1518 bytes in
length inclusive
(excluding framing bits
but including FCS bytes).
and received that are
1519 to 1522 bytes in
length inclusive
(excluding framing bits
but including FCS bytes).
FCS bytes).


FCS bytes).
and received that are up
FCS bytes).
eth-port-pwc tx-single-collision Parameter The number of frames Viewer
transmitted which
experienced exactly one
collision during
transmission.
eth-port-pwc tx-undersize Parameter The number of Viewer
transmitted frames less
than 64 bytes, with a
correct FCS value.

24.2.5 diagnostics
diagnostics show-files-list Command Show downloadable files, Operator Read-write
24.2.5.1 rmon
rmon clear-all Command Clears RMON statistics Operator Read-write
from all ports.
rmon clear-lag-port Command Clears a LAG port's Operator Read-write
RMON statistics.
rmon clear-port Command Clears RMON statistics Operator Read-write
from a specific port.
rmon get-statistics Command Get RMON statistics. Operator Read-write
24.2.5.2 loopback
line-loopback
line-loopback counter Parameter Shows the loopback Viewer Read-only
counter.
line-loopback line-loopback Parameter Configures line loopback. Operator Read-write
line-loopback pw-tdm-counter Parameter Shows the PW_TDM Viewer Read-only
loopback counter.
line-loopback pw-tdm-loopback Parameter Configures the PW_TDM Operator Read-write
loopback.
line-loopback pw-tdm-timeout Parameter Configures the PW_TDM Operator Read-write
loopback timeout in
minutes.
(0 for unlimited)
line-loopback stm1-counter Parameter Shows the STM-1/OC-3 Viewer Read-only
line loopback counter.
line-loopback stm1-line-loopback Parameter Configures the type of Operator Read-write
loopback to run.
line-loopback stm1-timeout Parameter STM-1/OC-3 line Operator Read-write
loopback timeout, in
minutes.
0 means no timer.


line-loopback timeout Parameter Configures the number of Operator Read-write
minutes for line loopback
timeout.
Use [0] to disable
loopback timeout.
radio-loopback
radio-loopback counter Parameter Shows the loopback Viewer Read-only
counter.
radio-loopback if-loopback[16] Parameter Activates IF loopback. Operator Read-write
radio-loopback rfu-rf-loopback Parameter Enables / disables RFU Operator Read-write
RF loopback.
radio-loopback timeout Parameter Configures the number of Operator Read-write
minutes for loopback
timeout.
0 means no timer.
24.2.6 xml-interface
xml-interface inv-gen-time Command Show inventory Viewer Read-only
generation time stamp.
xml-interface pm-gen-time Command Show PM generation time Viewer Read-only
stamp.

24.3 Basic System Configuration Using CLI

 Setting IP Addresses
 Adding users
 Navigating between stacked units
 Performing Resets
 Configuration backup
 Software version management
 Using CLI scripts
 Radio Parameter Configurations
 NTP
 SNMP
 CFM
 Pseudowire Configuration
 TDM trail management
 TDM Protected Trails (SNCP)
 Showing TDM Trail PMs and Status
 Configuring the Ethernet Switch Application
 Configuring the LAG Ports
 Management Ports
 VLAN Configuration
 QoS Configuration
 Auxiliary Channels
 Automatic State Propagation, 1+0 Configuration Only
 Radio script configuration
 Ring RSTP

24.3.1 Setting IP Addresses

To define a new IP address:
1 Log in using:
User: Admin or Operator
Password: Admin
2 Change to the management\networking\ip-address directory.
Type: cd management\networking\ip-address\, and press Enter.
3 Get the current IP address.
Type: get ip-address, and press Enter.
4 Set the new IP address.
Type: set <new_ip_address>, and press Enter.
24.3.2 Adding users

To define a new user:
1 Log in.
2 Change to the management/mng-services/users directory.
Type: cd management/mng-services/users and press Enter.
3 Type: add-user <name> <group> <password aging days> <expiration
date>, and press Enter.
4 Type the password for the new user.
24.3.3 Navigating between stacked units
24.3.3.1 Going from the main unit to a different unit

After log-in, prompt is always given at the main unit.
To change the prompt to a different unit:
1 Change to the cd /platform/shelf-manager directory.
2 Type: cd /platform/shelf-manager and press Enter.
3 Type: logon-unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
The prompt will change according to the relevant slot ID. For example, the
prompt for a unit located in slot 3 will show:
IP-10G-SLOT-3:/>
24.3.3.2 Returning to main unit

To return to the main unit, change to the platform/shelf-manager directory.
Type: cd /platform/shelf-manager and press Enter.

24.3.4 Performing Resets
24.3.4.1 In Stacked Configuration

To reset a specific unit in the shelf, at the main unit:
Type: cd /platform/shelf-manager, and press Enter.
2 Type: reset-unit <slot ID>, and press Enter.
Slot ID – the slot of the IDU to be reset (1–6).
To reset all extension units (but not the main unit), at the main unit:
3 Type: reset-extensions <slot ID>.
To reset all units (including the main unit), at the main unit:
3 Type: reset-shelf <slot ID>.
24.3.4.2 In any IDU (Standalone or Nodal)

To reset an IDU locally (standalone or in extension prompt in the shelf):
1 Change to the cd /platform/idc-board directory.
Type: cd /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: reset-unit <slot ID>, and press Enter.

24.3.5 Configuration backup

The configuration backup file must be transferred between the main unit and
an external site by FTP. Configuration files may be transferred between the
main and extension units.
To specify external FTP client site parameters, at t he main unit:
1 Change to the platform/idc-board directory.
Type: /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: set host-ip <ip> (the client’s IP address), and press Enter.
3 Type: set host-path <path> (the site to the desired file location at the
client) and press Enter.
4 Type: set user-name <user-name> (the user name expected from client)
and press Enter.
5 Type: change-user-password and press Enter.
6 When prompted, enter the user password and press Enter.
24.3.5.1 Creating configuration backup files

To create the backup file for a specific slot:
1 Change to the platform/shelf-manager directory.
2 Type: config-backup --unit <slot number> and press Enter.
To create the backup file for a all the slots in the shelf:
2 Type: config-backup –all and press Enter.
24.3.5.2 Saving configuration files in external site:

To upload the file to the FTP client
1 Change to the platform/idc directory.
2 Type: upload-archive configuration, and press Enter.
To see the upload status:
1 Change to the platform/idc directory.
2 Type: get config-upload-status, and press Enter.
"ready" means "no action was taken, ready to continue"
A successful result will give "succeeded"

24.3.5.3 Downloading saved configuration files:

To download the file from the FTP client:
2 Type: download-archive configuration, and press Enter.
To see the download status:
2 Type: get config-download-status, and press Enter.
To restore configuration to a specific slot:
2 Type: config-restore --unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
To restore a configuration to all slots on a shelf:
2 Type: config-restore --all, and press Enter.
To reset the relevant units:
2 Type: reset-extensions reset-shelf reset-unit and press Enter.
To reset a specific slot:
2 Type: reset-unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
To reset all the slots in the shelf,
2 Type: reset-shelf and press Enter.
To reset all the extension slots in the shelf:
2 Type: reset-extensions and press Enter.

24.3.6 Software version management

The software version files must be transferred between the main unit and an
external site by FTP.
Software can be deployed to the extension units from the main unit.
To define external FTP settings, at the main unit:
1 Change to the management/mng-service/mng-software directory.
Type: cd /management/mng-service/mng-software and press
Enter.
2 Type: set server-url <ip/path> (the client’s IP address and files path)
and press Enter.
3 Type: set server-login <user-name> (the user name expected from
client) and press Enter.
4 Type: change-server-password and press Enter.
5 When prompted, specify the user password and press Enter.
To upgrade software:
Enter.
2 Type: download and press Enter to download the new package.
To install downloaded software to a specific slot:
Enter.
2 Type: upgrade --unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
To install downloaded software to all slots on the shelf:
Enter.
2 Type: upgrade –all and press Enter.
To downgrade to a previous version:
Enter.
2 Type: download --downgrade, and press Enter to download the
downgrade package.
To downgrade a specific slot to a previous version:
Enter.

2 Type: downgrade --unit <slot number>, and press Enter to install the
downloaded software.
To downgrade all slots on the shelf to a previous version:
Enter.
2 Type: download --downgrade, and press Enter to download the
downgrade package.
3 Type: downgrade --all, and press Enter.
To roll back to the previously installed version for a specific slot:
Type: /management/mng-service/mng-software and press Enter.
2 Type: rollback --unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
To roll back to the previously installed version to all slots on the shelf:
Type: /management/mng-service/mng-software and press Enter.
2 Type: rollback --all, and press Enter.

24.3.7 Using CLI scripts

CLI scripts are text files containing CLI commands that can be downloaded
and run in the main unit only.
24.3.7.1 Setting external FTP client site parameters

To define the FTP settings, at the main unit:
Type: /platform/idc-board and press Enter.
2 Type: set host-ip <ip> (the client’s IP address), and press Enter.
3 Type: set host-path <path> (the site to the desired file location at the
client), and press Enter.
4 Type: set user-name <user-name> and press Enter.
5 Type: change-user-password and press Enter.
6 When prompted, enter the user password and press Enter.
To download CLI scripts from an FTP client:
2 Type: set cli-script-file-name<file name> and press Enter.
To download the file from the FTP client
2 Type: download-archive cli-script, and press Enter.
To see the upload status
2 Type: get download-cli-script-status and press Enter.
24.3.7.2 Managing and Executing scripts

To view the contents of the currently loaded script
2 Type: cli-script show, and press Enter.
To execute the currently loaded script
2 Type: cli-script execute, and press Enter.

To delete the currently loaded script

2 Type: cli-script delete, and press Enter.
24.3.8 CLI Script Limitations

User should be aware of the following limitations:
CLI scripts can be loaded only to main units and cannot be written to
configure extensions units. All configurations performed from a main unit are
supported.
In order to echo the messages to the console while the script is being executed,
use the “echo” command inside the script.
The user is responsible for editing the CLI commands in their logical order
(e.g., script must configure “Allowed VLANs” on a port only after configuring
the port as a trunk port).
Any bridge-related commands (L2 switch and protocol commands) require a
write operation in order to have them saved.
CLI commands that trigger a cold-reset echo the “confirmation message” and
then perform a cold-reset to the system if confirmed by the user. The
following commands prompt user confirmation:
 MRMC (radio) configuration
 Switch application configuration
 License upgrade
 Reset IDU
 Protection “copy-to-mate” command
Only a single command of this kind can be used per script, and only at the end
of the script!
If such a command is used at the end of the script, when this command is the
next one to be executed, the script will hold and wait until the user enters
confirmation (CQ19326).
A user with operator privileges cannot include user commands that require
higher privileges in a script. Higher privilege commands will not be executed
and will echo “error”.
SNMPv3 and Add user commands are not recommended for use via CLI
scripts. This is because these commands require user attention. The SNMPv3
commands or FTP password for software configuration or download, for
example, require a password from the user, and therefore should not be
performed via a CLI script.

24.3.9 Radio Parameter Configurations

To set TX frequency:
1 Change to the radio/rfu directory.
Type cd /radio/rfu/ and press Enter.
2 Type set tx-freq <frequency in KHz> and press Enter.
To set RX frequency:
2 Type set rx-freq <frequency in KHz> and press Enter.
To set TX power level:
2 Type max-tx-level <TX level in dBm> and press Enter.
To mute/unmute the TX:
2 Type set mute-tx <disable/enable> and press Enter.
To set ATPC reference level:
2 Type set atpc-ref-rx-level <reference level in dBm> and press
Enter.
To enable ATPC:
2 Type set atpc-admin <enable | disable> and press Enter.
To set RX level PM threshold1:
2 Type set pm-rx-level-threshold-1 <threshold in dBm> and press
Enter.
To set “RX level” PM threshold2:
2 Type cd /radio/rfu/ set pm-rx-level-threshold-2 <threshold in
dBm> and press Enter.

To set “TX level” PM’s threshold:

2 Type set pm-tx-level-threshold <threshold in dBm>, then press
Enter.
To enable/disable MAC header compression:
1 Change to the radio directory.
Type cd /radio/ and press Enter.
2 Type set mhc-admin <enable | disable> and press Enter.
To set Link-ID:
1 Change to the radio/framer directory.
Type cd /radio/framer/ and press Enter.
2 Type set link-id <Link-ID number> and press Enter.
To set radio excessive BER threshold:
2 Type set radio-excessive-ber-threshold <BER: 1e-3, 1e-4, 1e-5>
and press Enter.
To set radio signal degrade threshold:
2 Type set radio-signal-degrade-threshold <BER: 1e-6, 1e-7, 1e-8,
1e-9> and press Enter.
To set “MSE” PM’s threshold:
1 Change to the radio/modem directory.
Type cd / radio/modem / and press Enter.
2 Type set mse-threshold <Threshold in dB> and press Enter.

24.3.10 NTP
To enable/disable NTP service:
1 Change to the management/mng-services/time-service/ntp directory.
Type: cd /management/mng-services/time-service/ntp and
press Enter.
2 Type set server 192.168.1.100 and press Enter.
3 Type set admin <enable | disable> and press Enter.
To set NTP offset from GMT:
1 Change to the management/mng-services/time-service directory.
Type: cd management/mng-services/time-service and press
Enter.
2 Type set gmt-offset-hours 2 and press Enter.
3 Type set gmt-offset-minutes 0 and press Enter.
To set Daylight Saving Time:
Type: cd /management/mng-services/time-service and press
Enter.
2 Type set dst-start-month <Apr> and press Enter.
3 Type set dst-start-day <1> and press Enter.
4 Type set dst-end-month <Nov> and press Enter.
5 Type set dst-end-day <1> and press Enter.
To set date and time:
Type cd /management/mng-services/time-service and press
Enter.
2 Type set time-and-date <10-3-2009,15:00:00> and press Enter.
The time and date format is: day-month-year, hours: mins: secs

24.3.11 SNMP
To enable/disable SNMP:
1 Change to the management/mng-protocols/snmp directory.
Type: cd /management/mng-protocols/snmp and press Enter.
2 Type set admin <enable |disable>, and press Enter.
To set the SNMP version:
Type: cd /management/mng-protocols/snmp, and press Enter.
2 Type set version <v1 | v2c | v1> and press Enter.
24.3.11.1 SNMP parameters for SNMP Version 3

To set the security mode:
2 Type v3-security-mode < no security | authentication | authentication
privacy > and press Enter.
To set the authentication:
2 Type v3-auth-algorithm <sha | mds> and press Enter.
To specify the SNMPv3 password:
2 Type v3-password <password> and press Enter.
To set the telnet protocol:
2 Type set telnet-admin <enable | disable>, and press Enter.
To set web security protocol:
1 Change to the management/mng-protocols directory.
Type: cd /management/mng-protocols, and press Enter.
2 Type set web-admin <enable/disable> and press Enter.

24.3.11.2 Configuring HTTPS Web Protocol
Step 1
Create the NE certificate based on the NE's public key. The public key receives
the public key file through upload.
2 Type upload-archive public-key nd press Enter.
You can find your public_key file (for example, 192.168.1.18_pub_key)
in your host path directory.
Step 2
Download the NE certificate, and copy it to your ftp host path directory.
2 Type set security-file-format <pem }der> and press Enter.
3 Type set security-file-type <target-certificate> and press Enter.
4 Type set security-file-name <MYCERT.crt> (your certificate file
name), and press Enter.
5 Type download-archive security-file and press Enter.
Step 3 (Optional)
Download the NE CA's certificate.

Type: cd /platform/idc-board, and press Enter.
2 Type set security-file-format <pem |der> and press Enter.
3 Type set security-file-type <target-ca-certificate> and press
Enter.
4 Type set security-file-name <EssentialSSLCA_2.crt> (your CA-
certificate file name), and press Enter.
5 Type download-archive security-file, and press Enter.
Step 4 (Optional)
Set the web-ca-certificate-admin parameter to enable.

2 Type: cd /management/mng-protocols and press Enter.
3 Type set web-ca-certificate-admin <enable | disable>, and press
Enter.

Step 5:
Set the web-protocol parameter to HTTPS.

Type: cd /management/mng-protocols and press Enter.
2 Type set web-protocol <https | http>, and press Enter.
TIP: Enter the same URL in the web EMS, for example,
https://192.168.1.1 to use the HTTPS protocol.

24.3.12 CFM
24.3.12.1 Domain
To add a maintenance domain:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port/service-oam directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port
no.]/service-oam and press Enter.
2 Type: domain add <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]> and press
Enter.
To remove a maintenance domain:
2 Type: domain remove <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]> and press
Enter.
24.3.12.2 Domain & association

To add a maintenance association:
2 Type: domain add <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]> <Association
name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
To remove a maintenance association:
2 Type: domain remove <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]>
<Association name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.3 Association
To add an association:
2 Type: association add <Association name> <Domain name> <VLAN ID
[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To remove an association:

2 Type: association remove <Association name> <Domain name> <VLAN ID
[1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.4 CCM
To enable / disable the change continuity check admin state:
2 Type: ccm-admin <enable | disable> <Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID [1-
4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.5 CCM Interval

To modify the CCM interval:
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.]/service-oam
and press Enter.
2 Type: ccm-interval <interval time: 1-sec, 10-sec, 1-min, 10-min>
<Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.6 Local MEP

To add a local MEP according to CCM VLAN P-bit priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type: mep set < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID [1-
4090]> < Direction [up/down]> <CCM VLAN Pbit priority [0-7]> and press
Enter.
To add a local MEP according to VLAN ID:
press Enter.
2 Type: mep set < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID [1-
4090]> < Direction [up/down]> and press Enter.
To remove a local MEP:
press Enter.
2 Type: mep remove < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID
[1-4090]> < Direction [up/down]>, and press Enter.

24.3.12.7 Remote MEP

To add a remote MEP according to MAC address:
2 Type: remote-mep set <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> <Domain name>
<VLAN ID [1-4090]> <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> and press Enter.
To add a remote MEP:
2 Type: remote-mep set <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> <Domain name>
<VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
To remove a remote MEP:
2 Type: remote-mep remove <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> <Domain name>
<VLAN ID [1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.8 MIP
To add a MIP:
2 Type: mip add <Domain level [1-7]> and press Enter.
To remove a MIP:
2 Type: mip remove <Domain level [1-7]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.9 Loopback (Ping)

To ping message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID name and VLAN
P-bit priority:
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name
<Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press
Enter.
To ping message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID name and VLAN
ID:
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name
<Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To ping message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID level and VLAN P-
bit priority:
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level
<Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and
press Enter.
To ping a message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID level and VLAN
ID:
2 Type: ping mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level
<Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To ping according to MAID name and VLAN P-bit priority:
2 Type: ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-name <Domain
name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press Enter.
To ping according to MAID name and VLAN ID:
2 Type: ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-name <Domain
name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To ping according to MAID level and VLAN P-bit priority:
2 Type: ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-level <Domain
level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press
Enter.

To ping according to MAID level and VLAN ID:

2 Type: ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-level <Domain
level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.10 Link Trace

To traceroute a message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID name and
VLAN P-bit priority:
no.]/service-oam an press Enter.
2 Type: linktrace mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]>md-
name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and
press Enter.
To traceroute a message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID name and
VLAN ID:
2 Type: linktrace mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]>md-
name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To traceroute a message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID level and
VLAN P-bit priority:
2 Type: linktrace mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-
level Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]>
and press Enter.
To traceroute a message to a remote MEP or MIP according to MAID level and
VLAN ID:
2 Type: linktrace mac-address <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-
level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.

To perform a linktrace according to MEP ID, MAID name, and VLAN P-bit
priority:
2 Type: linktrace mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-name <Domain
name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press Enter.
To traceroute a message to a remote MEP according to MEP ID, MAID name
and VLAN ID:
2 Type: linktrace mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]>md-name <Domain
name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To perform a linktrace according to MEP ID, MAID level, and VLAN P-bit
priority:
2 Type: linktrace mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-level <Domain
level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press
Enter.
To traceroute a message to a remote MEP according to MEP ID, MAID level and
VLAN ID:
2 Type: linktrace mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> md-level <Domain
level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.11 Auto link trace

To add a remote MEP to the automatic linktrace list according to MAIN name
and VLAN P-bit priority:
2 Type: auto-linktrace add <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> md-name
<Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and press
Enter.
To add a remote MEP to the automatic linktrace list according to MAID name
and VLAN ID:

2 Type: auto-linktrace add <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]>md-name
To add an automatic linktrace according to MAID level and VLAN P-bit
priority:
2 Type: auto-linktrace add <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]>md-level
<Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> and
press Enter.
To add an automatic linktrace according to MAID level and VLAN ID:
2 Type: auto-linktrace add <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> md-
level<Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
To remove a remote MEP to the automatic linktrace list according to MAID
name and VLAN ID:
2 Type: auto-linktrace remove <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> md-name
To remove a remote MEP to the automatic linktrace list according to MAID
level and VLAN ID:
2 Type: auto-linktrace remove <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]> md-level
<Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> and press Enter.
24.3.12.12 Auto Link Trace Interval

To modify the auto linktrace interval:
1 Change to the YYY directory.
2 Type: set auto-linktrace-interval [seconds: range 60-3600] and
press Enter.

24.3.12.13 Remote MEP learning time

To modify the remote MEP learning time:
2 Type: set remote-meps-learning-time [seconds: range 60-3600] and
press Enter.

24.3.13 Pseudowire Configuration

The following is one example of a sequence for configuring a pseudowire
service:
1 Configure a TDM port;
2 Configure a DS0 bundle if needed (for CESoPSN) using add-bundle
command.
3 Configure a PSN tunnel
4 Configure a PW profile
5 Configure a PW service
24.3.13.1 PW T-Card Basic Configuration

The PW T-Card basic parameters include the common clock and
synchronization parameters and the Source IP Address for UDP/IP PSN
packets.
1 Change to the interfaces/pwc directory.
Type cd interfaces/pwc and press Enter.
2 Enable front panel clock support:
Type set front-clock-enabled yes and press Enter.
3 Modify the IP address for UDP/IP traffic.
Type set ip-addr-udpip-traffic [ip address] and press
Enter.
24.3.13.2 Ethernet Traffic Port Configuration

1 Change to the interfaces/pwc/eth-port directory.
Type cd interfaces/pwc/eth-port and press Enter.
2 Verify that the port is set to admin disabled (default value).
Type get-admin and press Enter.
3 Modify the Ethernet Port Rate parameter.
Type set Ethernet-rate 100 and press Enter.
4 Enable the port.
Type set admin enable and press Enter.
5 Modify the port’s duplex setting.
Type set duplex half and press Enter.

24.3.13.3 Configuring a SAToP UDP/IP Unprotected Service

This section provides an example of configuring a pseudowire service from
scratch, assuming the basic PW T-Card configurations have been made and the
Ethernet port have been configured.
Configuring a TDM Port for a SAToP Pseudowire Service

A TDM port used with a PW SATOP service should be E1 unframed and
unchannelized.
1 Go to the PWC TDM ports directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tdm-ports and press Enter.
2 Set the clock source reference port to loop on itself.
Type set clk-source-ref-port[7] 7 and press Enter.
3 Enable the port.
Type set admin[7] enable and press Enter.
No alarm is expected after activating the port, even though no trail with this
port has been assigned.
Assigning a TDM Port to a Trail

Refer to Defining a TDM Trail on page 528.
To check that the port has been properly assigned to a trail:
2 Type get assigned[7] and press Enter.
Configuring a PSN Tunnel

1 Go to the PWC tunnels directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tunnels and press Enter.
2 Create a new UDP/IP tunnel with id=100, destination IP 192.168.91.100,
next-hop 192.168.90.1, C-VLAN 11, DSCP 10, Priority bits 7, and MA 11.
Type udpip-tunnel set 100 192.168.91.100 192.168.90.1
c-type 11 10 7 11 and press Enter.
Configuring a Pseudowire Profile

1 Go to the PWC profiles directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/pw-profiles and press Enter.
2 Add a new profile with the ID 10.
Type add-pw-profile 10 and press Enter.
3 Get the internal ID of the new profile.
Type show-pw-profile-by-id 10 and press Enter.
4 Set RTP header usage to enabled, using the profile’s internal ID.
Type set rtp-header-used[10] true and press Enter.
Configure a Pseudowire Service

After all components required for a particular pseudowire service have been
configured, you can set up the service.
1 Go to the PW services directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/pws and press Enter.
2 Create a new service with the ID 1 on TDM port 7, PSN tunnel 100, profile
10, tunnel unprotected, source UDP port 101, destination UDP port 102,
not a Clock Recovery master.
Type add-pw 1 e1-satop udpip 7 10 disable 100 101 102
disable and press Enter.
3 Enable the service. By default, new services are created disabled.
Type modify-pw 1 enable and press Enter.
24.3.13.4 Configuring a CESoPSN UDP/IP Protected Service
This section provides a configuration example of a CESoPSN service, using
some of the configurations described in the previous section.
Configuring a TDM Port

TDM ports used in CESoPSN services should be E1 basic or CAS, channelized.
2 Set the port line type to E1 multiframe (CAS), channelized, and set the
clock source reference port parameters for TDM port 8, which you will use
in the service.
Type set line-type[8] e1-mf and press Enter.
Type set channelization[8] enable and press Enter.
Type set clk-source-ref-port[8] 8and press Enter.
3 Enable the port.
Type set admin[8] enable and press Enter.
After activating the port, an LOF alarm is expected because the port has not
been assigned to any trail.
Configuring a DS0 Bundle

A DS0 bundle is identified by its ID, which is provided by the user.
1 Go to the PWC DS0 bundles directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/ds0-bundles and press Enter.
2 Create a new DS0 bundle with an ID of 20, using the first four channels of
TDM port 8.
Type add-bundle 20 8 1 4 and press Enter.
3 Verify the channel assignment in the TDM port.
Type show-assigned-channels 8 and press Enter.

Configuring PSN Tunnels

4 Go to the PWC tunnels directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/tunnels and press Enter.
default next-hop 192.168.90.1, C-VLAN 20, MA 12.
Type udpip-tunnel set 200 192.168.91.100 192.168.90.1 c-
type 11 10 7 12 and press Enter.
default next-hop 192.168.90.2, C-VLAN 30, MA 13.
Type udpip-tunnel set 201 192.168.91.100 192.168.90.2 c-
type 30 10 7 13 and press Enter.
Configuring a Pseudowire Service

After all components required for a particular service have been configured,
you can set up the service.
1 Go to the PW services directory.
Type cd/interfaces/pwc/pws and press Enter.
2 Create a new service with the ID 2 on TDM port 8, profile 10, src/dest UDP
IP ports 1101 and 1102, respectively.
Type add-pw 2 cas-cespsn udpip 8 10 enable 1101 1102 and
press Enter.
3 Enable the service. By default, new services are created disabled.
Type modify-pw 2 enable and press Enter.

24.3.14 TDM trail management
24.3.14.1 Defining a TDM Trail

To define a TDM trail:
4 Change to the cd /interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
5 Type: add-trail <trail ID> <trail description> <ACM priority>
<operational/reserved> <protected/unprotected> <interface 1 slot #>
<interface 1 type> <interface 1 number> <interface 2 slot #> <interface 2
type> <interface 2 number> and press Enter.
Arguments description:
 Trail-ID: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
 Trail description: string up to 32 characters
 ACM priority: high or low
 Operational/reserved: reserved trails are introduced in the database and
the bandwidth will not be used for TDM traffic (it may be used for Ethernet
traffic) but traffic does not flow. For operational trails bandwidth is fully
allocated and traffic flows
 Protected/unprotected: unprotected trails are mappings between two
interfaces only. Protected trails are mappings between an end-point
interfaces and two other interfaces, the first of which is the primary path
and the second of which is the secondary path (see SNCP section below).
 Interface slot: slot number of the IDU containing the interface (from 1 to 6)
 Interface type: line (E1/T1) or radio
 Interface number: the number of the E1/T1 interface or radio VC to be
used.
For E1/T1 it can be 1 to 32 (1 to 16 if no extra 16 E1 T-card is
installed)
For radio, the maximum number depends on the radio script being
used
Unprotected trail example:
add-trail id1 desc1 high operational unprotected 1 line 1 1
radio 1.
24.3.14.2 Viewing Trails Defined in the System

To show all trails:
1 Change to the interfaces/pdh/trails directory.
2 Type: show-all-trails and press Enter.

To show a specific trail by its ID:

2 Type: show-trail-by-id <trail ID> and press Enter.
To show a specific trail by its source interface:
2 Type: show-trail-by-src <interface 1 slot #> <interface 1 type>
<interface 1 number>, and press Enter.
The trails will be shown in a table as follows (this is an example of a trail from
E1#1 in slot 2 to radio VC#1 in slot 3:
============================================================
Legend: s/i/n/- 's'=slot-id 'i'=if-type 'n'=if-num '-'=Empty
s(0..6) i(l=line/r=radio/s=stm-1/c=chain/s=sync_ethernet)
n(1..180)
===========================================================
Source Dest1 Dest2 Dest3 Dest4 Dest5 Dest6 Dest7 Dest8 Dest9
-------------------------------------------------------------
IndexInDb = 1, ID = t1, Desc = d1, Prio = high
Act = operational, TS = (0)
2/l/ 1 3/r/ 1 - - - - - - - -
------------------------------------------------------------
where 2/l/1 denotes slot 2/line/interface 1.
24.3.14.3 Deleting trails

To delete all trails
2 Type: del-all-trails and press Enter.
To delete a specific trail by its ID:
2 Type: del-trail-by-id <trail ID>, and press Enter.

To delete a specific trail by its source interface:

2 Type: del-trail-by-src <interface 1 slot #> <interface 1 type>
<interface 1 number>, and press Enter.
24.3.14.4 Activating and reserving trails

To activate/reserve all trails
2 Type: act-all-trails, and press Enter.
To activate/reserve a specific trail by its ID:
2 Type: act-trail-by-id <trail ID>, and press Enter.
24.3.15 TDM Protected Trails (SNCP)

All operations for unprotected trails are available for protected trails as well.
The additional operations for protected trails are described in this section.
24.3.15.1 Defining a Protected TDM Trail

To define a TDM trail, at the main unit:
1 Log in.
3 Type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails and press Enter.
4 Type: add-trail <trail ID> <trail description> <ACM priority>
<operational/reserved> <protected/unprotected> <end-point interface
slot #> < end-point interface type> < end-point interface number>
<primary path slot #> < primary path type> < primary path number>
<secondary path slot #> < secondary path type> < secondary path
number>, and press Enter.
 Trail-ID: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
 Trail description: string up to 32 characters
 ACM priority: high or low
 Operational/reserved: reserved trails are introduced in the database and
the bandwidth won’t be used for TDM traffic (it may be used for Ethernet
traffic) but traffic does not flow. For operational trails bandwidth is fully
allocated and traffic flows
 Protected/unprotected: unprotected trails are mappings between two
interfaces only. Protected trails are mappings between an end-point
interfaces and two other interfaces, the first of which is the primary path
and the second of which is the secondary path
 Interface slot: slot number of the IDU containing the interface (from 1 to 6)
 Interface type: line (E1/T1) or radio
 Interface number: the number of the E1/T1 interface or radio VC to be
used.
 For E1/T1 it can be 1 to 32 (1 to 16 if no extra 16 E1 T-card is installed)
 For radio, the maximum number depends on the radio script being used
Protected trail example:
add-trail id1 desc1 high operational protected 1 line 1 2
radio 1 3 radio 1.
24.3.15.2 Forcing trails to active/standby

Each protected trail can be forced to make either one of its paths active (or
none of them).
To force all trails to one of their paths
2 Type: protected-trail-force-active <Id> <path>, and press Enter.
To force a specific trail by its ID
2 Type to one of its paths type: protected-trail-force-active-by-id
<Id> <path>, and press Enter.
 <Id> - trail ID
 <path> - “primary”, “secondary” or “none”

24.3.16 Showing TDM Trail PMs and Status
24.3.16.1 Showing TDM Trail PM Measurements

To show PMs of all trails:
2 Type: show-all-trail-pms, and press Enter.
To show a specific trail’s PMs by its ID
2 Type: show-trail-pms-by-id <trail ID> <15 min interval | 24h
interval> and press Enter.
<15min/24h interval> is the interval number to be shown, where 0 is the
current interval, 1 is the previous one and so on. If no interval is selected, the
current one will be shown.
24.3.16.2 Showing TDM Trail Status

To show PMs of all trails
2 Type: show-all-trail-alarms and press Enter.

24.3.17 Configuring the Ethernet Switch Application

The Ethernet Switch menu includes the Switch configuration, STP protocol,
STP configuration, and QoS & rate limiting items.
The Ethernet switching methods include:
 Smart (Single) Pipe - Ethernet switching is disabled, whereby only a single
Ethernet interface is used for traffic and the unit operates as a point-to-
point microwave Ethernet radio.
 Managed Switch - For Layer 2 802.1Q switching.
 Metro switch - Ethernet Q-in-Q provider switch is enabled.
To set the Ethernet switching method:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge directory.
2 Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
3 Type: set ethernet-application <Ethernet application type> (Single
pipe, Managed switch, or Metro switch), and press Enter.
The system will reset (automatically).

24.3.18 Configuring the LAG Ports

You can group different ports into a single LAG (link aggregation) port.
24.3.18.1 Setting load balancing of the LAG

The load balancing of the LAG can be set to Hash function or simple Xor.
To set the LAG load balancing:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge directory.
2 Type: cd /interfaces/bridge and press Enter.
To set load balancing to Hash function, type: set lag-load-balance
hash, and press Enter.
To set load balancing to simple Xor function, type: set lag-
load-balance simple-xor, and press Enter.
24.3.18.2 Assigning ports to a LAG

You should only assign ports to a LAG, with these limitations:
 Only traffic ports (including the radio port) can belong to a LAG. Ports that
are configured as management or wayside ports cannot belong to a LAG.
 A LAG can only be defined in IDUs which are configured as a Managed
switch or Metro switch.
 All ports in a LAG group must be located in the same IDU (switch).
 There may be a maximum of three LAGs per IDU.
 A LAG may contain from one to five physical ports. When you add ports to
a LAG, you must observe the following restrictions:
Ports 1 & 2 (GBE ports) and ports 3 - 7 (FE only ports) cannot be in the
same LAG group. (This is true even if the GBE ports are configured at
100Mbps.)
The Radio port (port 8) can only be in assigned to a LAG with GBE
ports.
To assign ports to a LAG:
1 Change to the interfaces/bridge /eth-port directory.
Type: cd interfaces/bridge /eth-port[< port number>], and press
Enter.
2 Type: set lag-port group- <LAG number> (1 – 3), and press Enter.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each port that is being added to the LAG.
24.3.18.3 Defining LAG Options

To enable or disable port admin:
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press Enter.
2 Type set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.

To set auto negotiation on/off:

Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press
Enter.
2 Type set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set the port type:
Enter.
2 Type set type <access/trunk/hybrid>, and press Enter.
To enable or disable port learning:
Enter.
2 Type set learning <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To enable or disable port service type:
Type cd interfaces/bridge/eth-port[< port number>] and press Enter.
2 Type set service type <network/access>, and press Enter.
To set classify default:
Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-default<1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th>, and press Enter.
To set classify initial QoS:
Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-initial < ip-tos, ip-tos-over-vlan-pbits, port,
vlan-pbits, vlan-pbits-over-ip-tos>, and press Enter.
To set classify VLAN ID override:
Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-vid-override <disable, pbit-override, queue-
and-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set classify mac da override:


Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-mac-da-override <disable, pbit-override,
queue-and-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set Egress scheduler:
Enter.
2 Type: set qos-scheduling-scheme < all-queues-hrr, all-queues-strict,
fourth-and-third-queues-strict, fourth-queue-strict >, and press Enter.
24.3.18.4 Deleting a LAG

You must remove each port from the LAG to delete the LAG from the system.
To delete a LAG:
Type: cd interfaces/bridge /eth-port[< port number>], and
press Enter.
2 Type: set lag-port not-aggregated, and press Enter.
3 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each port that is already assigned to the LAG.

24.3.19 Management Ports

To set the number of management ports
1 Change to the management/networking directory.
Type: cd /management/networking and press Enter.
2 Type: set number-of-ports <no. of ports>(0-3), and press Enter.
To set the management type (inband, outband, VLAN)
2 Type set type < in-band or out-of-band >, and press Enter.
If you choose in-band, you should configure management VLAN ID:
2 Type set vlan <no. of VLAN> (1-4090), and press Enter.
24.3.19.1 Port configuration
Flow control
To enable or disable flow control (Smart Pipe only):
press Enter.
2 Type set flow-control <on | off>, and press Enter.
Managed switch Ethernet ports

To enable or disable port admin:
press Enter.
2 Type set admin <enable | disable>, and press Enter.
To set port speed rate:
press Enter.
2 Type set ethernet-rate <Rate> (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps), and press
Enter.
To set port duplex:


press Enter.
2 Type set duplex < full-duplex | half-duplex >, and press Enter.
press Enter.
2 Type set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set the port type:
press Enter.
2 Type set type <access or trunk>, and press Enter.
To set the default VLAN ID:
press Enter.
2 Type set vlan <VLAN no.> (1-4090), and press Enter.
To enable or disable port learning:
press Enter.
2 Type set learning <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To add, remove, or accept VLANs:
press Enter.
2 Type set-allowed-vlans <add, except, remove> <VLAN no.>, and press
Enter.
3 Type set-allowed-vlans < all, no-vlans>, and press Enter.

24.3.20 VLAN Configuration

To add, remove, enable, or disable VLANs:
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type vlan <VLAN no.> <add, remove, enable, disable>, and press Enter.
To add or change the VLAN name:
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type vlan <VLAN no.> name <VLAN name>, and press Enter.

24.3.21 QoS Configuration
24.3.21.1 Ingress Classifier

To set initial classification:
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-initial < ip-tos, ip-tos-over-vlan-pbits, port,
vlan-pbits, vlan-pbits-over-ip-tos>, and press Enter.
To set classify VID override:
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-vid-override <disable, pbit-override, queue-
and-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set classify MAC da override:
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-mac-da-override <disable, pbit-override,
queue-and-pbit-override, queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set default classification:
press Enter.
2 Type set qos-classify-default<1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th>, and press Enter.
24.3.21.2 Egress scheduler

To set Egress scheduler:
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.] and press
Enter.
2 Type: set qos-scheduling-scheme < all-queues-hrr, all-queues-strict,
fourth-and-third-queues-strict, fourth-queue-strict >, and press Enter.
24.3.21.3 Egress shaper

To set egress shaper:
press Enter.
2 Type: set qos-egress-shaper <on/off,> and press Enter.

3 Type: set qos-egress-shaper-rate <rate>, and press Enter.
24.3.21.4 Policer
To add/remove a policer:
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-policer <add, remove> <policer name>, and press Enter.
To add a class to the policer:
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-policer-class <add, remove> <policer class name> <policer
name> <matching type: all, arp, first-queue, second-queue, third-queue,
fourth-queue, broadcast, multicast, non-tcp-udp, tcp-control, tcp-data, udp,
unicast, unknown-unicast, unknown-multicast> <rate> <CBS> <exceed
action: drop>, and press Enter.
3 Type: qos-show-policers to verify the data, and press Enter.
24.3.21.5 QoS tables

To set VLAN Pbits priority remap table:
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-set-vlan-pbits-prio-remap <original Pbit> <Remapped
Pbit>, and press Enter.
To set VLAN ID to queue table:
press Enter.
2 Type: qos-vlan-to-queue set/remove <VID> <queue ID: 1st-queue,
2nd-queue, 3rd-queue, 4th-queue >, and press Enter.
To set VLAN Pbits to queue table:
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type: qos-set-vlan-tag-pbit-val <VLAN_Pbit> <queue ID: 1st-queue,
2nd-queue, 3rd-queue, 4th-queue >, and press Enter.
To set IP Pbits to queue table:

2 Type: qos-set-ip-pbit-val <IP_Pbit> <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2nd-

queue, 3rd-queue, 4th-queue>, and press Enter.
To set IP priority options:
2 Type: set qos-ip-tos-tc-pbits-option <diffserv, ip-precedence>,
and press Enter.
To set static MAC table:
2 Type: qos-static-mac-priority set/remove <MAC address>
<dest.port no.[1-8]> <priority [0-7]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]>, and press
Enter.
To set queue weights table:
2 Type: qos-set-scheduler-q-weight <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2nd-queue,
3rd-queue, 4th-queue > <weight:1-32>, and press Enter.

24.3.22 Auxiliary Channels
24.3.22.1 Wayside Channel

To set port admin:
1 Change to the interfaces/wayside directory.
Type: cd interfaces/wayside and press Enter.
2 Type: set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set port rate:
2 Type: set ethernet-rate <10mbps or 100mbps>, and press Enter.
2 Type: set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set port duplex:
2 Type: set duplex <full-duplex or half-duplex>, and press Enter.
24.3.22.2 User channel

To set port admin:
1 Change to the interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel directory.
Type: cd interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel and press Enter.
2 Type: set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set port type:
1 Change to the interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel directory.
Type: cd interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel and press Enter.
2 Type: set type asynchronous-<rs232 or v-11> and press Enter.

24.3.23 Automatic State Propagation, 1+0 Configuration Only

To set automatic state propagation (GBE-mute-override) in a Smart Pipe
application:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet and press Enter.
2 Type: set-gbe-mute-override <criteria: none, lof-loc, lof-loc-excber,
lof-loc-remote, lof loc-excber-remote >, and press Enter.
To set automatic state propagation ( GBE-mute-override) in a managed or
metro application:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet directory.
Type: cd interfaces/ethernet and press Enter.
2 Type: set-gbe-mute-override <criteria: none, lof, lof-excber, lof-
remote, lof-excber-remote >, and press Enter.
24.3.23.1 Ethernet Shutdown (Rx) Profile Threshold (ACM Enabled)

To set Ethernet shutdown (Rx) profile threshold:
1 Change to the radio/mrmc directory.
Type: cd radio/mrmc and press Enter
2 Type: set eth-shutdown-threshold-profile < profile-0 to
profile-7 >, and press Enter.
24.3.23.2 Metro Switch and Port Type Configuration

To set Metro switch as the application type:
2 At the new prompt, type set ethernet-application metro-switch,
and press Enter.
3 Confirm by typing yes, and press Enter.
The system will restart automatically.
To set the port type (CN/PN):
press Enter.
2 Type set type customer-network (or provider-network), and
press Enter.
To set default VLAN on CN ports:
Type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.], and
press Enter.

2 At the new prompt, type set vlan <VLAN ID>, and press Enter.
To set allowed VLANs on PN ports:
press Enter.
2 At the new prompt, type set-allowed-vlans <add,all,except,no-
vlans,remove> <VLAN ID>, and press Enter.
To set provider port ether type:
press Enter.
2 At the new prompt, type set provider-port-ethertype <0x88a8,
0x8100, 0x9100, 0x9200>, and press Enter.

24.3.24 Radio script configuration

To set the radio script:
1 Change to the radio/mrmc directory.
Type cd radio/mrmc and press Enter.
2 Type change-script-cmd < Script's name> < Operational mode>
<Maximum profile> disable-adaptive-power, then press Enter.
Parameter values for the radio script include:
 Script name
10Mbps-6.5MHz-4QAM-Grade-1
155Mbps-26MHz-128QAM-Grade-1
ACM_181Mbps-26MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_367Mbps-52MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_42Mbps-6.5MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_87Mbps-12.5MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
 Operational mode
acm-adaptive-mode
acm-fixed-mode
regular-mode (for non ACM scripts)
 Maximum profile
profile-0
profile-1
profile-2
profile-3
profile-4
profile-5
profile-6
profile-7
In “regular mode” only “profile-0” is available.

24.3.25 Ring RSTP

To enable Ring RSTP:
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ and press Enter.
2 Set the STP protocol.
3 Type set stp-protocol ring-rstp, and press Enter.
To set bridge priority:
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge and press Enter.
2 Type set priority <priority no: range 0-61440, steps of 4096> and
press Enter.
To set interface’s priority:
1 Change to the interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port directory.
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set priority <interface priority no: range: 0-240, steps of 16>
and press Enter.
To set interface’s patch cost:
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.] and
press Enter.
2 Type set path-cost <patch cost> and press Enter.
To set if interface is an “edge” port or “ring” port (“non-edge” port):
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.] and press
Enter.
2 Type set edge-port <yes | no> and press Enter.

25. Appendix B – List of Alarms
Corrective
# Name Severity Type Description Probable cause
Actions
101 ext-in-alarm indeterminate Alarm External alarm input User configured Check source
(%1). input problem. description, and
correct accordingly.
201 bridge- warning Event Loss of bridge Power failure during Verify bridge
configuration- configuration during configuration configuration.
loss reset change
301 excessive-ber major Alarm E1/DS1 excessive 1) Line is not 1) Reconnect line.
BER on port #%1. properly connected. 2) Check line
2) External cables. 3) Check
equipment is faulty. external equipment.
4) Power cycle the
system.
302 loopback- major Alarm E1/DS1 loopback User configured Cancel loopback
towards-line towards line on port system to loopback configuration.
#%1. mode.
303 loopback- major Alarm E1/DS1 loopback User configured Cancel loopback
towards-radio towards radio on system to loopback configuration.
port #%1. mode.
304 loss-of-signal major Alarm E1/DS1 loss of 1) Line is not 1) Reconnect line.
signal on port #%1. properly connected. 2) Check line
2) External cables. 3) Check
4) Power cycle the
system.
305 signal- minor Alarm E1/DS1 signal 1) Line is not 1) Reconnect line.
degrade degrade on port properly connected. 2) Check line
#%1. 2) External cables. 3) Check
4) Power cycle the
system.
306 unexpected- warning Alarm E1/DS1 unexpected 1) Port is disabled. 1) Enable relevant
signal signal on port #%1. 2) Line is connected port. 2) Disconnect
to a disabled port. cable from relevant
port.
307 std-trap-link- indeterminate Alarm E1/DS1 link up trap.
up
308 std-trap-link- indeterminate Alarm E1/DS1 link down
down trap.

Corrective
Actions
401 eth-loc-alarm major Alarm Ethernet loss of 1) FE cable 1) Check
carrier on port #%1. disconnected. 2) connection of FE
Defective FE cable. cable. 2) Replace
FE cable.
402 eth-tx-mute- warning Alarm Ethernet Tx mute Radio Check link.
alarm override on port LOF/EXBER/Link ID
#%1. on local or remote
side (in pipe
application).
403 gbe-loc-alarm major Alarm Gigabit Ethernet 1) Cable is not 1) Connect cable to
loss of carrier on connected to the the port. 2) Replace
port #%1. port. 2) Cable is cable.
defective.
404 gbe-sfp-alarm major Alarm Gigabit Ethernet SFP is not inserted 1) Check SFP
SFP not intact on connector. 2)
port #%1. Replace fiber.
405 gbe-sfp-tx- major Alarm Gigabit Ethernet SFP malfunction. Replace SFP.
alarm SFP Tx fault on port
#%1.
406 gbe-tx-mute- warning Alarm GBE Tx mute Radio Check link.
alarm override on port LOF/EXBER/Link ID
#%1. on local or remote
side.
407 std-trap-link- indeterminate Alarm Ethernet link up
up trap.
408 std-trap-link- indeterminate Alarm Ethernet link down
down trap.
409 change-in- warning Event Change in RSTP
stp-role role for port: %1;
New role: %2; New
state: %3; Root
bridge ID: %4;
Bridge role: %5.
501 file-load- critical Alarm Firmware file load 1) Firmware file is 1) Move
error-alarm error (%1). missing. 2) System Management to port
error on power up. 2. 2) Download
firmware file. 3)
Reset system.
502 file-not-found- critical Alarm Firmware file not 1) Firmware file is 1) Download
alarm found (%1). missing. firmware file. 2)
Reset system.

Corrective
Actions
601 radio- major Alarm Excessive BER on 1) Fade in the link. 1) Check link
excessive-ber radio. 2) Defective IF performance. 2)
cable. 3) Fault in Check IF cable, and
RFU. 4) Fault in replace if required.
IDU. 3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU.
602 radio-link-id- critical Alarm Link ID mismatch. Link ID is not the Configure the same
mismatch same for both sides link ID for both
of link. sides of link.
603 radio-lof critical Alarm Loss of frame on 1) Fade in the link. 1) Check link
radio. 2) Defective IF performance. 2)
IDU. 5) Different 3) Replace RFU. 4)
radio scripts at both Replace IDU. 5)
ends of the link. Make sure same
script is loaded at
both ends of the
link.
604 radio-signal- minor Alarm Signal degrade on 1) Fade in the link. 1) Check link
degrade radio. 2) Defective IF performance. 2)
IDU. 3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU.
605 std-trap-link- indeterminate Alarm Radio link up trap.
up
606 std-trap-link- indeterminate Alarm Radio link down
down trap.
701 alarms-file major Alarm System alarm file The alarm file was Download alarm
not found. deleted or is file.
corrupted.
702 cold-reset- warning Event Cold reset event. Cold reset
event command was
issued.
703 config- warning Event Configuration Re-try configuration
creation- creation failed. creation.
failed
704 config- warning Alarm Configuration
creation- creation succeeded.
succeeded

Corrective
Actions
705 config- warning Event Configuration Download failure. Re-try download
download- download failed. procedure.
failed
706 config- warning Event Configuration
download- download
succeeded succeeded.
707 config-install- warning Event Configuration install 1) Corrupt file. 2) 1) Re-install file. 2)
failed failed. Internal SW error. Download and
install file.
708 config-install- warning Event Configuration install
succeeded succeeded.
709 config- warning Event Configuration Re-try upload
upload-failed upload failed. procedure.
710 config- warning Event Configuration
upload- upload succeeded.
succeeded
711 entity-init-fail- major Alarm SW failed to SW error during Reset system.
alarm properly initialize. system initialization.
712 entity-init-fail- major Event SW error: entity %1 SW error during Reset system.
event initialization failure. system initialization.
713 extreme- warning Alarm IDU is in extreme The external Turn on external
temperature temperature cooling/heating cooling/heating
condition. system is not systems.
operating.
714 fan-failure minor Alarm Fan failure. Defective fan unit. Replace fan unit.
715 general- critical Alarm General HW failure Defective HW. 1) Reset system. 2)
hardware- %1. Replace IDU.
failure
716 kernel- minor Alarm Backup kernel is 1) New software 1) Re-install the SW
backup running. was installed when when system time is
system time was updated. 2) Update
"older" than the time time and run the
when the previous following command:
version was management/mng-
installed. 2) The services/mng-
kernel software/ . 3)
(/boot/uImage) is Package-reinstall
corrupted or kernel-2.6.14.7-
missing. aidc.3.14.e300c2.rp
m kernel-modules-
0.3.13-
2.6.14.7_aidc.3.14.
e300c2.rpm.

Corrective
Actions
717 low-input- warning Alarm Low input voltage Low input to the Check power supply
voltage detected. system. voltage.
Note: If the system
includes a dual-feed
power connection,
this alarm may be
raised if only one of
the power inputs is
actually connected,
even though the
system is receiving
adequate power
from the connected
input. You can
configure the
system to avoid
this. See
Configuring Power
Supply Alarms on
page 377.
718 param-set- warning Alarm Parameter set SW error. 1) Look in Alarm
fail-alarm failure. Log for matching
event. 2) In the
event, look for exact
parameter that has
failed. 3) Set the
parameter again via
the CLI. Note: the
alarm will be
cleared after reset.
719 param-set- major Event SW error: SW error. Reset system.
fail-event parameter %1 set
failed.
720 warm-reset- warning Alarm Warm reset event. SW reset in the
event system.
721 cli-script- warning Event CLI configuration Download failure. Re-try download
download- script download procedure.
failed failed.
722 cli-script- warning Event CLI configuration
download- script downloaded
succeeded successfully.
executed script activated.

Corrective
Actions
execution- script executed
succeeded successfully.
725 cli-script- warning Event CLI configuration CLI configuration 1) Correct CLI
execution- script failed. script execution configuration script.
failed failure. 2) Download
corrected script. 3)
Execute script.
726 public-key- warning Event Public key upload
upload-failed failed.
727 public-key- warning Event Public key upload
upload- succeeded.
succeeded
728 lvds- major Alarm Errors in TDM (1) Extension or (1) Re-insert unit.
backplane- backplane channel main unit equipment (2) Power-cycle
error-main for slot #%1. failure. (2) unit. (3) Replace
Backplane failure. unit (4) Check
backplane
729 lvds- major Alarm Errors in TDM (1) Extension or (1) Re-insert unit.
backplane- backplane channel main unit equipment (2) Power-cycle
error-extn in connection with failure. (2) unit. (3) Replace
main. Backplane failure. unit. (4) Check
backplane.
730 lvds-db-error major Alarm Errors are detected (1) IDU HW failure. (1) Re-insert T-card.
in connection with (2) T-card HW (2) Power-cycle
T-card. failure. unit. (3) Replace T-
card. (4) Replace
IDU.
731 csr-file- warning Event CSR file upload
upload- succeeded.
succeeded
732 csr-file- warning Event CSR file upload
upload-failed failed.
801 corrupted-file- critical Alarm Inventory file (%1) 1) Inventory file is 1) Reset system. 2)
alarm is corrupted. missing. 2) Download inventory
Inventory file was file..
found to be corrupt
upon system power
up.
802 file-not-found- critical Alarm Inventory file (%1) Inventory file is 1) Download
alarm was not found. missing. inventory file. 2)
Reset system.

Corrective
Actions
901 demo- warning Alarm Demo license is Demo license 1) Terminate demo
license-alarm being used by activated by user. license. 2) Activate
customer. operational license.
902 license- warning Event License demo Demo trial period Obtain a valid
demo-expired expired. has ended. license.
903 license- warning Event User started demo
demo-start- license.
by-user
904 license- warning Event Demo license
demo-stop- stopped by user.
by-user
905 license-load- warning Event License load failure 1) Invalid serial 1) Compare unit's
fail %1. License load number - license serial number with
operation failed. code does not license serial
match unit's serial number (3 left
number. 2) License characters of
version mismatch. license code with 3
right characters of
unit's serial). 2)
Check code license
generation
sequence. 3)
Contact Tech
support.
906 license-load- warning Event License load
successful successful.
907 license- warning Alarm License violation: Unit does not match 1) Check that the
violation- %1. license feature set. code was entered
alarm correctly. 2) Call
tech support for
new license
generation.
908 demo- major Alarm Demo license is Demo license 1) Terminate demo
license- about to expire activated by user. license. 2) Activate
about-to- within 48 hours and operational license.
expire-alarm will initiate a system
cold reset.
909 license- warning Event License violation User configuration (1) Fix configuration
violation- detected: %1. doesn't match to correspond to
detected licensed feature set. loaded licenses. (2)
Load proper
license.

Corrective
Actions
910 license- major Alarm License code Product serial Change IDU.
signature-fail checking failed due number or internal
to invalid product files error.
serial number.
1001 cable- major Alarm Protection cable is 1) Cable is not 1) Connect Ethernet
disconnected not properly connected between cable to protection
-alarm connected. protection ports. 2) port of both IDUs. 2)
Cable is connected Replace cable.
to wrong port. 3)
Cable is damaged.
1002 configuration- major Alarm Mismatch between The configurations .Apply Copy to Mate
mismatch- IDUs in protection of the IDUs are not from the desired
alarm mode. identical. IDU.
1003 copy-to-mate- warning Event Copy to mate
completed- completed.
event
1004 copy-to-mate- warning Event Copy to mate failed. Initiate another
failure-event Copy to Mate
command.
1005 copy-to-mate- warning Event Copy to mate
started-event process started.
1006 exc-ber- major Event Request from Active Tx at local 1) Check the Tx
change- remote side to side is not level of active unit.
remote-tx- perform a protection transmitting. 2) Check if active
sent-event switch. unit was set to
Mute. 3) Check
active unit's RFU.
1007 force-switch- major Alarm Force switch 1) User command - 1) Clear force
alarm command was force protection switch command.
issued. switch.
1009 lockout-alarm major Alarm Protection lockout User issued Clear lockout
command was protection lockout. command.
issued.
1010 lof-change- warning Event Remote side 1) Active Tx at local 1) Check the Tx
remote-tx- requests protection side is not level of active unit.
sent-event switch due to radio transmitting. 2) 2) Check if active
loss of frame. Fade in the link unit was set to
path. Mute. 3) Check
active unit's RFU. 4)
Check PM for fade
in link path.

Corrective
Actions
1011 manual- warning Event Local switch due to User request to
switch-req- user request. perform local
event switch.
1012 mate-comm- major Alarm IDU cannot 1) IDU IP addresses 1) Check IP
failure-alarm communicate with are identical. 2) IDU address and subnet
its mate IDU. IP subnets are not definition in both
identical. 3) In units. 2) In stand-
stand-alone alone configuration:
configuration: check protection
protection cable is cable connectivity.
not properly 3) In stand-alone
connected. 4) In configuration:
stand-alone replace protection
configuration: cable.
protection cable is
damaged.
1013 protection- warning Event Protection mode
mode- changed to %1 %2.
changed-
event
1014 sd-change- warning Event Remote side is 1) Link fade. 2) 1) Check link
remote-tx- requesting a Defective IF cable. performance. 2)
sent-event protection switch 3) RFU fault. 4) IDU Check IF cable. 3)
due to radio signal fault. Check RFU. 4)
degrade. Check IDU
1015 bridge-xml- warning Alarm
file-alarm
1101 download- warning Event Software download 1) There are no
failed failed event. valid packages for
download at remote
server. 2)
Communication with
remote server is
down. 3) Remote
server access
credentials are not
valid. 4) Remote
server URL is not
valid.
1102 download- warning Event Software download
succeeded succeeded event.

Corrective
Actions
1103 install-failed warning Event Software installation 1) There are no
failed event. valid packages for
installation at local
update directory. 2)
One or more
package has
unresolved
dependencies, i.e.
requires another
package(s) to be
installed first.
1104 install- warning Event Software installation
succeeded succeeded event.
1105 timed-install warning Event User has either
started or canceled
a timed installation.
SW %1 timer %2
command; timer:
%3 seconds.
1201 firmware-file- critical Alarm Modem firmware file Modem file is 1) Download
missing-alarm was not found. missing. Modem file. 2)
Reset system.
1202 firmware- critical Alarm Modem firmware 1) File is corrupt. 2) 1) Download file. 2)
load-error- was not loaded System failure. Reset system.
alarm successfully.
1203 modem-wd- warning Event Modem WD reset.
reset-event
1301 fpga-file- critical Alarm Radio script LUT is 1) Faulty file. 1) Download radio
corrupt-alarm not valid. script LUT.
1302 fpga-file-not- critical Alarm Radio script LUT File was not Download radio
found-alarm not found. downloaded to script.
system.
1303 incompatible- critical Alarm Incompatible script: Incompatibility 1) Change RFU. 2)
script-alarm %1 %2. between RFU and Change Radio
loaded radio script. script.
1304 modem- critical Alarm Radio script is not File is corrupt. Download file.
script-file- valid.
corrupt-alarm
1305 modem- critical Alarm Radio script not File not found. Download file.
script-file-not- found.
found-alarm
1306 mrmc-file- critical Alarm MRMC file not valid. File is corrupt. Download file.
corrupt-alarm

Corrective
Actions
1307 mrmc-file-not- critical Alarm MRMC file not File not found. Download file.
found-alarm found.
1308 rfu-file- critical Alarm RFU file not valid. File is corrupt. Download file.
corrupt-alarm
1309 rfu-file-not- critical Alarm RFU file not found. File not found. Download file.
found-alarm
1310 radio-script- critical Alarm Radio script not Configuration from 1) Change radio
not- supported by another system script. 2) Make sure
supported-by- hardware. Script loaded into F-series right hardware is
hw-alarm capacities above hardware. installed.
100 Mbps not
supported by this
hardware.
1311 acm-profile- warning Alarm TX ACM profile has Fade in Link Make sure
below- dropped below the transmission power
defined-thr- threshold defined by and ACM settings
alarm user. are adequate for
link conditions.
1401 incompatible- major Alarm RFU calibration RFU calibration Upgrade IDU SW.
rfu-tx- tables require IDC tables require IDC
calibration SW upgrade. SW upgrade.
1501 remote- major Alarm Remote 1) Fade in the link. Check link
communicatio communication performance.
n-failure failure alarm.
1601 if-loopback- warning Alarm IF loopback 1) User enabled IF Disable IF
alarm initiated. loopback. loopback.
1602 lock-detect- critical Alarm IF synthesizer 1) Extreme 1) Check
alarm unlock. temperature installation. 2)
condition. 2) HW Reset IDU.
failure.
1701 cable-open major Alarm Cable between IDU 1) Cable is not 1) Check IF cable
and RFU is not connected to IDU or and connectors. 2)
properly connected. RFU. Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU.

Corrective
Actions
1702 cable-short major Alarm There is a short in 1) Physical short at 1) Check IF cable
the IF cable. the IF cable. and connectors. 2)
Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU.
1703 communicatio warning Alarm Failure in 1) Defective IF 1) Check IF cable
n-failure communication cable. 2) IF cable and connectors. 2)
between IDU and not connected Verify that N-Type
RFU. properly. 3) connector inner pin
Defective IDU. 4) is not spliced. 3)
Defective RFU. 5) Replace IDU. 4)
RFU software Replace RFU. For
download in high power RF unit:
progress. 1) Check BMA
connector on OCB.
2) Check BMA
connector on RFU.
1704 delay- warning Event RFU delay Defective RFU. 1) Reset the
calibration- calibration failure 1. IDU/RFU. 2)
failure-1 Rx AGC is not Replace RFU.
locked.
1705 delay- warning Alarm RFU delay Calibration cannot Enter delay
calibration- calibration failure 2. be completed due calibration value
failure-2 to notch detection. manually.
1706 extreme- warning Alarm RFU temperature is 1) Installation 1) Check installation
temp-cond too high or low. conditions. 2) conditions. 2) Verify
Defective RFU. operation as per
product's specs. 3)
Replace RFU.
1707 fan-failure major Alarm RFU fan failure. 1) Defective / non- 1) Check RFU
existent fan drawer. connection to BP. 2)
2) Defective RFU- Check that fans are
to-fan drawer connected to PS. 3)
connection. 3) Replace RFU BP
Defective RFU. cable. 4) Replace
specific fan or fan
drawer. 5) Replace
RFU.
1708 freq-set- warning Event Frequency set Defective RFU. Check if problem
automatically automatically. repeats and if
errors/alarms
reported. Replace
ODU.

Corrective
Actions
1709 hardware- critical Alarm RFU hardware 1) Defective RFU. 1) Replace RFU.
failure-1 failure 1 alarm.
1710 hardware- critical Alarm RFU hardware Defective RFU. Replace RFU.
failure-2 failure 2 alarm.
1711 low-if-signal- major Alarm RFU is detecting 1) IF cable 1) Check IF cable
to-rfu low IF signal from connection. 2) connectors. 2)
IDU. Defective RFU. 3) Verify that N-Type
Defective IDU. connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU.
1712 no-signal- warning Alarm IDU is not detecting No RX (140 MHz) 1) Check IF cable
from-rfu a signal from the signal from RFU. and connectors. 2)
RFU. Verify that N-Type
connector inner pin
is not spliced. 3)
Replace IDU. 4)
Replace RFU. For
high power RF unit:
Check that the BMA
connector center
pin is not spliced
both on RFU and on
OCB.
1713 pa-extreme- warning Alarm RFU PA extreme 1) Installation 1) Check installation
temp-cond temperature. conditions. 2) conditions. 2)
Defective RFU. Replace RFU.
1714 power-failure- major Alarm RFU power failure 1) Defective IF 1) Replace IF
12v (12v) alarm. cable/connector. 2) cable/connector. 2)
Defective RFU. 3) Replace RFU. 3)
Defective IDU. Replace IDU.
1point5 (1.5v) alarm. cable/connector. 2) cable/connector. 2)
24v (24v) alarm. cable/connector. 2) cable/connector. 2)
1717 power-failure- critical Alarm RFU power failure 1) Defective IF 1) Replace IF
6v (6v pro) alarm. cable/connector. 2) cable/connector. 2)

Corrective
Actions
6v-sw (6v SW) alarm. cable/connector. 2) cable/connector. 2)
minus-5v (6v pro) alarm. cable/connector. 2) cable/connector. 2)
1720 power-failure- critical Event RFU power failure 1) Defective IF 1) Replace IF
vd (Vd) alarm. cable/connector. 2) cable/connector. 2)
1721 reset- warning Event RFU reset event.
occurred
1722 rfu-loopback- major Alarm RFU loopback User action. Disable RFU
active alarm loopback.
1723 rfu-mode- warning Event RFU changed mode
changed-to- to Combined.
combined
1724 rfu-mode- warning Event RFU mode changed
changed-to- to Diversity.
diversity
1725 rfu-mode- warning Event RFU changed mode
changed-to- to Main.
main
1726 rfu-power- major Alarm RFU power supply At least one of the 1) Replace RFU.
supply-failure failure. PSU voltages is too
low.
1730 synthesizer- major Alarm RFU synthesizer is 1) Defective RFU. 1) Replace XPIC
1-unlocked unlocked. 2) Defective XPIC cable. 2) Replace
cable connection. RFU.
2-unlocked unlocked 2) Defective XPIC cable. 2) Replace
3-unlocked unlocked. 2) Defective XPIC cable. 2) Replace
1733 synthesizer- major Alarm One of the RFU One of the RFU 1) Replace RFU. 2)
unlocked synthesizers is synthesizers is In XPIC mode,
unlocked. unlocked. replace mate RFU
as well.

Corrective
Actions
1734 tx-level-out- minor Alarm RFU Tx level out of 1) Defective RFU 1) Replace RFU. 2)
of-range range. (the RFU cannot Intermediate
transmit the solution - reduce Tx
requested TX power.
power).
1735 tx-mute warning Alarm RFU Tx mute. RFU transmitter Unmute the RFU
muted by user. transmitter.
1736 unknown-rfu- major Alarm IDC SW does not IDC SW does not Upgrade IDC SW.
type support the RFU. support the RFU.
1737 power- major Alarm Power amplifier 1) Incorrect 1) Check installation
decreased- temperature is installation. 2) conditions. 2) Verify
due-to-pa- extremely high. Hardware failure. operation as per
temperature product's specs. 3)
Replace RFU.
1738 atpc-override- warning Alarm ATPC override User configuration. Change either atpc-
tx-higher- transmission level override-tx-level or
than-max value is greater max-tx-level value
than system so that the override
maximum value is less than or
transmission level. equal to the
maximum value.
1739 atpc-override warning Alarm ATPC overridden: Actual transmitted 1) Correct the
Tx level has been signal level has transmission levels.
equal to the max Tx been at its 2) The alarm will be
level for a longer maximum value for cleared only upon
time than allowed. longer than allowed. manual clearing.
This is probably
caused by a
configuration error
or link planning
error.
1740 rsl-lower- warning Alarm The received signal 1) Low Tx power in 1) Check
than-user- level is lower than transmitter. 2) Transmission
defined-thr the user configured Wrong reference settings. 2) Check
threshold. level if ATPC is IDU-RFU cable. 3)
active. 3) Loss in Change threshold
channel or cables. according to link
4) Threshold planning.
configured too high.
1801 upload- warning Event RFU firmware User action.
firmware- upload canceled
canceled event.

Corrective
Actions
1802 upload- major Event RFU firmware Retry upload.
firmware- upload error.
error
1803 upload- major Event RFU FW upload Retry upload.
firmware- failed.
failed
1804 upload- warning Event RFU FW upload
firmware- succeeded.
succeeded
1901 upload- warning Event RFU software Retry upload.
software- upload canceled.
canceled
1902 upload- warning Event RFU software Retry upload.
software-error upload error.
1903 upload- warning Event RFU SW upload Retry upload.
software- failed.
failed
1904 upload- warning Event RFU SW upload
software- started.
started
1905 upload- warning Event RFU SW upload
software- succeeded.
succeeded-
event
2001 cfm-failure warning Alarm Ethernet services 1) Local MEP error 1) Check MAID
failure. indication. 2) definitions. 2)
Remote MEP error Check remote MEP
indication. 3) definitions. 3)
Remote MEP loss Check local MEP
of connectivity. definitions. 4) Run
"CFM traceroute" to
the remote MEP,
then perform "CFM
ping" to each MP
(Maintenance Point)
in order to find the
broken point.
2101 heartbeat indeterminate Event Heartbeat trap
2201 eeprom- major Alarm System unable to (1) Inserted drawer (1) Make sure
access-failure detect TDM drawer not supported. (2) drawer is properly
type. Hardware error. inserted. (2) Power
cycle the system.
(3) Replace drawer.

Corrective
Actions
2301 bp-lof-alarm critical Alarm TDM backplane (1) Extension or (1) Re-insert unit.
LOF for slot #%1. main unit equipment (2) Power-cycle
No signal is failure. (2) unit. (3) Check
detected from port. Backplane failure. backplane.
2302 communicatio critical Alarm Communications (1) Extension or (1) Re-insert unit.
n-lost-with-idu lost with IDU #%1. main unit equipment (2) Power-cycle
Communications failure. (2) unit. (3) Check
have been lost with Backplane failure. backplane.
extension units' SW.
2303 extraction- warning Event Extraction of IDU
detected #%1 in the shelf has
been detected.
2304 idu-presence- minor Alarm IDU #%1 presence IDU with TDM trails (1) Insert IDU in
not-detected not detected. An mapped to it was shelf. (2) Delete
IDU which is extracted from relevant TDM trails.
configured as shelf.
operational is not
detected as being
physically present in
the shelf.
2305 insertion- warning Alarm Insertion of IDU
detected #%1 in the shelf has
been detected.
2306 mate-version- major Alarm SW version (1) SW update Perform SW update
mismatch mismatch between performed in one to mate unit.
two units in unit only. (2) Units
protection mode. with different SW
version connected
as protection mate.
2307 protection- minor Alarm Protection mode (1) Equipment error (1) Re-configure XC
admin- mismatch for IDU in extension IDU. settings. (2) Reset
mismatch #%1, %2. A unit is (2) Backplane extension unit. (3)
configured in main communications Replace extension
unit as protected error. unit.
but an indication is
received that the
unit is not under
protection (or vice-
versa).
2308 protection- major Alarm Protection activity (1) Backplane (1) Replace units,
mode- error for IDUs #%1, communications one by one. (2)
mismatch %2. Two protected failure. (2) Check backplane.
units chose the Equipment failure in
same activity extension units.
(active/stand-by).

Corrective
Actions
2309 unit-version- major Alarm SW running version (1) SW update Perform a SW
mismatch mismatch with performed in main update for the
extension unit in unit only. (2) Units relevant extension
slot %1. The with different SW unit.
software version of version connected
extension unit is as extensions.
different from that of
the main unit.
2402 extension-bp- critical Alarm No signal is (1) Extension or (1) Re-insert unit.
lof detected in main unit equipment (2) Power-cycle
backplane failure. (2) unit. (3) Check
connection with Backplane failure. backplane.
main IDU.
2403 failure-in-one- warning Alarm A failure has been (1) Network TDM Check TDM trails
or-more-tdm- detected in at least trail Configuration status.
trails one TDM trail. error. (2) Signal
failure in TDM trail -
this may be due to
equipment failure or
AIS at the line input.
(3) Excessive BER
in TDM trail. (4)
Signal degrade in
TDM trail.
2406 invalid-trail- major Event Invalid trail status (1) Trail end-point (1) Perform reset in
status- change %1 in trail failure detected for end-point IDU if
change %2. Equipment one or more trails. exists. (2) Replace
failure status of one (2) Trail end-point end-point IDU.
or more trails failure cleared for
changed. one or more trails.
2407 trail- major Event Trail excessive BER (1) Trail excessive Check links and
excessive- status change %1 in BER detected for equipment alarms
BER-change trail %2. Excessive one or more trails. along the TDM trail.
BER status of one (2) Trail excessive
or more trails BER cleared for one
changed. or more trails.
2408 trail-id- warning Alarm Trail ID of received (1) Trail ID spelling (1) Check trail ID at
mismatch data differs from difference between both ends of the
locally configured. trail ends. (2) trail. (2) Check
Network TDM trail network trail
configuration error. configuration. (3)
(3) Errors in Check trail
incoming signal. performance (BER)
along the trail path
and fix errored links
if needed.

Corrective
Actions
2409 trail-id- warning Event Trail ID mismatch (1) Trail ID (1) Check trail ID at
mismatch- status change %1 in mismatch detected both ends of the
change trail %2. The status for one or more trail. (2) Check
of one more trails trails. (2) Trail ID network trail
has changed. mismatch cleared configuration.
for one or more
trails.
2410 trail- warning Alarm Trail ID: %1, path: (1) User command - Set force active to
protected- %2 forced active.. force active. "none" for this trail.
forced-active Force active
command has been
issued for the
relevant path in the
trail.
2411 trail- warning Event Trail protection (1) Signal failure
protected- switch performed in along the active
switch trail %1 due to %2. trail's path. (2) User
Active trail has been issued force active
switched in a path- command to stand-
protected trail. by path.
2412 trail-signal- minor Event Trail signal degrade (1) Trail signal Check links and
degrade- status change %1 in degrade detected equipment alarms
change trail %2. Signal for one or more along the TDM trail.
degrade status of trails. (2) Trail signal
one or more trails degrade cleared for
has changed. one or more trails.
2413 trails- warning Alarm Trails mapped to (1) One or more (1) Replace missing
mapped-to- inexistent interfaces components were components (IDUs,
inexistent- in IDU #%1. There extracted from the T-cards). (2) Make
interfaces are trails in the system since trails sure radio scripts
database that are were defined. (2) support required
mapped to Radio scripts have number of E1/DS1
interfaces not been replaced by trails through radio.
currently installed in narrower scripts (3) Delete relevant
the system. since trails were trails.
defined.
2414 trail-signal- warning Event Trail signal failure (1) Fade in a link Check links,
failure- status change %1 in along the trail. (2) equipment alarms
change trail %2. AIS Equipment failure in and trail
received in one or a network element configuration along
more incoming along the trail. (3) the TDM trail.
trails. Trail not properly
provisioned along
the path.

Corrective
Actions
2415 illegal-trail- warning Alarm Conflicting trails are Protection was (1) Erase relevant
configuration. configured in enabled in pair of trails. (2) Disable
protected IDUs %1 IDUs between protection in pair.
and %2. One or which trails were
more trails are previously
configured between configured.
two units configured
in protection mode.
2416 trail-RDI- warning Event RDI received status 1. Far end does not 1. Check trail
detected- %1 in trail %2. An receive a proper integrity in primary
change RDI indication has signal. 2. Trail is path. 2. Configure
been received from forced active to force "none".
the far-end of the secondary in far-
trail. end
2417 trail-signal- major Alarm Signal failure (AIS (1) Fade in a link Check links,
failure received) in one or along the trail. (2) equipment alarms
more incoming Equipment failure in and trail
trails. a network element configuration along
along the trail. (3) the TDM trail.
Trail not properly
provisioned along
the path.
2418 local-trail-rdi- warning Alarm An RDI indication 1. Far end does not 1. Check trail
detected has been received receive a proper integrity in primary
from the far-end of signal. 2. Trail is path. 2. Configure
the trail. forced active to force "none".
secondary in far-
end
2419 local-trail- major Alarm Signal failure (AIS (1) Fade in a link Check links,
signal-failure received) in one or along the trail. (2) equipment alarms
more incoming Equipment failure in and trail
trails. a network element configuration along
along the trail. (3) the TDM trail.
Trail not properly
provisioned along
the path.
2420 invalid-trail- major Alarm Equipment failure (1) Trail end-point (1) Perform reset in
status status for one or failure detected for end-point IDU if
more TDM trails. one or more trails. exists. (2) Replace
(2) Trail end-point end-point IDU.
failure cleared for
one or more trails.

Corrective
Actions
2500 security-log- major Event An error has been The security log file Log has been
event detected in the has been tampered automatically
security log file. with. renewed. Previous
data is lost.
2501 unsuccessful- warning Event Unsuccessful User mistake or Reset the user
consecutive- consecutive login security event. account (only
login- attempts for user "secure officer" or
attempts %1. A user above user types
attempted to log in allowed).
using a wrong
password more
than the allowed
number of times.
2502 corrupt-diff- major Event At system boot Inventory file was 1) Download
delay-val- corrupt values were found to be corrupt inventory file. 2)
found-event found in the upon system power Reset system.
differential delay up.
calibration
parameters. Error
automatically fixed.
2554 switch-lock- warning Alarm Hitless protection User configuration. Release switch
alarm switching is locked lock.
by user. Radio
diversity forced to
%1.
2555 unused-radio- warning Alarm Radio in IDU #%1 1) Configuration 1) Check link
lof-alarm unused due to LOF. error. 2) Defective configuration and
IDU not being used IF cable. 3) Fault in performance. 2)
for hitless switching RFU. 4) Fault in Check IF cable, and
because no frame is IDU. replace if required.
received at its radio. 3) Replace RFU. 4)
Replace IDU.
2558 blocking- warning Alarm MR: radio traffic User configuration. Release the radio
radio-alarm blocked on slot %1. lock.
Multi-radio traffic
distribution to a
radio is blocked by
user.

Corrective
Actions
2560 incompatible- warning Alarm Two or more One of the following Enable only
features- mutually exclusive feature compatible features.
enabled features have been combinations has
enabled. Feature been enabled:
"%1" and feature Multi-radio and
"%2" are mutually protection. Multi-
exclusive. radio and diversity.
Diversity and XPIC.
Diversity and 2+2.
Diversity and ACM.
XPIC and
protection.
2601 stm1-los critical Alarm No signal is (1) Line is not 1) Reconnect line.
detected from STM- properly connected. 2) Check line
1/OC-3/OC-3 port. (2) Cable is faulty. cables. 3) Check
(3) Equipment is external equipment.
faulty. (4) STM- 4) Attach SFP. 5)
1/OC-3 SFP not Power cycle the
attached. system.
2602 stm1-lof critical Alarm Loss of frame in (1) Line is not 1) Reconnect line.
incoming STM- properly connected. 2) Check line
1/OC-3 signal. (2) Cable is faulty. cables. 3) Check
(3) Equipment is external equipment.
faulty. (4) STM- 4) Attach SFP. 5)
1/OC-3 SFP not Power cycle the
attached. system.
2603 a2n- critical Alarm Failure to initialize (1) Equipment is 1) Power cycle the
initialization- or configure some faulty. (2) SW/HW system. 2) Check
failure component in versions mismatch. SW versions.
access to network
card.
2604 stm1-sfp-not- major Alarm Error in SFP (1) SFP not inserted 1) Reconnect SFP.
detected detection. properly. (2) 2) Change SFP.
Incompatible SFP
type. (3) Damaged
SFP.
2605 stm1- major Alarm Excessive BER is (1) Line is not 1) Reconnect line.
excessive-ber above configured properly connected. 2) Check line
threshold in (2) Cable is faulty. cables. 3) Check
incoming STM- (3) External external equipment.
1/OC-3 signal. equipment is faulty. 4) Power cycle the
system.

Corrective
Actions
2606 stm1-signal- minor Alarm Signal degrade - (1) Line is not 1) Reconnect line.
degrade excessive BER is properly connected. 2) Check line
above configured (2) Cable is faulty. cables. 3) Check
threshold in (3) External external equipment.
incoming STM- equipment is faulty. 4) Power cycle the
1/OC-3 signal. system.
2607 stm1-sfp-tx- major Alarm SFP hardware (1) SFP not inserted 1) Reconnect SFP.
fault failure: unable to properly. (2) 2) Change SFP.
transmit. Damaged SFP.
2608 mute-override warning Alarm STM-1/OC-3 mute User configured Configure STM-
override. STM-1/OC-3 1/OC-3 interface to
interface as silent. transmit.
2610 loopback-at- major Alarm Loopback at STM- User configured Cancel loopback
stm1 1/OC-3 interface loopback at STM- configuration.
alarm status. 1/OC-3 interface.
2611 stm1-pll- critical Alarm Unable to lock to Hardware failure in (1) Power cycle the
unlocked input clock for STM- STM-1/OC-3 card. system. (2) Replace
1/OC-3 signal. STM-1/OC-3 card
2612 j0-mismatch minor Alarm Received J0 trace (1) Error in remote Check that remote
identifier string not optical equipment equipment sent J0
identical to configuration. (2) string and length
configured expected Error in J0 expected equals expected J0
string. string configuration. configuration.
(3) Error in J0
length configuration.
2613 stm1-sync- major Alarm The TDM trail (1) Clock source (1) Make sure the
clock-signal- configured to carry configured from configured VC is the
failure the clock for the wrong VC. (2) end-point of the
STM-1 interface is Radio LOF or synchronization
not properly equipment failure trail. (2) Check
received. along the path of status of
the synchronization synchronization
trail. (3) LOS or AIS trail. (3) Check
at the status of clock
synchronization source interface.
source interface in
the far end of the
trail.

Corrective
Actions
2701 lag- major Alarm Degraded 1) Configuration 1) Check LAG
degradation- functionality in LAG error. 2) Defective physical
alarm #%1; LAG working Ethernet cables or configuration in both
at partial capacity. cables sides of link. 2)
At least one disconnected. 3) Check cables and
physical port Fault in external replace if required.
belonging to a LAG equipment. 3) Replace IDU.
report link down.
2702 lag-loss- critical Alarm LAG #%1 status 1) Configuration 1) Check LAG
alarm down - all physical error. 2) Defective physical
ports belonging to Ethernet cables or configuration in both
the LAG report a cables sides of link. 2)
link down. Traffic disconnected. 3) Check cables and
not flowing through Fault in external replace if required.
the LAG. equipment. 3) Replace IDU.
2703 change-in- warning Event Change in RSTP
stp-role role for port: %1;
New role: %2; New
state: %3; Root
bridge ID: %4;
Bridge role: %5.
2716 unused-tx- warning Alarm Traffic not being One of the following 1) Correct failure. 2)
multi-radio- sent through radio failures is present at Disable failure
alarm on slot %1 by multi- the receiving radio: (Excessive BER,
radio due to radio or 1) Radio LOF. 2) signal degrade) as
configuration failure. Minimum ACM point a cause for
reached. 3) Link ID blocking. 3) Enable
mismatch. 4) multi-radio in both
Excessive BER. 5) IDUs.
Signal degraded. 6)
User "radio block"
command. 7) Multi-
radio disabled in
that IDU.

Corrective
Actions
2718 unused-rx- warning Alarm Traffic not being One of the following 1) Correct failure. 2)
multi-radio- taken from radio on failures is present at Disable failure
alarm slot %1 by multi- this radio: 1) Radio (Excessive BER,
radio. Traffic not LOF. 2) Minimum signal degrade) as
being passed ACM point reached. a cause for
through this radio 3) Link ID blocking. 3) Enable
due to radio or mismatch. 4) multi-radio in both
configuration failure. Excessive BER. 5) IDUs.
Signal degraded. 6)
User "radio block"
command. 7) Multi-
radio disabled in
that IDU.
2719 multi-radio- critical Alarm Loss of frame on 1) Fade in the link. 1) Check link
local-lof- radio. 2) Defective IF performance. 2)
alarm cable. 3) Fault in Check IF cable, and
IDU. 5) Different 3) Replace RFU. 4)
radio scripts at both Replace IDU. 5)
ends of the link. Make sure same
script is loaded at
both ends of the
link.
2801 radio- warning Event Radio interface is User configuration. Enable the radio
interface- currently %1 interface if use of
changed-by- (enabled or the radio is desired
user-event disabled) by user
configuration. If
disabled, no traffic
will pass through
local radio.
2802 requested- minor Alarm Requested traffic TDM trails and high Reduce high-
cap-exceeds- capacity (Ethernet + priority Ethernet capacity Ethernet or
radio-cap- TDM) exceeds radio configuration. high priority TDM
alarm capacity. The total trails to this radio.
number of high
priority trails and
Ethernet traffic
configured to this
radio exceeds the
total radio capacity.

Corrective
Actions
2901 system-reset- warning Alarm One of the following One of the following (1) Perform system
required configurations have configurations was reboot. (2) Change
been changed; changed: (1) Radio relevant
system reset to be enable/disable (2) configuration to
applied: (1) Radio Radio script (3) current value.
enable/disable (2) Ethernet application
Radio script (3) (4) Demo license
Ethernet application enable/disable (5)
(4) Demo license License code
enable/disable (5) change (6)
License code Configuration
change (6) restore
Configuration
restore
2902 under- major Alarm Under-voltage 1) Power cable 1) Connect power
voltage- conditions detected disconnected. 2) supply cable. 2)
condition-ps- in a power supply. Power supply Check power supply
1 source failure. 3) source. 3) Replace
Hardware failure. IDU.
2903 under- major Alarm Under-voltage 1) Power cable 1) Connect power
voltage- conditions detected disconnected 2) supply cable. 2)
condition-ps- in a power supply. Power supply Check power supply
2 source failure. 3) source. 3) Replace
Hardware failure. IDU.
3001 insufficient- major Alarm XPIC cannot be set; 1) Modem script Check which
config-for- see probable cause does not support condition is lacking
xpic for the possible XPIC 2) ODU does and resolve it.
reasons. not support XPIC 3)
The frequency of
both radios is not
equal. 4) Different
type of ODU 5)
Protection is
enabled 6) One of
the IDUs HW does
not support XPIC.
7) Different scripts
are loaded in the
IDUs
3002 xsm-event warning Event XPIC recovery A change in the
event. XPIC recovery
mechanism took
place.
3003 insufficient- warning Event Condition for XPIC
config-for- not met.
xpic-event

Corrective
Actions
3100 sync-source- warning Event Synchronization 1) LOS/LOF at Check status of
switch source for the previous sync incoming signal at
system has been source interface. 2) sync source
switched. Hardware failure at interfaces.
previous sync
source interface.
3101 sync-line- major Alarm Sync clock source 1) Radio error along 1) Make sure all
clock-signal- signal failure for %1 the sync path. 2) radio links are
failure interface. The Invalid clock signal errorless along the
synchronization at clock source. 3) path. 2) Make sure
signal driving the Configuration error. source PDH signal
interface's output is being received. 3)
clock is not being Re-check
received. synchronization
path configuration.
3102 sync-line-db- major Alarm Sync clock source 1) Radio error along 1) Make sure all
path configuration.
3103 sync-stm1- major Alarm Sync clock source 1) Radio error along 1) Make sure all
path configuration.
3104 sync-radio- major Alarm Sync clock source 1) Radio error along 1) Make sure all
interface's output is being received 3)
path configuration.

Corrective
Actions
3105 sync-eth- major Alarm Sync clock status 1) Mismatch 1) Make sure all
clock- unavailable for between interfaces
unavailable Ethernet interface. synchronization configured as
Unable to reach configuration and carrying sync
synchronization actual hardware. 2) source clock exist in
interface hardware. Hardware failure. the system. 2)
Replace T-card. 3)
Replace IDU.
3106 sync-line- major Alarm Sync clock status 1) Mismatch 1) Make sure all
clock- unavailable for line between interfaces
unavailable %1 interface. synchronization configured as
Unable to reach configuration and carrying sync
Replace T-card. 3)
Replace IDU.
3107 sync-line-db- major Alarm Sync clock status 1) Mismatch 1) Make sure all
clock- unavailable for between interfaces
unavailable daughter-board line synchronization configured as
%1 interface. configuration and carrying sync
Unable to reach actual hardware. 2) source clock exist in
synchronization Hardware failure. the system. 2)
interface hardware. Replace T-card. 3)
Replace IDU.
3108 sync-stm1- major Alarm Sync clock status 1) Mismatch 1) Make sure all
clock- unavailable for %1 between interfaces
unavailable interface. Unable to synchronization configured as
reach configuration and carrying sync
Replace T-card. 3)
Replace IDU.
3109 sync-radio- major Alarm Sync clock status 1) Mismatch 1) Make sure all
clock- unavailable for %1 between interfaces
unavailable interface. Unable to synchronization configured as
reach configuration and carrying sync
Replace T-card. 3)
Replace IDU.

Corrective
Actions
3110 sync-eth- major Alarm Sync clock source 1) Radio error along 1) Make sure all
path configuration.
3111 sync-node- warning Alarm Node User configuration. Set node
mode-forced synchronization synchronization
source forced to mode to
sync source #%1. A "automatic".
certain interface has
been forced by user
as the source of the
synchronization
reference signal.
3112 sync-source- warning Event Change in clock 1) User changed 1) Change interface
if-status quality level at sync quality configuration configuration. 2)
source #%1. New in an interface. 2) Check flow of
quality is %2. The SSM received with reference clock in
quality of a new quality value. the network.
reference signal
received at a certain
interface has
changed.
3113 sync-source- warning Event Change in T0 1) The quality of the
system-clock system reference reference source
clock quality level. signal has changed.
New quality is %1. 2) The interface
The quality of the taken as reference
system's internal has changed.
reference clock
(which is distributed
onwards towards
the network) has
changed.
3333 no-internal- major Alarm IDU cannot 1) Second IDU 1) Replace
mate-alarm communicate with faulty. 2) Second missing/faulty unit.
second IDU in the IDU missing. 3) 2) Replace this IDU.
same shelf. Hardware error.

Corrective
Actions
4001 eth-clock- major Alarm The synchronization 1) Radio error along 1) Make sure all
source- signal driving the the sync path. 2) radio links are
signal-failure synchronous Invalid clock signal errorless along the
Ethernet clock is not at clock source. 3) path. 2) Make sure
being received. Configuration error. source PDH signal
is being received. 3)
Re-check
synchronization
path configuration.
5001 floating-ip- major Alarm Floating IP locked Constant protection Perform protection
filter-lock- to fixed unit switches due to lockout.
alarm following excessive permanent errors in
protection switches. radio.
To allow
management
access to the
system under
permanent
switching, the
floating IP address
is fixed to a single
unit and does not
necessarily
correspond with the
currently active unit.
5002 fip-invalid- warning Alarm Floating IP is Protection admin is (1) Set floating IP
protection- enabled in a system "disabled" but address to [0.0.0.0].
conf configured to 1+0. floating IP address or (2) Enable
An extra IP address is configured (value protection.
is being is different than
unnecessarily used. 0.0.0.0).

Ceragon FibeAir IP-10G IP-10E User Guide 20120601 Rev A.01

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Ceragon FibeAir IP-10G IP-10E User Guide 20120601 Rev A.01

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FibeAir® IP-10G and IP-10E

DOC-00034612 (Rev A.01)

Copyright © 2012 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.

Open Source Statement

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 2 of 577

3. Configuring Secured Access Protocols........................................................ 27

4. Working with Configuration Files .................................................................. 45

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 3 of 577

4.1.4 Viewing Configuration Archive Upload Status ............................................................. 47

5. Configuring Users and Password Security .................................................. 51

6. Configuring Software ..................................................................................... 58

7. Configuring and Viewing Basic System Information ................................... 69

8. Configuring Feature and Capacity Licenses ................................................ 75

9. Configuring Unit Management ....................................................................... 84

9.2 Configuring the Management Ports ............................................................................. 86

10. Configuring Traffic Interfaces ........................................................................ 96

11. Configuring Auxiliary Channels .................................................................. 148

12. Configuring the Radio Parameters .............................................................. 152

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 5 of 577

12.2 Configuring the Radio Frequencies ........................................................................... 154

13. Configuring QoS and Enhanced QoS ......................................................... 182

13.2.11 Defining the Static MAC Table .................................................................. 201

14. Setting Up Protected Configurations .......................................................... 234

15. Configuring Diversity ................................................................................... 259

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 7 of 577

15.4 Configuring IF Combining Diversity ........................................................................... 263

16. Configuring Multi-Radio ............................................................................... 265

17. Configuring XPIC .......................................................................................... 270

18. Configuring TDM Trails ................................................................................ 274

19. Configuring Synchronization....................................................................... 284

20. Configuring RSTP ......................................................................................... 295

20.3.4 Ring RSTP Management ........................................................................................... 302

21. Working with Service OAM .......................................................................... 309

22. Viewing System Activity and Performance ................................................. 331

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 9 of 577

22.3.3 Displaying Capacity Statistics .................................................................................... 340

23. Fault Management ........................................................................................ 370

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 10 of 577

23.12 Activating the All-ODU Enclosure .............................................................................. 391

24. Appendix A – CLI Reference ........................................................................ 392

24.2.1.41 enhanced-hc .............................................................................................. 443

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 12 of 577

24.3.11.2 Configuring HTTPS Web Protocol ............................................................. 514

25. Appendix B – List of Alarms ........................................................................ 548

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 14 of 577

About This Guide

What You Should Know

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 15 of 577

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 16 of 577

1.1 About the CeraWeb EMS (Web EMS)

1.1.1 Browser behavior with Web EMS

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 17 of 577

1.2 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure

IP-10G/E Web EMS Menu Hierarchy

Root Menu Item Sub-Menus Applicability For Further Information

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 18 of 577

Root Menu Item Sub-Menus Applicability For Further Information

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 19 of 577

Root Menu Item Sub-Menus Applicability For Further Information

Configuration  Enabling RSL Degradation Alarms

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 20 of 577

Root Menu Item Sub-Menus Applicability For Further Information

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 21 of 577